Krone BiG X 600; BiG X 700-1; BiG X 850-1; BiG X 1100-1 Operating Instructions

Original operating instructions
150 000 156 03 en
Precision forage harvester
BiG X 600
BiG X 700 -1
BiG X 850 -1
BiG X 1100 -1
(Machine No. 912 083 or higher)
EC Declaration of Conformity
We,
Maschinenfabrik Bernard Krone GmbH
Heinrich-Krone-Str. 10, D-48480 Spelle
hereby declare as manufacturer of the product named below, on our sole responsibility,
that the
Machine:
Precision forage harvester
Type / Types: BiG X 600, BiG X 700 -1, BiG X 850 -1, BiG X 1100 -1
to which this declaration refers is in compliance with the relevant provisions of
EC Directive 2006/42/EC (Machinery) and EC Directive 2004/108/EC (EMC)
The signing Managing Director is authorised to compile the technical documents.
Spelle, 01.09.2014
Dr.-Ing. Josef Horstmann
(Managing Director, Design and Development)
Year of manufacture:
Machine No.:
Dear Customer:
This manual provides you with the operating instructions for the
KRONE product you have purchased.
These operating instructions contain important information on
the correct use and safe operation of the machine.
If for some reason these operating instructions should have
become unusable in whole or in part, you may obtain
replacement instructions for your machine by quoting the
number mentioned overleaf.
Contents
Contents
1
General Aspects ............................................................ I -1
1.1
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.6
1.2.7
1.2.7.1
1.2.7.2
1.2.7.3
1.2.7.4
1.2.7.5
1.2.7.6
1.2.7.7
1.2.8
1.2.9
1.3
1.3.1
Purpose ................................................................................................................... I -1
Information on the product ....................................................................................... I -1
General Aspects ...................................................................................................... I -1
Address of the manufacturer: ................................................................................... I -1
Declaration .............................................................................................................. I -1
Designation ............................................................................................................. I -1
Information for enquiries and orders ........................................................................ I -2
Intended Use ........................................................................................................... I -2
Technical Data ......................................................................................................... I -3
Machine Types......................................................................................................... I -3
Dimensions ............................................................................................................. I -7
Front Attachments .................................................................................................... I -7
Trailer Coupling ....................................................................................................... I -8
Electrical equipment – technical data ...................................................................... I -8
Vibration Values of the Machine .............................................................................. I -8
Noise Emission Values of the Machine ................................................................... I -8
Weights ................................................................................................................... I -9
Consumables ........................................................................................................ I -10
Conversion before initial operation ........................................................................ I -11
Installing warning panels in operating position...................................................... I -11
2
Safety ..............................................................................II -1
2.1
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.2.7
2.2.8
2.2.9
2.2.10
2.2.11
2.2.12
2.2.13
2.2.14
2.2.15
2.2.16
2.2.17
2.2.18
2.2.19
2.2.20
2.3
Identifying important information in the Operating Instructions ................................ II -1
Safety instructions and accident prevention regulations .......................................... II -1
Personnel qualification and training ........................................................................ II -1
Dangers in case of non-compliance with the Safety Instructions ............................. II -1
Safety-conscious work practices ............................................................................. II -1
Safety and accident prevention regulations ............................................................. II -2
Self-propelled work machine ................................................................................... II -3
Foraging unit machine ............................................................................................. II -3
Autopilot .................................................................................................................. II -3
Implements .............................................................................................................. II -4
PTO shaft ................................................................................................................. II -4
Hydraulic system ..................................................................................................... II -4
Battery ..................................................................................................................... II -5
Cooling system ........................................................................................................ II -5
Tyres ........................................................................................................................ II -5
Emergency exit ........................................................................................................ II -5
Working in the vicinity of power transmission lines ................................................. II -5
Fire prevention measures ........................................................................................ II -5
Maintenance ............................................................................................................ II -6
Telephones and radio sets ...................................................................................... II -6
Unauthorised conversion/modification and manufacture of spare parts .................. II -6
Non-permissible modes of operation ....................................................................... II -6
Main Battery Switch ................................................................................................. II -7
Contents
2.4
2.4.1
Safety instructions on the machine .......................................................................... II -7
Location of the warning pictograms on the machine ................................................ II -8
3
Operators controls ...................................................... III - 1
3.1
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.2.7
3.2.8
3.2.9
3.2.10
3.2.11
3.2.12
3.2.13
3.2.14
3.2.15
3.2.16
3.2.17
3.2.18
3.2.19
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.7.1
3.7.2
3.7.3
3.7.4
3.7.5
3.7.6
3.8
Overview ............................................................................................................... III - 1
Switch panel .......................................................................................................... III - 1
Panel switches and pilot lamps ............................................................................. III - 2
Release switch – road/field ................................................................................... III - 3
Release switch – feed drive/front attachment ........................................................ III - 3
Parking brake button .............................................................................................. III - 3
Release switch – travelling gear ........................................................................... III - 4
Pushbutton TC (Traction Control) On/Off ............................................................... III - 4
Pushbutton TC I / II Sensitivity (Switching Grass / Maize) ...................................... III - 4
Release switch – autopilot .................................................................................... III - 5
Release switch - maintenance .............................................................................. III - 5
Pilot lamp of engine oil pressure ........................................................................... III - 6
Charge indicator light ............................................................................................ III - 6
Pilot lamp of coolant temperature .......................................................................... III - 6
Keyboards ............................................................................................................. III - 7
Ignition lock ........................................................................................................... III - 7
Cigarette lighter ..................................................................................................... III - 8
Instantaneous stop switch ..................................................................................... III - 8
OBD diagnostics plug (On-Board-plug) ................................................................. III - 8
Diagnostics socket ................................................................................................ III - 9
ISOBUS connection .............................................................................................. III - 9
Main Battery Switch ............................................................................................... III - 9
Multi-function lever .............................................................................................. III - 10
Roof console ....................................................................................................... III - 12
Switch group – roof panel .................................................................................... III - 13
Steering column and foot pedals ......................................................................... III - 14
Horn .................................................................................................................... III - 15
Indicator switch .................................................................................................... III - 15
Full beam ............................................................................................................ III - 16
Headlamp flasher ................................................................................................ III - 16
Foot Brake ........................................................................................................... III - 16
Trailer brake (option) ............................................................................................ III - 16
Manual operation on the platform (left) ................................................................ III - 17
4
"EasyTouch" Info Centre ............................................ IV -1
4.1
4.1.1
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
Information Section ................................................................................................ IV -3
Basic Screen ......................................................................................................... IV -3
Settings ................................................................................................................. IV -7
Working Width ....................................................................................................... IV -7
Temporary change in the working width of the grass pickup .................................. IV -7
Temporary Change of the Maize Header Working Width ....................................... IV -8
Temporary Change of the Working Width of the Direct Cutting System ................. IV -9
Front Attachment ................................................................................................. IV -10
Status (1) ............................................................................................................. IV -10
Foreign object detection (2) ................................................................................. IV -10
Setting the Setpoint Speed (3) ............................................................................. IV -11
Actual speed (4) .................................................................................................. IV -11
Contents
4.4
4.4.1
4.5
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.6
4.6.1
4.6.1.1
4.6.2
4.6.2.1
4.6.2.2
4.6.2.3
4.6.2.4
4.6.3
4.6.3.1
4.6.3.2
4.6.3.3
4.6.3.4
4.6.3.5
4.6.3.6
4.6.3.7
4.6.3.8
4.6.3.9
4.6.3.10
4.6.4
4.6.4.1
4.6.4.2
4.6.4.3
4.6.4.4
4.6.5
4.6.5.1
4.6.5.2
4.6.5.3
4.6.5.4
4.6.5.5
4.6.6
4.6.7
4.7
4.7.1
4.7.2
4.7.3
4.7.4
4.7.5
4.7.6
4.7.7
4.7.8
4.7.9
4.7.10
4.7.11
Feed Drive ........................................................................................................... IV -12
Adjusting the cutting length ................................................................................. IV -12
Lifting Gear .......................................................................................................... IV -13
Status .................................................................................................................. IV -13
Changing the setpoint pressure or setpoint height .............................................. IV -14
General Machine Settings ................................................................................... IV -15
Joystick-Memory-Keys ......................................................................................... IV -15
Allocate the assignment joystick-memory-keys ................................................... IV -15
General machine settings - grass pickup ............................................................. IV -16
Setting the grass pick-up operating mode ........................................................... IV -16
Setting the grass pick-up working width .............................................................. IV -17
To adjust the lifting gear control ........................................................................... IV -17
Setting the number of blades ............................................................................... IV -18
General machine settings - maize header ........................................................... IV -18
To set the operating mode of the maize header ................................................... IV -18
Setting the maize header working width .............................................................. IV -19
Adjusting the lifting gear control .......................................................................... IV -20
Setting the number of blades ............................................................................... IV -20
Selecting row tracer for autopilot ......................................................................... IV -21
Setting the row tracer ........................................................................................... IV -21
Setting the autopilot centre adjuster .................................................................... IV -22
Setting the response sensitivity of the autopilot ................................................... IV -22
Selection of the Steering Input ............................................................................. IV -23
Automatic setting of the cutting length by maturity detection on the maize plant
(AutoScan) .......................................................................................................... IV -23
General machine setting - direct cutting system .................................................. IV -25
Info mask game animal protection ....................................................................... IV -26
To set the working width of the direct cutting system ........................................... IV -26
To adjust the lifting gear control ........................................................................... IV -27
Setting the number of blades ............................................................................... IV -27
Customer Data Counter ....................................................................................... IV -28
Changing a customer record (1) or creating a new one ....................................... IV -29
Switching the counter on or off ............................................................................ IV -29
Activating the moisture value in the customer data counter ................................. IV -29
Deleting the customer counter ............................................................................. IV -30
Switching to general counters (machine data counters) ...................................... IV -30
Silage Fodder Addition ........................................................................................ IV -31
Adjusting the Grain Conditioner Distance ........................................................... IV -32
Short overview menu levels ............................................................................... IV - 33
Bringing up a Menu Level................................................................................... IV - 36
Main menu 1 „Settings“....................................................................................... IV - 36
Menu 1-1 „Parameters“ ....................................................................................... IV - 37
Menu 1-3 "System of Units Setting" .................................................................... IV - 39
Menü 1-4 „PowerSplit“ (option) ........................................................................... IV - 40
Menu 1-5 „Language“ ......................................................................................... IV - 42
Menu 1-7 „Display“ ............................................................................................. IV - 42
Menu 1-7-1 day/night mode ................................................................................ IV - 43
Menu 1-7-2 Beeper ............................................................................................. IV - 44
Menu 1-7-4 Direction of Rotation ........................................................................ IV - 45
Menü 1-7-5 Settings basic screen fields ............................................................. IV - 46
Contents
4.7.11.1
4.7.12
4.7.13
4.7.14
4.8
4.8.1
4.8.2
4.8.3
4.9
4.9.1
4.9.2
4.9.3
4.9.4
4.9.4.1
4.9.4.2
4.9.4.3
4.9.4.4
4.9.4.5
4.9.4.6
4.9.4.7
4.9.4.8
4.9.5
4.9.6
4.9.7
4.9.8
4.9.9
4.9.10
4.10
4.10.1
4.10.1.1
4.10.1.2
4.10.2
4.10.3
4.10.4
4.10.5
4.10.6
4.10.7
4.10.8
4.10.9
4.10.10
4.10.11
4.10.12
4.10.13
4.10.14
4.10.15
4.10.16
4.10.17
4.10.18
4.10.19
4.10.20
NIR sensor for moisture measuring .................................................................... IV - 47
Menu 1-6 „Date/time“ .......................................................................................... IV - 48
Menu 1-9 „Contractor address“ ........................................................................... IV - 49
Menu 1-10 "Joystick-Memory-Keys" ................................................................... IV - 50
Main Menu 2 „Counters“ ..................................................................................... IV - 51
Machine Data Counter ....................................................................................... IV - 51
Deleting the Machine Data Counters.................................................................. IV - 52
Switching to Customer Data Counters ............................................................... IV - 52
Main Menu 3 „Maintenance“ ............................................................................... IV - 53
Menu 3-1 "Central lubrication/cleaning of the engine compartment" .................. IV - 54
Menu 3-2 „Grinding / Counterblade“ ................................................................... IV - 55
Menu 3-3 „Calibration of Pendulum Frame and Absolute Lifting Gear Height“ ... IV - 59
Menu 3-4 „Calibration of Autopilot“ ..................................................................... IV - 63
Calling up the calibration screen on the terminal ................................................ IV - 65
Calibrating the steering angle sensor ................................................................. IV - 66
Selection of row sensor ...................................................................................... IV - 67
Calibrating row tracer with steel bracket (for the two-part EasyCollect) .............. IV - 67
Calibrating flexible row tracer (for the three-part EasyCollect) ........................... IV - 68
Calibrating of the valves - steering left/right (manually) ...................................... IV - 69
Automatic calibration of steering valves left / right .............................................. IV - 70
Calibrating the Turning Circle of the Machine ..................................................... IV - 72
Menu 3-5 „Calibration of upper discharge chute“ ................................................ IV - 74
Menu 3-6 „Calibration of grain conditioner“ ........................................................ IV - 77
Menu 3-7 „Calibration of Feed Drive/Front Attachment“...................................... IV - 79
Menu 3-9 „Calibration RockProtect“ ................................................................... IV - 84
Menu 3-10 "Calibration of main coupling" .......................................................... IV - 85
Menu 3-11 "Maintenance of additional axle" (optional) ...................................... IV - 88
Main Menu 4 „Service“ ....................................................................................... IV - 89
Menu 4-1 „Diagnostics“ ...................................................................................... IV - 89
Display of Release Conditions Not Met for Diagnostics ..................................... IV - 91
Display of possible faults for diagnostics ............................................................ IV - 92
Menu 4-1-1 „Feed Drive“ .................................................................................... IV - 93
Menu 4-1-2 „Front attachment“............................................................................ IV - 95
Menu 4-1-3 „CAN Bus“ ....................................................................................... IV - 97
Menu 4-1-4 „Upper Discharge Chute“ .............................................................. IV - 100
Menu 4-1-5 „Lifting Gear“ .................................................................................. IV - 103
Menu 4-1-6 „Drive“ ........................................................................................... IV - 108
Menu 4-1-7 „Metal Detection“ .......................................................................... IV - 112
Menu 4-1-8 „Diesel Engine“ ............................................................................. IV - 114
Menu 4-1-9 „Autopilot“ ...................................................................................... IV - 118
Menu 4-1-10 „AutoScan“ .................................................................................. IV - 120
Menu 4-1-11 „Electronics“ ................................................................................ IV - 121
Menu 4-1-12 „Work“ .......................................................................................... IV - 123
Menu 4-1-13 „Grinding“ .................................................................................... IV - 126
Menu 4-1-14 „Counterblade“ ............................................................................ IV - 128
Menu 4-1-15 „Grain conditioner“ ....................................................................... IV - 130
Menu 4-1-16 „Joystick“ ..................................................................................... IV - 131
Menu 4-1-17 „Control Unit Console“ ................................................................. IV - 132
Menu 4-1-18 „Manual Operation“...................................................................... IV - 134
Menü 4-1-19 „Terminal“ .................................................................................... IV - 135
Contents
4.10.21
4.10.22
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.13.1
4.13.2
4.13.3
4.13.4
4.14
4.14.1
4.14.2
4.15
4.15.1
4.15.2
4.15.3
4.15.4
4.15.5
4.16
4.16.1
4.17
4.18
4.18.1
4.18.2
4.18.3
4.18.3.1
4.18.3.2
4.18.4
4.18.5
4.18.6
4.18.6.1
4.18.7
4.18.8
4.18.9
4.18.10
Menu 4-1-20 "RockProtect Diagnostics" .......................................................... IV - 136
Menu 4-1-21 „Diagnostics Moisture“ ................................................................. IV - 138
Menu 4-2 „Error list“ .......................................................................................... IV - 139
Menu 4-3 „Service level“................................................................................... IV - 143
Menu 4-4 „Information“ ..................................................................................... IV - 144
Menu 4-4-1 „Joystick“ ....................................................................................... IV - 144
Menu 4-4-2 „Software“ ...................................................................................... IV - 145
Menu 4-4-3 „Machine“ ...................................................................................... IV - 147
Menu 4-4-8 "Display Software Packages" ........................................................ IV - 147
Menu 5 „Basic Screen“ ..................................................................................... IV - 148
Error message .................................................................................................. IV - 148
Information message ........................................................................................ IV - 149
Printer Connection (option)............................................................................... IV - 149
Printing Customer Data .................................................................................... IV - 149
Customer Data Print Menu ............................................................................... IV - 150
To print a customer record or records: ............................................................... IV - 150
Printing Cultivated Area Counter States ........................................................... IV - 151
Description of Printer Errors ............................................................................. IV - 151
Battery Change on the Terminal ....................................................................... IV - 152
Procedure for Replacing the Battery ................................................................. IV - 152
"Setting of the constant power load limit control" menu appears (option) ......... IV - 153
Yield recording system CropControl ................................................................. IV - 156
Operating CropControl system with operation terminal Beta ............................ IV - 156
Mounting operation terminal Beta ..................................................................... IV - 156
Operation terminal Beta .................................................................................... IV - 157
Overview .......................................................................................................... IV - 157
Description of the keys ..................................................................................... IV - 158
Operational Readiness ..................................................................................... IV - 158
Brief instruction ................................................................................................. IV - 159
Basic screen ..................................................................................................... IV - 160
Softkeys basic screen....................................................................................... IV - 160
Basic screen graphic display ............................................................................ IV - 161
Start / stop yield counter ................................................................................... IV - 162
Control weighing and calibration ...................................................................... IV - 163
Menu Level ....................................................................................................... IV - 164
4.18.10.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... IV - 164
4.18.10.1.1 Bringing up a Menu Level .............................................................................................. IV - 164
4.18.10.2 Main menu 1 "Settings" .................................................................................................. IV - 165
4.18.10.2.1 Menu 1-1 "Calibration of path recorder" ......................................................................... IV - 166
4.18.10.2.2 Menu 1-2 "Calibration of pressure sensor" .................................................................... IV - 167
4.18.10.2.3 Menu 1-3 "Minimum excursion setting" .......................................................................... IV - 169
4.18.10.2.4 Menu 1-4 "Contrast" ...................................................................................................... IV - 170
4.18.10.3 Main menu. 2 "Yield counter" ......................................................................................... IV - 172
4.18.10.3.1 "Yield counter" ............................................................................................................... IV - 172
4.18.10.3.2 Printing the values ......................................................................................................... IV - 172
4.18.10.3.3 Deleting the values ........................................................................................................ IV - 172
4.18.10.3.4 Entering the weighed mass ........................................................................................... IV - 173
4.18.10.3.5 Entering the calibration factor directly ............................................................................ IV - 175
4.18.10.4 Main menu 4 "Service" .................................................................................................. IV - 176
4.18.10.4.1 Menu 4-2 "Manual sensor test" ...................................................................................... IV - 176
Contents
4.18.10.4.2 Menu 4-5 "Current alarms" ............................................................................................ IV - 179
4.18.10.4.3 Main Menu 5 “Info” ......................................................................................................... IV - 179
4.19
4.19.1
4.19.2
4.20
Alarm Message ................................................................................................ IV - 180
General Messages ........................................................................................... IV - 181
Physical alarm messages................................................................................. IV - 181
Operating CropControl system via KRONE CCI 200 operation terminal or KRONE
Delta operation terminal ................................................................................... IV - 182
5
Driver’s cab .................................................................. V - 1
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.3.1
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
5.15.1
5.15.2
5.15.3
5.15.4
5.15.5
5.15.6
5.15.7
5.15.8
5.16
5.17
5.18
5.18.1
5.18.2
5.18.3
5.19
Ladder to driver’s cabin ......................................................................................... V - 1
Opening the cabin door ......................................................................................... V - 1
The air comfort seat ............................................................................................... V - 2
Right armrest (Version Standard and Option) ........................................................ V - 6
Steering column adjustment .................................................................................. V - 7
Storage compartment for first-aid kit/operating instructions ................................... V - 8
Passenger seat (optional) ...................................................................................... V - 8
Inside mirror ........................................................................................................... V - 8
Cold box ................................................................................................................ V - 8
Sun visor ............................................................................................................... V - 9
Outside mirrors ...................................................................................................... V - 9
Emergency exit .................................................................................................... V - 10
Windshield wipers ............................................................................................... V - 11
Washer system - windshield ................................................................................ V - 11
Side window washer (optional) ........................................................................... V - 11
Climatronic / Heating ........................................................................................... V - 12
Control and indicator elements ............................................................................ V - 12
Switch on system................................................................................................. V - 13
Setting the desired cabin temperature ................................................................. V - 13
Switching air conditioning operation on/off .......................................................... V - 14
Switching REHEAT - operation on and off .......................................................... V - 14
Manual adjustment of the evaporator fan speed .................................................. V - 15
Switching the temperature display to ° Fahrenheit ............................................... V - 15
Showing errors on the display ............................................................................. V - 16
Adjustable air jets ................................................................................................ V - 17
Radio ................................................................................................................... V - 17
Ladders ............................................................................................................... V - 18
Ladder to the radiator compartment ..................................................................... V - 18
Ladder to the motor compartment ........................................................................ V - 19
Flaps with safety locks ........................................................................................ V - 19
Setting the monitor for camera monitoring (Option) ............................................. V - 19
6
Lighting ........................................................................ VI - 1
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
Indicator, hazard warning flasher and brake light ................................................. VI - 1
Parking light .......................................................................................................... VI - 2
Dipped beam ........................................................................................................ VI - 3
Working floodlights ............................................................................................... VI - 4
Allround lights ...................................................................................................... VI - 6
Reversing lights.................................................................................................... VI - 6
Interior Lighting ..................................................................................................... VI - 7
Locator lighting for multi-function lever ................................................................. VI - 7
Contents
7
Start-up ........................................................................ VII -1
7.1
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
7.1.4
7.1.5
7.1.6
7.1.8
7.1.9
7.1.7
7.1.10
7.2
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.3
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.8.3.1
7.3.4
7.3.5
7.3.6
7.3.7
7.4
7.4.1
7.4.2
7.4.3
7.4.4
7.4.5
7.4.6
7.4.7
7.4.8
7.4.9
7.4.10
7.4.11
7.4.12
7.4.13
7.4.14
7.4.15
7.4.16
7.4.17
7.4.18
7.4.19
7.4.19.1
7.4.20
7.5
7.5.1
7.5.2
Daily checks ......................................................................................................... VII -1
Dirt deposits in the engine and machine compartment ........................................ VII -2
Engine - oil level check ........................................................................................ VII -3
Hydraulic oil level check ....................................................................................... VII -3
Checking the engine coolant level ....................................................................... VII -3
Checking the central lubrication system ............................................................... VII -4
Tyres ..................................................................................................................... VII -4
Checking the foot brake ........................................................................................ VII -4
Fuel level .............................................................................................................. VII -4
Light functions ...................................................................................................... VII -4
Setting Mirror and Monitor for Camera Monitoring (Option) .................................. VII -5
Fuel system .......................................................................................................... VII -5
Fuel ...................................................................................................................... VII -5
Refueling .............................................................................................................. VII -5
Venting the fuel system......................................................................................... VII -5
Engine operation .................................................................................................. VII -6
Running in the engine .......................................................................................... VII -6
Before starting the engine .................................................................................... VII -6
Starting the engine ............................................................................................... VII -7
Starting at low temperatures ................................................................................. VII -8
Starting with auxiliary battery ............................................................................... VII -8
Killing the engine.................................................................................................. VII -8
Switching off the engine ....................................................................................... VII -8
Driving .................................................................................................................. VII -9
General aspects of driving .................................................................................... VII -9
Steering ................................................................................................................ VII -9
Starting the engine ............................................................................................. VII -10
Road/field mode ................................................................................................. VII -10
Switching the travelling gear on ......................................................................... VII -10
Release holding brake ....................................................................................... VII -10
Operating brake .................................................................................................. VII -11
Setting the acceleration behaviour ..................................................................... VII -11
Driving forwards ................................................................................................. VII -11
Reversing ........................................................................................................... VII -12
Quick stop .......................................................................................................... VII -12
Fast direction change (fast reversing) ................................................................. VII -12
Cruise control ..................................................................................................... VII -13
Constant-Power load limit control ....................................................................... VII -14
Autopilot ............................................................................................................. VII -15
Traction Control TC ............................................................................................. VII -17
TC Sensitivity Switchover ................................................................................... VII -17
Hydrostat system ................................................................................................ VII -17
Towing ................................................................................................................ VII -17
Releasing the parking brake manually ............................................................... VII -18
Parking the Machine ........................................................................................... VII -20
Operation with Front Attachments ....................................................................... VII -21
Adjusting the adapter frame ................................................................................ VII -21
Pendulum frame ................................................................................................. VII -22
Contents
7.5.3
7.5.3.1
7.5.3.2
7.5.3.3
7.5.3.4
7.5.4
7.5.5
7.5.6
7.5.7
7.5.7.1
7.5.7.2
7.5.7.3
7.5.7.4
7.5.6.5
7.5.7.6
7.4
7.6.1
7.6.2
7.7
7.8
7.9
Fitting and Detaching the Front Attachment ........................................................ VII -23
Fitting the Front Attachment ................................................................................ VII -23
Connecting the Hydraulic Lines ......................................................................... VII -24
Removing the Front Attachment ......................................................................... VII -26
Parking the Front Attachment .............................................................................. VII -27
Attaching the Rear Weight .................................................................................. VII -27
Adjusting hydraulics of the forage harvester ....................................................... VII -29
Adjusting the lifting gear ..................................................................................... VII -30
Converting the grass channel grain conditioner ................................................. VII -32
Preparations ....................................................................................................... VII -32
Fold out crane splice .......................................................................................... VII -34
Deinstallation of grass channel .......................................................................... VII -34
Installation of grass channel ............................................................................... VII -37
Installation of the corn conditioner ...................................................................... VII -41
Demontage Corn-Conditioner ............................................................................ VII -47
Trailer operation.................................................................................................. VII -49
Connecting the Trailer ......................................................................................... VII -50
Disconnecting the Trailer .................................................................................... VII -52
Registration plates ............................................................................................. VII -54
Connecting an additional silage agent dosing unit (external) ............................. VII -54
Plugs included with delivery depending on version of the silage agent dosing unit
(internal/external)................................................................................................ VII -55
8
Operation .................................................................... VIII -1
8.1
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.2
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4
8.2.5
8.2.6
8.2.7
8.2.8
8.2.8.1
8.2.8.2
8.3
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.4
8.4.1
8.4.2
Road travel .......................................................................................................... VIII -1
Transport position ................................................................................................ VIII -2
Prior to travel ....................................................................................................... VIII -3
Travel ................................................................................................................... VIII -4
Field operation .................................................................................................... VIII -5
Field Mode on Slopes ......................................................................................... VIII -5
Working in the Vicinity of Power Transmission Lines ........................................... VIII -7
Lifting gear ........................................................................................................... VIII -7
Feed drive/front attachment ............................................................................... VIII -10
Setting the Cutting Length and Discharge Chute Position ................................. VIII -11
Tips for optimising crop flow .............................................................................. VIII -13
Grinding the cutting blade .................................................................................. VIII -22
Removing crop blockages in the area of the crop flow ...................................... VIII -25
Move the machine into a secure condition ........................................................ VIII -25
Removing blockages ......................................................................................... VIII -26
Blowing device on the feed attachment ............................................................. VIII -27
Adjusting blowing times .................................................................................... VIII -27
Performing a functional test and monitoring set times ........................................ VIII -27
Automatic function of additional axle (option) .................................................... VIII -28
Checking "Lift additional axle" automatic function ............................................. VIII -28
Checking automatic function "Lowering additional axle" ................................... VIII -28
9
Maintenance ................................................................. IX -1
9.1
9.2
9.3
Special safety instructions ..................................................................................... IX -1
General Aspects .................................................................................................... IX -1
Maintenance of the supply system......................................................................... IX -2
Contents
9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3
9.3.4
9.3.5
9.3.6
9.3.7
9.3.8
9.3.9
9.3.10
9.3.11
9.3.12
9.4
9.4.1
9.5
9.5.1
9.5.2
9.5.3
9.5.4
9.5.5
9.5.6
9.5.7
9.5.8
9.6
9.6.1
9.6.2
9.6.3
9.7
9.7.1
9.7.2
9.7.3
9.7.4
9.7.5
9.7.6
9.8
9.8.1
9.8.2
9.9
9.10
9.11
9.11.1
9.11.2
9.11.3
9.11.4
9.12
9.12.1
9.12.2
9.12.3
9.12.4
Detaching the feed drive housing .......................................................................... IX -2
Attaching the feed drive housing ........................................................................... IX -6
Fold down the feed drive housing ......................................................................... IX -7
Maintenance jobs on the lifting gear while it is folded down or raised ................... IX -7
Adjusting or replacing the grindstone .................................................................... IX -8
Adjust or change the cutting blades..................................................................... IX -10
Working with half the number of cutting blades ................................................... IX -15
Turning or replacing the counterblade ................................................................. IX -15
Conveyor bars of the front baling roller ................................................................ IX -17
Adjusting the scraper - smooth roller ................................................................... IX -18
Adjusting the baling roller - scraper ..................................................................... IX -19
Adjusting the feed drive housing tension springs ................................................ IX -20
Crop track ............................................................................................................ IX -20
Access points to the crop track ............................................................................ IX -20
Engine maintenance ........................................................................................... IX -23
Excerpt from overview of maintenance (MAN) ..................................................... IX -23
Important maintenance instructions ..................................................................... IX -24
Fuel system ......................................................................................................... IX -25
Fuel filter/water separator .................................................................................... IX -26
Fuel filter ............................................................................................................. IX -26
Engine oil ............................................................................................................ IX -28
Cooling system .................................................................................................... IX -29
Air filter ................................................................................................................ IX -31
Hydraulics maintenance ...................................................................................... IX -33
Special safety instructions ................................................................................... IX -33
System layout of work and brake hydraulics........................................................ IX -33
Hydraulic tank ..................................................................................................... IX -35
Gearbox maintenance ......................................................................................... IX -37
Checking the oil level and changing oil on the gearbox engine power drive ....... IX -37
Checking the oil level and changing the oil on the distributor gearbox ................ IX -40
Checking the oil level and changing the oil on the lower roller gearbox .............. IX -41
Checking the oil level and changing the oil on the upper roller gearbox ............. IX -42
Oil level check and oil change on the tower gearbox of the upper
discharge chute ................................................................................................... IX -42
Checking the Oil Level and Changing the Oil of the Wheel Gearboxes ............... IX -43
Maintenance - Belt drives .................................................................................... IX -45
Pulley and kraftband ............................................................................................ IX -45
Screen drum drive ............................................................................................... IX -46
Windscreen washer system ................................................................................. IX -46
Fire extinguisher .................................................................................................. IX -46
Tyres .................................................................................................................... IX -47
Checking and servicing the tyres ......................................................................... IX -47
Fitting tyres .......................................................................................................... IX -48
Wheel mounting .................................................................................................. IX -48
Fitting different tyres ............................................................................................ IX -48
Maintenance – electrical system ......................................................................... IX -49
Main battery switch .............................................................................................. IX -49
Batteries .............................................................................................................. IX -49
Lighting................................................................................................................ IX -50
Control units and fuses ........................................................................................ IX -51
Contents
9.13
9.13.1
9.14
9.14.1
9.14.2
9.14.3
9.14.4
9.14.5
9.14.6
9.14.7
9.14.8
9.14.9
9.15
9.16
9.17
9.18
9.18.1
9.18.2
9.18.3
9.19
9.20
9.21
9.22
Maintenance – compressed air system ............................................................... IX -60
Compressed air storage tank ............................................................................... IX -60
Maintenance – Air conditioning system and heating ........................................... IX -60
Special warnings ................................................................................................. IX -60
Components of the air conditioning system ......................................................... IX -61
Data sheet of refrigerant R134a (extract) ............................................................. IX -61
Technical Data ..................................................................................................... IX -61
Refrigerant ........................................................................................................... IX -62
Manometric switch ............................................................................................... IX -62
Fresh air fan and circulation mode (cabin) ........................................................... IX -62
Checking refrigerant condition and filling quantity of collector/dryer .................... IX -63
Capacitor ............................................................................................................. IX -64
Maintenance – central lubrication system
(BEKA-MAX) ....................................................................................................... IX -65
Lubricant ............................................................................................................. IX -71
Lubrication chart .................................................................................................. IX -72
Silage Agent System (Optional) .......................................................................... IX -74
Special Instructions for Using Silage Agents ....................................................... IX -74
Cleaning Work on the Silage Agent System ........................................................ IX -74
Dosing quantity of the Silage Agent System........................................................ IX -74
Cable Winch ........................................................................................................ IX -75
Trailer Coupling ................................................................................................... IX -76
Brakes ................................................................................................................. IX -77
Maintenance Schedule ........................................................................................ IX -78
10
List of parameters ........................................................................... X - 1
A1
Operation of the Internal Silage Agent System ........................... A - 1
A2
Error messages ............................................................................. A2 - 1
General Aspects
1
General Aspects
These operating instructions contain fundamental
instructions. These must be observed in operation and
maintenance. For this reason, these operating
instructions must be read by operating personnel
before commissioning and use, and must be available
for easy reference.
1.2.4 Designation
Vehicle identification plate
The machine data are rendered on a type plate (1),
which is located on right front side of the machine.
Follow both the general safety instructions contained in
the section on safety and the specific safety
instructions contained in the other sections.
1.1 Purpose
The self-propelled forage harvester BiG X is used to
harvest and chop blades and leaves, maize and similar
crops, when provided with front attachments in the
works of the manufacturer.
1.2 Information on the product
1.2.1 General Aspects
1
Maschinenfabrik Bernard KRONE
GmbH
Heinrich-Krone-Straße 10
D – 48480 Spelle
Typ
These operating instructions are valid for the selfpropelled forage harvester BiG X.
1.2.2 Address of the manufacturer:
Maschinenfabrik Bernard Krone GmbH
Heinrich-Krone-Str. 10
D-48480 Spelle (Germany)
Telephone: 0 59 77/935-0
Fax: 0 59 77/935-339
E-mail: [email protected]
1.2.3 Declaration
EC declaration of conformity corresponding to the EC
directive
See reverse side of title page
BIG X 1100
:
Fahrzeugident-Nr. :
BX
Ohne
Erntevorsatz
-1
Baujahr:
EasyFlow
3001
Mit Erntevorsatz
EasyCollect
753
EasyCollect
7500 / 903
Zul. Gesamtgewicht :
Zul. Achslast vorn :
Zul. Achslast hinten :
Made in Germany
BX500067_2
Type
Vehicle ID No.
Year of
construction
Tank cover
key number
The entire identification plate
represents a legal document and
should not be altered or rendered
illegible!
I-1
General Aspects
Vehicle frame number
The vehicle frame number is located in the wheel well
of the right rear wheel.
BX100370_1
1.2.5 Information for enquiries and orders
1.2.6 Intended Use
When asking questions concerning the machine or
ordering spare parts, be sure to provide type
designation, vehicle ID number and the year of
construction.
The self-propelled forage harvester "BiG X" is intended
exclusively for the conventional use in agricultural or
similar work (intended use).
Original spare parts and accessories
authorised by the manufacturer ensure
safe use. Use of other parts may void
the liability for any resulting damage.
Any use of the machine for other purposes is deemed
not to be in accordance with specifications. The manufacturer shall not be liable for any resulting damage; the
user alone shall bear the risk.
Use as intended includes compliance with the operating,
maintenance and repair conditions specified by the manufacturer.
If unauthorised modifications are made to the machine,
the manufacturer is released from liability for any resulting damage.
I-2
General Aspects
1.2.7 Technical Data
1.2.7.1 Machine Types
Type
Motor manufacturer
Type of engine
Certified engine performance (ECE R120)
Max. cutting continuous output X Power
Cylinders
Stroke capacity
Harvesting attachment drive
Feed drive rollers/front baling rollers
Feed drive rollers drive
Cutting length
Gathering drum width
Diameter
Speed
Cutter arrangement/number of cutters
Cuts/min
Swivel range of discharge
Overload height
Travelling gear
Vmax at engine speed
1550 rpm
All-wheel drive
Spring-mounted steering axle
Comfort cab with driver information system
Air conditioning system
Air cushioned seat
Undercarriage
BiG X 600
KW/HP
KW/HP
l
mm
mm
mm
U/min
mm
km/h
Drive axle tyres
air pressure, refer to the section on
Maintenance - Tyres
Tread
Steering axle tyres
Tread
air pressure, refer to the sectio
Maintenance - Tyres
Tightening torque for wheel nuts
Hydrostatic travelling gear
(speeds)
Drive pumps (double pump)
Wheel motors, front
Wheel motors, rear
Feed drive pump
Hydraulic engine feed drive
Front attachment pump
Hydraulic motor front attachment drive
MAN
D 2868
570/775
441/600
V-8
16,2
Hydraulic, continuous
6
Hydraulic
5 - 29/4 - 21/2,5 - 15
800
660
1.190
V-shaped 20/28/40
11.900/16.660/23.800
210°
approx. 6,000
Hydrostatic
40 km/h
standard
standard
standard
standard
standard
4 wheels
Direct drive using axial piston motors
with epicyclic gear trains
710/75 R 34
650/75 R 32
800/65 R 32
800/70 R 38
900/60 R 32
900/60 R 38
540/65 R30
600/70 R 28
710/60 R30
710/55 R30 only for USA
(Max.ballasting 3650 kg
on 40 km/h/ 25mph)
Nm
510 drive axle/ 270 steering axle
Field mode: 0 to 25 km/h continuous
Road travel: 0 to 40 km/h continuous
Absorption volume 145 ccm pressure 490 bar
stepless 0/-115 ccm
stepless 0/-62 ccm
Absorption volume 105 ccm pressure 430 bar
Absorption volume 75 ccm
Absorption volume 75 ccm pressure 430 bar
Absorption volume 75 ccm
I-3
General Aspects
Type
Motor manufacturer
Type of engine
Certified engine performance (ECE R120)
Max. cutting continuous output X Power
Max. cutting continuous output Eco Power
Cylinders
Stroke capacity
Harvesting attachment drive
Feed drive rollers/front baling rollers
Feed drive rollers drive
Cutting length
Gathering drum width
Diameter
Speed
Cutter arrangement/number of cutters
Cuts/min
Swivel range of discharge
Overload height
Travelling gear
Vmax at engine speed
1550 rpm
All-wheel drive
Spring-mounted steering axle
Comfort cab with driver information system
Air conditioning system
Air cushioned seat
Undercarriage
BiG X 700 -1
KW/HP
KW/HP
KW/HP
l
mm
mm
mm
U/min
mm
km/h
Drive axle tyres
air pressure, refer to the section on
Maintenance - Tyres
Tread
Steering axle tyres
Tread
air pressure, refer to the sectio
Maintenance - Tyres
Tightening torque for wheel nuts
Hydrostatic travelling gear
(speeds)
Drive pumps (double pump)
Wheel motors, front
Wheel motors, rear
Feed drive pump
Hydraulic engine feed drive
Front attachment pump
Hydraulic motor front attachment drive
I-4
MAN
D 2868
570/775
492/669
374/509
V-8
16,2
Hydraulic, continuous
6
Hydraulic
5 - 29/4 - 21/2,5 - 15
800
660
1.190
V-shaped 20/28/40
11.900/16.660/23.800
210°
approx. 6,000
Hydrostatic
40 km/h
standard
standard
standard
standard
standard
4 wheels
Direct drive using axial piston motors
with epicyclic gear trains
710/75 R 34
650/75 R 32
800/65 R 32
800/70 R 38
900/60 R 32
900/60 R 38
540/65 R30
600/70 R 28
710/60 R30
710/55 R30 only for USA
(Max.ballasting 3650 kg
on 40 km/h/ 25mph)
Nm
510 drive axle/ 270 steering axle
Field mode: 0 to 25 km/h continuous
Road travel: 0 to 40 km/h continuous
Absorption volume 145 ccm pressure 490 bar
stepless 0/-115 ccm
stepless 0/-62 ccm
Absorption volume 105 ccm pressure 430 bar
Absorption volume 75 ccm
Absorption volume 75 ccm pressure 430 bar
Absorption volume 75 ccm
General Aspects
Type
Motor manufacturer
Type of engine
Certified engine performance (ECE R120)
Max. cutting continuous output X Power
Max. cutting continuous output Eco Power
Cylinders
Stroke capacity
Harvesting attachment drive
Feed drive rollers/front baling rollers
Feed drive rollers drive
Cutting length
Gathering drum width
Diameter
Speed
Cutter arrangement/number of cutters
Cuts/min
Swivel range of discharge
Overload height
Travelling gear
Vmax at engine speed
app. 1550 rpm
All-wheel drive
Spring-mounted steering axle
Comfort cab with driver information system
Air conditioning system
Air cushioned seat
Undercarriage
BiG X 850 -1
KW/HP
KW/HP
KW/HP
l
mm
mm
mm
U/min
mm
km/h
Drive axle tyres
air pressure, refer to the section on
Maintenance - Tyres
Tread
Steering axle tyres
Tread
air pressure, refer to the sectio
Maintenance - Tyres
MAN
D 2862
625/850
607/825
469/638
V-12
24,2
Hydraulic, continuous
6
Hydraulic
5 - 29/4 - 21/2,5 - 15
800
660
1.245
V-förmig 20/28/40
12.450/17.430/24.900
210°
ca. 6.000
Hydrostatic
40 km/h
standard
standard
standard
standard
standard
4 wheels
Direct drive using axial piston motors
with epicyclic gear trains
710/75 R 34
650/75 R 32
800/65 R 32
800/70 R 38
900/60 R 32
900/60 R 38
540/65 R30
600/70 R 28
710/55 R30 only for USA
(Max.ballasting 3650 kg
on 40 km/h/ 25mph)
Tightening torque for wheel nuts
Hydrostatic travelling gear
(speeds)
Drive pumps (double pump)
Wheel motors, front
Wheel motors, rear
Feed drive pump
Hydraulic engine feed drive
Front attachment pump
Hydraulic motor front attachment drive
Nm
510 drive axle / 270 steering axle
Field mode: 0 to 25 km/h continuous
Road travel: 0 to 40 km/h continuous
Absorption volume 145 ccm pressure 490 bar
stepless 0/-115 ccm
stepless 0/-62 ccm
Absorption volume 105 ccm pressure 430 bar
Absorption volume 75 ccm
Absorption volume 75 ccm pressure 430 bar
Absorption volume 75 ccm
I-5
General Aspects
Type
Motor manufacturer
Type of engine
Certified engine performance (ECE R120)
Max. cutting continuous output X Power
Max. cutting continuous output Eco Power
Cylinders
Stroke capacity
Harvesting attachment drive
Feed drive rollers/front baling rollers
Feed drive rollers drive
Cutting length
Gathering drum width
Diameter
Speed
Cutter arrangement/number of cutters
Cuts/min
Swivel range of discharge
Overload height
Travelling gear
Vmax at engine speed
1550 rpm
All-wheel drive
Spring-mounted steering axle
Comfort cab with driver information system
Air conditioning system
Air cushioned seat
Undercarriage
BiG X 1100 -1
KW/HP
KW/HP
KW/HP
l
mm
mm
mm
U/min
mm
km/h
Drive axle tyres
air pressure, refer to the section on
Maintenance - Tyres
Tread
Steering axle tyres
Tread
air pressure, refer to the sectio
Maintenance - Tyres
Tightening torque for wheel nuts
Hydrostatic travelling gear
(speeds)
Drive pumps (double pump)
Wheel motors, front
Wheel motors, rear
Feed drive pump
Hydraulic engine feed drive
Front attachment pump
Hydraulic motor front attachment drive
I-6
MAN
D 2868
793/1.078
758/1.031
469/638
V-12
24,2
Hydraulic, continuous
6
Hydraulic
5 - 29/4 - 21/2,5 - 15
800
660
1.245
V-shaped 20/28/40
12.450/17.430/24.900
210°
approx. 6.000
Hydrostatic
40 km/h
standard
standard
standard
standard
standard
4 wheels
Direct drive using axial piston motors
with epicyclic gear trains
710/75 R 34
650/75 R 32
800/65 R 32
800/70 R 38
900/60 R 32
900/60 R 38
540/65 R30
600/70 R 28
710/55 R30 only for USA
(Max.ballasting 3650 kg
on 40 km/h/ 25mph)
Nm
510 drive axle/ 270 steering axle
Field mode: 0 to 25 km/h continuous
Road travel: 0 to 40 km/h continuous
Absorption volume 145 ccm pressure 490 bar
stepless 0/-115 ccm
stepless 0/-62 ccm
Absorption volume 105 ccm pressure 430 bar
Absorption volume 75 ccm
Absorption volume 75 ccm pressure 430 bar
Absorption volume 75 ccm
General Aspects
H
1.2.7.2 Dimensions
L
B
BX850981_1
Length L (mm)
Width B (mm)
Height H (mm)
Depending on version
min
max
min
max
min
max
8335
9440
3000
3455
3920
4000
1.2.7.3 Front Attachments
The following front attachments can be installed on the
machine
Direct cutting system
X- Disc 6200
Maize header
EasyCollect 6000
EasyCollect 7500
EasyCollect 9000
EasyCollect 753
EasyCollect 903
EasyCollect 1053
EasyCollect 603
Pick-up
EasyFlow 300
EasyFlow 380
EasyCollect 450-2
EasyCollect 600-2
EasyCollect 750-2
EasyCollect 600-3
EasyCollect 750-3
EasyCollect 900-3
EasyCollect 1050-3
The front attachment Pick-up EasyFlow 380 cannot be used in all countries.
I-7
General Aspects
1.2.7.4 Trailer Coupling
Permissible D-value
78,2 kN
Permissible supported load on the coupling point
max. 2.000 kg
Max. trailing load
11.000 kg
Trailer Coupling for Italy
Permissible supported load on the coupling point
max. 1.500 kg
Max. trailing load
6.000 kg
1.2.7.5 Electrical equipment – technical data
Performance of the generator
12 V / 270 A
Number of batteries
2
Battery voltage
12 V
Battery capacity
(2x) 135 Ah
1.2.7.6 Vibration Values of the Machine
The determined values are below the values the
Occupational Safety Regulation 2002/44/EC requires.
•
•
The vibration values for hand-arm vibrations are
under 2.5 m/s².
The triggering value of 0.5 m/s² is not exceeded
with regard to whole-body vibrations.
1.2.7.7 Noise Emission Values of the
Machine
The values have been determined following the EU
directive 2000/14/EC.
Machine Type
Noise Level
BiG X 700 -1
75,7 dB
BiG X 1100 -1
76,6 dB
I-8
General Aspects
1.2.8 Weights
BiG X 600-1/700-1 (2 axles)
Without/ with pick-up
front attachment
Easy Flow3001
Permissible total weight:
Permitted axle load, front:
Permissible axle load, rear:
18.000 kg
11.500 kg
8.250 kg
With maize header
EasyCollect EasyCollect
EasyCollect
753
7500
6000
20.850 kg
12.600 kg
8.250 kg
20.550 kg
12.300 kg
8.250 kg
20.850 kg
12.600 kg
8.250 kg
EasyCollect
903
22.000 kg
13.000 kg
9.300 kg
BiG X 850-1/1100-1 (2 axles)
With front attachment
Without attachment
drive
EasyFlow
3001
EasyCollect
753
18.000 kg
10.500 kg
9.300 kg
18.000 kg
11.500 kg
9.300 kg
22.500 kg
12.500 kg
10.000 kg
Permissible total weight:
Permitted axle load, front:
Permissible axle load, rear:
EasyCollect
7500/903
23.000 kg
13.000 kg
10.000 kg
BiG X 600-1/700-1 (3 axles)
Without front attachment or
with pick-up front
attachment
With maize header
depending on the
set-up condition
18.000 kg
11.500 kg
8.250 kg
not permitted
Permissible total weight:
Permitted axle load, front:
Permissible axle load, rear:
Permissible axle load
additional axle:
21.300 - 21.700
11.500 kg
8.250 kg
1.950 kg
BiG X 850-1 (3 axles)
With front attachment
Without front
attachment
Permissible total weight:
Permitted axle load, front:
Permissible axle load, rear:
Permissible axle load
additional axle:
18.000 kg
10.500 kg
9.300 kg
EasyFlow
300
EasyCollect
7500/753/903
18.000 kg
11.500 kg
9.300 kg
23.000 kg
11.500 kg
9.300 kg
2.200 kg
not permitted
BiG X 1100-1 (3 axles)
With maize header
Permissible total weight:
Permitted axle load, front:
Permissible axle load, rear:
Permissible axle load
additional axle:
Without front
attachment
EasyFlow
300
18.000 kg
10.500 kg
9.300 kg
18.000 kg
11.500 kg
9.300 kg
not permitted
EasyCollect
7500
EasyCollect
753
EasyCollect
903
23.000 kg
11.500 kg
9.300 kg
2.200 kg
I-9
General Aspects
1.2.9 Consumables
Quantities
Litres
Diesel tank
Engine oil
Approx. 960
*
Hydraulic oil
Coolant
Approx. 150
Approx. 90
(BiG X 600/700-1)
Approx. 130
(BiG X 850-1/
BiG X1100-1)
Filtered oils
Brand name
European Standard EN 590
DIN EN 590 (Germany)
ASTM D 975 No. 1 D (USA)
BS 2869 Part 1 Class A 1 (Great Britain)
Please observe the engine manufacturer’s
consumables list!
Use only engine oils approved by the
MAN factory standard.
Please observe the engine manufacturer's
consumables list!
HLP 46
Ratio of antifreeze mixing
BiG X600/700-1:
45 l:45l
BiG X 850-1/1100-1:
65 l:65l
Please observe the operating
instructions of theengine manufacturer!
Gear of power
Approx. 12,5
Gear oil Mobil SHC 630
ISO viscosity Class (220) take off
Distributor gearbox
8.5
Gear oil Mobil SHC 630
ISO viscosity Class (220)
Roller gearbox,
bottom left
Approx. 3.0
Gear oil API-GL4-SAE85W-90
Angular gearbox
Approx. 0.5
Gear oil API-GL4-SAE85W-90
Roller gearbox,
top right
tower gearbox on
the upper
discharge chute
3.0
Gear oil API-GL4-SAE85W-90
1,5
Gear oil Mobil Glygoyle 460
Wheel gearboxes
front: approx. 3.0
rear: approx. 1.5
Transmission oil Shell Spirax S4 CX 50
* See accompanying documents (MAN)
All information, illustrations and technical data in
this operating manual are in keeping with the latest
state of technology at the point of publication.
Design subject to modifications at any time without
any stated reason.
I - 10
Bio-degradable
lubricants
Brand name
HE 46 (on request)
General Aspects
1.3 Conversion before initial
operation
1.3.1 Installing warning panels in
operating position
If the warning panels (2) have been assembled for
transport in alignment with the machine (a), then they
must be positioned in operating position (b) before
initial operation.
•
•
2
1
Unscrew the screw connections on the supports (1)
of the warning panels (2) right/left.
Turn the warning panels (2) right/left and install
them in the operating position (b) to the supports
(1).
Adapt the position of the warning
panels to the width of the tyres (two
positions are possible).
BX851041
2
1
BX851042
1
2
BX851043
I - 11
General Aspects
I - 12
Safety
2
Safety
2.1 Identifying important
information in the Operating
Instructions
Important safety instructions in the present operating
instructions are identified with the general hazard
symbol. Non-observance of these safety instructions
may result in personal injury:
Safety symbol as per DIN 4844 - W9
General functional instructions are indicated as follows:
2.2 Safety instructions and
accident prevention
regulations
2.2.1 Personnel qualification and training
The self-propelled forage harvester BiG X may be
used, maintained and repaired only by persons who are
familiar with it and have been informed of the hazards
involved. The operator must define areas of
responsibility and arrange the monitoring of the
personnel. Should personnel lack the required
knowledge, they must receive the required training and
instruction. The operator must ensure that the contents
of these operating instructions have been fully
understood by personnel.
Repair work not described in these operating
instructions must only be carried out by authorised
service centres.
2.2.2 Dangers in case of non-compliance
with the Safety Instructions
Instructions affixed directly to the machine must be
complied with and kept in a completely legible
condition by all means. If illegible, they must be
replaced.
Failure to follow the safety instructions could result in
personal injury and environmental hazards as well as
damage to the machine. Failure to comply with the
safety instructions can lead to the forfeiture of any
claims for damages.
If the safety instructions are not respected, this may
result, for example, in the following hazards:
– Danger to persons through improperly safeguarded
working areas
– Failure of important functions of the machine
– Failure of compulsory procedures for maintenance
and repair
– Danger to persons due to detrimental mechanical
and chemical effects
– Danger to the environment due to leaking hydraulic
oil
2.2.3 Safety-conscious work practices
Always observe the safety instructions set out in these
operating instructions, all existing accident prevention
rules and any internal work, operating and safety rules
issued by the operator.
The safety and accident prevention regulations issued
by the responsible professional associations are
binding.
The safety instructions of the vehicle manufacturer
must be complied with.
II - 1
Safety
Always observe the applicable traffic laws when using
public roads (for example, in Germany, the Road
Traffic Type Approval Law and Road Traffic Law).
13. Check and attach transport equipment, such as
lighting, warning devices and any protective
equipment!
Be prepared for emergencies. Always store the fire
extinguisher and the first-aid kit close at hand.
Always keep the numbers for emergency calls to
physicians and the fire department ready at the
telephone.
14. Actuating mechanisms (ropes, chains, rods, etc.)
of remotely operated devices must be run so that
they do not trigger unintended movements in any
transport and working positions.
2.2.4 Safety and accident prevention
regulations
1. In addition to the instructions in these operating
instructions, you must comply with the generally
applicable safety and accident prevention
regulations!
2. The warning and safety signs affixed to the vehicle
provide important information for safe operation.
For your own safety always pay attention to these!
15. Ensure that implements are in the prescribed
condition for road travel and lock them according to
the instructions of the manufacturer!
16. Never leave the driver’s seat when the vehicle is
moving!
17. Always drive at the correct speed for the prevailing
driving conditions! Avoid sudden changes in
direction when travelling uphill or downhill or across
a gradient!
3. When using public roads, make sure that you
observe the applicable traffic regulations!
18. Implements and ballast weights attached to the
vehicle affect its driving, steering and braking
response. For this reason, make sure that you are
able to steer the machine and brake as required!
4. Make sure that you are familiar with all equipment
and controls as well as their functions before you
begin working with the machine. It is too late to
learn this when you are operating the machine!
19. Take into account the extension radius and/or
inertia of an implement when turning corners!
5. Users must wear close-fitting clothes. Avoid
wearing loose or baggy clothing. Wear protective
gloves when performing work in the vicinity of the
crop conveying mechanisms.
6. Keep the machine clean to prevent the danger of
fire!
7. Before starting or moving the machine, make
certain that nobody is in the vicinity of the
machine! (Watch out for children!) Make sure that
you have a clear view!
8. You may carry passengers during operation and
transport on the working implement only if they use
the passenger seat provided.
9. Attach implements correctly! Only attach and
secure implements to the prescribed devices!
10. When attaching or removing implements, place the
supporting devices in the correct positions!
11. Always attach ballast weights properly to the fixing
points provided!
12. Observe permitted axle loads, gross weight and
transport dimensions!
II - 2
20. Start up implements only when all protective
devices have been attached and set in the required
position!
21. Always keep the safety equipment in good working
order. Replace missing or damaged parts.
22. Keep out of the working range of the machine at all
times!
23. Do not stay in the swivel and ejecting range of the
ejector!
24. Hydraulic hinged frames/lifting equipment may be
operated only if no persons are in the swivel range!
25. Parts operated by external power (e.g. hydraulics)
can cause crushing and shearing injuries!
26. Before leaving the forage harvester, lower the front
attachments onto the ground, apply the holding
brake, switch off the engine and remove the
ignition key!
27. There must not be anyone between the forage
harvester and the front attachment without the
vehicle being secured against rolling off through the
holding brake and/or wheel chocks!
Safety
2.2.5 Self-propelled work machine
2.2.6 Foraging unit machine
•
1. When driving on public roads, the hazard warning
lights or the revolving signal light and the excess
width identification equipment must be used in
compliance with the applicable national traffic
regulations.
•
2. Switch on the lights so that the vehicle can be
easily recognised.
•
3. Safety equipment.
4. Always check the machine for driving and
operational safety before use.
5. Hold on to the hand grip when getting on and off
the forage harvester.
6. It is not permitted to transport people on the
platform.
7. The road safety switch must be in road position
during road travel to ensure that all hydraulic
functions - except for the steering and brakes – are
deactivated.
8. Only drive the machine at the permitted speed.
9. Implements must be in transport position and
locked in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions for road driving.
10. If the engine is running in an enclosed space,
divert the exhaust fumes and ensure sufficient
ventilation.
11. When using starting fluid, avoid ignition sources
and naked flames. Keep starting fluid clear of
batteries and electrical cables.
12. When passing through corners, always take into
consideration the width of the front attachment and
the fact that the rear of the forage harvester will
swivel out. The condition of the ground influences
the driving properties of the forage harvester.
13. Drive with care if you notice pits, ditches and
obstacles; they can cause the forage harvester to
overturn. This is particularly important on slopes.
Dangerous cutting tools are located under the
protective equipment of the machine. These cutting
tools coast after the drive has been switched off.
Thus a sufficient safety distance from the machine
must be kept up to the standstill of all aggregates.
Do only work on the machine when the audio
coastdown alarm is finished and a visual inspection
with regard to the standstill of the aggregates has
been made.
Because of the nature of the process, not all
moving parts of the blade drum and drive can be
completely covered, especially during the grinding
process. To prevent serious injuries, all protective
devices and maintenance openings must be closed
during the grinding process. In addition, there must
be no one in the area of the blade drum. Do not
reach into this area!
2.2.7 Autopilot
1. The autopilot must only be used for its intended
purpose. It must only be used in open fields, off
public and semi-public roads, away from open
areas frequented by people and far away from any
persons that could be endangered. They must only
be used for their intended purpose:
• Automatic forage harvester guiding on
a stalk-line row of plants.
2. Before placing autopilot in service, its full
functionality must be verified and all its modules
checked.
- Check whether the autopilot shuts down by an
abrupt moving of the steering wheel and by leaving
the driver`s seat (via seat switch contact).
- Check for proper operating condition i. e. free of mechanical damages and leaks
- of row tracers, of the steering angle transmitter as
well as of all visible hoses and wirings.
3. When the autopilot is in operation, there must be
on one within 50 m of the forage harvester in any
direction.
4. The operator is not permitted to leave the driver’s
cabin while the autopilot is in operation.
5. While the autopilot is in operation, the driver must
regularly check the direction in which the machine
is moving and its travel path to be able to take over
manual control of the harvest forager immediately if
obstructions or interruptions come up in the
vehicle’s path.
6. After the autopilot has been in operation and before
leaving the field, the autopilot must always be
switched off on the autopilot release switch on the
console.
II - 3
Safety
7. Manipulating safety-related elements of the
autopilot is prohibited, as is making changes to the
hydraulic, electrical or electronic components.
8. The autopilot should only be installed by an
authorised service centre.
8. Place the uncoupled PTO shaft on the holder
provided!
9. Immediately repair any damage before working with
the implement!
2.2.10
2.2.8 Implements
1. Caution! Once the drives have been switched off,
a hazard remains from the flywheel which
continues to turn by inertia! Keep away from the
implement during this time. Be sure that the
machine has come to a complete stop before
starting any maintenance work!
2. Cleaning, lubricating and adjusting the implements
must be carried out only when the drive is switched
off, the engine switched off and the ignition key
removed! The audio coastdown alarm, which is
sounded after the main drive is switched off, must
be finished.
2.2.9 PTO shaft
1. Only PTO shafts specified by the manufacturer
may be used!
2. The protective tube and protective funnel of the
PTO shaft as well as the PTO shield - also on the
implement end - must be attached and in proper
condition!
3. Make sure that the required tube covers for PTO
shafts are in place in transport and working
position!
4. Before installing or detaching PTO shafts, switch
off the PTO shaft, turn the engine off and remove
the ignition key!
5. Always make sure that the PTO shafts are
mounted correctly and secured properly!
6. Secure the PTO shaft guard against turning by
hooking in the chains!
7. Cleaning, lubricating or adjusting PTO driven
implements or the PTO shaft only with PTO
disengaged, engine switched off and ignition key
withdrawn!
II - 4
Hydraulic system
1. The hydraulic system is pressurised!
Special care at hydraulic systems with
accumulators. Hydraulic systems with
accumulators are under high pressure! Repair work
to the hydraulic system must only be performed by
service centres.
2. When connecting hydraulic cylinders and motors,
make sure the hydraulic hoses are connected as
specified!
3. When connecting the hydraulic hoses to the forage
harvester hydraulics, take care that the hydraulic
system is depressurised both on the tractor side
and on the device side!
4. When functions are connected hydraulically between
the forage harvester and the front attachment,
coupling sleeves and plugs should be identified so
that faulty operation is excluded! If the connectors
are interchanged, the functions will be reversed (e.g.
raising/lowering) - Risk of accident!
5. Check the hydraulic hose lines at regular intervals
and replace them if damaged or worn! The
replacement hose lines must meet the technical
requirements of the device manufacturer!
6. When searching for leaks, use suitable aids to
avoid the risk of injuries!
7. Liquids escaping under high pressure (hydraulic oil)
can penetrate the skin and cause serious injury! In
the case of injuries, seek medical assistance
immediately. Risk of infection!
8. Before working on the hydraulic system,
depressurise the system and switch off the engine!
Safety
2.2.11 Battery
1. Maintenance work on the batteries requires
sufficient knowledge and mounting tools according
to the instructions.
2. Keep naked flames, burning matches and spark
sources clear of the battery. Risk of explosion!
3. Never check the charging level of the battery by
connecting the two poles with a metal object. Use
an acid tester or voltmeter.
4. Never charge a frozen battery. Explosion hazard!
Warm the battery to 16 °C beforehand.
5. Battery acid can cause severe injuries by burning
your skin and eyes. For this reason, wear suitable
protective clothing.
2.2.15 Working in the vicinity of power
transmission lines
1. Always take great care when working under or in
the vicinity of power transmission lines.
2. Please remember that during operation of the
forage harvester, the overall height of 4 m is
exceeded considerably due to the upper discharge
chute.
3. If there is any need to travel under overhead lines,
the machine operator must request information on
the rated voltage and the minimum height of the
overhead lines from the overhead line operator.
4. Always keep the safety distances according to the
table.
Rated voltage
2.2.12 Cooling system
A heated cooling system is pressurised –
Burning hazard! For this reason, only remove the
radiator cap with the engine switched off and after the
engine has been able to cool.
2.2.13 Tyres
1. When working on the tyres, make sure that the
device is in a safe position and has been secured
against rolling (wheel chocks).
2. You must have adequate knowledge and the proper
tools to undertake the work of fitting wheels and
tyres!
3. Repair work on the tyres and wheels should only be
carried out by specially trained personnel and only
tools appropriate to the job should be used!
4. Check tyre pressure regularly! Inflate the tyres to
the recommended pressures!
5. Check the wheel nuts periodically! Missing wheel
nuts can result in a wheel falling off and the
machine tipping over.
2.2.14 Emergency exit
The right hand side window in the cabin is designed for
being an emergency exit. In case of an emergency the
cabin can be left over the emergency exit. To do this,
the right hand side window must be manually unlocked
before opening.
kV
to
1
Above
1 to 110
Above 101 to 220
Above 220 to 380
Safe distance from
overhead lines
m
1
2
3
4
2.2.16 Fire prevention measures
1. Before starting to work, make sure the fire
extinguisher is in a condition according to the
regulations and familiarise yourself with how to use
it.
2. The associated fire extinguisher must be serviced
periodically. If it was used, it must always be
refilled, even if you only used it very briefly.
3. To avoid fire hazards, always keep the forage
harvester clean! In particular remove any crop
wound around rotating parts.
4. The forage harvester is also used to process very
dry crop (hay, straw), which constitutes an imminent fire hazard.
5. The fire hazard can be reduced by removing
accumulated crop from the machine several times
a day (interval depends on the type of crop) and
checking the machine components for overheating.
Check for oil leaks or exiting oil and take corrective
action. Heed the lubricating instructions. Take
special care when regrinding the cutting blades –
fire hazard due to flying sparks! Before regrinding
the blades, clear the vicinity of the machine of any
crop/substances that may catch fire!
II - 5
Safety
6. Frequently check the hydraulic oil lines thoroughly
for proper condition and position with sufficient
clearance to contact edges that may be sharp.
7. Check the vicinity of the hot zones of the engine,
the exhaust system and pipes and the turbo
charger, and remove crop residues.
8. Take great care when handling fuels. Never fill in
fuel in the vicinity of unshielded flames or sparks
that may cause ignition. Do not smoke when filling
in fuel! Extreme fire hazard.
2.2.17 Maintenance
1. Always perform repair, maintenance and cleaning
work as well as troubleshooting only when the drive
is switched off and the engine stopped!
- Remove the ignition key!
2. The audio coastdown alarm, which is sounded after
the main drive is switched off, does not relieve the
operator of the obligation to make certain the
machine is at an absolute standstill before working
on it.
3. Regularly check that nuts and bolts are properly
seated and tighten them if necessary!
4. When performing maintenance work with the
implement raised, always secure it with suitable
supporting elements.
5. When replacing working tools with cutting edges,
use suitable tools and gloves!
6. Dispose of oils, greases and filters according to
the regulations!
7. Always disconnect the power supply before
working on the electrical system!
8. If protective devices and guards are subject to
wear, check them regularly and replace them in
good time!
9. When performing repair work and electrical welding
work on the machine, always switch off the engine
and disconnect the power supply via the main
switch of the battery.
10. Replacement parts must, as a minimum, comply
with the technical requirements set by the
manufacturer of the implements!
This is ensured by using genuine KRONE
replacement parts!
11. Use only nitrogen for filling pneumatic
accumulators - Explosion hazard!
II - 6
2.2.18 Telephones and radio sets
Telephones and radio equipment not connected to an
external antenna may cause malfunctions in the
electronic system of the vehicle and thus jeopardising
the operating safety of the vehicle.
2.2.19 Unauthorised conversion/
modification and manufacture of
spare parts
Modifications to the machine are permitted only with
the prior approval of the manufacturer. Original spare
parts and accessories authorised by the manufacturer
ensure safe use. The use of other parts may void the
liability for any consequential damage.
2.2.20 Non-permissible modes of
operation
The operational safety of the machine is only
guaranteed if it is used for its intended purpose in
accordance with the Chapter "General Information" of
these operating instructions. The limit values stated in
the data sheets must not be exceeded under any
circumstances.
Safety
2.3 Main Battery Switch
Risk of injury due to trailing machine parts!
If the main battery switch is used for switching off the machine while the diesel engine is running, then
the safety equipment of the machine is deactivated.
• Do only actuate the main battery switch if the diesel engine is turned off and the ignition key is
removed.
The main battery switch (1) is located on the left-hand
machine side behind the cover (2).
2
The main battery switch (1) is used to turn on or
interrupt the machine's power supply. The connection
to the dynamo and to the starter is, however, not
switched on or interrupted with the main battery switch.
•
•
Main battery switch (1) in position „I“ - electric
circuit closed.
Main battery switch (1) in position „0“ - electric
circuit interrupted.
BX851016
Interrupt the electrical power circuit after using the
machine, in emergencies and for repairs.
When the ignition is set to step I or
step II, the battery discharges even
when the main battery switch (1) is
switched off as an electrical
connection to the dynamo as well as
to the starter exists.
2.4 Safety instructions on the
machine
1
BX851017_1
The self-propelled forage harvester BiG X is equipped
with all the required safety equipment (protective
devices). However, it is not possible to eliminate all
potential hazards on this machine since to do so would
impair its full functional capability. You will find
corresponding hazard warnings on the machine that point
out the residual risks.
We have implemented the hazard warnings in the form of
warning pictograms.
In the following, you will find important information on the
locations of these warning pictograms and an associated
description/supplementation!
Familiarise yourself with the statement
of the warning pictograms.
The adjacent text and the selected
location on the machine provide
information on the special danger spots
on the machine.
II - 7
Safety
2.4.1 Location of the warning pictograms on the machine
1 3 9 10
7
5
2 3
6
7
12 7 11
7
14
12
BX850979_2
Left-hand side and front of the machine
8
8
9
14
5
12
12
16
12
16
BX850980_1
Right-hand side and rear of the machine
II - 8
Safety
1
Before placing the machine
into operation, read the
operating instructions and
safety instructions. Both
must be heeded.
Order No. 939 471-1 (1x)
3
2
Before performing
maintenance and repair work,
switch off the engine and
remove the ignition key.
Order No. 942 289-0 (1x)
4
Keep sufficient distance to
rotating machine parts.
Keep the stipulated safe
distance to power
transmission lines.
Order No. 942 293-0 (2x)
5
Order No. 942 200-1 (1x)
6
Burning hazard! Hot
surface, keep sufficient
distance.
While performing grinding work, keep your
distance. Close the protective cover once
you have completed the grinding work.
Order No. 942 210-0 (2x)
Order No. 942 294-0 (2x)
7
Never touch any moving
machine parts.
Wait until they have come
to a complete stop.
Order No. 939 410-2 (6x)
8
The pressure accumulator is under gas and
oil pressure.
Always perform dismounting and repair work
exclusively in compliance with the
instructions in the technical manual.
Order No. 939 529-0 (4x)
II - 9
Safety
1 3 9 10
7
5
2 3
6
7
12 7 11
7
14
12
BX850979_2
Left-hand side and front of the machine
8
8
9
14
5
12
12
16
12
16
BX850980_1
Right-hand side and rear of the machine
II - 10
Safety
9
10
It is impermissible to carry
passengers on ladder
steps or platforms.
The machine may be taken into
operation only when a suitable fire
extinguisher is at hand.
Order No. 942 291-0 (2x)
Order No. 942 290-0 (1x)
11
12
Before parking the
machine, secure it with
wheel chocks against
unintended rolling.
Order No. 942 250-0 (1x)
Do not open or remove the
protective equipment when
the engine is running.
Order No. 942 002-4 (5x)
15
16
942 441 -0
D
E
F
GB
I
Kugelhahn nur bei kpl. abgesenktem Hubwerk
betätigen.
El grifo de bola solamente deberá operarse después
de haber bajado totalmente el elevador hidráulico.
N'agir sur le robinet à boisseau sphérique qu'après
avoir abaissé totalement le relevage hydraulique.
Stop points
The ball cock should only be operated with the
power lift totally lowered.
Azionare il rubinetto a sfera solo dopo aver
abbassato completamente il sollevatore.
Order No. 942 012-1 (4x)
Order No. 942 441-0 (1x)
II - 11
Safety
23
22
20
20
200 227 280 (1x)
22
200 229 680 (1x)
II - 12
21
BX500665_3
21
200 227 270 (1x)
23
200 229 690 (1x)
Operators controls
3
Operators controls
3.1 Overview
1
2
3
4
7
5
6
8
9
BX500098_4
1
2
3
4
5
-
Switch group – air conditioning/heating
Switch group – roof panel
Camera monitoring system (optional)
Side window wiper (right/left)
Info Centre
3.2 Switch panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
-
Panel switches
Pilot lamps
Keyboards
Instantaneous stop switch
12-Volt socket
Cigarette lighter
Ignition lock
6
7
8
9
-
Switch panel
Multi-function lever
Steering column
Operating brake
3
4
2
6
7
1
BX851077
III - 1
Operators controls
3.2.1 Panel switches and pilot lamps
1
2
3
4
5
6
-
7
8
9
10
11
-
Release switch – road/field
Release switch – feed drive/front attachment
Parking brake button
Release switch – travelling gear
Pushbutton TC (Traction Control) on/off
Pushbutton TC I / II sensitivity (switching
grass / maize)
Release switch - Autopilot
Release switch - maintenance
Pilot lamp - engine oil pressure
Charge indicator light
Pilot lamp - coolant temperature
1
2
3
4
5
10 9 11
6
BX851076
8
7
Actuating release switches
The release switches are locked
against unintentional actuation.
•
1
1
To actuate the release switches (1), push the lock (2)
forward and press the release switch.
2
III - 2
BX750C-0003
Operators controls
3.2.2 Release switch – road/field
When travelling on roads, the road/
field release switch must be set to the
position "I".
This ensures that only the travelling
gear, the steering mechanism and the
brakes are active.
1
1
The road/field release switch (1) is used to switch from
road travel to field operation and vice versa.
I
II
-
Road travel
Field operation
I
II
BX750C-0004
3.2.3 Release switch – feed drive/front
attachment
Actuating the feed drive/attachment release switch (1)
releases the feed drive rollers and the corresponding
attachment.
•
1
BX750C-0005
2
The road/field release switch (2) must be set to field
operation ( II).
I
II
-
Feed drive/front attachment off
Feed drive/front attachment on
I
II
I
II
3.2.4 Parking brake button
The parking brake is applied or released by pressing
the button (1) repeatedly.
The parking brake is released automatically when
starting the machine.
When you are leaving the driver's seat, the parking
brake is applied automatically.
1
Driving for an extended period of time
with the holding brake applied will
result in overheating of the brake.
Check the status of the parking brake
in the display:
The parking brake has been applied if
the symbol
appears in the
BX750C-0006
display.
III - 3
Operators controls
3.2.5 Release switch – travelling gear
When the travelling gear release switch (1) is actuated,
the travelling gear is released.
No persons may be present in the
direct hazardous area of the machine
when the travelling gear release switch
is actuated!
I
II
-
I
1
Travelling gear off
Travelling gear on
When the travelling gear is switched on (II position),
the maintenance functions (manual operation on the
left platform) are not released.
II
BX850858
3.2.6 Pushbutton TC (Traction Control)
On/Off
The Traction Control (TC) is an antislip system that prevents wheel spin
in certain situations. It can be set to
one of two stages.
2
Turning the ignition on automatically
switches the traction control on.
•
Pressing the TC button (2) repeatedly switches the
traction control off or back on.
The status of the traction control is shown in the
display (in the travelling gear data section (III) of the
Info Centre, see Basic Screen chapter).
BX850859
3.2.7 Pushbutton TC I / II Sensitivity
(Switching Grass / Maize)
The TC I / II pushbutton (3) sets the sensitivity level
of the traction control. There are two sensitivity
levels: level II for grass and level I for maize.
• Pressing the TC I / II button (3) repeatedly switches
the TC between the two sensitivity levels.
3
The sensitivity level of the traction control is shown in
the display (in the travelling gear data section (III) of
the Info Centre, see Basic Screen chapter).
The last set sensitivity is retained even
after the ignition is turned off.
III - 4
BX850860
Operators controls
3.2.8 Release switch – autopilot
Actuating the autopilot release switch (1) releases the
autopilot function.
II
The autopilot is available only in maize
operation when the EasyCollect maize
header has been attached.
•
1
The road/field release switch must be active in field
operation and the travelling gear release switch
must be switched on.
I
II
-
Autopilot off
Autopilot on
I
BX750C-0007
3.2.9 Release switch - maintenance
Actuating the maintenance release switch (1) releases
all maintenance functions (manual operation on the left
platform).
•
II
The road/field release switch must be active in field
operation and the travelling gear release switch
must be switched off.
I
II
-
1
Maintenance off
Maintenance on
BX750C-0008
I
III - 5
Operators controls
After the machine has been restarted, the
following indicator lamps light up for approx. 2
seconds.
3.2.10 Pilot lamp of engine oil pressure
The pilot lamp of engine oil pressure (1) illuminates, if
the engine oil pressure is too low.
1
Switch off engine immediately.
•
2
Check level of motor oil
3.2.11 Charge indicator light
The charge indicator light (2) will light up, if the output
voltage of the three-phase generator is not sufficient
to charge the batteries.
•
3
Check the cables and connections on the threephase generator and on the batteries. Check the
V- belt on the three-phase generator.
3.2.12 Pilot lamp of coolant temperature
The pilot lamp of coolant temperature (3) illuminates,
if the cooling water temperature reaches the critical
area.
• Check level of coolant
• Check state and fastening of cooling water intake
horse as well as air intake hose
III - 6
BX850862
Operators controls
3.2.13 Keyboards
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
-
8 -
9 10 -
11
12
13
14
15
16
-
not taken
not taken
Start diesel engine II (BiG X 800, 1000)
Switch off diesel engine II (BiG X 800, 1000)
Main coupling on
Main coupling off
Pendulum frame - swing up to the left
Pendulum frame - swing up to the right
(red) pick-up = lift roller-type crop guard
(red) maize header = retract
(red) pick-up = lower roller-type crop guard
(red) maize header = fold out
By pressing the keys (7) and (8) simultaneously,
switch off the pressure in the first hydraulic
circuit.
(blue) pick-up = swing in roller feelers
(blue) maize header = lift plant divider
(blue) pick-up = extend roller feelers
(blue) maize header = lower plant divider
By pressing the keys (9) and (10)
simultaneously, switch off the pressure in the
second hydraulic circuit.
(green) optional for additional hydraulic unit I-A
(green) optional for additional hydraulic unit I-B
A = optional for additional control
B = optional for additional control
(black) optional for additional hydraulic unit II-A
(black) optional for additional hydraulic unit II-B
1
3
1
5
1
6
1
2
4
13 14
7
1
8
1
11
1 12
1
9 10 15 16
BX500004
3.2.14 Ignition lock
The ignition lock (1) has four positions:
STOP
-
Off
I
II
III
-
Electric circuit for electronics is switched on
The ignition is switched on
Start position
STOP
I
II
1
III
BX851078
III - 7
Operators controls
3.2.15
Cigarette lighter
In order to prevent damage and injury,
never hold the cigarette lighter (1) in
pressed position.
•
Press the cigarette lighter (1) in; when the required
temperature is reached the insert will come out by
itself.
1
The socket of the cigarette lighter can be used to
connect other power consumers with 12 volts and a
maximum of 10 amps. When the engine has been
switched off, the battery will be discharged. Use the
specified plug to connect accessory units.
BX851079
3.2.16 Instantaneous stop switch
1
When the instantaneous stop switch (1) is actuated,
the travelling gear is deactivated and the machine
stops. All work functions are stopped.
When the instantaneous stop switch (2) is actuated, all
work functions are stopped.
•
Press the instantaneous stop switch (1 or 2)
Quick stop button (1) stops all drives and the
travelling gear Quick stop button (2) stops just all
drives.
•
In order to activate the machine, move the actuated
instantaneous stop switch (1 or 2) to its initial
position by turning it slightly to the right.
2
BX851080
3.2.17 OBD diagnostics plug (On-Board-plug)
2
1
BX851075
The OBD diagnostics plug (1) is located in the cabin,
behind the instructional seat and below the storage
surface (2).
III - 8
Operators controls
3.2.18 Diagnostics socket
Only devices that are approved by
KRONES may be connected to the
CAN interface.
•
•
CAN interface (1)
USB connection (2)
3.2.19
2
1
ISOBUS connection
ISOBUS socket is located right bottom on the seat.
• ISOBUS socket (3).
3
BX851081
3.3 Main Battery Switch
The main battery switch (1) is located on the left-hand
machine side behind the cover (2).
2
The main battery switch (1) is used to turn on or
interrupt the machine's power supply. The connection
to the dynamo and to the starter is, however, not
switched on or interrupted with the main battery switch.
BX851016
1
BX851017_1
III - 9
Operators controls
3.4 Multi-function lever
1
a
5
2
b
16
3
15
a
4
14
d
b
c
5
14
13
d
c
9
6
18
8
7
19
20 17
12
11
10
1
2
3
-
4
-
5a
5b
5c
5d
6
-
7
8
9
10
11
-
III - 10
Memory keys (M1)
Memory keys (M2)
Autopilot (field operation of maize header
only)
Mirror upper discharge chute (with main
coupling switched on)
discharge chute to transport setting (with
main coupling turned off)
Ejector flap up
Turn discharge chute right
Ejector flap down
Turn discharge chute left
Memory key for adjustment process - lifting
gear
Speed discharge chute
Pilot lamp - travelling gear on
Without function
Reduce the engine speed
Switch from nominal speed to idle speed and
vice versa
BX850800_1
Possible assignment of the keys M1
and M2, see section General Machine
Settings „Joystick-Memory-Keys“.
12
13
-
14a 14b 14c 14d 15
16
17
18
19
20
-
Increase engine speed
Switching operating mode diesel engine
(optional) (power split)
Lower the lifting gear (step mode)
Raise the lifting gear up to top (sensing
mode) Save height
Raise the lifting gear (step mode)
Automatic header contour (sensing mode)
Save height
Feed drive/front attachment ON - OFF
Reverse feed drive/front attachment
Save the cutting length
Actuation key for travelling gear
Selector switch - acceleration ramp
Joystick
Operators controls
F
E
20 17
D
J
H
G
K
L
M
A
B
C
BX500003_2
A
-
B
C
-
D
-
E
F
-
-
G
-
Acceleration (in forward travel)
Deceleration (in reverse)
Start travelling gear with actuation key (18)
pressed
Multi-function lever – centre position
Acceleration (in reverse)
Deceleration (in forward travel)
Start travelling gear with actuation key (18)
pressed
Deceleration to 0 km/h
Fast reversing with actuation key (18) pressed
(field operation only)
Multi-function lever – centre position
Switch on cruise control (in forward travel only)
Save present speed for cruise control – Press
actuation key (18) and move multi-function
level in direction F
In field mode, the load limit control "Constant
Power" (option) will be activated by briefly
pressing the driving lever twice to the
right.(option)
Bring up cutting length value 1
If the 17 button is pressed and is past the
action point, the cutting length is saved in the
Info Centre (value 1)
H
J
-
K
-
L
M
M
-
Central position
Bring up cutting length value 2
If the 17 button is pressed and is past the
action point, the cutting length is saved in the
Info Centre (value 2)
Lower discharge chute (optional: fold in upper
discharge chute extension for EasyCollect EC
1053 ( 14 rows)
When button (17) is pressed, press joystick
forwards (20).
Central position
Lift upper discharge chute
Raise discharge chute (optional: fold out upper
discharge chute extension for EasyCollect EC
1053 (14 rows)
When button (17) is pressed, press joystick
(20) back.
If the discharge chute flap is lifted, the
folding in of the upper discharge chute
extension defers by approx. 2 seconds,
because the discharge chute flap was
being lowered automatically before.
During folding in and folding out the
discharge chute flap can't be actuated.
III - 11
Operators controls
3.5 Roof console
4
2
6
5
3
4
1
BX500601_2
1
2
3
4
5
6
-
III - 12
Switch – air conditioning/heating
Switch group – roof panel
Interior lighting
Cooling compartment - cool bag
ISO compartment for radio
Locator lighting for multi-function lever
Operators controls
3.6 Switch group – roof panel
2
1
7
1
2
-
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
-
12
-
13
-
8
3
13
4
5
12
11
9
6
10
BX850978_2
Working floodlight – side of cab
Working floodlight – cab roof and upper
discharge chute
Working floodlight - front
Mirror adjustment (right rear view mirror only)
Rear working floodlights
Side light/dipped beam
Allround lights
Warning flashers
Windshield wipers
Windshield washer unit
Switching between driving headlights onto
guardrail and onto lamp carrier
Locator lighting for multi-function lever (the
brightness can be regulated)
Working floodlights discharge chute
III - 13
Operators controls
3.7 Steering column and foot pedals
5
1
2
4
8
3
7
6
10
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
-
III - 14
Button for horn
Indicator switch
Pilot lamp indicator
Full beam
Headlamp flasher
Full beam indicator light
BX200111_4
7
8
-
9
-
10
-
Pilot lamp – trailer function
Release lever for horizontal and vertical
steering column adjustment
Release lever for horizontal steering column
adjustment
Operating brake
Operators controls
3.7.1
•
Horn
When the push-button (1) is pressed, the horn is
sounded.
1
BX100210_2
3.7.2
Indicator switch
In road traffic the change of travelling
direction is indicated by a flashing
light.
•
Switch (1) forward – right indicator
•
Switch (1) backward – left indicator
The indicator pilot lamp (2) will flash when the flashing
light has been switched on.
1
2
BX100213_2
III - 15
Operators controls
3.7.3
Full beam
1
The full beam can only be activated if
the dipped beam is turned on.
Switch off high beam when a vehicle
approaches.
•
Switching high beam on – press lever (1) down.
•
Switching high beam off – press lever (1) up.
2
If the full beam is turned on, the indicator lamp (2) is lit
permanently.
3.7.4
•
BX100212_2
Headlamp flasher
Pull the headlamp flasher lever (1) up.
If the headlamp flasher is activated, the indicator lamp
(2) lights up briefly.
2
1
BX200040_2
3.7.5
•
Foot Brake
Apply the brake pedal (1) - the vehicle slows down.
The braking effect reinforces due to increasing
pressure on the brake pedal (1).
1
BX100111_2
3.7.6 Trailer brake (option)
The optionally installed trailer brake (two-line brake) is
only intended for the operation with trailer.
•
•
•
Brake pedal (1) - service brake of the machine
Brake pedal (2) - service brake of the trailer
Connecting bolt (3) for brake pedal
The both brake pedals are connected with each other
by a connecting bolt (3). To be able to brake the trailer
separately (only permissible in field mode), the
connection of the both brake pedals can be
disconnected via connecting bolt (3).
Road travel is only permissible with
connected brake pedals.
III - 16
1
2
3
BX851040
Operators controls
3.8 Manual operation on the platform (left)
1
9
3
2
4
5
7
6
10
11
12
8
BX850805
Activation of manual operation:
Road/field release switch in field
operation position
Travelling gear release switch off
Maintenance release switch on
Main coupling on
1
2
3
-
4
-
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
-
Move the right counterblade to blade drum
Move the left counterblade to blade drum
Move the right counterblade away from blade
drum
Move the left counterblade away from blade
drum
Close grinding flap
Open grinding flap
Automatic grinding operation
Move grindstone by hand
reverse feed drive/front attachment
Instantaneous stop switch
Raise lifting gear
Lower lifting gear
III - 17
Operators controls
III - 18
Info Centre
4
"EasyTouch" Info Centre
Overview
II
I
III
V
IV
BX500148_1
•
I
= Display
•
II = Keys
•
III = Keys
•
IV = Rotary potentiometer
•
V = Menu key
1
A
to
to
8
D
(1 - 8)
(A - D)
IV - 1
Info Centre
The Info Centre renders information on the power
actions and the present operating conditions of BiG X.
The Info Centre can be used to carry out settings in the
machine as well as to start and stop actions.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Its main components are:
Keys 1-8
Keys 1-8 are used to activate the softkeys located in
the right column. For the assignment of the keys, see
the illustration.
If there is no softkey next to the key, it has no
function.
B
A
C
D
BX500000
Keys A-D
The keys A-D are used to activate the softkeys located
in the line just above them. For the assignment of the
keys, see the illustration.
If there is no softkey above the key, the key has no
function.
Rotary potentiometer (1)
The rotary potentiometer has two functions:
1. The rotary potentiometer can be turned to change
settings and to select the desired menu in the menu
level.
2. Pressing the rotary potentiometer activates and
saves the settings.
2
Menu key (2)
You can use the (1) key with the rotary potentiometer
to call or close the menu level or to go to the preceding
menu level. Holding the key down slightly longer takes
you back to the basic screen.
1
BM 400 0101
Display (screen display)
I
The display is divided up into the following sections:
Status line (I):
Time, number of errors, central
lubrication, pendulum frame.
II
Information section: Engine data (II)
Drive data (III)
Settings (IV and V)
IV
III
V
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500001
IV - 2
Info Centre
4.1 Information Section
After the ignition is switched on, the basic screen
appears in the display.
4.1.1 Basic Screen
Status line (I):
•
•
= Error; at least one error occurred. The
number of errors present is in front of the icon.
Central lubrication
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
= Central lubrication active (green)
= Error in central lubrication (red)
A
B
C
D
BX851013
= Central lubrication inactive (yellow)
= Feed drive cleaning system active (green)
•
I
1
2
= Error cleaning system (red)
3
4
= Cleaning system inactive (yellow)
5
6
7
8
Pendulum frame
= Pendulum frame free. Position of
pendulum frame is as shown.
= Pendulum frame free. Position of
A
B
C
D
BX500002_2
pendulum frame is as shown.
= Pendulum frame free. Position of
pendulum frame is as shown.
= Position of pendulum frame unknown
because pendulum frame sensor is defective or not
calibrated.
= Pendulum frame locked. Position of
pendulum frame is as shown.
= Pendulum frame locked. Position of
pendulum frame is as shown.
= Pendulum frame locked. Position of
pendulum frame is as shown.
= Position of pendulum frame unknown
because pendulum frame sensor is defective or not
calibrated.
IV - 3
Info Centre
Engine data information section (II):
1080
•
Engine speed
Road operation:
Field mode:
1000 - 1700 rpm
1100 -2100 rpm
Coloured Display of the Engine Speed (1)
Black
On BiG X 600 /700-1/850-1 over 1800 rpm,
on BiG X 1100-1 over 1850 rpm.
• The diesel engine is not in its optimal speed
working range.
Green
On BiG X 600 /700-1/850-1 between 1700 and 1800
rpm, on BiG X 1100-1 between 1750 and 1850 rpm.
• The diesel engine is in its optimal speed working
range.
II
1080
B
A
C
20
40
60
80
100
Engine capacity as %
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
1
Speeds may vary depending on the
diesel engine.
0
2
BX500650
Red
On BiG X 600 /700-1/850-1 under 1700 rpm,
on BiG X 1100-1 under 1750 rpm .
• The diesel engine is in a critical speed working
range. It should immediately be relieved.
•
1
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX851057
Fault indicator lamp red (engine fault) Stop
•
immediately!
Inform the KRONE dealer or the KRONE customer
service
•
Fault indicator lamp yellow (engine fault)
Consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as
possible
•
Cooling water temperature display
If the cooling water temperature reaches the critical
range, the background of the cooling water
temperature display changes to yellow
.
•
•
IV - 4
Fuel gauge
reserve display of fuel
Info Centre
Information section of the travelling gear data (III):
•
= Cruise control active; the number after
the icon is the saved speed for Tempomat operation
in km/h.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
= Cruise control inactive
•
•
Travelling speed
Road operation:0 - 40 km/h
Field mode:
0 - 18 km/h (BiG X 600 /700-1)
0 - 25 km/h (BiG X 850-1 /
BiG X 1100-1)
Acceleration ramp of travelling gear
III
B
A
C
D
BX850864
1 = lowest acceleration ramp
2 = ...
3 = ...
4 = highest acceleration ramp
•
Direction of travel
= Forward travel
= Neutral (standstill)
= Reverse travel
•
Traction Control TC
= Traction Control TC active
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
= Traction Control TC inactive
•
III
Traction Control TC I / II Sensitivity
= Traction Control TC I (maize) activ
= Traction Control TC I r (maize) ready
B
A
C
D
BX850863
for operation
= Traction Control TCI II (grass) active
= Traction Control TC II (grass)
ready for operation
= Parking brake is applied
If the machine is running with the
parking brake engaged, the parking
brake indicator flashes and a horn
sounds at intervals of about 30
seconds.
I
IV
II
= Emergency mode; allows the driver to
drive the vehicle out of the danger zone even if
there are serious drive problems.
= Error on additional axle
V
A
B
C
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BX850871_1
IV - 5
Info Centre
•
Others:
= Quick stop button has been activated on
the console.
= Quick stop button has been activated by
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
manual operation device (platform).
•
= Load limit control active - the travelling
III
speed is automatically adjusted to the
speed reduction of the engine.
•
Autopilot (optional, only in maize field mode):
= Autopilot active, the row tracer is
evaluated on the left
= Autopilot active, the row tracer is
evaluated on the right
= Autopilot active, both row tracers are
evaluated
= Autopilot active, the row tracer is
evaluated on the left (depending on the upper
discharge chute)
= Autopilot active, the row tracer is
evaluated on the right (depending on the upper
discharge chute)
= Autopilot active, the mirrored row tracer
is evaluated on the left (depending on the upper
discharge chute)
= Autopilot active, the mirrored row tracer
is evaluated on the right (depending on the upper
discharge chute)
•
Lifting gear control (only in field mode)
= The lifting gear pressure control is
active
= The lifting gear pressure control is
inactive
= The lifting gear distance control is
active
= The lifting gear distance control is
inactive
= The lifting gear position control is active
= The lifting gear position control is
inactive
Information section of settings (IV and V):
(see Chapter "Settings").
IV - 6
A
B
C
D
BX500165_1
Info Centre
4.2 Settings
4.2.1 Working Width
The working width must be set in order to be able to
calculate the surface.
In grass pickup mode, the symbol
IV
and the set
width (swathed width) is displayed in the information
section settings (IV) in cm or inches.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
In maize header mode, the settings (IV) information
section displays the symbol
A
and the number
B
C
D
BX500005_1
of rows set with the resulting working width in cm or
inches.
In Direct cutting system mode, the symbol
and the set width are displayed in the information
section settings (IV) in cm or inches.
4.2.2 Temporary change in the working
width of the grass pickup
Working width = swathed width
•
Pressing the
if the
1
1
key decreases the working width;
key is held down for a longer time, the
working width will decrease faster.
•
Pressing the
2
key increases the working width
(up to the maximum for the fixed set width). If the
2
key is held down for a longer time, the working
width will increase faster.
It is also possible to make a setting with the rotary
potentiometer:
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the working width. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can adjust the desired working width with the
rotary potentiometer (up to a maximum for the fixed
set width).
To exit the input field again, press the rotary
potentiometer.
Activating the key on the multifunction
lever ((14b) = raise lifting gear up to
top) causes the system to switch back
to the permanently set working width.
14
b
BX500500_1
IV - 7
Info Centre
4.2.3 Temporary Change of the Maize
Header Working Width
The resulting working width is
calculated from the row distance and
the number of rows directly and the
result is displayed.
•
Pressing the
rows; if the
1
IV
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key decreases the number of
key is held down for a longer time,
1
1
the number decreases faster.
A
•
Pressing the
2
B
C
D
key increases the number of rows
BX500009_1
(up to the maximum for the fixed set number). If the
2
key is held down for a longer time, the number
will increase faster.
It is also possible to make a setting with the rotary
potentiometer:
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the working width. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can adjust the desired number of rows with the
rotary potentiometer (up to a maximum for the fixed
set number).
To exit the input field again, press the rotary
potentiometer.
Activating the key on the multifunction
lever ((14b) = raise lifting gear up to
top) causes the system to switch back
to the permanently set working width.
14
b
BX500500_1
IV - 8
Info Centre
4.2.4 Temporary Change of the Working
Width of the Direct Cutting System
•
Pressing the
if the
1
1
IV
key is held down for a longer time, the
Pressing the
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key increases the working width
(up to the maximum for the fixed set width). If the
2
2
key decreases the working width;
working width will decrease faster.
•
1
key is held down for a longer time, the working
width will increase faster.
A
B
C
D
BX500010_1
It is also possible to make a setting with the rotary
potentiometer:
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the working width. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can adjust the desired working width with the
rotary potentiometer (up to a maximum for the fixed
set width).
To exit the input field again, press the rotary
potentiometer.
Activating the key on the multifunction
lever ((14b) = raise lifting gear up to
top) causes the system to switch back
to the permanently set working width.
14
b
BX500500_1
IV - 9
Info Centre
4.3 Front Attachment
The status and the set target speed of the front
attachment will be shown in the settings (IV) info area
in the menu field front attachment.
1
2
4.3.1 Status (1)
•
= Front attachment not OK
•
= Front attachment standstill
•
= Front attachment OK
•
= Front attachment forward inactive
•
= Front attachment forward active
•
= Front attachment reverse inactive
•
= Front attachment reverse active
4.3.2 Foreign object detection (2)
•
= Metal detection deactivated
•
= metal detected in feed drive
•
= An error has occurred in metal detection.
RockProtect
•
= A rock was detected in the feed drive.
•
= An error has occurred in RockProtect.
•
= An error has occurred in metal detection
and RockProtect.
IV - 10
4
3
IV
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500006_2
Info Centre
4.3.3 Setting the Setpoint Speed (3)
•
Pressing the
3
key decreases the setpoint
speed; if the
3
key is held down for a longer
time, the setpoint speed will decrease faster.
•
Pressing the
if the
4
4
key increases the setpoint speed;
4
key is held down for a longer time, the
setpoint speed will increase faster.
A
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the setpoint speed. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to set the
desired setpoint speed.
To exit the input field again, press the rotary
potentiometer.
3
IV
It is also possible to make a setting with the rotary
potentiometer:
•
1
2
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500006_2
4.3.4 Actual speed (4)
•
Display of current actual speed
IV - 11
Info Centre
4.4 Feed Drive
The cutting length is determined by the speed of the
feed drive rollers and the number of blades that are
used.
The current cutting length is displayed in the feed drive
menu field in the information section of settings (IV).
•
inches.
Depending on the number of blades that are used,
the cutting length can be set within a range from 3 62 mm.
IV
A
4.4.1 Adjusting the cutting length
Pressing the
if the
5
5
key decreases the cutting length;
key is held down for a longer time, the
cutting length will decrease faster.
•
Pressing the
if the
6
6
key increases the cutting length;
key is held down for a longer time, the
cutting length will increase faster.
It is also possible to make a setting with the rotary
potentiometer:
•
•
•
•
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Cutting length display
and the current cutting length in mm or
•
1
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the cutting length. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired cutting length.
To exit the input field again, press the rotary
potentiometer.
The change is accepted immediately.
Two different cutting lengths (value 1/ value 2) can be
saved and retrieved with the multifunction lever (see
the chapter on the Multi-Function Lever).
IV - 12
B
C
D
BX500007_2
Info Centre
4.5 Lifting Gear
In field mode, the current lifting gear control is
displayed in the Drive data info area (II). The actual
height of the lifting gear and the corresponding setpoint
pressure or the setpoint height is displayed in the
Settings info area (IV) in the Lifting gear menu field.
4.5.1 Status
•
IV
III
= The lifting gear pressure control is
active. The controller regulates the pressure against
the ground to a constant value. Control is active.
•
= The lifting gear pressure control has
A
B
C
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3 1 2
BX850849
been switched on. Control is still inactive.
= Lifting gear distance control (optional,
•
only in conjunction with distance sensors); the
control sets the height constant relative to the
ground. Control is active.
= The lifting gear distance control has
•
been switched on. Control is still inactive.
•
= Lifting gear position control; the control
sets the height constant relative to the machine.
Control is active.
•
= The lifting gear position control has
been switched on. Control is still inactive.
•
1st value (1) = actual height of the lifting gear in
cm or inches
•
2nd Value (2) = setpoint pressure as a percentage
value for the own weight of the front
attachment. It is adjustable between 6% (front attachment sways above
the ground) to a maximum of 70%
(front attachment presses on to the
ground with 70% of its own weight).
or
2nd value (2) = nominal height in cm or inches or
as a % if the lifting gear distance
control is set.
IV - 13
Info Centre
4.5.2 Changing the setpoint pressure or
setpoint height
•
Pressing the
if the
7
7
key decreases the setpoint value;
key is held down for a longer time, the
IV
setpoint value will decrease faster.
•
Pressing the
if the
8
8
key increases the setpoint value;
It is also possible to make a setting with the rotary
potentiometer:
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the lifting gear. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired setpoint value.
To exit the input field again, press the rotary
potentiometer.
The setpoint pressure or setpoint
height can also be saved using the
multi-function lever (see chapter
operation " Multifunction lever ").
IV - 14
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key is held down for a longer time, the
setpoint value will increase faster.
•
1
A
B
C
D
2
BX500008_2
Info Centre
4.6 General Machine Settings
4.6.1 Joystick-Memory-Keys
In the delivery state, no functions are assigned to the
keys M1 and M2 on the joystick.
In this case the setting mask „Joystick Memory Keys“
can be called via the menu point 1-10 or via activating
the key
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
.
The following functions can be assigned to the joystick
memory keys.
• Raise/lower plant divider (just in maize)/ holding
down device (just in grass)
• Increase/decrease working width
• Retrieve saved cutting lengths 1 or 2
• Increase/decrease front attachment speed
• Turn pendulum frame left/right
V
A
B
C
D
BX500011_1
4.6.1.1
•
•
•
•
•
Allocate the assignment joystick-memorykeys
Use the rotary potentiometer to select M1 and M2.
The selection box is highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the selection box.
Set the required function with the rotary
potentiometer.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection box.
Activating the key
B
B
C
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX850991
If the mask has not been actuated with
B
2
accepts the settings.
A
the key „
1
“, the set functions will
be locked and symbolized via a „lock“
symbol in the fields M1/M2.
•
Activating the key
D
brings up the basic screen.
•
Activating the key
C
brings up the general
machine settings.
•
Pressing the key
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
A
B
C
D
BX850992
IV - 15
Info Centre
4.6.2 General machine settings - grass
pickup
4.6.2.1
•
•
•
•
•
Setting the grass pick-up operating mode
= Grass pickup
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the operating mode. The selection box is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the selection box.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
operating mode of the grass pickup.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection box.
•
Activating the
key brings up the basic screen.
•
Activating the key
D
C
brings up the settings load
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
limit control (option). .
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
A
B
C
D
BX500013
IV - 16
Info Centre
4.6.2.2
Setting the grass pick-up working width
Working width = swathed width
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the working width. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired working width.
To exit the input field again, press the rotary
potentiometer.
•
Activating the
key brings up the basic screen.
•
Activating the key
D
C
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500016
brings up the settings load
limit control (option).
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
4.6.2.3
•
To adjust the lifting gear control
= Lifting gear pressure control; the control
sets the pressure on the ground to a constant
value.
•
= Lifting gear position control; the control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
sets the height constant relative to the machine.
•
= Lifting gear distance control (optional,
only in conjunction with distance sensors); the
control sets the height constant relative to the
ground (only with EasyCollect).
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the lifting gear control. The selection box
is highlighted in colour (only with EasyCollect).
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the selection box.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired lifting gear control.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection box.
•
Activating the
•
Activating the key
A
B
C
D
BX500017
key brings up the basic screen.
D
C
brings up the settings load
limit control (option).
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 17
Info Centre
4.6.2.4
Setting the number of blades
After the number of blades has been changed (see
chapter Maintenance - Working with Half the Number of
Blades), the current number of blades must be set.
Setting the number of blades automatically adjusts the
speed of the feed drive roller to the set cutting length of
the new number of blades.
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the number of blades. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired number of blades.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection field.
•
Activating the
•
To open the settings for load limit control, press the
C
•
D
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500018
key brings up the basic screen.
key.
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
4.6.3 General machine settings - maize
header
4.6.3.1
•
To set the operating mode of the maize
header
= Maize header
To set the operating mode:
• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the operating mode. The selection box is
highlighted in colour.
• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the selection box.
• You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
operating mode of the maize header.
• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection box.
IV - 18
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500014_1
Info Centre
To set the machine type:
Maschinentyp:
•
= KRONE-EasyCollect (6000,7500,9000)
•
= KRONE-EasyCollect (753, 953,1053)
•
= kein KRONE-Fabrikat
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the machine type. The selection box is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the selection box.
Use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the machine type.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection box.
•
Activating the
•
To open the settings for AutoScan, press the
D
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500166
key brings up the basic screen.
C
key.
• Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
4.6.3.2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Setting the maize header working width
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the number of rows. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
Use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the desired
number of rows.
To exit the input field again, press the rotary
potentiometer.
A
B
C
Activating the
•
To open the settings for AutoScan, press the
D
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500019
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the spacing between rows. The input field
is highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired spacing between rows.
To exit the input field again, press the rotary
potentiometer.
•
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key brings up the basic screen.
C
key.
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
A
The resulting working width is
calculated directly from the row
spacing and the number of rows and
the result is displayed.
B
C
D
BX500020
IV - 19
Info Centre
4.6.3.3
•
Adjusting the lifting gear control
= Lifting gear pressure control; the control
sets the pressure on the ground to a constant
value.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
= Lifting gear position control; the control
•
sets the height constant relative to the machine.
•
= Lifting gear distance control (optional,
only in conjunction with distance sensors); the
control sets the height constant relative to the
ground.
A
B
C
D
BX500021_1
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the lifting gear control. The selection box
is highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the selection box.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired lifting gear control.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection box.
•
Activating the
•
To open the settings for AutoScan, press the
D
key brings up the basic screen.
C
key.
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
4.6.3.4
Setting the number of blades
After the number of blades has been changed (see
chapter Maintenance - Working with Half the Number of
Blades), the current number of blades must be set.
Setting the number of blades automatically adjusts the
speed of the feed drive roller to the set cutting length of
the new number of blades.
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the number of blades. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired number of blades.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection field.
•
Activating the
•
To open the settings for AutoScan, press the
D
key brings up the basic screen.
C
key.
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 20
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500022_1
Info Centre
4.6.3.5
Selecting row tracer for autopilot
This mode determines which row tracer on the maize
header will be evaluated for control of the autopilot.
Chaffing should preferably be in row tracer mode left or
right, with automatic row tracer mode for crops.
Chaffing should preferably be in row tracer mode left or
right, with both row tracers mode.
•
= Row tracer left is evaluated.
•
= Row tracer right is evaluated.
•
= Both row tracers are evaluated.
•
= Row tracer is automatically evaluated.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500023_1
The row tracer selection is made automatically
based on the position of the upper discharge chute.
Upper discharge chute left = row tracer left
Upper discharge chute right = row tracer right
= Row tracer is automatically evaluated
•
mirrored.
The row tracer selection is made automatically
based on the position of the upper discharge chute.
Upper discharge chute left = row tracer right
Upper discharge chute right = row tracer left
In "Row tracer automatic" and "Row
tracer mirrored automatic" mode, if
the upper discharge chute is not
swivelled out, the "Upper discharge
chute left" position is used as the
basis.
4.6.3.6
•
•
•
•
Setting the row tracer
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the row tracer. The selection box is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the selection box.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to set the
desired mode.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection box.
•
Activating the
•
To open the settings for AutoScan, press the
D
key brings up the basic screen.
C
key.
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 21
Info Centre
4.6.3.7 Setting the autopilot centre adjuster
The centre setting can be used to justify the side
distance from the forage harvester to the crop edge
queried by the row tracer.
If the lateral distance needs to be reduced, a negative
number should be set. To increase it, set a positive value.
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the centre adjuster. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired distance.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection field.
•
Activating the
•
To open the settings for AutoScan, press the
D
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500024_1
key brings up the basic screen.
C
key.
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
4.6.3.8
Setting the response sensitivity of the
autopilot
The response sensitivity can be used to adjust the
response (delay) of the autopilot control system.
The response sensitivity must be adjusted to the
specific combination of crop edge, driving speed and
ground conditions.
With an even crop edge, slow driving speed and dry
ground conditions, a low (slow) response sensitivity
can be set.
With an uneven crop edge, faster driving speed and
moist ground conditions, a higher (faster) response
sensitivity should be set.
The setting must be made based on specific local
factors and depends on the situation in question.
The setting can be changed during operation while
driving.
Setting range:
•
•
•
•
1 (slow) - 10 (fast)
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the response sensitivity. The input field
is highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to set the
desired value.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection field.
IV - 22
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500025_1
Info Centre
•
Activating the
•
To open the settings for AutoScan, press the
D
key brings up the basic screen.
C
key (only for setting of maize mode).
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
takes you one menu level back.
4.6.3.9 Selection of the Steering Input
• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the ISOBUS steering. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
• Press the rotary potentiometer to jump to the input
field.
When selecting the front attachment EasyCollect:
•
A
B
C
D
BX500025_1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Steering via ISOBUS steering commands
active
•
,
,
Steering via conventional buttons
,
on the EasyCollect
When selecting the front attachment EasyFlow, XDisc
or of other manufacturers:
A
B
C
D
BX851019
•
Steering via ISOBUS steering commands
active
•
•
Steering via ISOBUS inactive (steering
via row sensors)
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection field.
Activating the
D
key brings up the basic screen.
The basic screen displays the accordingly adjusted
steering input through the symbol of the autopilot.
4.6.3.10 Automatic setting of the cutting length by
maturity detection on the maize plant
(AutoScan)
The system uses the AutoScan sensor to detect the
degree of maturity of the maize plant.
The AutoScan control electronics calculate the
optimum cutting length of the maize plant from the
previously entered minimum and maximum cutting
length and control the speed of the pre-compression
rollers accordingly.
• To open the „AutoScan“ settings menu, press the
C
key (only for setting of maize header operating
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
mode).
A
B
C
D
BX500810
IV - 23
Info Centre
(1) Enter the maximum possible cutting length.
The entry is also possible via button
adjusted value) as well as
4
3
(Reduce
3
(Increase adjusted
value).
This entered cutting length will be controlled by the
AutoScan sensor from a degree of maturity of about
66% on. (This value is adjustable in professional
mode)
(2) Enter the maximum possible cutting length.
The entry is also possible via button
adjusted value) as well as
6
5
(Increase adjusted
: sensor available
: sensor not available
(5) Status for automatic adjustment of cutting length
: Automatic adjustment of cutting length is
active. The AutoScan sensor accepts the
adjustment of the cutting length in the specified
area.
: Manual adjustment of the cutting length active.
Use the key "D" in order to switch on or switch off the
automatic adaption of cutting length.
: Activation automatic mode
: Deactivation automatic mode
: No adjustment possible (AutoScan is not
connected)
After having entered the values for the minimum and
maximum cutting length these are being checked for
plausibility. In case the value for max. is changed to
4.6mm and the min. value is 4.7mm for example, the
min. value will automatically change to 4.5mm.
Set parameter 34020 to value 1 in „AutoScan“
menu to bring up the graphical representation of
the settings (3).
IV - 24
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
5
(Reduce
value).
This entered cutting length will be controlled by the
AutoScan sensor from a degree of maturity
underneath approx. 33 %. (This value is adjustable
in professional mode).
(3) Graphic display of settings.
(4) Setting if the degree of maturity sensor "AutoScan"
is present (effective after restart).
•
4
1
A
B
C
D
BX500167_2
Info Centre
Graphical display of the adjustments of the
AutoScan sensor:
(1) Theoretical, maximum cutting length when the
degree of maturity mounts up to 100 %. The cutting
length will not be further increased above a degree
of maturity of about 66%, since a degree of maturity
above 66% is not realistic in practice.
This value is automatically determined by the min. and
max. cutting lengths entered by the user (value is
adjustable in professional mode).
(2) Theoretical, minimum cutting length when the
degree of maturity is 0%. The cutting length will not
be further decreased below a degree of maturity of
about 33%, since a degree of maturity below about
33% is not realistic in practice. This value is
automatically determined by the min. and max.
cutting lengths entered by the user(value is
adjustable in professional mode).
(3) Current cutting length
(4) Currently determined degree of maturity. If the
display stops at 50%, the sensor will not detect a
valid maturity.
(5) The current position on the characteristic line in the
working range.
(6) The minimum cutting length specified by the user.
(7) The maximum cutting length specified by the user.
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5
3
7
6
2
4
A
B
C
D
BX500777
4.6.4 General machine setting - direct
cutting system
Set the operating mode to direct cutting system
•
•
•
•
•
= Direct cutting system
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the operating mode. The selection box is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the selection box.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
operating mode of the direct cutting system.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection box.
•
Activating the
key brings up the basic screen.
•
Activating the key
D
C
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500015
brings up the settings load
limit control (option).
• Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 25
Info Centre
4.6.4.1
Info mask game animal protection
If the mode XDisc is adjusted, an information picture
with the correct mowing performance appears
temporarily on the display.
When mowing from "outside to inside", the animals are
slowly forced from the safe boundary area into the
center of the area, which makes the possibility for a
life-saving escape for the animal more difficult or takes
it away.
A remedy for this issue is the mowing method from
"inside to outside" of the area. In doing so, you drive
directly into the center of the parcel without mowing the
boundary area and mow anticlockwise from "inside to
outside". Therefore the animal can leave the field in
compliance with its flight behaviour without any harm.
.
4.6.4.2
•
•
•
•
B
C
D
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the working width. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired working width.
To exit the input field again, press the rotary
potentiometer.
Activating the
•
To open the settings for load limit control, press the
C
D
3
4
5
6
7
8
BM4000266
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key brings up the basic screen.
key.
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 26
2
To set the working width of the direct
cutting system
•
•
A
1
A
B
C
D
BX500026
Info Centre
4.6.4.3
To adjust the lifting gear control
= Lifting gear pressure control; the control
•
sets the pressure on the ground to a constant
value.
•
= Lifting gear position control; the control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
sets the height constant relative to the machine.
•
= Lifting gear distance control (optional,
only in conjunction with distance sensors); the
control sets the height constant relative to the
ground.
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the lifting gear control. The selection box
is highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the selection box.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired lifting gear control.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection box.
•
Activating the
•
To open the settings for load limit control, press the
C
•
D
A
B
C
D
BX500027
key brings up the basic screen.
key.
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
4.6.4.4
Setting the number of blades
After the number of blades has been changed (see
chapter Maintenance - Working with Half the Number of
Blades), the current number of blades must be set.
Setting the number of blades automatically adjusts the
speed of the feed drive roller to the set cutting length of
the new number of blades.
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the number of blades. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired number of blades.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection field.
•
Activating the
•
To open the settings for load limit control, press the
C
•
D
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500028
key brings up the basic screen.
key.
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 27
Info Centre
4.6.5 Customer Data Counter
•
To bring up the Customer counter, activate the
B
•
key under the
softkey.
is displayed green if a
The softkey
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
customer counter is active.
When the customer counter is active, a
dataset will be selected but not yet
incremented.
V
B
A
C
D
BX500169
Customer record (1)
Status display (2)
STOP
Counter stopped
A counter is activated
A counter other than the one shown is activated.
10
Freely usable numeric input field (for the
example to assign several different
cultivated areas to the customer record)
1
Counter (active counters are highlighted in colour)
•
= operating hour counter (h)
•
= drum hours counter (h)
•
= working hours counter (h)
•
= surface counter (ha)
•
= road kilometre counter (km)
•
= fuel consumption (l) (optional)
4
5
A
(3) = additional counter (can be configured via
D key)
D
)
(4) = absolute fuel consumption (can be
deleted via C key)
C
)
(5) = display of currently activated counters
IV - 28
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
B
C
D
BX500047_3
Info Centre
4.6.5.1
Changing a customer record (1) or
creating a new one
A total of 30 customer records can be created. Select
the customer record you want to modify; select a free
customer record to create a new entry with the
and
•
•
•
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
keys.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
desired setting. The entry box is highlighted in
colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer opens an
alphanumeric input field.
You can change the customer record or enter a
new one with the rotary potentiometer. (To accept
the desired alphanumeric value, press the rotary
potentiometer.)
2
1
A
B
C
D
BX500170_1
Selecting the "ESC" symbol (1) and
confirming causes the program to exit
the input field without saving the
entries or changes.
Selecting the "Enter" symbol (2) and
confirming causes the program to
accept and save the entry or change.
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
also takes you one menu level back.
4.6.5.2
•
Switching the counter on or off
Use the
on
5
and
or off
•
Activating the
•
Pressing the
6
STOP
B
keys to switch the counter
.
key brings up the basic screen.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
A
B
C
D
BX850942
4.6.5.3
Activating the moisture value in the
customer data counter
•
Bring up the additional counter by using
•
Activate the moisture measuring with the rotary
potentiometer and confirm the selection with the
D
key.
rotary potentiometer.
The mean moisture value is listed automatically as
the last point on the print-outs of the printer. The
pictogram for the moisture on this print-out is „%~~“
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX850943
IV - 29
Info Centre
4.6.5.4
•
Deleting the customer counter
Pressing the
C
key under the
sofkey
deletes the counters of the selected cultivated
area
10
in the selected customer record (in
the example shown here, the tenth cultivated
area).
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX850942
4.6.5.5
•
Switching to general counters (machine
data counters)
Pressing the
A
key under the
softkey
brings up the "Counters and machine data" menu.
For more information see chapter "Counters and
Machine Data"
You can print out all customer
records or selected ones with the aid
of a printer (option).
For additional Information, please
refer to chapter "Printing Customer
Data"
IV - 30
Info Centre
4.6.6 Silage Fodder Addition
In field mode, the silage fodder addition icon is displayed
in the information section of settings (V) with the current
setting.
Pre-requisite for switching on Automatic mode:
•
•
•
•
Feed drive/front attachment switched on
Main drive switched on
Front attachment lowered
Driving forward
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Status (1)
•
= Automatic mode switched on, silage
A
B
C
D
BX850944
fodder addition active.
= Automatic mode switched on, silage
•
fodder addition inactive.
•
= silage fodder addition is deactivated.
•
= silage fodder addition is always active.
•
= filling level indicator for silage agent
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
addition (optional)
•
Activating the
C
key brings up the silage fodder
addition screen.
Conditions for release not met
•
= lower lifting gear
•
= vehicle moving
•
= Main coupling on
•
= feed drive on
•
= Release switch – road/field
•
= Maintenance release switch
•
= Stop switch for control unit console
•
= stop switch for manual operation
A
B
C
D
BX500149_1
Fault
•
= CU
•
= Joystick
•
= KMC2
•
= KMC3
•
= Metal detection
•
= DIOM
IV - 31
Info Centre
Silage fodder addition (1)
•
= silage fodder addition not active
•
= silage fodder addition always active
•
= silage fodder addition Automatic
1
2
mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Activate/deactivate fill level indicator for silage
fodder addition (optional) (2)
•
= fill level indicator for silage fodder
addition activated
•
A
B
C
D
BX500149_1
= fill level indicator for silage fodder
addition deactivated
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to set the
silage fodder addition setting. The selection box is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the selection box.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired setting.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection box.
•
Activating the
•
Press the
C
key brings up the basic screen.
key on the rotary potentiometer to
open the menu.
4.6.7 Adjusting the Grain Conditioner
Distance
If "Maize header or X-Disc" mode has been set, the
symbol
and the current actual value of the grain
conditioner distance is displayed in the information
section of settings (V).
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the grain conditioner. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
distance.
To exit the input field again, press the rotary
potentiometer.
The currently set target distance is
approached automatically.
Calibrating the grain conditioner
(See chapter on Grain Conditioner Calibration).
IV - 32
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500012_2
Info Centre
4.7 Short overview menu levels
Menu level 1 (settings) and menu level 2 (counters)
1
2
1-1
1-1-1
1-2
1-1-2
1-3
1-1-3
1-4
1-1-4
1-5
1-1-5
1-7
1-7-1
1-1-8
1-8
1-7-2
1-1-9
1-9
1-7-4
1-1-10
1-10
XD
1-7-5
1-1-11
1-1-12
1-1-13
1-1-14
1-1-15
1-1-20
1-1-25
1-1-21
BX850952_1
IV - 33
Info Centre
Menu level 3 (maintenance)
3
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
BX850953
IV - 34
Info Centre
Menu level 4 (service) and menu level 5 (return to basic screen)
4
4-1
4-2
1
2
3
4
4-3
4-4
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-4-3
4-4-8
4-1-1
4-1-15
4-1-2
4-1-16
4-1-3
4-1-17
4-1-4
4-1-18
4-1-5
4-1-19
4-1-6
4-1-20
4-1-7
4-1-21
4-1-8
5
4-1-9
4-1-10
4-1-11
4-1-12
4-1-13
4-1-14
BX850954_1
IV - 35
Info Centre
4.7.1 Bringing up a Menu Level
•
You can bring up a menu level with the
key on
the rotary potentiometer.
The display indicates the menu level.
The menu level is divided into five main menus:
•
= main menu 1 „Settings“
•
= main menu 2 „Counters“
•
= Main menu 3 „Maintenance“
•
= main menu 4 „Service“
•
= Main menu 5 „Basic screen“
•
You can close the menu level that was called with
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500172
on the rotary potentiometer.
4.7.2 Main menu 1 „Settings“
The main menu level is active.
•
Select main menu 1 with the rotary potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The display shows menu level 1 „Settings“.
The main menu, „Settings“, is divided up into these
menus:
•
= Menu 1-1 „Parameters“
•
= Menu 1-2 „Machine setting“
•
= Menu 1-3 „Units“
•
= Menu 1-4 „Diesel engine PowerSplit“ (option)
•
= Menu 1-5 „Language“
•
= Menu 1-7 „Display“
•
= Menu 1-8 „Date/time“
•
= Menu 1-9 "Contractor address"
•
= Menu 1-10 „Joystick-Memory-Keys“
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer takes
you one menu level back.
IV - 36
A
B
C
D
BX500030
Info Centre
4.7.3 Menu 1-1 „Parameters“
The main menu „Settings“ is active.
•
•
Select menu 1-1 „Parameters“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The display indicates the menu level „Parameters“.
The „Parameters“ menu is divided into these
sub-menus:
•
= Menu 1-1-1 „Feed drive“
•
= Menu 1-1-2 „Front attachment“
•
= Menu -1-1-3 „Discharge chute“
•
= Menu 1-1-4 „Grinding“
•
= Menu 1-1-5 „Counterblade“
•
= Menu 1-1-8 „EasyFlow“
•
= Menu 1-1-9 „EasyCOLLECT“
•
XD
= Menu 1-1-11 „Metal detection“
•
= Menu 1-1-12 „Diesel engine“
•
= Menu 1-1-13 „Drive“
•
= Menu 1-1-14 „Autopilot“
•
= Menu 1-1-15 „Work“
•
= Menu 1-1-20 „Autoscan“
•
= Menü 1-1-21 „RockProtect“
•
= Menu 1-1-25 "Moisture measuring"
•
•
B
C
D
BX500031_1
= Menu 1-1-10 „X-DISC“
•
•
A
Pressing the
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500032
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
desired menu.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
parameters of the selected menu to be displayed.
IV - 37
Info Centre
Entering parameters
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select
individual parameters. The input field is highlighted
in light blue.
Only input fields with a light blue
background can be changed.
•
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
The mask for parameter entry appears with the
following displays:
(1) Shows the designation of the selected
parameter.
B
A
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500147_1
(2) Visual display of the possible range of the
parameter value.
(3) Parameter data: (from top to bottom) parameter
number, min. value, max. value, default setting
value, unit.
1
(4) Actual value of the parameter. 99999 means the
corresponding control unit is offline.
•
•
7
4
5
Enter the new setpoint value in the input field (5)
with the rotary potentiometer or keyboard (7).
You can reset to the default setting value in the
input field (6) (non-locking function).
A
B
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
6
3
1
C
D
BX750018
•
To delete the setpoint value, press the
•
To accept the modified value and/or parameter input
mask, press the
•
B
key.
key.
To apply the default setting values, press the
key next to the
•
A
5
softkey.
To jump back to the screen that was previously
displayed, press the
7
key next to the
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
softkey.
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
For additional information on the
individual parameters, please refer to
the parameter list in the appendix
entitled „Parameter list“.
The menu 1-2 "Setting Machine" is
selectable via the basic screen and
described in the section "General
Machine Settings".
IV - 38
A
B
C
D
BX500147
Info Centre
4.7.4 Menu 1-3 "System of Units Setting"
Das Hauptmenü „Einstellungen“ ist aufgerufen.
The main menu "Settings" is active.
• Activate the rotary potentiometer to activate menu
1-3 "System of Units Setting".
The display shows four selection windows. The
measuring unit for different measurement sizes can be
changed here.
The metric or the imperial system of units can be
selected in this menu:
•
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
= metric system of units
A
•
1
B
C
D
BX500033_1
= imperial system of units
Global Settings in the Selection Window (1)
Unit
Measurement size
metric
imperial
Surface
Route
Fuel consumption
Height lifting gear
Working width
ha
km
l
cm
cm
acres
miles
gal
inch
inch
Setting the Cutting Length in the Selection Window
(2)
Setting the display in mm or inch.
Setting the Gap Distance of the Corn Conditioner in
the Selection Window (3)
Setting the display in mm or inch.
Setting the Travelling Speed, the Cruise Control
Speed and the Load Limit Control (4)
Setting the display in km/h or miles/h.
Setting the Units
• Select the desired selection window with the rotary
potentiometer, the input field is highlighted in colour.
• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the selection box.
• You can use the rotary potentiometer to set the
desired measuring unit.
• To exit the selection field, press the rotary
potentiometer.
• The menu level is called by pressing the menu key
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
A
B
C
D
BX500034_1
2
3
4
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX851001
next to the rotary potentiometer.
Example (BX851005):
Basic screen with the displays of measurement sizes
in different systems of units.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX851005_1
IV - 39
Info Centre
4.7.5 Menü 1-4 „PowerSplit“ (option)
Power management with MAN engines (from SW
200814613 on)
The current operating mode of the diesel engine for the
parameters 33515 and 33518 is marked in the basic
screen as follows:
: diesel engine in max. power mode
(parameter is set to 2 = full
performance).
I
1080
: diesel engine in eco mode (parameter
is set to 3 = reduced performance).
TRI PWR:
Diesel engine with large torque
reserves at full performance (only
BiG X 700 Europe).
Use in case of changing and difficult
harvesting conditions.
III
IV
V
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500163_2
For additional information on the
individual parameters, please refer to
the parameter list in the appendix
entitled „Parameter list“.
Automatic switchover between ECO power and X
power.
Automatic switchover between ECO power and X
power.:
: Abrupt switchover when speed is set
: Steady switchover, starts about 100 rpm before
set speed
The switchover back to the ECO mode is always
abrupt when the engine capacity is set, provided the X
power mode has been set by the automatic. In case
the X power mode has been selected manually, the
automatic is only on standby and does not interfere
any longer.
The TRI Power characteristic line is skipped in
automatic mode.
Manuel switching between ECO Power, X Power et
TRI Power
The TRI Power mode cannot be preset and it can be
reached by switching the modes manually.
The manual switching of X Power - TRI Power - ECO
Power and in the circle is only possible if the
conditions for this are fulfilled, i. e. the engine is not
overloaded.
Selection of TRI Power characteristic line via Eco/X
switch (1):
• Order X PWR switch: ECO> TRI >X.
• Order ECO PWR switch: X>TRI>ECO.
• The display in the basic screen is necessary.
IV - 40
1
BX851090
Info Centre
Graphic display of the settings of PowerSplit
(1) Diesel engine speed at which an automatic
switchover from ECO power to X power shall begin
to take place.
(2) Current performance mode
(3) Start setting for X-Disc and maize operation
(4) Start setting for grass operation
(5) Start setting for road operation
(6) Setting for the automatic switchover between
activating/deactivating ECO power and X power and
switchover course.
2
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
3
4
5
A
B
C
D
BX850951_1
Statusanzeige
STOP
: Automatic switchover inactive
: Automatic switchover active
The automatic is only active when the setpoint diesel
engine speed exceeds 1900 rpm.
IV - 41
Info Centre
4.7.6 Menu 1-5 „Language“
The main menu „Settings“ is active.
•
•
Select menu 1- 5„Language“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
1-5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Press the rotary potentiometer.
The display shows the language selection.
Set language
(1)
(2)
= currently set language
= display of the selected language
•
You can select the language you want with the
rotary potentiometer.
•
To confirm the selection, press the rotary
potentiometer.
A
B
C
D
BX500035
1
•
Pressing the
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
The selected language is applied
immediately.
2
A
B
C
D
BX850847
4.7.7 Menu 1-7 „Display“
The main menu „Settings“ is active.
•
Select menu 1-7 „Display“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
1
2
3
4
The "Display" menu is divided into the following:
5
6
•
= Menu 1-7-1 "Contrast/brightness"
7
8
•
= Menu 1-7-2 „Beeper“
•
The display shows menu level 1-7 „Display“.
A
•
= menu 1-7-4 „Direction of Rotation“
•
= Menü 1-7-5 „Settings basic screen
fields “
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 42
B
C
D
BX500037_1
Info Centre
4.7.8 Menu 1-7-1 day/night mode
Menu „display“ is called up.
• Select menu 1-7-1 „Day/night mode“ via the rotary
potentiometer.
• Press rotary potentiometer.
The display shows the settings for day and night.
•
= day
•
= night
A
B
C
•
•
•
•
3
4
5
6
7
8
BX500611_1
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
desired setting. The selection box is highlighted in
colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the selection box.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired function.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection box.
Pressing the
2
D
Adjust day/ night mode
•
1
key on the rotary potentiometer
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
takes you one menu level back.
A
B
C
D
BX500612
IV - 43
Info Centre
4.7.9 Menu 1-7-2 Beeper
The „Display“ menu is active.
•
Select menu 1-7-2 „Beeper“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
1
2
3
4
The display indicates the beeper settings.
5
6
•
= Key pressed
7
8
•
= Alarm
•
= Note
A
B
C
D
BX500038_2
Beeper function
•
= Beeper inactive
•
= Beeper active
•
= Beeper limited by time
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The activation time of the beeper can be set optionally
to
and
.
To set the beeper
A
B
C
D
BX500043_1
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
desired setting. The selection box is highlighted in
colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the selection box.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired function.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection box.
•
To turn on the beeper, press the
7
key.
•
To turn off the beeper, press the
8
key.
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 44
Info Centre
4.7.10 Menu 1-7-4 Direction of Rotation
The „Display“ menu is active.
•
•
Select menu 1-7-4 „Direction of rotation“ with the
rotary potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
The display shows settings for direction of rotation.
•
= Scroll down in the parameter list
•
= Input elements selection down
•
= Scroll down in the menu
A
B
C
• Press the
1
key to set „Anti-clockwise“.
2
key to set „Clockwise“.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500201
Set the direction of rotation
(1) Direction of rotation „Scroll down in the parameter
list“:
• Press the
1
5
4
1
1
2
2
3
4
3
5
6
7
8
(2) Direction of rotation „Input elements selection
down“:
A
•
Press the
3
key to set „Anti-clockwise“.
•
Press the
4
key to set „Clockwise“.
B
C
D
BX500200
(3) Direction of rotation „Scroll down in the menu“:
•
Press the
5
key to set „Anti-clockwise“.
•
Press the
6
key to set „Clockwise“.
(4) Press the softkey
to set all direction of
rotation settings to default values.
(5) Press the softkey
to return to the basic
screen.
The currently set direction of rotation
is represented by the blue arrow
.
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 45
Info Centre
4.7.11 Menü 1-7-5 Settings basic screen
fields
The „Display“ menu is active.
•
Select menu 1-7-5 „Settings basic screen fields“
with the rotary potentiometer
•
Press the rotary potentiometer
The display shows the options of displays
A
B
C
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BX850839
The currently displayed measurement value is
highlighted by a contour (the current
time in this example).
Change display in the basic screen:
• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
desired display,
the input box is highlighted in colour
• Press the rotary potentiometer to confirm the
selected display (in the example: „current
fuel consumption“)
The saved setting (1) is now shown in the basic screen
(in the example: current fuel consumption)
The following displays are selectable in the basic
screen:
A
B
C
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BX850840
Present time/Date
Current fuel consumption
1
Cutting drum speed
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Acreage output
Current fuel consumption
referring to acreage
moisture value of the crop the NIR sensor
has measured
Current fuel consumption with regard to
the crop yield in (only possible in
connection with the yield recording
CropControl) (option)
•
Change into basic screen
•
By pressing the key
B
A
the display will be set
back to factory setting (time).
IV - 46
.
A
B
C
D
BX850841
Info Centre
4.7.11.1 NIR sensor for moisture
measuring
The moisture content of the crop is determined via NIR
sensor.
WARNING! - Stony grounds!
Damage to the sensor discs
• Do not perform moisture measuring
via NIR sensor on stony grounds.
B
A
•
Select the display
C
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX851032
with the rotary
potentiometer, the input field is highlighted in colour.
Confirm the selection by pressing the rotary
potentiometer.
The basic screen shows the actual moisture value (1)
of the crop when the NIR sensor is active.
1
•
1
If the following conditions have been met, then
the NIR sensor is active:
• The main coupling is switched on (refer to chapter 3
"Control Elements")
• The maintenance release switch is switched off
(refer to chapter 3 "Control Elements")
• The feed drive/front attachment release switch is
switched on (refer to chapter 3 "Control Elements").
•
•
•
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX851054
The basic screen displays the status display
"Feed drive /Front Attachment Forward Active".
The setpoint engine speed exceeds 1500 rpm
(constant value, cannot be changed).
The machine duty is greater than 40%.
2
If the following conditions have been met, then the
NIR sensor carries out an automatic calibration:
• If at least 10 sensor operating hours have passed
since the last calibration of the NIR sensor.
• The maintenance release switch is switched on
(refer to chapter 3 "Control Elements").
• The setpoint engine speed is 800 rpm or higher
(constant value, cannot be changed).
The calibration is interrupted if the condition "NIR
sensor active" is fulfilled again.
The "---" display (2) appears in the basic screen after
10 seconds if the NIR sensor is defective or if a
measurement value is outside the measuring range.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX851055
3
The "OFF" display (3) appears in the basic screen if
the sensor is not active (one or more conditions for the
operating state "active" are not met).
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX851056
IV - 47
Info Centre
4.7.12 Menu 1-6 „Date/time“
The main menu „Settings“ is active.
•
Select menu 1-8 „Date/time“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
The display shows the date and the time.
A
B
C
•
•
•
•
3
4
5
6
7
8
BX500044_1
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
desired setting. The entry box is highlighted in
colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
Set the desired date/time with the rotary
potentiometer.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection field.
Pressing the
2
D
To set date/time
•
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
A
B
C
D
BX500045
IV - 48
Info Centre
4.7.13
Menu 1-9 „Contractor address“
The main menu "Settings" is active.
•
Select menu 1-9 "Contractor" with the rotary
potentiometer.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500659
•
Press the rotary potentiometer to call the
<Contractor Information> mask.
A maximum of 6x30 characters can be
entered. The information is used each
time a print job is sent to the CAN
printer (option). If a line contains no
characters (including no spaces), that
line will not be considered for printing
(option).
A
•
•
•
•
B
C
Pressing the key
3
4
5
6
7
8
BX500660
1
on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
2
D
Pressing the rotary potentiometer opens an
alphanumeric input field (1).
Turn the rotary potentiometer to select a letter
(yellow mark).
Press the rotary potentiometer to select the letter.
Selecting the "Enter" symbol (2) and confirming
causes the program to accept and save the entry or
change.
Selecting the "ESC" symbol (3) and
confirming causes the program to exit
the input field without saving the
entries or changes.
•
1
A
B
C
D
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
BX500661
IV - 49
Info Centre
4.7.14
Menu 1-10 "Joystick-MemoryKeys"
The main menu "settings" is active.
"
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
menu 1-10 "Joystick-Memory-Keys".
"
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select M1
or M2.The selection box is highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the selection box.
Set the required function with the rotary
potentiometer.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection box.
"
"
"
"
Activating the key
B
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX850994
saves the settings.
If the mask has not been actuated with
the key "
B
", the set functions will be
locked and symbolized via a "lock"
symbol in the fields M1/M2.
"
Pressing the key
on the rotary potentiometer
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
takes you one menu level back.
A
B
C
D
BX850991
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX850992
IV - 50
Info Centre
4.8
•
•
•
Main Menu 2 „Counters“
You can bring up a menu level with the
key on
the rotary potentiometer.
Select main menu 2 „Counter“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The display shows various counters.
Counter level(sets)
•
= total bale counter (cannot be deleted)
•
= counter level 1 (can be deleted)
•
= counter level 2 (can be deleted)
•
= counter level 3 (can be deleted)
4.8.1
A
B
C
D
BX500046
Machine Data Counter
(Active counters are highlighted in colour)
•
= Operating hours counter
•
= Drum hours counter
•
= Working hours counter
•
3
4
5
6
7
8
0 h 0 min
0.0
ha
0.0
km
42 . 00
0.0
L
L/h
= Odometer (both street and
4
field mode) (km)
•
2
0 h 0 min
= Surface counter
•
1
0 h 0 min
A
= Fuel consumption meter
B
3
C
D
BX500048_3
(3)= absolute fuel consumption (can be deleted
with
C
key)
(4)= current average consumption (l/h)
(5) = Display of currently activated counters
To set the counter level
•
To change counter level, activate the
2
or
1
key for
.
It is also possible to make a setting with the rotary
potentiometer:
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the counter level. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the selection box.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired counter level.
To exit the selection field, press the rotary
potentiometer.
IV - 51
Info Centre
4.8.2
•
Deleting the Machine Data Counters
Pressing the
C
key under the
softkey
deletes all counters in a set. (Only the counters of
sets 1 to 3 can be deleted.)
•
Pressing the
Pressing the
B
key under the
A
•
Switching to Customer Data
Counters
Pressing the
A
key under the
softkey brings
up the „Customer data counter“ menu.
For more information, see chapter „Customer Data
Counters“
IV - 52
3
4
5
6
7
8
softkey
brings up the basic screen.
4.8.3
2
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
•
1
B
C
D
BX500048_1
Info Centre
4.9 Main Menu 3 „Maintenance“
The main menu level is active.
•
Select main menu 1 with the rotary potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The display shows menu level 3 „Maintenance“.
The main menu „Maintenance“ is divided up into six
menus:
•
= Menu 3-1 "Central lubrication/cleaning
the engine compartment"
•
= Menu 3-2 „Grinding / counterblade“
•
= Menu 3-3 „Calibration of pendulum
A
B
C
D
BX500075_1
frame“
•
= Menu 3-4 „Calibration of Autopilot“
•
= Menu 3-5 „Calibration of upper
discharge chute“
•
= Menu 3-6 „Calibration of cracker“
•
= Calibration of feed drive/front
attachment"
•
= Menu 3-7 „Calibration of front
attachment“
•
= Menu 3-8 „Calibration of travel path“
•
= Menü 3-9 „RockProtect“ (optional)
•
= Menu 3-10 "Calibration of main
coupling"
•
= Menu 3-11 „Maintanance additional
axis“ (option)
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
When the maintenance switch in the
basic screen is activated, the
„Maintenance“ main menu appears
automatically.
IV - 53
Info Centre
4.9.1 Menu 3-1 "Central lubrication/
cleaning of the engine
compartment"
The main menu "Maintenance" is active.
•
•
Select menu 3-1 "Central lubrication/cleaning the
engine compartment" with the rotary potentiometer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Press the rotary potentiometer.
The display shows the „Clean central lubrication/engine
compartment“ mask.
•
Press the
•
lubrication“ function.
Initiate the function "feed drive cleaning" by
5
A
B
C
D
BX500613
key to initiate the „Intermediate
activating the key
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
(standard).
A
B
C
D
BX500202
Conditions for release not met
•
= Release switch – road/field
•
= Travelling gear release switch
•
= Diesel engine speed
•
= Release switch – feed drive/front
attachment
•
= Maintenance release switch
•
= Stop switch for control unit console
•
= Stop switch for manual operation
Malfunction
•
= CU
•
= Manual operation
•
= Joystick
•
= KMC2
•
= KMC3
IV - 54
Info Centre
4.9.2 Menu 3-2 „Grinding / Counterblade“
The main menu „Maintenance“ is active.
•
Select menu 3-2 „Grinding / counterblade“ with the
rotary potentiometer.
1
2
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
3
4
5
6
7
8
Warning notices appear pointing out
special dangers associated with
grinding the cutting blade (refer to the
section on Operation – grinding the
cutting blade).
A
•
Actuating the
7
B
C
D
key takes you to a parameter
BX500615
input box for the grinding of the counterblade.
Conditions for release not met
•
= Release switch – road/field
•
= Travelling gear release switch
•
= Diesel engine speed
•
= Release switch – feed drive/front
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
attachment
•
= Maintenance release switch
•
= Stop switch for control unit console
•
= Stop switch for manual operation
A
B
C
D
BX851002
Malfunction
•
= CU
•
= Manual operation
•
= Joystick
•
= KMC2
•
= KMC3
IV - 55
Info Centre
Status Displays Grinding Operation
Status of the grinding flap (1)
•
= Grinding flap is closed
•
= Grinding flap is open
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
Status of the grinding stone (2)
•
= Grinding stone is on the left
•
= Grinding stone is in the centre
•
= Grinding stone is on the right
•
= Grinding stone moves to the left
2
3
A
B
C
D
BX851003
The display with arrow is available in
different positions, which show the
direction of movement of the grinding
stone.
•
= Position of grinding stone unknown;
grinding stone sensors are both alive/sensor is
defective - FAULT
Status of grinding operation (3)
•
1. number = current grinding cycle, 2nd
number = number of target grinding cycles
One grinding cycle corresponds to a double stroke of
the grinding stone (1 x left/1 x right).(Depending on the
number of adjusters).
Status of the Remaining Grinding Cycles up to the
Grinding Stone Readjustment (4)
• (4) = Couter "Remaining grinding cycles up to the
grinding stone readjustment"; since the counter has
been loaded to the maximum number (5) of grinding
cycles by activating
1
5
4
If the number of the remaining
grinding cycles falls below 10% of the
maximum number (5) of the grinding
cycles, then the display is shown in
red.
•
To set the counter (4) "Remaining grinding cycles
up to grinding stone readjustment" to the maximum
number of grinding cycles, press
IV - 56
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key.
1
key.
A
B
C
D
BX851004
Info Centre
Acknowledging the error message
•
Using the
key under softkey
A
4
, hide the
message.
•
Activate the
1
key to set counter „Total of all
grinding cycles“ (4) to zero. Message (6) appears in
the display.
•
Using the
A
key under softkey
Using the
B
key under softkey
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
, hide the
message.
•
1
6
, cancel the
process.
Readjust the grinding stone or replace
it. (See Chapter „Readjusting or
Replacing the Grinding Stone“)
A
B
C
D
BX500175_1
IV - 57
Info Centre
Counterblade – status of the counterblade motors
(data as seen in direction of travel)
Visual display if the counterblade will be moved
manually.
•
= Approach counterblade on the right
active
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
= Approach counterblade on the right
inactive
•
= Moving away from counterblade on the
right active
•
= Moving away from counterblade on the
right inactive
•
= Counterblade right broken cable
•
= Counterblade right short circuit
•
= Approach counterblade on the left
A
B
C
D
BX500173_1
active
= Approach counterblade on the left
•
inactive
•
= Moving away from counterblade on the
left active
= Moving away from counterblade on the
•
left inactive
•
= Counterblade left broken cable
•
= Counterblade left short circuit
Adjusting the number of grinding cycles
(Factory setting 20)
• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
desired setting. The entry box is highlighted in
colour.
• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
• You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired number.
• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection field.
Start/stop grinding operation
Pressing the
8
key starts or stops grinding
operation.
•
= Grinding operation not possible.
•
= Start grinding operation.
•
= Stop grinding operation.
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
•
Pressing the
7
key takes you to a parameter
input box for counterblade adjustment.
IV - 58
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500173_1
Info Centre
4.9.3 Menu 3-3 „Calibration of Pendulum
Frame and Absolute Lifting Gear
Height“
During the calibration, components
may move around, in particular the
lifting gear and pendulum frame - risk
of injury!
1
2
3
4
The pendulum frame only needs to be
calibrated after work on the pendulum
frame or after replacement of the
electronic system.
Before calibrating the pendulum
frame, adjust the lifting gear (see
chapter „Adjusting the lifting gear“)
5
6
7
8
A
B
C
D
BX500053
The main menu „Maintenance“ is active.
•
Select menu 3-3 „Calibration of pendulum frame“
with the rotary potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
1
2
1
The „Calibration of pendulum frame and absolute lifting
gear height“ menu appears.
Conditions for release not met
•
= Release switch – road/field
•
= Seat switch
•
= Diesel engine speed
•
= Release switch – feed drive/front
BX500176
attachment
•
= Maintenance release switch
•
= Stop switch for control unit console
•
= Stop switch for manual operation
Malfunction
•
= CU
•
= Joystick
•
= KMC2
•
= KMC3
IV - 59
Info Centre
Mask description display „Calibration
pendulum frame/lifting unit heights“
•
The current lifting height is indicated as a % with
the symbol
•
.
The currently saved absolute height of the lifting
gear at 80 % is indicated by the symbol
•
.
The currently saved absolute height of the lifting
gear at 20 % is indicated by the symbol
.
Calibration process for absolute lifting gear
height
Calibration of the absolute lifting gear height is required
so that the lifting gear height can be specified in
absolute terms in the Info Centre.
The calibration values are stored separately for grass
pick-up and maize header.
Prerequisites
•
•
•
•
•
Lifting gear adjusted (see chapter „Adjusting the
lifting gear“).
Release switch field mode ON
Travelling gear release switch off.
Front attachment unit connected.
Release switch field mode ON
The lifting unit height must be
calibrated if the header has been
changed.
•
•
Adjust the connected front attachment to match
grass pick-up or maize header X-Disc mode as
appropriate.
The front attachment (with the maize header
folded out) must be standing on the ground with a
solid subsurface and are aligned horizontally.
IV - 60
A
B
C
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BX850987
Info Centre
Measuring the lifting height
•
For pick-up (1), measure the distance „a“ between
ground and the lowest point of a spring tine.
1
a
WHBBX03184
•
In case of EasyCollect maize header (1), measure
the distance (a) between ground and cutter blade.
1
a
WHBBX03182
•
In case of XDisc (1), measure distance „a“
between ground
a
1
WHBBX03183
IV - 61
Info Centre
Calibrate the upper lifting gear height
•
Press „Lift lifting unit“ (1) key on the driving lever
until a value of „80%“ is displayed next to symbol
.
•
With the rotary potentiometer, select the setting
„Save the absolute height of lifting gear at 80
•
%“. The input field is highlighted in the colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
1
•
•
BX851082
Set the measured distance „a“ (refer to „Measure
lifting height“) by using the rotary potentiometer.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection field.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
To calibrate the lower lifting gear height
•
Press „Lower lifting unit“ (1) key on the driving
lever until a value of „20%“ is displayed next to
the symbol
•
.
With the rotary potentiometer, select the setting
„Save the absolute height of lifting gear at 20
•
•
%“. The input field is highlighted in the colour.
Set the measured distance „a“ (refer to „Measure
lifting height“) by using the rotary potentiometer.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
The calibration process for „absolute lifting gear
height“ is complete.
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 62
A
B
C
D
BX500055_1
Info Centre
4.9.4 Menu 3-4 „Calibration of Autopilot“
• There is danger of injury during
calibration due to the spontaneous
movements of mechanical parts (for
example the steering axle). No
persons may remain in the danger
zone of the machine.
Before using autopilot for the first
time, the autopilot must be calibrated
to ensure problem-free operation.
Pre-requisite:
• EasyCollect maize header with row tracer attached.
• EasyCollect maize header with flexible row sensor
(1) can only be used with software 20 083 052 0
(link for download: http://www.krone.de/software).
Perform a software update for all control units of the
machine, if necessary.
The complete software version 20 083 052 0
contains among other things the following software
versions of the individual control units:
KMC2 : 150200102-27
KMC3: 150200103-27
Terminal: 150200104-28
Autopilot: 150200029-17 or higher.
1
BX851050
• The main menu "Maintenance" is called.
IV - 63
Info Centre
When the autopilot is calibrated, the
work steps must be performed in the
specified order.
•
Start the diesel engine and turn on release switches
<Field>, <Travelling gear>, and <Autopilot>.
If one of these conditions is not
fulfilled, the right side of the screen
will display a corresponding message.
Release conditions are highlighted in
yellow; errors are highlighted in red.
Conditions for release not met
•
= Release switch – road/field
•
= Travelling gear release switch
•
= Seat switch
•
= Release switch autopilot
•
= Maintenance release switch
•
= Stop switch for control unit console
•
= Stop switch for manual operation
A
C
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500058
Malfunction
•
= CU
•
= Joystick
•
= Autopilot
•
= KMC3
IV - 64
B
1
Info Centre
4.9.4.1
•
•
Calling up the calibration screen
on the terminal
Select menu 3-4 „Calibration of Autopilot“ with the
rotary potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
It is displayed the picture "Calibration of Autopilot"
The calibrated values are checked, if
there possible. If a value out of range, it
is displayed with an exclamation mark
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
by the calibrated value. The value
can't be saved.
B
A
C
D
BX500057
Display with outside tip
Display with central tip
13
7
8
4
1
3
7
2
8
4
5
6
1
13
3
4
5
14
A
7
B
C
3
8
D
11
9
10
6
4
5
6
7
8
12
14
A
B
C
D
BX500617
Pos.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
3
2
11
12
10
2
5
6
1
2
9
1
BX500660
Meaning
Saved value, maximum steering angle, left
Saved value, straight-ahead driving
Saved value, maximum steering angle, right
Saved value, minimum row tracer, left
Saved value, minimum row tracer, right
Actual value, steering angle sensor
Actual value, row tracer, left
Actual value, row tracer, right
Setpoint value, voltage/pulse duty factor at a steering angle of 0.01%, left
Saved value, minimum current steering angle, left
Setpoint value, voltage/pulse duty factor at a steering angle of 0.01%, right
Saved value, minimum current steering angle, right
Actual value, engine speed
Automatically calibration the minimum current from the valve steering left / right
IV - 65
Info Centre
4.9.4.2
Calibrating the steering angle
sensor
The actual value of the steering angle
sensor should be about 400 +/- 10 when
driving straight ahead.
1.
•
•
•
•
•
Calibrating steering angle - straight-ahead
driving
Move the steering axle to the centre position (move it
until the steering is set to straight-ahead driving).
•
•
•
<saved value, straight-ahead driving>. The input field
is highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump
to the input field.
To save the current actual value of the steering angle
sensor and exit the input field, press the rotary
potentiometer again.
If the actual value is lower than 220, the KRONE
customer service must be contacted.
•
•
•
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
B
C
D
BX500661_2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Use the rotary potentiometer to select
<saved value, maximum steering angle, left>. The
input field is highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
To save the current actual value of the steering
angle sensor and exit the input field, press the
rotary potentiometer again.
The actual value or the saved value must not be
less than 220. If it is, readjust the sensor.
3. Calibrating the steering angle - right max.
• Move the steering axle to the max. right position
(move it until the steering has gone as far as it
can).
•
2
Use the rotary potentiometer to select
2. Calibrate steering angle left max.
• Move the steering angle to the max. left position
(move it to the left until the steering angle has gone
as far as it can).
•
1
Use the rotary potentiometer to select
<saved value, maximum steering angle, right>. The
input field is highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
To save the current actual value of the steering
angle sensor and exit the input field, press the
rotary potentiometer again.
If the actual value is greater than 630, the KRONE
customer service must be contacted.
IV - 66
A
B
C
D
BX500058
Info Centre
4.9.4.3 Selection of row sensor
The row tracer in the central tip or in the
outside tips can be selected.
•
Select parameter 34016 "Autopilot row sensor in
central tip" in autopilot group in the "Parameter"
mask.
0 = outside tip, 1 = central tip.
4.9.4.4
•
Calibrating row tracer with steel
bracket (for the two-part
EasyCollect)
In menu 1-1-14, set parameter 26025 in the
autopilot group "Flexible row sensor installed" to 0.
The two row tracers right/left must be
calibrated together.
1.
Calibrating row sensor outside tip left / central
tip right
The row sensor (1) "Outside tip left/
central tip right" must be in basic
position and may not be actuated.
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting
•
•
•
•
or
for the „Left row
tracer“. The input field is highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
To save the current actual value of the current
actual value of the left row tracer and exit the input
field, press the rotary potentiometer.
The actual value must be in the range of 250 ±50. If
necessary, readjust the sensor.
When the row tracer has been moved to the limit
obstruction, the sensor value must have a
difference of 300 - 320.
1
WHBBX0302
When activating the "Outside tip left/
central tip right" row sensor, the sensor
value is increased.
IV - 67
Info Centre
2.
Calibrating row sensor outside tip right /
central tip left
The row sensor (1) "Outside tip right/
central tip left" must be in basic position
and may not be actuated.
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting
•
•
•
•
or
for the „Right row
tracer“. The input field is highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
To save the current actual value of the current
actual value of the right row tracer and exit the input
field, press the rotary potentiometer.
The actual value must be in the range of 590 ±50. If
necessary, readjust the sensor.
When the row tracer has been moved to the limit
obstruction, the sensor value must have a
difference of 300 - 320.
1
EC100630
When activating the "Outside tip right/
central tip left" row sensor, the sensor
value is reduced.
4.9.4.5 Calibrating flexible row tracer
(for the three-part EasyCollect)
Prerequisites:
• The machine must be on a level surface.
• The row sensors can swing without abuting against
an obstacle.
Calibration:
• In menu 1-1-14, set the parameter 26025 in the
autopilot group "Flexible row sensor installed" to 1.
• Recalibrate the value for the idle state of the row
sensor (refer to points 1 and 2 in chapter
"Calibrating Row Sensor with Steel Bracket").
The following approximate values are determined when
calibrating the flexible row sensor (1) with sensor in
zero position (button not activated):
New row tracer
Sensor „Row registration B66“: 50 +/- 10
Used row tracer
Sensor „Row registration B66“: 40 – 120
For control:
The following approximate values are determined
when calibrating the flexible row sensor with sensor
in maximum position:
Sensor "Row registration right B66": 450 +/- 10
Sensor "Row registration left B66": 450 +/- 10
IV - 68
1
BX851050
After replacing the sensor as well as
after a worked surface of approx. 100
ha, the autopilot must be calibrated
again.
Info Centre
4.9.4.6
Calibrating of the valves steering left/right (manually)
Calibration with outside tip
Prerequisite
•
1.
13
Move the steering axle to the centre position (move
it until the steering is set to straight-ahead driving).
7
8
4
Minimum current for the valve, steering to the
left (manually)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5
6
1
1
3
2
•
<Current value valve right> (9) . The
•
•
•
9
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select
input field is highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
With the rotary potentiometer, increase the current
setpoint value (in increments of 0.01%) of the valve
until the steering just starts to move.
Then with the potentiometer, decrease the setpoint
value (in increments of 0.01%), until the steering
had just stopped moving.
To accept the setting as a calibrated value, press
the rotary potentiometer.
11
12
10
14
A
B
C
D
BX500617
Calibration with centre tip
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The saved minimum current value for the left valve
is updated.
•
Activating the
11
9
key under the rotary
potentiometer cancels the process.
2.
Minimum current for the valve, steering to the
right (manually)
A
B
C
D
BX500654
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select
<Current value valve right> (11) . The
•
•
•
input field is highlighted in colour.
Durch Drücken des Drehpotis in das Eingabefeld
springen.
Mit dem Drehpoti den aktuellen Sollwert (in 0,01%)
des Ventiles vergrößern, bis die Lenkung sich
gerade bewegt.
Mit dem Drehpoti dann den Sollwert (in 0,01%)
verringern, bis die Lenkung sich nicht mehr bewegt.
To accept the setting as a calibrated value, press
the rotary potentiometer.
The saved minimum current value for the right valve
is updated.
•
Activating the
key under the rotary
potentiometer cancels the process.
IV - 69
Info Centre
4.9.4.7
Automatic calibration of steering
valves left / right
Risk of injury!
The steering axle moves
automatically while the steering
valves are being calibrated. No one
is permitted in the danger zone!
Beginning with Terminal software
version 150 200 104 - 08, automatic
calibration of minimum valve currents
left/right is possible.
Correct calibration of the steering angle
sensor is required to start automatic
calibration.
Start the automatic calibration process with the
A
key. A new window appears.
1
2
3
4
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500655
Item
1
2
3
4
Meaning
Current PWM pulse duty cycle. Voltage expressed as a %; the relevant coil is
controlled.
Current is presently flowing through the relevant coil
Current value of steering angle sensor B64
Status of the calibration:
Valve Y39 "Steering left" is calibrated.
Valve Y40 "Steering right" is calibrated.
Calibration successful and values saved.
Calibration stopped
5
IV - 70
•
If an error occurs, the corresponding error number appears.
Info Centre
Then the valves are immediately controlled
automatically. The steering axle moves accordingly.
•
The process can be interrupted at any time with the
B
•
key.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
When calibration has stopped, you can switch back
to the previous view with the
B
5
key.
The automatic calibration process may last several
minutes. If minimum currents were successfully
determined during automatic calibration, this is
indicated by a diskette icon that appears for about 3
seconds.
If an error occurs during calibration, the
calibration process is interrupted and
the corresponding error (5) appears.
Error
number
1
2
3
Icon
Meaning
The value of steering angle sensor B64 is
less that the calibrated value "Steering full
left"
The value of steering angle sensor B64 is
greater that the calibrated value "Steering
full right"
Valve Y39 "Steering left" is controlled. The
value of steering angle sensor B64 should
therefore also become smaller. However the
sensor value has become greater.
A
•
Recalibrate steering angle sensor B64 left,
centre and right.
•
Exchange valves Y39 and Y40 between
themselves. Activation is to the left, but
steering turns to the right.
Parameter 26027 "Valves reversed" is set
incorrectly.
Steering angle sensor B64 is mounted
incorrectly
Wrong sensor as steering angle sensor B64.
•
•
•
•
•
5
Valve Y39 "Steering left" was activated, but
no change was noted on steering angle
sensor B64.
D
Cause / remedy
• Recalibrate steering angle sensor B64 left,
centre and right.
•
"Steering right" valve is activated. The
value of steering angle sensor B64 should
therefore also become greater. However,
the sensor value has become smaller.
C
BX500656
•
4
B
•
•
•
•
•
Valves reversed. Activation is to the right,
but steering turns to the left.
Parameter 26027 "Valves reversed" is set
incorrectly.
Sensor on the steering axle is mounted
incorrectly
Wrong sensor on the steering axle
The minimum current that was previously
determined automatically is not correct Ò
repeat calibration.
Steering angle sensor B64 defective
Steering angle sensor B64 or linkage on
steering angle sensor B64 mounted
incorrectly.
Hydraulics defective
Hydraulic valve Y39 "Steering left"
defective
IV - 71
Info Centre
Error
number
6
Icon
Meaning
Valve Y40 "Steering right" was activated,
but no change was noted on steering
angle sensor B64.
Cause / remedy
• The minimum current that was previously
determined automatically is not correct Ò
repeat calibration.
• Steering angle sensor B64 defective
• Steering angle sensor B64 or linkage on
steering angle sensor B64 mounted
incorrectly.
• Hydraulics defective
• Hydraulic valve Y40 "Steering right"
defective
• Broken cable to valve Y39 "Steering left"
• Valve coil Y39 defective
• Autopilot control defective
7 and 9
Broken cable Y39 valve Steering Left
8 and 10
Broken cable Y40 valve Steering Right.
•
•
Broken cable to valve Y40 "Steering right"
Valve coil Y40 defective
11
Pressure was detected on pressure sensor
B63 "Pressure steering".
•
•
•
•
•
Autopilot control defective
Steering intervention on steering wheel
Pressure sensor B63 defective
Autopilot control defective
Hydraulics defective
4.9.4.8
Calibrating the Turning Circle of
the Machine
In the „Calibration of turning circle“ mask, the
measured values for the middle turning circle, left (1)
and right (2), can be entered and saved.
Determining turning circle left:
• Drive the machine onto a fastened surface and
adjust maximum steering stop left.
• Mark a point on the ground on the outer edge of
the front right tyre (1).
• Drive a semicircle with low speed and maximum
steering stop.
• Measure the distance (3) between outer edge of
front left tyre (2) and the previously marked point
(1).
1
B
C
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX851020
2
3
WHBBX03770
IV - 72
2
2
1
A
1
Info Centre
Determining turning circle right:
• Drive the machine onto a fastened surface and set
it to maximum steering stop right.
• Mark a point on the ground on the outer edge of
the front left tyre (1).
• Drive a semicircle with low speed and maximum
steering stop.
• Measure the distance (3) between outer edge of
the front right tyre (2) and the previously marked
point (1).
1
2
3
WHBBX03837
Calibrating turning circle:
• Select page 3 „Calibration of turning circle“ in
menu 3-4.
•
•
•
•
Select the input window
for <Turning
circle left> (1) or <Turning circle right> (2) with
the rotary potentiometer, the input field is
highlighted in colour.
Press the rotary potentiometer to jump to the input
field.
Enter the values (in mm) for the turning circle left
and right into the appropriate input window (1) or
(2).
Press the rotary potentiometer to save the current
turning circles right and left and to leave the input
field.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
1
A
1
B
C
D
BX851020
IV - 73
Info Centre
4.9.5 Menu 3-5 „Calibration of upper
discharge chute“
The calibration must be performed to determine the
maximum final position left/right.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The spout must always be calibrated when
•
•
•
•
a new spout has been mounted.
the controlled final position has not been reached.
the control unit KMC2 has been replaced.
work has been performed on the drive train of the
spout (gearbox, slewing ring, …).
A
B
C
D
BX500620
During the calibration, components
may move around, in particular the
lifting gear and upper discharge
chute - risk of injury!
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Prerequisite
•
The upper discharge chute must be raised.
The main menu „Maintenance“ is active.
•
Select menu 3-5 „Calibration of upper discharge
chute“ with the rotary potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
A
B
C
D
BX500066
„Calibration of upper discharge chute“ appears.
Conditions for release not met
•
= Release switch – road/field
•
= Travelling gear release switch
•
= Seat switch
•
= Upper discharge chute not up
•
= Maintenance release switch
•
= Stop switch for control unit console
•
= Stop switch for manual operation
•
Position „spout bottom“ is not alive
Malfunction
•
= CU
•
= Joystick
•
= KMC2
IV - 74
Info Centre
Upper discharge chute
•
= Upper discharge chute up
•
= Upper discharge chute down
•
= Position of upper discharge chute
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
sensor, bottom - broken cable
•
= Position of upper discharge chute
sensor, bottom - short circuit
•
= Position of upper discharge chute
unknown, lower sensor position may be defective
A
B
C
D
BX500067
•
= Upper discharge chute position left
•
= Upper discharge chute position centre
•
= Upper discharge chute position right
•
= Upper discharge chute position
unknown, sensor position centre or defective
•
The
symbol indicates the current number of
pulses for the current side, while the
symbol
indicates the momentary current of the upper
discharge chute valve for the current direction of
rotation.
•
The
symbol indicates the saved
number of max. pulses for left.
•
The
symbol indicates the saved
number of max. pulses for right.
Data requiring calibration
The maximum number of pulses must be determined
for left and right.
The individual calibration processes
are interrupted by manually operating
the upper discharge chute with the key
on the multi-function lever and when
the driver leaves the driver’s seat!
IV - 75
Info Centre
The minimum currents are calibrated automatically.
After every restart of the machine and the first time after having mirrored the spout, the currents are
determined again. Therefore it is recommended to perform the first mirroring process when the machine
is warm and at a standstill.
Calibrating the maximum number of pulses to the right
•
•
Move the upper discharge chute all the way to the
right manually with the keys on the multi-function
lever.
The upper discharge chute stops when the
maximum number of pulses for the side in question
has been reached.
If the upper discharge chute is not reached at the stop,
press the
D
key to continue turning.
Turning is performed at minimum current.
Softkey display:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
= Upper discharge chute right turning active
= Upper discharge chute right turning inactive
= Upper discharge chute right turning error
•
If the discharge chute is at the stop, turn the
A
discharge chute back somewhat with the
B
B
C
D
key
BX500067
so that the discharge chute is not constantly
moving up against the mechanical stop.
• To start calibration, activate the
softkey
C
key under
= „Apply max. number of
pulses“. The display on the softkey switches to
= „Calibration process running“ and
=
„Calibration process successfully completed“.
Calibrating the maximum number of pulses to the
left
• Move the upper discharge chute all the way to the
left manually with the keys on the multi-function
lever.
The upper discharge chute stops when the
maximum number of pulses for the side in question
has been reached.
• If the upper discharge chute is not reached at the stop,
press the
B
key to continue turning.
A
B
C
= Upper discharge chute left turning active
softkey
4
5
6
7
8
A
= „Apply max. number of
= „Calibration process running“ and
If the discharge chute is at the stop, turn the
D
so that the discharge chute is not constantly
moving up against the mechanical stop.
key under
pulses“. The display on the softkey switches to
= Upper discharge chute left turning error
IV - 76
3
D
• To start calibration, activate the
= Upper discharge chute left turning inactive
discharge chute back somewhat with the
2
BX500067
Turning is performed at minimum current.
Softkey display:
•
1
=
„Calibration process successfully completed“.
key
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
Info Centre
4.9.6 Menu 3-6 „Calibration of grain
conditioner“
The main menu „Maintenance“ is active.
•
•
Select menu 3-6 „Calibration of grain conditioner“
with the rotary potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
„Calibration of grain conditioner“ appears.
Conditions for release not met
A
•
= Release switch – road/field
•
= Travelling gear release switch
•
= Seat switch
•
= Maintenance release switch
•
= Stop switch for control unit console
•
= Stop switch for manual operation
B
C
D
BX500621
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Malfunction
•
= CU
•
= Joystick
•
= KMC2
•
= KMC3
A
B
C
D
BX500069
IV - 77
Info Centre
Calibrating the grain conditioner
1
The grain conditioner should only be calibrated when
the grain conditioner is being installed or if the actual
value of the grain conditioner distance is significantly
different than the setpoint value.
3
To ensure exact calibration, it is important to determine
the exact distance between the two rollers (1, 2) of the
grain conditioner with a sensor gauge (3).
2
BX200440
The current power consumption of the grain conditioner
is indicated by the symbol
. It is required for
diagnostic purposes by the Krone service technicians.
•
•
•
•
Measure the grain conditioner distance on the
machine (actual value).
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the „Distance“. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump
to the input field.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to set the
distance to the measured actual value
.
A
•
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to exit
the input field.
•
The display on the softkey switches to
„Calibration process running“ and
=
= „Calibration
process successfully completed“.
•
Press the
3
or
4
key to decrease or increase or
reduce the grain conditioner distance.
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 78
10.0
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500070_1
Info Centre
4.9.7 Menu 3-7 „Calibration of Feed Drive/Front Attachment“
The main menu „Maintenance“ is active.
•
•
Select menu 3-7 „Calibration of feed drive/front
attachment“ with the rotary potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
„Calibration of feed drive/front attachment“ appears.
Display of Symbol (1):
= Central lubrication active (green)
A
B
C
D
BX500622
= Error in central lubrication (red)
= Central lubrication inactive (yellow)
Conditions for release not met
•
= Release switch – road/field
•
= Travelling gear release switch
•
= Seat switch
•
= Diesel engine speed
•
= Release switch – feed drive/front
attachment
•
= Maintenance release switch
•
= Stop switch for control unit console
•
= Stop switch for manual operation
1
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500071_1
Malfunction
•
= CU
•
= Joystick
•
= KMC2
•
= KMC3
IV - 79
Info Centre
Calibrating the front attachment
The lifting gear must be in working
position (not lifted) for calibrating the
front attachment.
For calibration of the front attachment
the main coupling must always be
switched in.
The front attachment should be calibrated only, when
the actual speed massively deviated from the setpoint
speed (by technician or after replacement of the job
computer).
After the front attachment is calibrated, the feed drive
should also be calibrated.
1
278
567
451
0
Prerequisites
•
•
•
Travelling gear release switch off
Release switch for feed drive/front attachment on
Release switch road/field ON
The front attachment must be stopped.
The engine speed must be 1950 rpm.
You can increase the engine speed to
1950 rpm with the
2
key.
Depending on the type of diesel
engine, the setpoint speed may
deviate during calibration.
• To start calibration for the front attachment, activate
the
C
key under softkey
.
The Y7 valve „Front attachment forward“ is activated.
The front attachment should start to turn after a brief
time.
The calibration process lasts up to 120 seconds. If the
necessary data cannot be determined during this time,
the calibration process is interrupted.
•
Use the
or
D
key under the softkey to abort
the calibration.
•
The progress display after the icon for the front
attachment
indicates the status:
= Calibration has been stopped
= Calibration is running
= Calibration was successful
= Calibration was not successful
•
The
symbol is used to indicate the present
current of valve Y7 „Front attachment forward“ in
mA.
•
The
symbol is used to indicate the current
speed of the front attachment.
IV - 80
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
D
BX500072_1
Info Centre
•
The speeds are indicated for support values 1 and 2
of the calibration:
1
Speed (support value) 1:
= Calibration 1 has been stopped
278
567
451
0
= Calibration 1 is running
= Calibration 1 was successful
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
= Calibration 1 was not successful
Speed (support value) 2:
= Calibration 2 has been stopped
A
B
C
D
BX500072_1
= Calibration 2 is running
= Calibration 2 was successful
= Calibration 2 was not successful
Display stopped; current power consumption and
engine speed are at 0.
The calibration is complete.
•The power consumption display is updated:
I 0 = Power consumption when turning is started.
I min = Power consumption at minimum speed.
I max = Power consumption at maximum speed.
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 81
Info Centre
Calibrating the feed drive
The lifting gear must be in working
position (not lifted) for calibrating of
the feed drive.
For calibration of the feed drive the
main coupling must always be
switched in.
The feed drive should be calibrated together with the
front attachment and should not be performed if the
actual cutting length is different from the displayed
cutting length.
1
278
Prerequisites
•
•
•
1950 rpm with the
2
key.
Depending on the type of diesel
engine, the setpoint speed may
deviate during calibration.
• To start calibration for the feed drive, activate the
A
key under softkey
.
The Y5 valve „Feed drive forward“ is activated. The
front attachment should start to turn after a brief time.
The calibration process lasts up to 120 seconds. If the
necessary data cannot be determined during this time,
the calibration process is interrupted.
Use the
B
or
key under the softkey to abort
the calibration.
•
The display after the icon for the feed drive
indicates the status:
= Calibration has been stopped
= Calibration is running
= Calibration was successful
= Calibration was not successful
•
The
symbol is used to indicate the present
current of valve Y5 „Feed drive forward“ in mA.
•
451
0
Travelling gear release switch off
Release switch for feed drive/front attachment on
Release switch road/field ON
The front attachment must be stopped.
The engine speed must be 1950 rpm.
You can increase the engine speed to
•
567
The
symbol is used to indicate the current
speed of the feed drive.
IV - 82
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
D
BX500072_1
Info Centre
•
The speeds are indicated for support values 1 and 2
of the calibration:
Speed (support value) 1:
= Calibration 1 has been stopped
1
= Calibration 1 is running
278
= Calibration 1 was successful
567
451
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
= Calibration 1 was not successful
Speed (support value) 2:
= Calibration 2 has been stopped
= Calibration 2 is running
= Calibration 2 was successful
A
B
C
D
BX500072_1
= Calibration 2 was not successful
Display stopped; current power consumption and
engine speed are at 0.
The calibration is complete.
•The power consumption display is updated:
I 0 = Power consumption when turning is started.
I min = Power consumption at minimum speed.
I max = Power consumption at maximum speed.
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 83
Info Centre
4.9.8 Menu 3-9 „Calibration RockProtect“
Main menu „Maintenance“ is active.
•
•
Select menu 3-9 „Calibration RockProtect“ by using
the rotary potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Menu „Calibration RockProtect“ is displayed.
If the both displayed values are at 2500 mV, the zero
position must not be calibrated. Depending on the
tolerance of parts, a minor deviation may occur.
A
B
C
D
BX851067
Only perform the calibration
RockProtect with the machine at
standstill.
Wait until the trailing machine parts
have come to a complete stop.
The zero position must be recalibrated if the values
deviate significantly:
• Press the key
A
under the softkey
to save
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
the current value.
A
B
C
D
BX851068
IV - 84
Info Centre
4.9.9 Menu 3-10 "Calibration of main
coupling"
Risk of injury !
While the main coupling valve is
being calibrated, the cutting drum
starts running automatically!
Prerequisites:
In order to be able to calibrate the speeds, the following
conditions have to be fulfilled:
• Quick-stop switch - panel: OFF
• Quick-stop switch – manual operation: OFF
• Travelling gear release switch: OFF
• Road/field switch: ON
• Maintenance release switch: OFF
• The driver must be sitting on the driver’s seat.
• The door must be closed.
If one of these conditions has not been fulfilled, a
corresponding symbol is displayed on the terminal.
The keys which must be pressed are displayed on the
graphics
The terminal keys must be pressed.
When calibrating the main coupling,
observe the sequence of the work
steps.
Work steps:
Risk of injury!
During the calibration process
components may move, in particular
the cutting drum.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The main menu "Maintenance" is active.
1. Select menu 3-10 "Calibration of main coupling"
with the rotary potentiometer.
2. Press the rotary potentiometer.
A
B
C
D
BX500657_1
IV - 85
Info Centre
Conditions for release not met
•
•
Field release switch not in position <ON>.
To start the calibration process, the
switch must be in the <ON> position.
1
2
Travelling gear release switch not in
3
4
5
6
7
8
<OFF> position. To start the calibration
process, the switch must be in the
<OFF> position.
•
Maintenance release switch is not in the
<OFF> position. To start the calibration
process, the switch must be in the
<OFF> position.
•
The seat switch has not been actuated.
To start the calibration process, there
must be a person on the seat.
•
The quick-stop switch on the panel of the
cab has been actuated. To start the
calibration process, the switch must not
be actuated.
•
The quick-stop switch in manual operation
has been actuated. To start the calibration
process, the switch must not be
actuated.
•
The door has not been closed. To start
the function, the door must be closed .
IV - 86
A
B
C
D
BX500659_2
Info Centre
When all conditions have been fulfilled for calibration of
the main coupling, no symbols are displayed in the left
screen area.
3. Starting the calibration process
When all conditions have been fulfilled and the symbol
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
is displayed, the calibration process can be
started:
•
Press the
5
key.
The current of the "main coupling ON"
•
flows through the valve Y12 in mA
The speed of the cutting drum
in r.p.m.
When a rotation of the cutting drum is detected, the
min and max current for the cutting drum valve is
calculated and automatically saved.
A
B
C
D
BX500659_2
If no speed is detected on the cutting
drum, the automatic calibration process
is stopped at 1400 mA.
If no current is measured, e.g. because
the valve cable is broken, the calibration
process is also interrupted and an error
message is displayed.
•
To stop the calibration process, press the
key.
6
The following conditions are possible during the
calibration process:
STOP
The calibration process has been stopped
The calibration process is running
A speed of the cutting drum has been
measured. The values have been saved.
The calibration process was concluded successfully.
The speed of the diesel engine in r.p.m.
All conditions for automatic calibration of the
main coupling have been fulfilled. The calibration
process can be started with the key
A
below.
The calibration process is running and can be
stopped with the key below. No values are saved.
or:
The calibration process cannot be started
because e.g. one or more conditions have not
been fulfilled.
IV - 87
Info Centre
4.9.10 Menu 3-11 "Maintenance of additional axle" (optional)
The main menu „Maintenance“ is active.
•
•
Select menu 3-11 „Maintenance of additional axle“
with the rotary potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500206
Submenu „Maintenance of additional axle“ appears.
The following conditions must be met to be able to
raise or lower the additional axle:
•
•
When all conditions for raising or lowering the additional
axle have been met, no symbols appear in the left
screen area.
The additional axle can now be raised or lowered
manually:
A
•
Raise the additional axle with the
1
or
2
•
Lower the additional axle with the
3
or
4
keys.
keys.
The hydraulic pressure in the hydraulic cylinder of the
additional axle (Sensor B80) is displayed at the same
time.
Conditions for release not met
•
Diesel engine not started. The diesel
engine must be started to activate the
additional axle manually.
•
Release switch for travelling gear not in
the <OFF> position. The switch must be in
the <OFF> position to activate the additional axle manually
•
Wrong type of operation (maize is not
adjusted)
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The diesel engine must be running.
Release for the travelling gear must be turned off.
Pressing the key
on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 88
B
C
D
BX500611
Info Centre
4.10
Main Menu 4 „Service“
The main menu level is active.
•
Select the main menu with the rotary potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
The display shows menu level 4 „Service“.
The main menu „Service“ is divided up into 4 menus:
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
= Menu 4-1 „Diagnostics“
A
•
= Menu 4-2 „Error list“
•
= Menü 4-3 „Fitter’s section (password-
B
C
D
BX500074
protected“)
•
•
= Menu 4-4 „Information“
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
4.10.1 Menu 4-1 „Diagnostics“
The main menu level is active.
•
Select main menu 4-1 with the rotary potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The display shows menu level 4-1 „Diagnostics“.
The main menu, „Diagnostics“, is divided up into these
menus:
•
= Menu 4-1-1 „Feed drive“
•
= Menu 4-1-2 „Front attachment“
•
= Menu 4-1-3 „CAN bus“
•
= Menu 4-1-4 „Discharge chute“
•
= Menu 4-1-5 „Lifting gear“
•
= Menu 4-1-6 „Drive“
•
= Menu 4-1-7 „Metal detection“
•
= Menu 4-1-8 „Diesel engine“
•
= Menu 4-1-9 „Autopilot“
A
B
C
D
BX500624
IV - 89
Info Centre
•
= Menu 4-1-10 „Autoscan“
•
= Menu 4-1-11 „Electronics“
•
= Menu 4-1-12 „Work“
•
= Menu 4-1-13 „Grinding“
•
= Menu 4-1-14 „Counterblade“
•
= Menu 4-1-15 „Grain conditioner“
•
= Menu 4-1-16 „Joystick“
•
= Menu 4-1-17 „Control unit console“
•
= Menu 4-1-18 „Manual operation“
•
= Menu 4-1-19 „Terminal“
•
= Menu 4-1-20 „RockProtect“
•
= Menu 4-1-21 „Humidity measurement“
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 90
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500624_1
Info Centre
4.10.1.1 Display of Release Conditions
Not Met for Diagnostics
Menu field (I) shows conditions that have not yet been
met but which must be met to be able to perform
diagnostics. An appropriate remedy must be found in
each case.
I
= Diesel engine speed not at 1950 rpm
•
=Diesel engine has not been started
•
=Diesel engine is not off
•
= Diesel engine idle speed of 1100UPM not
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500185
reached
•
=Speed of vehicle is not correct
•
= Switch the release switch autopilot on or off
•
= Switch the feed drive/front attachment
release switch on or off
•
= Switch the travelling gear release switch on
or off
•
= Switch the road/field release switch on or
off
•
= Switch the parking brake release switch on
or off
•
= Cutting drum running / not running
•
= Cutting drum stopped / not stopped
•
= Pendulum frame not in horizontal position
•
= Grinding flap closed
•
= Grinding flap open
•
= Front attachment not folded out
•
= Front attachment not folded in
•
= Front attachment off / not off
•
= Front attachment on / not on
•
= Seat switch (driver’s seat is unoccupied)
•
= Grass mode not set
•
= Stop switch in the console on or off
•
= Maize mode not set
•
= Manual operation stop switch on or off
•
= XDisc mode not set
•
= Open or close door
•
= Switch the maintenance release switch on
or off
•
= Main coupling on/off.
•
= Lifting gear too high/not high enough
= Lifting gear too low/not low enough
•
= Upper discharge chute not parked
•
= Upper discharge chute not up
•
= Feed drive off / not off
•
= Feed drive on / not on
IV - 91
Info Centre
4.10.1.2 Display of possible faults for
diagnostics
The faults listed below may appear in menu field (I).
•
•
= Error CAN to ADM 1/MFR
I
= Error CAN to ADM 2
(Only double engine)
•
= Error CAN to Autopilot
•
= Error CAN to CU
•
= Error CAN to DIOM
•
= Error CAN to EMR
•
= Error CAN to manual operation
•
= Error CAN to Joystick
•
= Error CAN to KMC2
•
= Error CAN to KMC3
•
= Error CAN to metal detection
•
= Error CAN to maturity detection
•
= Error CAN to DRC
IV - 92
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500185
Info Centre
4.10.2 Menu 4-1-1 „Feed Drive“
The main menu „Diagnostics“ is active.
•
•
Select menu 4-1-1 „Feed drive“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Press the rotary potentiometer.
„Feed drive diagnostics“ appears.
For release conditions (1) not met see chapter
„Display of Release Conditions Not Met for
Diagnostics“.
A
B
C
D
BX500076_1
For faults (1) see chapter „Display of Possible Faults
for Diagnostics“.
The menu „Feed drive diagnostics“ is divided into
2 pages:
Page 1: Sensor test
Page 2: Actuator test
Sensor test (page 1)
•
= Error (symbol will be displayed after the
incorrect position)
•
= Broken cable sensor
•
= Sensor alive
•
= Sensor not alive
•
= Sensor short circuit
•
= Metal detection inactive (no medal in the
I
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500625
feed drive)
•
= Metal detection active (metal in the feed
drive)
Press the
C
key under the
softkey to bring up
page 2 <Actuator test> of the „Feed drive“ menu.
IV - 93
Info Centre
Actuator test (page 2)
•
= Feed drive forward inactive
•
= Feed drive forward active (green)
•
= Feed drive forward free
•
= Feed drive forward error (red)
•
= Feed drive rear inactive
•
= Feed drive reverse active (green)
•
= Feed drive rear free
•
= Feed drive reverse error (red)
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500626
•
= Horn off
•
= Horn on (green)
•
= Horn broken cable (red)
•
= Horn short circuit (red)
Switching actuators on/off
Pre-condition: Conditions for release must be met.
(See Section „Display of release conditions not met for
diagnostics“).
•
When all conditions have been met for the actuator
test, the
•
key.
key and
4
key.
7
key and
key.
The parameter list is called by activating the key
D
•
2
To turn the horn on and off, use the
8
•
key and
To turn the reverse feed drive on and off, use the
3
•
softkeys will be displayed
and the displayed actuators will be released.
To turn the forward feed drive on and off, use the
1
•
and
under the
Press the
B
softkey.
key under the
softkey to go
back to page 1 <Sensor test> of the „Feed drive“
menu.
•
Pressing the
C
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 94
Info Centre
4.10.3 Menu 4-1-2 „Front attachment“
The main menu „Diagnostics“ is active.
•
•
Select menu 4-1-2 „Front attachment“ with the
rotary potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
„Front attachment diagnostics“ appears.
For release conditions (1) not met see chapter
„Display of Release Conditions Not Met for
Diagnostics“
For faults (1) see chapter „Display of Possible Faults
for Diagnostics“
A
B
C
D
BX500629
The menu „Front attachment diagnostics“ is
divided into 2 pages:
Page 1: Sensor test
Page 2: Actuator test
Sensor test (page 1)
•
= Error (symbol will be displayed after the
incorrect position)
•
I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
= Broken cable sensor
•
= Sensor alive
•
= Sensor not alive
•
= Sensor short circuit
•
= Metal detection inactive (no medal in the
A
B
C
D
BX500627
feed drive)
•
= Metal detection active (metal in the feed
•
drive)
= Error headland management.
The error messages 2408 „Fault header speed“ and/
or 2407
„Fault intake speed“ appear in the terminal.
If this is not the case, the following steps must be
performed:
• Stop the machine.
• Stop the lifting unit.
• Check header and intake unit for soiling and
clean them, if necessary.
Press the
C
key under the
softkey to bring up
page 2 <Actuator test> of the „Feed drive“ menu.
IV - 95
Info Centre
Actuator test (page 2)
•
= Front attachment forward inactive
•
= Front attachment forward active (green)
•
= Front attachment forward is free
•
= Front attachment forward error (red)
•
= Front attachment reverse inactive
•
= Front attachment reverse active (green)
•
= Front attachment reverse free
•
= Front attachment reverse error (red)
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500628
Switching actuators on/off
Pre-condition: Conditions for release must be met.
(See Section „Display of release conditions not met for
diagnostics“).
•
When all conditions have been met for the actuator
test, the
•
2
key.
key and
4
key.
The parameter list is called by activating the key
D
•
key and
To turn the reverse feed drive on and off, use the
3
•
softkeys will be displayed
and the displayed actuators will be released.
To turn the forward feed drive on and off, use the
1
•
and
under the
Press the
B
softkey.
key under the
softkey to go
back to page 1 <Sensor test> of the „Feed drive“
menu.
•
Pressing the
C
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 96
Info Centre
4.10.4 Menu 4-1-3 „CAN Bus“
The main menu „Diagnostics“ is active.
•
•
Select menu 4-1-3 „CAN bus“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
Diagnostics „CAN bus“ appears.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CAN bus user:
•
= KMC2 active
B
A
•
C
D
BX500082_1
= KMC2 inactive or disconnected from
CAN bus
•
= DRC active
1
2
•
= DRC inactive or disconnected from CAN
3
4
5
6
7
8
bus
•
•
= DIOM active
= DIOM inactive or disconnected from
CAN bus
•
= Autopilot active
•
= Autopilot inactive or disconnected from
A
B
C
D
BX850989
CAN bus
•
= Autopilot switched off
•
= Joystick active
•
= Joystick inactive or disconnected from
CAN bus
•
= Terminal active
•
= Terminal inactive or disconnected from
CAN bus
•
= CU active
•
= CU inactive or disconnected from CAN
bus
•
= KMC3 active
•
= KMC3 inactive or disconnected from
CAN bus
•
= Printer active
IV - 97
Info Centre
•
= ADM1/MFR active
•
= ADM1/MFR inactive or
disconnected from CAN bus
or CAN bus disconnected from Diesel
engine
1
2
3
4
•
= EMR active
5
6
•
= EMR inactive or disconnected from
7
8
CAN bus
A
•
= Manual operation active
•
= Manual operation inactive or
disconnected from CAN bus
•
= Metal detection active
•
= Metal detection inactive or
disconnected from CAN bus
•
= (optional) AutoScan active
•
= (optional) AutoScan inactive or
disconnected from CAN bus
•
= (optional) RockProtect active
•
= (optional) RockProtect inactive or
disconnected from CAN bus
•
= (optional) Additional axis active
•
= (optional) Additional axis inactive or
disconnected from CAN bus
•
= CropControl aktive
•
= CropControl inactive or
divided from CAN-Bus
•
= Moisture measurement active
•
= Moisture measurement inactive
CAN-Bus
IV - 98
B
C
D
BX850989
Info Centre
•
Press the
key on the rotary potentiometer to
open the menu level.
•
Press the
C
key to bring up the second page of
the „Can bus“ menu.
Switching terminating resistors
•
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
= Terminating resistor active
•
= Terminating resistor inactive
Press the
B
key to bring up the previous page of
A
the „Can bus“ menu.
•
1
Pressing the
B
C
D
BX500178
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 99
Info Centre
4.10.5 Menu 4-1-4 „Upper Discharge
Chute“
The diagnostics menu „Upper discharge chute“ is
divided into 3 pages.
Page 1:
Page 2:
Page 3
Sensor Test
Actuator test part 1
Actuator test part 2
•
Select menu 4-1-4 „Upper discharge chute“ with the
rotary potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500084_1
„Upper discharge chute diagnostics“ appears.
For release conditions (1) not met see chapter
„Display of Release Conditions Not Met for
Diagnostics“.
For faults (1) see chapter „Display of Possible Faults
for Diagnostics“.
I
Sensor test for upper discharge chute (1) (page 1)
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500630
The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been
attached to the machine for the function of the upper
discharge chute.
•
= Upper discharge chute position left
•
= Upper discharge chute position centre
•
= Upper discharge chute position right
•
= Upper discharge chute position
1
2
unknown, sensor position centre or defective
•
= Upper discharge chute up
•
= Upper discharge chute down
•
= Position of upper discharge chute
sensor, bottom - broken cable
•
= Position of upper discharge chute
sensor, bottom - short circuit
•
= Position of upper discharge chute
unknown, lower sensor position may be defective
IV - 100
A
B
C
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
BX500631
Info Centre
Status display of general sensors (2)
•
= Broken cable sensor
•
= Sensor alive
•
= Sensor not alive
•
= Sensor short circuit
1
2
General error messages (3)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
= Problem with the 12V3/12V4 power
•
supply of the KMC2
•
= The 12V3/12V4 power supply of the
KMC2 is OK
•
1
The
A
B
C
D
3
BX500631
symbol indicates the current number of
pulses for the present side.
•
The
symbol indicates the present current of
the upper discharge chute valve for the current
direction of rotation.
Actuator test part 1/2 (page 2/page 3)
Actuators are controlled during the
actuator test. This may result in the
machine performing unexpected
actions. Because of this, the test
must only be performed from a safe
position outside the area that is
affected by machine parts moved by
the actuators.
The actuator test is used to test actuators that have
been attached to the machine for the function of the
upper discharge chute.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Menu control:
Press the
C
key under the softkey to bring up the
A
B
C
D
BX500179
next page of the „Upper discharge chute/actuator test“
menu.
Press the
B
key to bring up the previous page of the
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
„Upper discharge chute“ menu.
If an actuator is turned on, the next or
previous page cannot be called.
(If necessary, turn the actuator off and
repeat the process)
Pre-requisite: Conditions for release must be met.
((See chapter „Display of Release Conditions Not Met
for Diagnostics“)
A
B
C
D
BX500180
IV - 101
Info Centre
To select an actuator:
To run an actuator (for example upper discharge chute
rotate left), activate the corresponding keys on the
control unit. For the actuators to be switched, see the
table below.
The example below explains how to perform an
actuator test. Proceed in a similar manner with the
other actuators.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Turn on the actuator „Upper discharge chute rotate left“
with the
1
key
Possible status display of the selected actuator
A
B
C
D
BX500180
Actuator turned off
Actuator turned on
Broken cable
Short circuit
The status displays described above
are valid for all actuators related to the
upper discharge chute.
Valve
Icon
Description
Turn on the actuator
Turn off the actuator
Y20
Upper discharge chute rotate left
1
2
Y21
Upper discharge chute rotate right
3
4
Y22
Raise ejector flap
5
6
Y23
Lower ejector flap
7
8
Y24
Lift upper discharge chute
1
2
Y25
Lower upper discharge chute
3
4
Y63
Fold in upper discharge chute
5
6
Y64
Fold out upper discharge chute
7
8
IV - 102
Info Centre
4.10.6 Menu 4-1-5 „Lifting Gear“
The „Diagnostics“ main menu is active.
• Select menu 4-1-5 „Lifting gear“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
• Press the rotary potentiometer.
„Lifting gear diagnostics“ appears.
For release conditions (1) not met see chapter
„Display of Release Conditions Not Met for
Diagnostics“.
For faults (1) see chapter „Display of Possible Faults
for Diagnostics“
The diagnostics menu „Lifting gear“ is divided into 4
pages.
Page 1:
Information page
Page 2:
Actuator test (part 1)
Page 3:
Actuator test (part 2)
Page 4:
Calibration display
B
A
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500092_1
Menu overview – information page (page 1) 2
I
Display sensor values
II
Status display valves
III
Display saved setpoint value
The display in the display varies according to
design of the feed drive/front attachment.
Menu control
•
Press the
key under the
C
softkey to bring
up page 2 <Actuator test> of the „Lifting gear“
menu.
•
Press the
A
key under the
I
II
softkey to
bring up page 4 <Calibration display> of the „Lifting
gear“ menu.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
III
B
A
C
D
BX500649
I
II
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
III
A
B
C
D
BX850843
IV - 103
Info Centre
Lifting gear sensor test (page 1)
The Diagnostics menu is used to test whether the sensor
responds when a function is performed.
This is indicated by the values after the symbols in the
sensor display (I) changing when the corresponding
function is performed.
The display in the display varies according to
design of the feed drive/front attachment.
The status displays listed below also appear in the sensor
display (I)
•
= Sensor header contour left; the current
I
II
value is displayed as a digital and
percentage value
•
= Error, sensor header contour left
•
= Position of sensor lifting gear; the current
= Error, lifting gear position sensor
•
= Sensor header contour right; the current
B
A
C
= Error, sensor header contour right
•
= Sensor for lifting gear pressure; the
I
II
= Error, lifting gear pressure sensor
= Front attachment folded out left
(only on two-piece EasyCollect)
•
= Front attachment folded out right
(only on two-piece EasyCollect)
•
= Position of pendulum frame (varies
according to design of the feed drive/front
attachment)
•
= Broken cable sensor
•
= Sensor alive
•
= Sensor not alive
•
= Sensor short circuit
•
= Dumping active
•
= Dumping inactive
Dumping = oscillation absorption for
road travel
•
Press the
C
key under the
softkey to bring
up page 2 <Actuator test> of the "Lifting gear"
menu.
IV - 104
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
III
A
•
4
BX500649
current value is displayed as a digital and
percentage value
•
3
D
value is displayed as a digital and
percentage value
•
2
III
value is displayed as a digital,
percentage, and absolute value
•
1
B
C
D
BX850843
Info Centre
Actuator test part 1 (page 2)
In case of actuator tests via the terminal or directly on the actuator, there is the risk of
accidental movements of the machine or machine parts.
Make sure that work on the machine is only performed by qualified personnel.
Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back.
Secure the controlled machine parts against unintentional movements.
Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone.
The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is
affected by machine parts moved by the actuators.
•
•
•
•
•
Menu control
•
Press the
B
key under the
softkey to bring
up page 1 <Information page> of the "Lifting gear"
menu.
•
Press the
C
key under the
softkey to bring
up page 3 <Actuator test> of the "Lifting gear"
menu.
If an actuator is turned on, the next
or previous page cannot be called.
(If necessary, turn the actuator off
and repeat the process)
For release conditions (I) not met see chapter
„Display of Release Conditions Not Met for
Diagnostics“
Pre-requisite: Conditions for release must be met.
((See chapter „Display of Release Conditions Not
Met for Diagnostics“)
For faults (I) see chapter „Display of Possible Faults
for Diagnostics“
Actuator turn on/off
•
To turn <Raise lifting gear> on and off, use the
key and
•
2
3
I
3
4
key.
5
6
7
8
To turn <Lifting gear accumulator> on and off, use
the
•
4
1
key.
To turn <Lower lifting gear> on and off, use the
key and
•
2
1
5
key and
6
key.
To turn the LED on the EMR on and off, use the
7
key and
8
key.
Valve
Description
Y32
Raise lifting gear
Y33
Lower lifting gear
Y34
Lifting gear accumulator
A
B
C
D
BX500632
Actuator turned on
Actuator turned off
(LED lights up in green)
(LED is not lit)
LED on EMR
Additional status displays of the selected actuator:
Broken cable
Short circuit
IV - 105
Info Centre
Actuator test part 2 (page 3)
•
When all conditions have been met for the actuator
test, the softkeys
and
will be displayed and
the displayed actuators will be released.
Actuator turn on/off
• To turn <Turn pendulum frame to the left> on and off,
use the
key and
1
2
1
key and
3
4
key and
5
3
4
5
6
7
8
key.
• To turn <Pendulum frame locked horizontally> on and
off, use the
2
key.
• To turn <Turn pendulum frame to the right> on and off,
use the
1
6
A
B
C
D
BX500633
key.
• To turn <Pendulum frame locked horizontally> on and
off, use the
key and
6
8
key.
Valve
Description
Actuator turned on
Actuator turned off
(LED lights up in green)
(LED is not lit)
Y37
Turn pendulum frame to the left
Y38
Turn pendulum frame to the right
Y54
Pendulum frame locked horizontally
Y55
Pendulum frame locked horizontally
Actuator status displays
Actuator status (1)
active
Actuator status (1) Actuator status (1) Actuator status (1)
inactive
Broken cable
Short circuit
Description
Raise lifting gear
Lower lifting gear
Lifting gear accumulator
Pendulum frame rotate left
Pendulum frame rotate left
Pendulum frame locked
horizontally
Pendulum frame locked
horizontally
Menu control
•
Press the
B
key under the
softkey to bring
up page 2 <Actuator test> of the „Lifting gear“
menu.
IV - 106
Info Centre
Changing pulse/pause ratio
The pulse/pause ratio of the control signal to control
the actuators can be adjusted via rotary
potentiometer.
•
•
•
•
With the rotary potentiometer, select the bar
graph. The bar graph is highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the bar graph.
Turning the rotary potentiometer clockwise
increases the value. Turning it anticlockwise
reduces the value.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the value
to be applied and returns you from the bar graph.
1
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500650
Calibration display (page 4)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
II
A
The list in the table below shows how the elements on
which the sensor display (I) and calibration display (III)
depend.
DesignationSensor display
Calibration display
(I)
B
C
D
BX500648
Notes
(III)
Lifting Gear
Lower lifting gear must be floating freely
Top pressure control
(no
Lifting gear distance control
/
contact with ground)
Lifting gear must be completely up/
completely down
Header contour left
/
Front attachment must be(optional)
completely up / completely down
Header contour right
/
Front attachment must be (optional)
completely up / completely down.
Menu control
•
•
Press the
B
key under the softkey
to bring
up page 1 <Information page> of the „Lifting gear“
menu.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer takes you one
menu level back.
IV - 107
Info Centre
4.10.7 Menu 4-1-6 „Drive“
The „Diagnostics“ main menu is active.
•
Select menu 4-1-6 „Drive“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
1
2
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
3
4
5
6
7
8
„Drive diagnostics“ appears.
The „Traction Drive“ diagnostics menu is divided into
three pages.
Page 1:
Sensor test
Page 2:
Sensor test additional axle (only for
additional axle option)
Page 3:
Actuator test additional axle (only for
additional axle option)
B
A
C
D
BX500101
Release conditions
•
= Release switch – road/field
•
= Release switch – road/field activated
•
= Travelling gear release switch
•
= Travelling gear release switch activated
For faults (I) see chapter „Display of Possible
Faults for Diagnostics“
IV - 108
A
B
C
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
WHBBX03224
Info Centre
Traction drive sensor display (1)
•
Direction of travel; the number after the symbol is
the current travel speed.
= Forward travel
1
2
= Reverse travel
3
4
= Cruise control active; the number after
5
6
7
8
= Neutral (standstill)
•
1
the icon is the saved speed for Cruise control
operation in km/h
= Cruise control inactive
A
B
C
D
BX851022
•
= Traction Control TC I
(maize) active
•
= Traction Control TC I
(maize) ready for operation
•
= Traction Control TCI II
(grass) active
•
= Traction Control TC II
(grass) ready for operation
•
= Traction Control TC active
•
= Traction Control TC inactive
•
= Power limitation active
•
= Power limitation inactive
•
= Brake tank pressure OK
•
= Brake tank pressure not OK
•
= Brake pedal switch unknown
•
= Service brake pressure OK
•
= Service brake pressure not OK
•
= Service brake pressure unknown
•
•
= Parking brake is applied
= Emergency mode; allows the driver to drive
the vehicle out of the danger zone even if there are
serious drive problems.
IV - 109
Info Centre
•
Press the
C
key to bring up the next page of the
„Travelling gear“ menu.
The „Additional axle sensor test“ menu appears.
1
Possible status displays
(1) = Current speed
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
= Voltage error
= Voltage ON
Actuator turned off
Actuator turned on
A
B
C
D
BX851023_1
Broken cable
Sensor test (2)
•
•
= Pivoting angle pump
= Angle / electric power steering angle
rear axle, left side
2
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX850866
•
= Angle / electric power steering angle rear
axle, left side
•
= Electric power / speed rear left-hand wheel
•
= Electric power / speed rear right-hand
wheel
•
= Electric power / speed rear right-hand
wheel
•
= Percent (%) excursion/electric power /
brake pedal pressure (bar)
•
IV - 110
= High pressure unknown
Info Centre
•
Press the
C
key under the softkey
to bring
up the next page of the „Travelling gear“ menu.
The „Additional axle actuator test“ menu appears.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500203
Actuator test additional axis
In case of actuator tests via the terminal or directly on the actuator, there is the risk of
accidental movements of the machine or machine parts.
• Make sure that work on the machine is only performed by qualified personnel.
• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back.
• Secure the controlled machine parts against unintentional movements.
• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone.
• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is
affected by machine parts moved by the actuators.
Selecting an actuator:
Use the
1
key to turn on the „Lift additional axis“
2
key to turn off the „Lift additional axis“
3
key to turn on the „Lower additional
actuator.
Use the
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
actuator.
Use the
axis“ actuator.
Use the
4
key to turn on the „Lower additional
axis“ actuator.
Menu control
•
Press the
A
B
key under the softkey
to
B
C
D
BX500204
scroll back to the previous page.
•
Pressing the
C
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 111
Info Centre
4.10.8 Menu 4-1-7 „Metal Detection“
The main menu „Diagnostics“ is active.
•
•
Select menu 4-1-7 „Metal detection“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
For release conditions (1) not met see chapter
„Display of Release Conditions Not Met for
Diagnostics“
B
A
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500106
For faults (1) see chapter „Display of Possible Faults
for Diagnostics“
Metal detection
•
= Operating voltage for metal detection
= Voltage of the stop valve.
•
0 mV = Stop valve switched
Operating voltage = Stop valve not switched
= Status of the metal detection output
•
= No metal in feed drive
= Metal in feed drive
= Status of the KMC2 input, which is also
•
switched through the metal detection output.
= No metal in feed drive
= Metal in feed drive
= Error
IV - 112
A
B
C
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
WHBBX03520
Info Centre
•
= The current speed of the feed drive is
displayed. This makes it possible to check that the
attachments have come to a complete stop.
•
•
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
= software version of metal detection
= Metal detection is on
= Metal detection is off
•
1
=The output of the metal detection is in
A
B
C
D
WHBBX03520
good working order
= The output of the metal detection is not
in good working order
= Broken cable stop valve
= Short circuit stop valve
= Power consumption too high
•
= Interference limit value
•
= Average interference value
To switch actuator on/off
•
A test stop for metal detection can be triggered by
activating the
A
key under the
softkey.
• To release metal detection again, activate the
key under the
•
•
softkey.
To apply the default setting values, press the
key next to the
Pressing the
B
1
softkey.
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 113
Info Centre
4.10.9 Menu 4-1-8 „Diesel Engine“
The main menu „Diagnostics“ is active.
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select menu 4-1-8 „Diesel engine“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
„Diesel engine Diagnostics“ appears.
Diesel engine page 1
•
= Engine speed
•
= Engine cooling water temperature
•
= Engine cooling water level
A
B
C
D
BX500108_1
Two separate oil circuits in the engine require two oil
gauges:
= oil pressure EDC master
(master control unit)
= oil pressure EDC slave
•
• Activating the
key for
C
causes the next
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
page to be displayed.
• Activating the
key for
A
causes the next
A
B
C
D
BX850842
maintenance interval to be displayed
Diesel engine page 2
1
2
•
= Temperature fuel
3
4
•
= Diesel fuel consumption
5
6
7
8
= Temperature of air intake
•
•
•
•
= charge air pressure
Maximum engine capacity
Engine capacity, speed
P
• Activating the
A
key for
A
B
C
D
BX500110
causes the next
maintenance interval to be displayed.
• Activating the
B
key for
causes the
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
previous page to be displayed.
• Activating the
C
key for
causes the next
page to be displayed.
• Activating the
A
key for
causes the
diesel engine Diagnostics to be displayed.
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
A
B
C
D
BX500161
IV - 114
Info Centre
Diesel engine page 3
•
= Fuel pressure EDC-Master
Fuel pressure EDC-Slave
•
= Engine control unit voltage
•
= Exit gas temperature
•
Press the
B
key for
to display the previous
C
key for
to display the next
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
page.
•
Press the
page.
•
Press the
A
B
C
D
BX750019_1
key on the rotary potentiometer to
open the menu level.
IV - 115
Info Centre
Diesel engine page 4
Mask description hydrostatic fan
Depending on temperature range / speed range, the
colour of the displayed bar changes. Critical ranges
are displayed yellow and red.
If red bars are displayed in the mask, stop the
machine immediately. However, make sure that the
engine runs so that it can cool down.
1
2
3
4
•
= Hydraulic oil temperature
5
6
•
= Load air temperature
7
8
•
= Engine cooling water temperature
•
= Engine fan speed (calculated)
A
•
You can use the
1
and
2
keys to switch
between Manual and Automatic mode
.
The currently active mode is marked in grey.
In manual mode the setting can be
•
switched back and forth between RPM and % with
the
3
and
4
keys. The currently active unit is
shown in grey.
•
The value can be adjusted with the
and
6
IV - 116
keys (max. 1100 or 100%).
5
B
C
D
BX850844
Info Centre
Possible status displays (1)
The ventilator is located in automatic mode.
The ventilator is located in manual mode.
Error condition, the fan turns with maximum
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
speed.
Cleaning state, the fan turns for the set time
(parameter 33759 „Duration of cleaning
phase“, parameter 33768 „Duration of
working phase“) with maximum speed.
A
B
C
D
1
BX850845
The diesel engine/fan is OFF.
Current power consumption of engine fan
Maintenance position, the fan turns with
minimum speed.
= Hydraulic oil temperature too high
= Charge air temperature too high
= Engine cooling water temperature too high
•
Press the
B
key for
to display the previous
page.
•
Pressing the key
on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
When you are leaving the diagnostics
page, automatic mode is retrieved.
IV - 117
Info Centre
4.10.10 Menu 4-1-9 „Autopilot“
The Diagnostics menu „Autopilot“ is divided into 2
pages.
Page 1:
Sensor Test
Page 2:
Actuator test
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The „Diagnostics“ main menu is active.
•
•
Select menu 4-1-9 „Autopilot“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
„Autopilot Diagnostics“ appears.
•
Pressing the
A
key on the rotary potentiometer
B
C
D
BX500111
takes you one menu level back.
Sensor test (1)
1
Actuator test (2)
The actuator test is used to test actuators that have
been attached to the machine for the function of the
Autopilot.
To be able to perform an actuator
test, all hydraulically moveable parts
must be in their basic position/initial
position.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500153
In case of actuator tests via the terminal or directly on the actuator, there is the risk of
accidental movements of the machine or machine parts.
•
•
•
•
•
Make sure that work on the machine is only performed by qualified personnel.
Secure the machine against rolling away.
Secure controlled machine parts against unintentional movements.
Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone.
The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is
affected by machine parts moved by the actuators.
For release conditions (1) not met see chapter
„Display of Release Conditions Not Met for
Diagnostics“
For faults (1) see chapter „Display of Possible
Faults for Diagnostics“
Menu control:
Press the
C
2
I
B
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key under the softkey to bring up the
next page of the „Autopilot/actuator test“ menu.
Press the
1
key to bring up the previous page of the
„Autopilot“ menu.
If an actuator is turned on, the next or
previous page cannot be called.
(If necessary, turn the actuator off and
repeat the process)
IV - 118
A
B
C
D
BX500152
Info Centre
To select an actuator:
To run an actuator (for example disable steering (I)),
activate the corresponding keys on the control unit. For
the actuators to be switched, see the table below.
The example below explains how to perform an
actuator test. Proceed in a similar manner with the
other actuators.
Turn on the actuator „Disable steering (I)“ with the
1
key
Possible status display of the selected actuator
Actuator turned off
Actuator turned on
2
I
Broken cable
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Short circuit
The status displays described above
are valid for all actuators related to the
Autopilot.
Valve
Icon
Description
A
B
C
D
BX500152
Turn on the actuator
Turn off the actuator
Y66
Disable steering (I)
1
2
Y67
Disable steering (II)
3
4
Y39
Steering left
5
6
Y40
Steering right
7
8
IV - 119
Info Centre
4.10.11 Menu 4-1-10 „AutoScan“
„Diagnostics“ main menu is called up.
• Select menu 4-1-10 „AutoScan“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
AutoScan
(1) = AutoScan operating voltage
(2) = Signal LED1
1
2
3
4
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
5
(3) = Signal LED2
A
(4) Set max. cutting length
(6)
Cutting length for brown maize
(7)
Cutting length for green maize
(8) Current cutting length
basic screen.
IV - 120
C
D
BX500205
(5) Set min. cutting length
• Pressing the softkey
B
returns you to the
Info Centre
4.10.12 Menu 4-1-11 „Electronics“
The main menu „Diagnostics“ is active.
•
•
Select menu 4-1-11 „Electronics“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Press the rotary potentiometer.
„Electronics Diagnostics“ appears.
For release conditions (1) not met see chapter
„Display of Release Conditions Not Met for
Diagnostics“
A
B
C
D
BX500112
For faults (1) see chapter „Display of Possible Faults
for Diagnostics“
• The
symbol identifies diagnostic values that
lie within a valid range.
• The
symbol identifies diagnostic values that
I
do not lie within a valid range.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500142
IV - 121
Info Centre
• To scroll forward
backward
•
Pressing the
, use the
, use the
B
C
key. To scroll
key.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
A
B
C
D
BX500143
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500634
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500144
IV - 122
Info Centre
4.10.13 Menu 4-1-12 „Work“
The Diagnostics menu „Work“ is divided into 6 pages.
Page 1:
Sensor Test
Page 2:
Actuator test part 1
Page 3:
Actuator test part 2
Page 4:
Actuator test part 3
Page 5:
Actuator test part 4
Page 6
Actuator test part 5
The „Diagnostics“ main menu is active.
•
•
Select menu 4-1-12 „Work“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500113
„Work Diagnostics“ appears.
For release conditions (1) not met see chapter
„Display of Release Conditions Not Met for
Diagnostics“
I
For faults (1) see chapter „Display of Possible Faults
for Diagnostics“
Sensors
•
= Broken cable sensor
•
= Sensor alive
•
= Sensor not alive
•
= Sensor short circuit
•
= No error
•
= Error
•
= Function is active
•
= Function is inactive
• To scroll forward
•
Press the
, activate the
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500154_1
C
key.
key on the rotary potentiometer to
open the menu level.
Actuator test part 1 to part 5 (page 2 to page 6)
The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the work function.
In case of actuator tests via the terminal or directly on the actuator, there is the risk of
accidental movements of the machine or machine parts.
• Make sure that work on the machine is only performed by qualified personnel.
• Secure the machine against rolling away.
• Secure controlled machine parts against unintentional movements.
• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone.
• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is
affected by machine parts moved by the actuators.
IV - 123
Info Centre
Menu control:
Press the
C
key to bring up the next page of the
„Actuator test/Work“ menu.
Press the
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key to bring up the previous page of the
I
„Work“ menu.
If an actuator is turned on, the next or
previous page cannot be called.
(If necessary, turn the actuator off and
repeat the process)
Pre-requisite: Conditions for release must be met.
((See chapter „Display of Release Conditions Not Met
for Diagnostics“)
A
B
C
D
BX500155
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500186
To select an actuator:
To run an actuator (for example main coupling),
activate the corresponding keys on the control unit. For
the actuators to be switched, see the table below.
The example below explains how to perform an
actuator test. Proceed in a similar manner with the
other actuators.
Using the
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key, turn on the „Main coupling“
actuator.
Possible status display of the selected actuator
A
B
C
D
BX500187
Actuator turned off
Actuator turned on
Broken cable
1
2
Short circuit
3
4
5
6
7
8
The status displays described above
are valid for all actuators related to the
work.
A
B
C
D
BX500188
IV - 124
Info Centre
Valve
Icon
Y12
Description
Turn on the actuator
Turn off the actuator
Main coupling
1
2
Main coupling acoustic signal
3
4
Y26
Fold in front attachm.
1
2
Y27
Extend front attachm.
3
4
Y29
Lower plant divider /
5
6
H61
Supporting wheel out
Y28
Raise plant divider /
Supporting wheel in
7
8
Y51
(green) optional for additional hydraulic unit I-A
Y52
(green) optional for additional hydraulic unit I-B
3
4
Y61
(black) optional for additional hydraulic unit II-A
5
6
Y62
(black) optional for additional hydraulic unit II-B
7
8
Y60
Molasses addition
1
2
M16
Silage agent pump
3
4
Y73
Additional valve for engine
3
4
Central lubrication
5
6
Storage switch grass / maize
7
8
1
2
cleaning/compressed air
M12
Y53
electric power supply
IV - 125
Info Centre
4.10.14 Menu 4-1-13 „Grinding“
The main menu „Diagnostics“ is active.
•
•
Select menu 4-1-13 „Grinding“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
„Grinding Diagnostics“ appears.
For release conditions (1) not met see chapter
„Display of Release Conditions Not Met for
Diagnostics“
•
Maintenance flap is closed.
A
B
C
BX500114
For faults (1) see chapter „Display of Possible
Faults for Diagnostics“
3
Status of the grinding flap (2)
•
= Grinding flap is closed
•
= Grinding flap is open
•
= Grinding flap in intermediate position
•
= Position of grinding flap unknown
•
= Error grinding flap
1
= Grinding stone is on the left
•
= Grinding stone is in the centre
•
= Grinding stone is on the right
•
= Grinding stone moves to the left
The display with arrow is available in
different positions, which show the
direction of movement of the grinding
stone.
•
= Position of grinding stone unknown;
grinding stone sensors are both alive/sensor is
defective - FAULT
2
4
5
Status of the grinding stone (3)
•
D
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500157
Status display of general errors (5)
•
= Electrical power supply 12V3 of KMC3
(for grinding stone) is OK
•
= Electrical power supply 12V3 of KMC3
(for grinding stone) is faulty
Status display of sensors (4)
•
= Output is turned off
•
= Broken cable sensor
•
= Output is turned on (electrical current in
•
= Sensor alive
•
= Sensor not alive
•
= Sensor short circuit
IV - 126
mA for valve Y65 „grinding flap open/
closed“ is OK)
•
= Output is turned on (electrical current in
mA for valve Y65 „grinding flap open/
closed“ is not OK)
Info Centre
Actuator test
•
•
•
•
•
In case of actuator tests via the terminal or directly on the actuator, there is the risk of
accidental movements of the machine or machine parts.
Make sure that work on the machine is only performed by qualified personnel.
Secure the machine against rolling away.
Secure controlled machine parts against unintentional movements.
Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone.
The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is
affected by machine parts moved by the actuators.
The actuator test is used to test actuators that have
been attached to the machine for the grinding
function.
Pre-condition: Conditions for release must be met.
((See chapter „Display of Release Conditions Not
Met for Diagnostics“)
To select an actuator:
1
2
key.
The valves for the grinding stone are controlled by
3
4
the
5
6
7
8
• To open the grinding flap, use the
•
•
5
key and the
Pressing the
6
3
key and
4
key.
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
A
B
C
D
BX500158
IV - 127
Info Centre
4.10.15 Menu 4-1-14 „Counterblade“
The main menu „Diagnostics“ is active.
•
•
Select menu 4-1-14 „Counterblade“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Press the rotary potentiometer.
„Counterblade Diagnostics“ appears.
For release conditions (1) not met see chapter
„Display of Release Conditions Not Met for
Diagnostics“
• Maintenance flap is closed.
A
B
C
D
BX500115
For faults (1) see chapter „Display of Possible
Faults for Diagnostics“
3
2
Status of the grinding flap (2)
•
= Grinding flap is closed
•
= Grinding flap is open
•
= Grinding flap in intermediate position
•
= Position of grinding flap unknown
•
= Error grinding flap
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5
A
B
C
D
BX500159_1
Status of the grinding stone (3)
•
= Grinding stone is on the left
•
= Grinding stone is in the centre
•
= Grinding stone is on the right
•
= Grinding stone moves to the left
The display with arrow is available in
different positions, which show the
direction of movement of the grinding
stone.
•
= Position of grinding stone unknown;
grinding stone sensors are both alive/sensor is
defective - FAULT
Status display of general errors (5)
•
= Electrical power supply (12V1/12V3) of
KMC3 (for counterblade) is OK
•
= Electrical power supply (12V1/12V3) of
KMC3 (for counterblade) is faulty
IV - 128
Info Centre
Actuator test
•
•
•
•
•
In case of actuator tests via the terminal or directly on the actuator, there is the risk of
accidental movements of the machine or machine parts.
Make sure that work on the machine is only performed by qualified personnel.
Secure the machine against rolling away.
Secure controlled machine parts against unintentional movements.
Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone.
The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is
affected by machine parts moved by the actuators.
The actuator test is used to test actuators that have
been attached to the machine for the counterblade
function.
Pre-condition: Conditions for release must be met.
(See chapter „Display of Release Conditions Not
Met for Diagnostics“
• You can use the
3
1
key to move away from the
counterblade on the right and the
4
key to
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
approach it.
• You can use the
5
key to move away from the
counterblade on the left and the
6
key to
approach it.
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
A
B
C
D
BX500160
takes you one menu level back.
Actuator status displays
Actuator status (1) Actuator status (1) Actuator status (1) Actuator status (1)
aktive
inaktive
Broken cable
Short circuit
Beschreibung
Approach counterblade on the
right
Move away from counterblade on
the right
Approach counterblade on the left
Move away from counterblade on
the left
IV - 129
Info Centre
4.10.16 Menu 4-1-15 „Grain conditioner“
In diagnostic menu 4-1-15 you can test whether voltage
is present on the cracker motor.
You can also see whether the voltage via KMC 3 is OK
and whether current is flowing on the cracker motor.
The „Diagnostics“ main menu is active.
•
•
Select menu 4-1-15 „Grain conditioner“ with the
rotary potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
Diagnostics „Grain conditioner“ appears.
•
Pressing the
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500116
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
Status display of general errors (1)
•
= Electrical power supply (12V2) of KMC3
(for grain conditioner) is OK
•
= Electrical power supply (12V2) of KMC3
(for grain conditioner) is not OK
If menu field (2) shows a value with
the actuator turned on (cracker
motor rotating anticlockwise/
clockwise), current is flowing. If the
value remains at zero, no current is
flowing.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
A
B
C
D
BX500189
Actuator test (3)
Actuators are controlled during the actuator test. This may result in the machine performing
unexpected actions. Because of this, the test must only be performed from a safe position
outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators.
The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the function of the grain
conditioner.
Pre-condition: Conditions for release must be met. (See chapter „Display of Release Conditions Not Met for
Diagnostics“)
To select an actuator:
To run an actuator (for example cracker motor rotating anticlockwise), activate the corresponding keys on the control
unit.
Using the
Using the
3
4
key, turn on the „Reduce cracker distance“ actuator.
key, turn on the „Increase cracker distance“ actuator.
Possible status display of the selected actuator
Actuator turned off
Actuator turned on
Broken cable
Short circuit
IV - 130
Info Centre
4.10.17 Menu 4-1-16 „Joystick“
The key functions of the joystick can be checked in
the „Joystick“ Diagnostics menu.
When bringing up the „Joystick“
Diagnostics menu, the diesel engine
must be stopped.
No functions are performed when the
joystick is activated in the „Joystick“
Diagnostics menu.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The „Diagnostics“ main menu is active.
•
Select menu 4-1-16 „Joystick“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
A
B
C
D
BX500117
„Joystick Diagnostics“ appears.
•
Pressing the
Menu control:
A
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
Pressing the
1
key under the
softkey brings
up the basic screen.
Press the
C
key under the
softkey to bring up
A
B
C
D
BX500190_3
the next page of the „Joystick“ menu.
Press the
C
key under the
softkey to bring up
the next previous of the „Joystick“ menu.
A representation of the joystick appears in the display.
If a function is activated on the joystick, the status of
the function that is performed appears in the display.
Possible status display of the activated key
Key not activated
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Key activated.
A
Broken cable
B
C
D
BX500190_1
Short circuit
IV - 131
Info Centre
4.10.18 Menu 4-1-17 „Control Unit
Console“
Both the release switches and the keys on the console
can be checked for their functionality in the „Control
unit console“ Diagnostics menu.
When bringing up the „Control unit
console“ Diagnostics menu, the diesel
engine must be stopped.
No functions are performed in the
„Control unit console“ Diagnostics
menu when the release switches or
keys are activated.
B
A
C
•
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500118
The „Diagnostics“ main menu is active.
•
1
Select menu 4-1-17 „Control unit console“ with the
rotary potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
„Control unit console Diagnostics“ appears.
Malfunction
•
=
Störung Dieselmotor
B
A
Pressing the key
C
under the softkey
C
BX850990_1
D
brings
up the next page of the „Control unit console“ menu.
The mask „Diagnostics seat switch“ is shown in the
display (depending on configuration the CU (1) may not
be shown).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Mögliche Statusanzeige der betätigten Taste
1
Seat switch not actuated
Seat switch actuated
Broken cable
A
B
C
D
BX850848
Short circuit
with time delay
Pressing the key
B
under the softkey
brings
up the page of the menu „Control unit console“ again.
IV - 132
Info Centre
Release switch
Activated
Inactive Release switch
Road/field
Feed drive/front attachment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
Parking Brake
Travelling gear
Traction Control TC
Traction Control TC Sensitivity I
(maize) or II (grass)
Autopilot
Maint.
A
B
C
D
BX850868
Seat switch
Door switch
Stop switch CU
Stop switch for manual operation
Keypads (1)
When the keypads (1) are activated, the keys are
highlighted in colour.
For assignment of keypads, see
chapter on „Keypads“ controls
IV - 133
Info Centre
4.10.19 Menu 4-1-18 „Manual Operation“
Keys for manual operation can be checked for their
functionality in the „Manual operation“ Diagnostics
menu.
When bringing up the „Manual
operation“ Diagnostics menu, the
diesel engine must be stopped.
No functions are performed when keys
are activated in the „Manual
operation“ Diagnostics menu.
The main menu „Diagnostics“ is active.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500119
•
Select menu 4-1-18 „Manual operation“ with the
rotary potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
„Manual operation Diagnostics“ appears.
2
= Manual operation
Keypads (1)
When the keypads (1) are activated, the keys are
highlighted in colour.
For the assignment of keypads, see
chapter „Manual operations on the
platform“
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
Possible status display of the activated key (2)
Key not activated
Key activated.
Broken cable
Short circuit
IV - 134
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
Malfunction
•
1
A
B
C
D
BX500146
Info Centre
4.10.20 Menü 4-1-19 „Terminal“
A function test of the keys can be accomplished in the
diagnostics menu „Terminal“.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The main menu „Diagnostics“ is active.
•
•
Select menu 4-1-19 „Terminal“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
The „Terminal“ setting appears.
•
Actuate all the keys one after the other.
A
B
C
D
BX500196
Possible status display of the activated key
Key not functional
Key functional
•
Pressing the key
at the rotary potentiometer
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
twice takes you one menu level back.
A
B
C
D
BX500197
IV - 135
Info Centre
4.10.21 Menu 4-1-20 "RockProtect
Diagnostics"
"Diagnostics" main menu is called up.
•
•
Select menu 4-1-20 "RockProtect Diagnostics" with
the rotary potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
"RockProtect diagnostics" appears.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RockProtect Diagnostics Page 1
Any release conditions that have not been fulfilled are
displayed in the area highlighted in grey, if applicable.
A
B
C
D
ROP00005
Status display of the sensor (1)
Depending on the configuration, the voltage value
and the status of the sensor are displayed.
1
= Sensor is OK
= Cables/sensor defective.
2
Status display of the stop request (2)
A
= Normal Operation, no stop
Status display of the stop lock (3)
It indicates whether the stop lock is set. It is always
active in reverse drive.
= Stop lock inactive, normal operation
= Stop lock active, no rock detection
key under the
softkey to
release the RockProtect after a stop.
•
To show the next page, press the
the
IV - 136
softkey.
4
5
6
7
8
C
B
C
D
ROP00006_2
= Stop was requested
B
3
3
= Voltage value too high
Press the
2
I
= Broken cable
•
1
key under
Info Centre
RockProtect Diagnostics Page 2
Any release conditions that have not been fulfilled are
displayed in the area highlighted in grey, if applicable.
Status display of the stop request (1)
3
= Stop was requested
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
= Normal Operation, no stop
2
Status display of the stop lock (2)
It indicates whether the stop lock is set. It is always
active in reverse drive.
A
= Stop lock inactive, normal operation
B
C
D
ROP00007_2
= Stop lock active, no rock detection
•
Press the
key on the left next to the
softkey to switch the output for the stop valve on or
off.
The target status of the output is displayed on the
icon next to the icon.
= Output is not switched.
= Output is switched.
•
If for any reason no diagnostics may be performed
the icons
•
will not (3) appear.
To show the previous page, press the
under the
B
key
softkey.
IV - 137
Info Centre
4.10.22 Menu 4-1-21 „Diagnostics
Moisture“
„Diagnostics“ main menu is called.
• Select „Diagnostics Moisture“ menu (4-1-21) by
using the rotary potentiometer.
• Press rotary potentiometer.
The „Diagnostics Moisture“ menu is displayed.
If the release conditions (I) are not fulfilled, refer
to chapter „Display of Not Fulfilled Release
Conditions for Diagnostics“
For disturbances (I), refer to chapter „Display of
Possible Disturbances for Diagnostics“
A
B
C
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
WHBBX04000
The „Moisture“ diagnostics menu consists of one
page
• Page 1 „Sensor Test and Actuator Test“
Any release conditions that have not been fulfilled are
displayed in the area highlighted in grey, if applicable.
I
The current voltages and measurement values for
„Moisture measurement“ function is shown in display
1 „Sensor and actuator test“.
Switch actuators on and off
When all release conditions have been met for the
actuator test, the softkeys
and
are
displayed
and the displayed actuators are released.
They can be switched on and off via number keys.
•
Press key
1
•
Press key
2
•
Pressing the key
to switch on moisture actuator.
to switch on moisture actuator.
on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 138
A
B
C
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
WHBBX04225
Info Centre
4.11
Menu 4-2 „Error list“
The main menu level is active.
•
Select main menu 4-2 with the rotary potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
„Error list“ appears.
•
= Current error
•
= Fault storage
•
= Current error, diesel engine
•
= Fault storage, diesel engine
B
A
C
D
BX500120
= Error list "Informative events"
Current errors
The display shows the error list with the current errors.
The time, status, error number and designation are
shown.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• Status
C = Error has come (Come)
G = Error has gone (Gone)
A = Error acknowledged
B
A
C
D
BX500121_2
• To display fault storage, activate the
the
B
key under
softkey.
Fault storage
Fault storage is arranged chronologically.
The date, time, status, error numbers, and designation
are shown.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• Status
C = Error has come (Come)
G = Error has gone (Gone)
A = Error acknowledged
B
A
C
D
BX500122
•
Press the
2
key next to the
softkey to
scrolls one page up.
•
Press the
4
key next to the
•
softkey to
scrolls one line up.
•
Press the
6
key next to the
8
key next to the
softkey to
scrolls one page down
•
softkey to
Press the
Press the
C
key next to the
softkey to
display current errors of the diesel engine.
scrolls one line down
IV - 139
Info Centre
Current diesel engine errors
The display shows the error list with the current errors
of the diesel engine.
Error codes are displayed with a sequential number.
Menu field (1) indicates the number of alarms present.
1
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• To display diesel engine fault storage, activate the
D
key under the
softkey.
A
B
C
D
BX500123_4
Meaning of line A
Seq.
Sequence number
SRC
Source address: Address from control unit to error messages
0: ECM control unit on the engine
SPN
Suspect Parameter Number: Identification of the error code
FMI
Failure Mode Identification: Identification of the error message
CNT
Counter: Recording the error frequency
Diesel engine fault storage
The display shows the fault storage of the diesel
engine.
Error codes, the status, date and time are indicated
with a sequential number.
Menu field (1) indicates the number of alarms present.
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• Status
1 = Error set
2 = Error deleted
• To scroll to the
To scroll to the
end of a list, use the
top, use the
8
7
key.
key.
A
B
C
D
BX500124_3
• To display current errors, activate the
under the
•
Press the
key
softkey.
key on the rotary potentiometer to
open the menu level.
IV - 140
A
Info Centre
Error list „Informative events“
The „Current errors“ menu appears.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500121
•
Activating the
7
key calls the „Informative
events“ menu.
The „Informative events“ menu records the
following messages:
• 3507 Diesel engine maintenance
• 3508 Air filter contamination
• 3509 Hydraulic oil filling level
• 4301 Metal in feed drive!
• 7016 Stone detected!
• 42 DRC parking brake active
• 45 Travelling gear release (S3) not switched
Menu control:
•
Activating the
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500663
A
key under the
softkey
brings up the basic screen.
•
Activating the
B
key under the
softkey
brings up the current alarm list.
•
Activating the
2
key next to the
softkey
scrolls one page up
•
Activating the
4
key next to the
softkey
key next to the
softkey
scrolls one line up
•
Activating the
4
scrolls one line down
•
Activating the
8
key next to the
softkey
scrolls one page down
•
Activating the
D
key under the
softkey
brings up the „Service events“ menu.
IV - 141
Info Centre
Error list "Service events"
The "Service events" menu contains the following
events with the time stamp:
• 60000 Update completed
• 60001 Service performed for diesel engine 1
• 60002 Service performed for diesel engine 2
• 60003 Error list deleted
• 60004 Error deleted
• 60005 Max. speed changed
• 60006 Front tyre size changed
• 60007 Rear tyre size changed
• 60008 Max. road speed changed
• 60009 DRC software updated
• 60010 DRC parameter set updated
• 60011 ERR-INIT
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500664
Menu control:
•
Activating the
A
key under the
softkey
brings up the basic screen.
•
Activating the
2
key next to the
softkey
scrolls one page up
•
Activating the
4
key next to the
softkey
key next to the
softkey
scrolls one line up
•
Activating the
6
scrolls one line down
•
Activating the
8
key next to the
softkey
scrolls one page down
•
Pressing the
C
key next to the
takes back you to the "Informative
Events" menu.
IV - 142
softkey
Info Centre
4.12
Menu 4-3 „Service level“
The main menu level is active.
•
Select main menu 4-3 with the rotary potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
The „Service level“ is protected by a password and is
accessible only to the Krone service staff.
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
takes you one menu level back.
A
B
C
D
BX500125_1
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500126_1
IV - 143
Info Centre
4.13
Menu 4-4 „Information“
The main menu level is active.
•
•
Select main menu 4-4 with the rotary potentiometer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Press the rotary potentiometer.
The display shows menu level 4-4 „Information“.
The main menu, „Settings“, is divided up into three
menus:
•
= Menu 4-1 „Joystick“
•
= Menu 4-2 „Software“
•
= Menu 4-3 „Machine“
•
Pressing the
A
B
C
D
BX500127_1
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
4.13.1
Menu 4-4-1 „Joystick“
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The main menu „Information“ is active.
•
•
Select menu 4-4-1 „Joystick“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
„Joystick information“ appears.
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
A
B
C
D
BX500128_1
takes you one menu level back.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500129_2
IV - 144
Info Centre
4.13.2
Menu 4-4-2 „Software“
The main menu „Information“ is active.
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select menu 4-4-2 „Software“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
„Software information“ appears.
The display shows the software versions of the various
controllers.
A
B
C
D
BX500130
Page 1
= Terminal
•
If the versions of resources and DLLs
(Userware) do not match for the terminal, the version numbers appear in
red.
•
= DRC
•
= KMC2
•
= KMC3
If the KMC2 and KMC3 software is not
designed for your machine type, the
version numbers appear in red
•
Activating the
•
potentiometer causes the second page to be
displayed on the rotary potentiometer.
To show or hide extended information, press the
key
1
or
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500131_1
key or turning the rotary
B
.
2
Page 2
•
= Joystick
•
= CU
•
= Manual operation
•
= EMR
•
Activating the
•
potentiometer causes the fourth page to be
displayed on the rotary potentiometer.
To show or hide extended information, press the
key
1
or
key or turning the rotary
C
2
.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500132_1
IV - 145
Info Centre
Page 3
•
= Autopilot
•
= Metal detection
•
= ADM1 (Daimler-Motor) /
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MFR (MAN-Motor)
= ADM2 (Daimler-Motor Big X 800/1000)
•
• Activating the
•
key or turning the rotary
D
potentiometer causes the fourth page to be
displayed on the rotary potentiometer.
To show or hide extended information, press the
key
1
or
A
B
C
D
BX500133_1
.
2
Page 4
•
= DIOM
•
= AutoScan (optional)
•
= RockProtect (optional)
• Activating the
•
Pressing the
•
takes you one menu level back.
To show or hide extended information, press the
1
IV - 146
or
key on the rotary potentiometer
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key or turning the rotary
A
potentiometer causes the third page to be displayed
on the rotary potentiometer.
key
1
.
A
B
C
D
BX500134_1
Info Centre
4.13.3
Menu 4-4-3 „Machine“
The main menu „Information“ is active.
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select menu 4-4-3 „Machine“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
„Machine information“ appears.
The display shows machine information.
B
A
C
D
BX500136_1
(1) Machine number
(2) Engine setting
(3) Engine number
(4) Reference number EDC Master
(5) Software version EDC Master
(6) Reference number EDC Slave
(7) Software version EDC Slave
(8) Software version MFR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B
A
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX851006
4.13.4
Menu 4-4-8 "Display Software
Packages"
The main menu "Information" is active.
•
•
Select menu 4-4-8 "Display Software Packages"
with the rotary potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The "Display Software Packages" is shown.
B
A
The display shows the software packages of the
machine:
(1) BiG X FuelSave or BiG X FuelSave Advanced
(2) BiG X ISOBUS ECU
C
D
BX851010
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Status Displays
Option is released
Option is not released
A
B
C
D
BX851011
IV - 147
Info Centre
4.14 Menu 5 „Basic Screen“
The main menu is active.
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select menu 5 "Basic screen" with the rotary
potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
The „Basic screen“ is displayed.
A
B
C
D
BX500137
A
4.14.1
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX850875
Error message
If an error occurs on the machine, the error message
appears in the display.
The error message and the fault code are displayed.
•
The error message can be confirmed with the
A
•
key under softkey
key under the softkey
3
4
5
6
7
8
B
.
A
For a list of error messages, error
description, potential error reason and
remedy of error, please refer to
appendix A – Error messages.
Errors of the diesel engine are always
displayed by means of an error
message and an engine warning light
IV - 148
2
.
The acoustic signal can be turned off with the
that lights up.
1
.
B
C
D
BX500138
Info Centre
4.14.2 Information message
If one or several conditions are not met to carry out an
action, the information message will be displayed in the
information section of settings (IV).
The information message and the information code are
displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Acknowledging the information message
•
The error message can be confirmed with the
key under softkey
A
A
.
B
C
D
BX500162
4.15 Printer Connection (option)
The information items listed below can be printed with
the aid of the printer.
•
Individual customer records or all
•
= operating hour counter (h)
•
= drum hours counter (h)
•
= working hours counter (h)
•
= surface counter (ha)
•
= road odometer (km)
•
= fuel consumption (l)
Create connection:
•
•
•
Connect the printer via the diagnostics socket (see
chapter 3 „Diagnostics socket“) in the console.
Insert the paper as explained in the printer’s
operating instructions.
The printer is now ready for operation.
4.15.1
Printing Customer Data
To print customer records, activate the
the
B
V
key under
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500169
softkey to switch to the „Customer data
counter“ submenu
If there is no printer available, or no
printer ready for operation, the
symbol does not appear.
•
Press the
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key to bring up the „Customer data“
print menu.
Before bringing up the „Customer
data“ menu, make certain the
customer record you want to print is
selected in the Customer data counter
menu.
A
B
C
D
BX500195
IV - 149
Info Centre
4.15.2
Customer Data Print Menu
Menu overview:
(1) = Use the
key to select the displayed
1
customer record for printing.
(2) = Select all customer records to be printed with the
key.
2
(3) = Use the
3
key to select the last selected
1
cultivated area counter or the one that was
entered in the „Customer data counter“ menu for
printing.
(4) = Select all cultivated area counters of a customer
record to be printed with the
4
2
3
10
key.
(5) =
(6) =
(7)=
(8)=
(9) =
Paper feed
Start printer
Stop print job
Bring up basic screen
Switch to „Customer data counter“ menu
(10)
=
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4
9
Counter is selected for printing.
A
8
B
5
C
D
6
7
BX500193
Counter will not be printed
•
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
desired counter. The entry box is highlighted in
colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can activate or deactivate the counter for
printing with the rotary potentiometer.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection field.
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
4.15.3
•
To print a customer record or
records:
The customer record to be printed
must previously be selected in the
„Customer data counter“ menu. (If
necessary switch to the customer data
counter menu with the $$$ key and
and select the desired customer data
record)
Select the displayed customer record for printing
with the
the
•
7
1
key and start the print process with
key.
To print all customer records, press the
and then start the print process with the
2
7
key
key.
All counters will be printed for which
the counter status is greater than zero.
IV - 150
Info Centre
4.15.4
Printing Cultivated Area Counter
States
• Use the
3
1
3
10
key to select the last selected cultivated
2
area counter or the one that was entered in the
„Customer data counter“ menu for printing. Start the
print process with the
•
You can use the
7
9
8
key.
7
A
B
C
D
Printing all customer records and all cultivated
area counter states
•
First press the
•
Then activate the
the
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5
area counters of a customer record. Start the print
process with the
2
4
key
key to select all cultivated
4
1
6
7
BX500193
key.
4
key and start printing with
key.
All counters will be printed for which
the counter status is greater than zero.
4.15.5
Description of Printer Errors
Error message
Icon
Description
No paper. Insert paper and restart the print process.
The print buffer is full. Restart the terminal and repeat the print process.
No CAN connection to the printer. Check the cabling to the printer.
IV - 151
Info Centre
4.16 Battery Change on the Terminal
The back-up battery in the terminal ensures the
parameters saved in the computer remain intact even if
the main battery switch is turned off, for example.
The back-up battery must be replaced if the
corresponding error message is displayed:
Error no. 5000, "Display battery empty"
When replacing the battery, the voltage
to the machine must not be switched off
as data will be lost otherwise.
4.16.1 Procedure for Replacing the
Battery
•
•
•
•
Turn on the ignition to ignition stage 2.
Wait until the Work icon appears in the terminal.
Unscrew the screw (1) and push the clamping ring
in the direction of the terminal (see direction of
arrow).
Carefully remove the terminal in the direction of
arrow and put it on the cover of the operating
console.
1
WHBBX03429
•
•
Unscrew all screws (1) at the edge of the rear cover
(2) of the terminal.
Fold down the cover carefully in the direction of
arrow from the terminal.
1
2
WHBBX03553
•
Loosen the battery carefully with a suitable
screwdriver and remove it from the support (push it
out to the top).
Do not damage the battery
compartment and do not cause any
short circuits. If a short circuit is
caused, the terminal may be
destroyed.
•
•
•
•
Observe the polarity and insert a new battery.
Switch the ignition off and on again.
Check the terminal for functionality.
Fasten the terminal.
IV - 152
1
WHBBX03550
Info Centre
4.17 "Setting of the constant power load limit control" menu
appears (option)
•
Press the key
D
on the basic screen to change
to the mask "Joystick-Memory-Keys"/"Machine
Settings".
The changes become effective
immediately.
In doing so, the forage harvester can
be adapted to the respective
circumstances during its use.
•
Press the
C
key to bring up the next page „Set-
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500012_2
tings of the load limit control“. (In maize mode,
press the
C
key twice, because additional
settings can be made).
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500014_1
IV - 153
Info Centre
Entering the degree of speed reduction
Speed reduction can be set dependent
on speed and engine duty.
Speed-dependent entry:
Selection is effected via activation of the key:
1
= speed dependent (1)
•
Press the rotary potentiometer to switch to the
selection box (3). The box has a yellow background.
•
The degree of speed reduction can be increased or
decreased from 3% - 15% by turning the rotary
potentiometer engine to the left or right.
•
To accept and save the value, press the rotary
potentiometer again. The colour of the background
will change to light blue again.
A degree of speed reduction by 10%
means that, at a setpoint engine speed
of 2000 rpm, the engine speed of 1800
rpm will be controlled by increasing
or reducing the speed of the travelling
gear.
Engine duty-dependent entry:
1
3
4
9
6
5
7
8
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500608_2
In the screen mask for speed-dependent motor
spinning the following values are displayed:
• Switching speed control/ torque control (1) (current
setting)
• Setpoint engine speed (just for speed control) (3)
• Actual speed diesel engine (4)
• Nominal speed (5)
• Setpoint motor spinning or setpoint moment (6)
• Maximum speed (7)
• Minimum speed (8)
• Engine capacity (9)
Selection is effected via activation of the key:
2
= dependent on engine capacity utilization (2)
2
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select setting
(2). The selection box is highlighted in colour.
•
•
•
Press the rotary potentiometer to switch to the
selection box (3). The box has a yellow background.
The degree of speed reduction can be increased or
decreased from 65% - 95% by turning the rotary
potentiometer engine to the left or right.
To accept and save the value, press the rotary
potentiometer again. The colour of the background
will change to light blue again.
4
1
2
3
4
7
5
6
8
7
8
9
6
5
A
B
C
D
BX500610_2
The changes become effective
immediately.
In doing so, the forage harvester can
be adapted to the respective
circumstances during its use.
IV - 154
Info Centre
Setting the maximum speed
Press the rotary potentiometer to select the input field
for the maximum speed.
•
•
Pressing the rotary potentiometer once will mark the
input field.
The colour of the background will change to yellow,
and the value of the maximum speed can be
increased or decreased by turning the rotary
potentiometer to the left or to the right.
To accept and save the value, press the rotary
potentiometer again.
The colour of the background will change to light
blue again.
1
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500608_1
The load limit control will now accelerate the travelling
gear up
to the speed at which it is set.
The changes become effective
immediately.
In doing so, the forage harvester can
be adapted to the respective
circumstances during its use.
Setting the minimum speed
Press the rotary potentiometer to select the input field
for the maximum speed.
•
•
Pressing the rotary potentiometer once will mark the
input field.
The colour of the background will change to yellow,
and the value of the minimum speed can be
reduced or increased by turning the rotary
potentiometer to the left or to the right.
To accept and save the value, press the rotary
potentiometer again.
The colour of the background will change to light
blue again.
2
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500609_1
The load limit control will now delay the travelling gear
to the speed at which it is set.
The changes become effective
immediately.
In doing so, the forage harvester can
be adapted to the respective
circumstances during its use.
IV - 155
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18 Yield recording system
CropControl
The CropControl system enables a complete yield
recording and documentation of the harvested areas.
1
The CropControl system does not
present a measuring device as
defined by law via measurement and
calibration (Eichgesetz).
The electronic equipment of the CropControl system
consists essentially of the job computer, an operation
terminal and the sensors.
ERT00006_2
Functions of the job computer (1):
•
•
•
•
Yield counter
Reading the signals
Transfer of alarm messages
Diagnostics sensors
The operation terminal communicates information to
the driver and performs settings to operate the
CropControl system. This information is received and
further processed by the job computer.
4.18.1 Operating CropControl system with
operation terminal Beta
4.18.2 Mounting operation terminal Beta
Mount the control unit with its support (3) where it
can be seen by the driver following the Operating
Manual.
•
4
3
2
Attach the control unit (2) onto the support (3) and
press onto the support (3).
The control unit (2) is fixed by the magnetic plate
(4) on the support (3).
ERT00008
•
Connect the control unit (2) according to assembly
instructions with the cable for CropControl (1) in
the console.
2
1
ERT00040_1
IV - 156
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.3 Operation terminal Beta
4.18.3.1 Overview
9
1, 2, 3 Keys for softkey
4
Menu key
5
"+" key
6
Esc key
7
"+" key
8
OK key
9
Display
1
3
2
4
7
5
6
8
ERT00009_1
IV - 157
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.3.2 Description of the keys
Keys 1-3
The keys 1-3 are used to activate the softkeys located
in the line just above them.
For the assignment of the keys, see the illustration.
If there is no softkey above the key it has no function.
Key 4
The
key can be used to bring up the menu level.
Key 5 and key 7
Use the
and
keys to change the settings
and to select the desired menu at the menu level.
Key 6
Use the
key to go to the previous screen or
previous menu level.
Holding the key down slightly longer takes you back to
the basic screen.
1
3
2
4
7
5
6
8
Key 8
You can use the
key to save settings, bring up
selected menus or switch back and forth between
display formats for yield recording (kg, t/h and t/ha).
ERT00039_1
4.18.4 Operational Readiness
Switching ON
To turn on the CropControl System,
turn on the ignition of the forage
harvester. It does not need to be
turned on separately.
After you have switched the unit on, the connection to
the job computer is established.
ERT00010
If it is not possible to set up a connection, data
connection interrupted, the message shown on the right
appears in the display.
The CAN connections and job computer must be checked.
If the connection is established, the basic screen
appears after a brief time.
IV - 158
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.5 Brief instruction
Start yield recording:
Switch on control, press keys
and
and to
select the desired area and operate softkey ON.
If such amount of foraged crops is now fed that the bar
is outside the hatching, the mass will be added up
according to the excursion.
To obtain an accurate result, the system must be
calibrated in the middle of the stock (average of the
stock) if possible. This is done by a control weighing.
Perform control weighing:
ERT00011_1
Initially, request an empty wagon with known tare
weight. Before filling the wagon, press the softkey
ON to start the control weighing. Now fill the wagon.
Make sure that no foraged crops are lost during cutting
and during transport. Once the wagon is full, terminate
the control weighing by pressing the softkey
ON,
send the wagon for weighing and request the weight of
the load.
Cutting can continue normally while you wait for the
value.
Enter weight of the control weighing:
Once the value of the control weighing is known, it can
be entered as follows:
ERT00027_1
Press the "
" softkey.
The "Yield counter" menu is displayed.
Press the "
" softkey.
The "Enter weighed mass" menu is displayed.
Use the softkeys
and
2
to enter the value of
the control weighing and save it using the key
.
The calibration factor will then be recalculated and the
measured mass will be corrected retrospectively for the
entire field.
Pressing the
esc
6
key twice brings up the basic screen.
For more detailed information, please read the
corresponding chapters.
6
1/1
400
???
0kg
X
ERT00041
IV - 159
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.6 Basic screen
4.18.6.1 Softkeys basic screen
The following softkeys are found in the lower line:
ON Start / stop control weighing
•
Start / stop control weighing
•
Press the
key for softkey "
ON
".
For more information see Section "Control weighing
and calibration"
ERT00011_1
Call yield counter
•
Call yield counter
•
Press the
key for softkey "
".
For further information, see the "Yield Counter"
chapter.
it is possible to
Using the softkey
enter the respective values for the
control weighing of the CropControl
system directly from the basic screen
•
ON start/stop yield counter
Start/stop yield counter
•
Press the
key for softkey "ON".
For further information, see the "Starting / stopping
yield counter" chapter.
Chose between display formats
Click
to select display of recorded yield in the
basic screen. You can chose between display formats
t, t/h and t/ha.
IV - 160
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.7 Basic screen graphic display
Description of the graphic display:
ON
Yield counter has been stopped
Yield counter has been started
Area (the value (1) indicates the
area that is currently selected)
You can use the
and
keys to select among
the 50 areas.
After the yield counter has been started (visible from
softkey "ON" being represented in reverse colours), no
other area can be selected.
1
2
3
To be able to select a different area,
the yield counter must first be
stopped.
•
Depending on the selection, the value (2) shows the
current weight of the selected cultivated area in t,
the current machine throughput in t/h or the current
yield in t/ha. Throughput and current yield are only
shown when the yield counter is started.
•
The display "3" indicates the current excursion of
the rear top pre-compression roller.
ERT00012_1
The yield counter can only be active when the bar in
the display is outside the hatching.
The value range for the hatching is determined by the
minimum excursion. (refer to menu 1-3 "Minimum
excursion setting")
If the display bar is far outside the
hatching in no-load operation, this
indicates significant dirt at the feed
drive, which must be removed.
IV - 161
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.8 Start / stop yield counter
The following conditions must be met so that the yield
counter can operate correctly.
•
•
•
•
Feed drive is moving
Front attachment down
Machine is moving
Excursion larger than minimum excursion
Start yield counter:
ON
•
Yield counter has been stopped
Yield counter has been started
Press the
key for softkey "ON" (softkey
"ON" is displayed in reverse colours, the yield
counter has been started).
Pressing the key once again will stop the yield counter,
(softkey "ON" is no longer displayed in reverse
colours.)
Yield is only counted when the icon
appears in the display,
otherwise not.
IV - 162
ERT00042
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.9 Control weighing and calibration
To achieve a high accuracy of the yield measurement,
the CropControl system must be calibrated. For this, at
least one (but max. 10) control weighings must be
performed for each area and each fruit sort.
To obtain correct measurement values, counter
weighing should be performed in the middle of the
stock and not at the edge of the field.
A maximum of 10 control weighings are
available for each area.
Recalculation of the calibration factor
initiates the correction of the measured
mass retrospectively for the entire field.
If several control weighings are
performed (max. 10), the calibration
factor is calculated from the average of
the up to 10 control weighings.
•
The yield counter has been started.
(
Yield counter has been started)
•
Press the
key for softkey
ERT00013_1
ON.
(Softkey "
ON " is displayed in reverse colours
while control weighing is running.)
The display shows the basic screen with the additional
information control weighing in that the current control
weighing and the respective mass are displayed.
Yield is only counted when the icon
appears in the display,
otherwise not.
•
Fill wagon
Accuracy can be influenced positively by
selecting a trailer load for the control
weighing that corresponds to the
average of the entire field. Travelling
speed and engine capacity should also
be average.
Pressing the key
weighing, (softkey "
reverse colours.)
•
once again will stop the control
ON " is no longer displayed in
Then, weigh the load of the trailer and enter the
determined value according to Section "2.3.4
Entering the weighed mass".
Cutting can continue normally while you
wait for the value of the weighing. It is
still possible to start a second control
weighing directly.
IV - 163
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.10 Menu Level
4.18.10.1
Overview
1
Path recorder calibration
1-2
Pressure sensor calibration
1-3
1
min
Setting
Minimum excursion
1-4
2
Contrast
Yield counter
4
Service
4-2
5
Manual sensor test
Information
4-3
Current alarms
ERT00014
4.18.10.1.1 Bringing up a Menu Level
•
Press the
key (1).
The menu level is shown in the display.
You can exit the menu level again with the
(2).
esc
6
key
1
2
ERT00015_1
IV - 164
CropControl Operating Instructions
The menu level is divided into 4 main menus:
1
•
1
•
2
= Main menu. 2 "Yield counter"
•
4
= Main menu 4 "Service"
•
5
= Main Menu 5 „Information“
•
You can use the
= Main menu 1 "Settings"
BPM50270
and
keys to select
the main menus. The selected icon is shown in
reverse colours.
•
Pressing the
key brings up the menu level
of the main menu that is selected.
•
Use the
esc
6
key to close the menu currently
displayed.
4.18.10.2
Main menu 1 "Settings"
Calling the main menu
•
Call the main menu with the
•
You can select main menu 1 "Settings
with the
or
1
key.
1
"
keys. The icon is shown in
reverse colours.
•
Press the
key.
BPM50270
The display shows menu level 1 "Settings".
Menu level 1 "Settings" is divided into 4 menus:
•
1
= Menu 1-1 "Calibration of path
recorder"
•
1-2
1-1
= Menu 1-2 "Calibration of pressure
sensor"
•
1-3
min
= Menu 1-3 "Minimum excursion
setting"
•
1-4
= Menu 1-4 "Contrast"
ERT00016
IV - 165
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.10.2.1 Menu 1-1 "Calibration of path
recorder"
Before placing the machine in service the first time and
after any assembly work on the path recorder, it must
be calibrated. For this, it must be ensured that no
crops are in the feed drive and that the precompression rollers have been moved to the bottom
limit stop.
Displaying the menu
Main menu 1 "Settings" appears
•
Use the
"
and
1
1-1
keys to select menu 1.1
Calibration of path recorder". The icon
is shown in reverse colours.
•
Press the
key.
The display shows menu 1-1 "Calibration of path
recorder".
ERT00016
The
icon in the upper line indicates that the
displayed values are saved.
•
Press the
key for softkey
. The icon
appears in reverse colours for a short while. The
calibration value of the path recorder is
displayed; the symbol
in the upper line will
1-1
val: 791 mV
disappear.
The calibration value must be between
500 mV and 1000 mV.
•
Press the
key. The calibration value is
saved and the
icon appears in the upper
line.
•
Use the
esc
6
key to close the menu currently
displayed.
The display shows menu level 1 "Settings".
•
Pressing the
screen.
IV - 166
esc
6
key twice brings up the basic
ERT00017
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.10.2.2 Menu 1-2 "Calibration of pressure
sensor"
The pressure sensor must be calibrated before placing
the machine in service the first time, after any
assembly work and weekly during operation. For this, it
must be ensured that no crops are in the feed drive and
that the pre-compression rollers have been moved to
the bottom limit stop.
Displaying the menu
1-2
Main menu 1 "Settings" appears
•
Use the
"
1-2
and
keys to select menu 1.2
Calibration of pressure sensor". The
icon is shown in reverse colours.
•
Press the
key.
min
The display shows menu 1-2 "Calibration of pressure
sensor".
The
ERT00018
icon in the upper line indicates that the
displayed values are saved.
The value in the middle (1) underneath the bar
indicates the current drive pressure. The value on the
left (2) is the calibration value "maximum feed drive
speed", the value on the right (3) is the calibration
value "maximum feed drive speed".
To calibrate the pressure sensor, proceed according to
the following steps one after the other:
•
Set the lifting gear to working position (not lifted)
•
Switch on cutting drum
•
Switch on feed drive
•
Adjust engine to working speed (1950 rpm)
„
Set chop length to minimum possible value
•
Press the
key for softkey
1-2
43bar
47bar
67bar
ERT00019
1-2
, the symbol is
shown in reverse colours.
The symbol
•
•
in the upper line will disappear
and calibration is started. An arrow will appear
underneath the hatching on the left.
Slowly increase chop length until the bar is
within the hatching on the left.
Wait for a short time
43bar
47bar
67bar
ERT00020
IV - 167
CropControl Operating Instructions
•
The left calibration will be overwritten. The arrow
underneath the hatching on the left will disappear
and an arrow will appear underneath the hatching on
the right.
•
Slowly increase chop length once again until the bar
is within the hatching on the right.
•
Wait for a short time
•
The right calibration will be overwritten. The arrow
underneath the hatching on the right will disappear
and the softkey
is no longer displayed in reverse
colours.
•
Press the
key. The calibration values are
icon appears in the upper line.
saved and the
•
Use the
esc
6
key to close the menu currently
displayed.
The display shows menu level 1 "Settings".
•
Pressing the
screen.
IV - 168
esc
6
key twice brings up the basic
1-2
43bar
47bar
67bar
ERT00021
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.10.2.3 Menu 1-3 "Minimum excursion
setting"
Use the minimum excursion to set from what excursion
of the pre-compression rollers the measurement is
started. The higher the minimum excursion setting, the
more crops must flow through the rollers to activate the
yield counter.
1-3
min
Standard value for minimum excursion: 5 mm
Displaying the menu
Main menu 1 "Settings" appears
ERT00012
•
Use the
and
keys to select menu 1.3
"Calibration of minimum excursion". The icon is
shown in reverse colours.
•
key.
Press the
1-3
The display shows menu 1-3 "Minimum excursion
setting".
min
The
icon in the upper line indicates that the
displayed values are saved.
5mm
The minimum excursion can be set in
the range from 0mm to 30mm
DEF
ERT00023
The bar display and the value on the right next to it
indicate the set minimum excursion.
•
You can use the
and
keys to adjust the
desired minimum excursion. The
line goes out.
•
Press the
and the
icon in the top
key. The calibration value is saved
icon appears in the upper line.
Set minimum excursion to factory setting
•
Press the key
for softkey "DEF", the icon will
be displayed in reverse colours for a short while,
and the minimum excursion is reset to the factory
setting. The symbol
disappear.
•
Press the
saved and the
in the upper line will
key. The minimum excursion is
icon appears in the upper line.
IV - 169
CropControl Operating Instructions
•
Use the
esc
6
key to close the menu currently
displayed.
The display shows menu level 1 "Settings".
•
Pressing the
esc
6
key twice brings up the basic
screen.
4.18.10.2.4 Menu 1-4 "Contrast"
1-4
Displaying the menu
Main menu 1 "Settings" appears
•
Use the
1-4
and
min
keys to select menu 1-4
"Contrast", the icon will be in reverse
colours.
•
Press the
key.
ERT00025
The display shows menu 1-1 "Contrast".
The progress bar indicates the contrast value set.
The
icon in the upper line indicates that the
1-4
displayed value is saved.
Setting and saving the contrast
The higher the bar, the stronger the contrast in the
display.
•
Use the
and
keys to set the contrast. The
icon in the top line goes out.
ERT00024
•
Press the
key, the set contrast value will be
saved,the icon
•
Use the
esc
6
the upper line will disappear.
key to close the menu currently
displayed.
The display shows menu level 1 "Settings".
•
Pressing the
screen.
IV - 170
esc
6
key twice brings up the basic
CropControl Operating Instructions
Day/night design
Switching from day to night design reduces background
lighting.
Night design:
•
Press the
key for softkey
1-4
.
Background lighting is reduced.
Day design:
•
key for softkey
Press the
.
Background lighting is increased.
•
Use the
esc
6
ERT00024
key to close the menu currently
displayed menu.
•
Pressing the
esc
6
key twice brings up the basic
screen.
IV - 171
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.10.3
Main menu. 2 "Yield counter"
Calling the main menu
•
Call the main menu with the
•
Use the
"
2
and
key.
4
keys to select main menu 2
Yield counter", the icon is displayed in
reverse colours.
•
Press key
.
The display shows menu 2 "Yield counter".
ERT00026
4.18.10.3.1 "Yield counter"
The total mass is displayed for each area.
•
or
key to pre-select the
Use the
requested area. The pre-selected area is
displayed in reverse colours.
At the end of the list, maximally 2 fields without mass
(0kg) are visible.
ERT00027_1
4.18.10.3.2 Printing the values
If a CAN printer is connected to the diagnostics
interface of the machine, the values of the yield
counter can be printed.
•
•
Press the
key for softkey
the value for the pre-selected field.
Press
key for softkey
to print out
for longer than 3s
to print out the values for all fields.
Press the
key for softkey
Press the
key for softkey
and hold it
and hold it
down for longer than 3s to delete the values for
the entire yield counter.
IV - 172
On average determined
calibration value for the denoted
field.
The mass entered by the driver
at the 1. calibration
The mass entered by the driver
at the 2. calibration
Specific weight determined at
the 2. calibration.
down for 1 second to delete the value for the
pre-selected field.
•
Determined weight of
denoted field (here field 4).
Specific weight determined at
the 1. calibration.
4.18.10.3.3 Deleting the values
•
Description of print out of CropControl
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.10.3.4 Entering the weighed mass
If at least one control weighing is available for a field,
the respective weighed mass can be entered as
follows:
•
Select the area for that a weighed mass is to be
entered as described in Section "2.3.1 Yield
counter".
•
Press the
key for softkey
or key
.
The display shows the menu "Entering the weighed
mass".
The
icon in the upper line indicates that the
2
displayed values are saved.
The value (1) indicates the current calibration factor for
the selected area (in this example area 7). It is
determined from the factors of the individual control
weighings.
6
1/1
As long as no calibration factor has been
saved for the displayed field, the factor
from the previous field is displayed and
is used for calculating the mass.
The value (2) indicates the selected control weighing.
In the adjacent picture, the 2nd control weighing from a
total of 4 control weighings is selected.
•
and
Use the key
control weighing.
X
ERT00028
2
to select the requested
The value (3) indicates the calibration factor for the
selected control weighing. If not factor has been saved,
this is indicated by a question mark.
•
Use the keys
softkey
for softkey
and
400
???
0kg
7
2/4
534
???
12370kg
X
for
to enter the weighed mass for the
ERT00029
selected control weighing. The symbol
in the
upper line will disappear.
•
Press the
2
key. The entered mass is saved, the
calibration factor is recalculated and the
appears in the upper line.
icon
7
2/4
534
520
12370kg
X
ERT00030
IV - 173
CropControl Operating Instructions
Recalculation of the calibration factor
initiates the correction of the
measured mass retrospectively for the
entire field.
Deleting the control weighing
If an error has occurred when entering the weighed
mass and the correct value is no longer known, it is
possible to delete the respective control weighing.
•
Press the
key for softkey
to delete the
value for the selected control weighing. The symbol
in the upper line will disappear.
•
Press the
key. The change is saved, the
calibration factor is recalculated and the
icon
appears in the upper line.
•
Use the
esc
6
key to close the menu currently
displayed.
The display shows menu 2 "Yield counter".
•
Pressing the
screen.
IV - 174
esc
6
key twice brings up the basic
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.10.3.5 Entering the calibration factor
directly
If no control weighing is available for a field, it is
possible to enter a calibration factor directly. However,
this calibration does not necessarily reflect the
characteristics of the field.
The accuracy that can be achieved by direct entering
of the calibration factor strongly depends on the
experience of the operator.
The calibration factor should therefore only be entered
if it is not possible to carry out a control weighing and
the current calibration factor appears to be unrealistic.
However, if the direct entry of the calibration factor
function is to be used repeatedly, it is purposeful to
compile an own table for each fruit sort from
experience values in that the calibration factors for the
different degrees of ripeness and moisture contents are
saved.
A calibration factor can only be entered for fields that either contain the
mass 0 kg or for that not control
weighing has yet been carried out.
The factor can be entered as follows:
•
Select the field for that a calibration factor is to be
entered as described in Section "2.3.1 Yield
counter".
•
Press the
key for softkey
or key
.
ERT00031_1
2
The display shows the menu "Entering the calibration
factor".
The
8
0
0
icon in the upper line indicates that the
displayed values are saved.
•
Use the keys
softkey
for softkey
and
for
to enter the calibration factor for the
selected field. The symbol
in the upper line will
ERT00032
disappear.
•
Press the
key. The calibration factor is saved
icon appears in the upper line.
and the
•
Use the
esc
6
key to close the menu currently
displayed.
2
8
510
510
The display shows menu 2 "Yield counter".
•
Pressing the
esc
6
key twice brings up the basic
screen.
ERT00033
IV - 175
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.10.4
Main menu 4 "Service"
Calling the main menu
•
You can select main menu 4 "
or
the
4
Service" with
4
keys. The icon is shown in reverse
colours.
•
Press the
key.
The display shows menu level 4 "Service".
Menu level 4 "Service" is divided into two menus:
•
= Menu 4-2 "Manual sensor test"
•
ERT00043
4-2
= Menu 4-5 "Current alarms"
ERT00034
4.18.10.4.1 Menu 4-2 "Manual sensor test"
In the manual sensor test, the sensors fitted on the
machine for the CropControl system are tested for
errors.
4-2
Main menu 4 "Service" is called.
•
You can select the menu 4-2 "
test" with the
Manual sensor
keys. The icon is shown in
reverse colours.
•
Press the
ERT00034
key.
The display shows menu 4-2 "Manual sensor test".
Selecting the sensor
•
Select the sensor with the
4-2
B73
and
5,1V
keys.
The selected sensor at the left in the display is shown
in reverse colours and is tested.
state
0,9V
1,6V
ERT00035
IV - 176
CropControl Operating Instructions
Diagnostics – analogue sensors
Possible status messages (state):
•
7
•
8
= Broken cable or short circuit
Error
= Defect in the sensor or job computer
Setting values:
The bar (1) must be inside the marked area (2) of the
bar display.
B73
Analogue Sensors
No. Icon
B72
B72
4-2
Description
Path recorder (must always be
state
in the marked area).
B73
B73
5,1V
2
0,9V
1
1,6V
Pressure sensor (must always be
ERT00044
in the marked area).
Diagnostics power supply voltages
Nominal voltages:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
12 V tot.:
12 V Ter:
SS_5V:
8 V ana:
8 V dig:
12 V P2:
12 V P3:
3V Bat
N°
Icon
12 - 14.5 V
12 - 14.5 V
4.5 - 5.5 V
8.5 - 9.1 V
8.5 - 9.1 V
12 - 14.5 V
12 - 14.5 V
>2,5 V
U1
Description
BPM50490
U1
U1
Supply voltage
IV - 177
CropControl Operating Instructions
Diagnostic dates
N°
Icon
Description
D630
Speed (rpm) of the feed drive (if the
feed drive is running, the speed
(rpm) of the feed drive must appear
here)
D730
Machine is cutting (when the
machine is cutting, "OK" appears,
otherwise "OFF".)
D731
Forage harvester counter (if the
machine is cutting and also
moving, the counter must be
incremented)
•
Use the
esc
6
key to close the menu currently
U1
BPM50500
U1
displayed menu.
The display shows menu level 4 "Service".
•
Pressing the
esc
6
key twice brings up the basic
screen.
BPM50501
U1
BPM50502
U1
BPM50503
IV - 178
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.10.4.2 Menu 4-5 "Current alarms"
Currently pending errors for the CropControl system are
displayed in the menu "Current alarms".
4-5
Calling the menu
Main menu 4 "Service" is called.
•
You can select the menu 4-5 "
alarms" with the
and
Current
keys. The icon is
shown in reverse colours.
•
Press the
ERT00036
key.
The display shows menu 4-5 "Current alarms".
Currently pending alarms are displayed in the
lower part (1) with the corresponding alarm
number (2).
4-5
1
1/2
B72
102
•
You can use the
or
keys to switch to
2
another window.
(only possible if there is more than one error present
at the same time)
•
Use the
esc
6
ERT00037
key to close the menu currently
displayed.
The display shows menu level 1 "Settings".
•
Pressing the
esc
6
key twice brings up the basic
5
screen.
4.18.10.4.3 Main Menu 5 “Info”
Calling the main menu
•
Call the main menu with the
•
You can select main menu 5
or
•
key.
5
BPM50340
with the
keys. The icon is shown in reverse colours.
Press the
key.
The display shows menu 5 “Info”.
•
= Version of the job computer
ERT00050
IV - 179
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.19 Alarm Message
If a malfunction occurs in the machine an alarm
message appears in the display and an audio signal is
heard at the same time (rapid-interval horn sound).
Description, possible cause and remedy are shown in
Chapter "3.1 General alarm messages".
101
B72
All functions in the menu that is
covered over are still active.
The softkeys that are covered by the
alarm message are disabled.
Stop audio signal:
•
Press the
key for softkey
.
key for softkey
, the alarm is
To reset alarm:
•
Press the
reset and the audio signal stops.
If the malfunction occurs again, the alarm message will
appear again.
To delete an alarm:
Alarms should only be deleted in
emergency situations.
Press the
key for softkey
and hold it
down 5 seconds. The alarm is deleted.
If the malfunction occurs again, no alarm message will
appear.
The alarm message does not appear when the
malfunction occurs until after the control unit is turned
off and back on.
IV - 180
ERT00038
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.19.1 General Messages
No.
Description
A01
Computer internal fuse Short circuit in case of the
supply via FU2
2 defective (only
yellow job computer)
A02
Fuse 3 defective
(self-repairing)
A03
CAN connection
interrupted
between terminal
and job computer
EEPROM error
A04
Possible cause
Short circuit in case of the
supply via 3A
Job computer defective
Replace the job computer
Backup battery faulty
A14
Undervoltage
Fuse -22F39 defective
A15
Overvoltage
A16
RAM error
A19
Counter will soon
Counter status too high
overflow (returns to 0).
101
Check wiring for short circuit,
replace job computer, if necessary
Check the CAN wiring
Undervoltage
backup battery
No.
Check wiring for short circuit.
Replace the fuse (just the yellow job
computer), replace the job computer, if
necessary
CAN wiring defective
A13
4.19.2
Remedy
Check backup battery and replace if
necessary battery
Replace fuse
Dynamo defective
Check the dynamo
Defective back-up battery
Job computer defective
Check the back-up battery and replace
it, if necessary
Replace the job computer, if
necessary
Use other field counter.
Delete field counter.
Physical alarm messages
Description
Possible cause
Remedy
Sensor or supply line defective
- Perform a sensor test
B72
Path recorder
- Check the sensor and supply line for
damage
102
B73
Pressure sensor
Sensor or supply line defective
- Perform a sensor test
- Check the sensor and supply line for
damage
IV - 181
CropControl
4.20
Operating CropControl System via KRONE CCI 200 Operation
Terminal or KRONE Delta Operation Terminal
The CropControl system enables a complete yield recording and documentation of the harvested
areas.
Note
The CropControl system does not present a measuring device as defined by law via
measurement and calibration.
Connecting the Terminal in case of Self-Propelled Machines
A
cc000606
Fig. 1
For the connection to a self-propelled machine, a special cable set “IN-CAB“ is required. It can be
ordered by stating KRONE number 20 082 207 1.
•
Connect interfaces “CAN1-IN” and “CAN1-OUT” on the terminal via “INCAB” cable with “INCAB”
bushing (A) of the machine.
•
Mount KRONE CCI 200 control unit or KRONE Delta control unit as described in the assembly
instructions and connect it.
Switch control unit on and off if CropControl is not connected to ISOBUS
Make sure that the connections on the device are correctly and firmly seated before the terminal is
switched on for the first time.
CC000890
•
Fig. 2
•
To switch the control unit on or off, press key (1) and hold it down for approx. 2 seconds.
For further information on the functioning of the terminal, observe the supplied terminal
operating instructions.
IV-182
CropControl
Switch terminal on/off if CropControl is connected to ISOBUS
0
CC000848
When switching it on the first time, the configuration of the specific menus of CropControl is loaded
into the terminal. The loading process may take a few minutes. The configuration is saved in the
memory of the terminal.
mm
Fig. 3
After loading process, the “basic screen” is shown in the display.
CropControl is ready for operation now.
F7
F1
F8
F2
F9
F3
F10
F4
F11
F5
F12
F6
CC000739
Design of the Display
Fig. 4
The display of the terminal is divided up into the following sections:
Status line (I)
–
The status displays of the machine.
Function keys (II) (F1 to F12)
–
CropControl is operated via function keys. The softkeys (graphics) belonging to the function keys
are touch sensitive.
Main window (III)
IV-183
CropControl
Status line (I)
F7
F1
F8
F2
F9
F3
F10
F4
F11
F5
F12
F6
Fig. 5
Status line (I)
Current states of CropControl are displayed in the upper line (I).
Graphic
Meaning
Information
Alarm message present.
1
1
Currently active control weighing for
the displayed cultivated area
Cultivated areas 1-50 are available.
Currently active control weighing for
the displayed cultivated area
Altogether, there is the possibility to
perform 500 control weighings.
CropControl counts yield.
The following conditions must be
fulfilled so that the CropControl yield
counts:
The field is active but CropControl
does not count yield.
IV-184
–
Intake turns
–
Header in working position
–
Machine moves forward
–
The excursion of the precompression rollers is bigger
than the set minimum excursion.
The machine is not chopping at the
moment or too little crop passes the
machine.
CropControl
Description of graphics (II) for function keys (F1 to F12)
Fig. 6
Softkey
Meaning
Information
One cultivated area back
Cultivated areas can only be selected
when there is no one active at the
moment.
One cultivated area forward
Stopping cultivated area.
The displayed cultivated area is
active.
Starting cultivated area.
The displayed cultivated area is not
active.
Bringing up menu level of CropControl
Starting/resetting loading counter
Starting or stopping control weighing
Bringing up yield counter menu
IV-185
CropControl
Display in the Basic Screen
3
4
1
5
2
6
CC000892
Fig. 7
Graphic
Meaning
1)
Excursion of the last pre-compression rollers
2)
Excursion of the last pre-compression roller as a numerical value
3)
Harvested yield from the selected cultivated area
4)
Momentary yield per area unit
5)
Momentary yield per time unit
6)
Payload
Selecting cultivated area
•
Select the desired cultivated area by using function keys
and
.
The selected cultivated area is displayed in the status line!
If a cultivated area has been started, no other cultivated area can be selected, the yield counter must
be stopped first.
Starting yield counter
•
Start the yield counter for the selected cultivated area by using
function key.
The selected cultivated area is displayed in the status line!
At the same time, function key
indicates that no yield counter has been started.
Stopping yield counter
•
Stop the yield counter for the selected cultivated area by using function key
The selected cultivated area is displayed in the status line!
At the same time, function key
IV-186
indicates that a yield counter has been started.
.
CropControl
Bringing up menu level
•
To bring up the menu level, press function key
, CropControl menu level is displayed.
For further information, please refer to chapter “Menu Level”.
Loading counter
The loaded weight can be defined via this function. Thus the total weight of the attachment can be
determined.
Note
The loading counter only shows the loaded weight when the CropControl has been calibrated
for the field via control weighings and the field is homogeneous with regard to humidity.
Otherwise, major differences may result.
Starting the loading counter
•
.
Start the loading counter by using function key
Stopping the loading counter
•
Stop the loading counter by using function key
and reset it at the same time.
Control Weighing and Calibration
To achieve a high accuracy of the yield measurement, it is necessary to calibrate the CropControl
system. For each cultivated area and fruit sort, perform at least one control weighing.
To obtain correct measurement values, perform control weighing in the middle and not at the edge of
the field.
After the control weighing has been completed and the entered weight of the control weighing has
been adopted, the correction factor will be recalculated. The recalculation of the correction factor
initiates the correction of the measured mass retrospectively for the entire cultivated area.
If several control weighings are performed, the correction factor is calculated from the average of the
total control weighings for the cultivated area.
Starting control weighing
•
Start control weighing by using function key
.
The number of the currently active control weighing is displayed in the status line.
If the symbol
does not appear in the status line, a cultivated area that contains the control
weighings must be deleted.
Stopping control weighing
•
Stop the currently active control weighing by using function key
.
IV-187
CropControl
Performing control weighing
Prerequisites:
•
The cultivated area is selected and the yield counter is started.
•
Path sensor and pressure sensor are calibrated.
•
Empty attachment with known tare weight is available.
•
The machine is at a standstill.
To achieve a high accuracy of the yield measurement, the following needs to be done for control
weighing:
•
Select a trailer load that represents the diameter of the entire field.
•
Drive with average driving speed and engine load.
Performing a control weighing:
•
Position the empty attachment next to the machine.
•
Start control weighing.
•
Load attachment. Caution: Make sure that the entire harvested crop is loaded onto the
attachment.
•
Stop control weighing if the attachment has been loaded.
•
Weigh attachment. Make sure that no crop is lost when driving to the scale.
•
Enter full weight minus tare weight of the attachment (added weight) for control weighing (refer to
“Enter the weighed mass of a control weighing”) and adopt the value for the calculation of the
correction factor.
While the weight of the weighing is determined, chopping can be continued and/or a further control
weighing can be carried out.
Yield counter menu
•
IV-188
Bring up the yield counter list by using function key
(refer to “Yield Counter List”).
CropControl
Menu Level
Short Overview
Main menu
Sub-menu
Designation
1
Settings
Setting Minimum Excursion
1
Calibration
2
Calibration Path Sensor
1
Calibration Pressure Sensor
2
13
Yield Counter of Individual Cultivated Areas
15
Service
Manual Sensor Test
1
Current Alarms
2
Information
4
Technician
5
IV-189
CropControl
Bringing up a Menu Level
mm
Fig. 8
•
Press
to bring up the menu level from the basic screen.
The menu level is divided into the following main menus:
Main Menu 1 "Settings"
Main menu 2 "Calibration"
Main menu 13 "Yield Counter"
Main menu 15 "Service"
or
to select the desired main menu.
Press function keys
The selected symbol is highlighted in grey.
IV-190
•
Pressing function key
•
Pressing function key
closes the called up menu.
•
Pressing function key
and holding it down brings up the basic screen.
brings up the menu level of the selected main menu.
CC000849
0
CC000848
1
CropControl
Main Menu 1 Settings
CC000849
1
Fig. 9
•
Bring up menu level by pressing function key
•
Select main menu 1
•
Press function key
from the basic screen.
by pressing function key
or
, the symbol is highlighted in grey.
.
The display shows menu level 1 “Settings”.
In main menu 1, the following sub-menu exists:
Menu 1-1 „Minimum Excursion"
IV-191
CropControl
Menu 1-1 Minimum Excursion
In menu 1-1 “Minimum Excursion”, you can set from what excursion of the pre-compression rollers the
measurement is started. The higher the minimum excursion setting, the more crops must flow through
the rollers to activate the yield counter.
1-1
1-1
min
CC000851
CC000850
min
Fig. 10
Calling the menu
Main menu 1 “Settings” is called.
•
Select menu 1-1
by pressing function keys
•
Press function key
.
or
, the symbol is highlighted in grey .
The display shows menu 1-1 „Minimum Excursion“.
The minimum excursion can be set between 0 and 30 mm.
The guide value to set the minimum excursion is 5 mm.
The symbol
•
Increase or reduce the desired value of minimum excursion via function key
symbol
•
in the upper line goes out.
Press function key
The symbol
IV-192
in the upper line indicates that the displayed value is saved.
.
in the upper line indicates that the displayed value is saved.
•
Pressing the function key
closes the called up menu
•
Pressing the function key
and holding it down brings up the basic screen
or
, the
CropControl
Main Menu 2 Calibration
CC000852
2
Fig. 11
•
Bring up menu level by pressing function key
•
Select main menu 2
grey.
•
Press function key
from the basic screen
by pressing the function keys
or
, the symbol is highlighted in
The display shows menu level 2 “Calibration”.
Menu level 2 is divided into two sub-menus:
Menu 2-1 “Calibration of path sensor“
Menu 2-2 “Calibration of pressure sensor“
IV-193
CropControl
Menu 2-1 Calibration of Path Sensor
Before placing the machine in service the first time and after any assembly work on the path sensor, it
must be calibrated. In this process, it must be ensured that there is no crop in the intake and the precompression rollers are in the bottom position on the stop.
CC000853
CC000854
2-1
2-1
Fig. 12
Calling the menu
Main menu 2 “Calibration“ is called.
•
Select menu 1-1
•
Press function key
by pressing function keys
or
, the symbol is highlighted in grey.
The display shows menu 2-1 „Calibration of Path Sensor“.
The left bar display and the value below it show the calibrated voltage value for the path sensor.
The right bar display and the value below it show the current voltage value of the path sensor. If the
red bar is the red marked area, the path sensor can be calibrated.
A calibration is not possible if the value is outside this area. The following causes may be possible:
•
The intake is soiled so that the intake rollers are not in the position on the stop.
•
Path sensor defective.
•
The voltage value is too small after assembly. Mount a distance sheet, if necessary.
The symbol
in the upper line indicates that the calibrated value is saved.
Calibrating the path sensor
The current voltage value of the path sensor is saved as a calibrated value via function key
IV-194
.
CropControl
Menu 2-2 Calibration Pressure Sensor
The calibration of the pressure sensor must be carried out before placing the machine in service the
first time, after any assembly work and weekly during operation. Ensure that no crops are in the intake
and that the pre-compression rollers are in the bottom limit stop.
2-2
CC000856
CC000855
2-2
Fig. 13
Calling the menu
Main menu 2 “Calibration“ is called.
•
Select menu 2-2
•
Press function key
by pressing function key
or
, the symbol is highlighted in grey .
The display shows menu 2-2 “Calibration of Pressure Sensor“.
The symbol
in the upper line indicates that the displayed value is saved.
The bar indicates the intake speed.
The green areas specify the areas of the intake speed for the both intake speeds to be calibrated.
To calibrate the pressure sensor, proceed according to the following steps:
•
Move lifting unit in working position (not lifted).
•
Turn on cutting drum.
•
Turn on intake.
•
Adjust engine to working speed (1950/2000 rpm).
•
Set the cutting length in the machine terminal to the smallest possible value.
•
Slowly increase the cutting length in the machine terminal until the black bar is within the lower
green area.
CC000858
2-2
CC000857
2-2
Fig. 14
.
•
Press function key
•
Calibration has been started. For a short time, an arrow appears on the right next to the lower
green area.
IV-195
CropControl
CC000859
CC000860
2-2
2-2
Fig. 15
The arrow next to the bottom green area disappears and an arrow appears next to the upper green
surface.
The symbol
or
next to the bar flashes and it indicates whether the cutting length in the
machine terminal must be increased or reduced. The symbol
•
in the upper line goes out.
Adapt the cutting length until the black bar reaches the upper green area.
CC000861
2-2
•
IV-196
If the black bar is in the upper green area, the symbol
short time.
or
disappears. Wait for a
CropControl
CC000862
2-2
Fig. 16
Press function key
to save the calibrated values.
2-2
CC000863
2-2
CC000893
•
Fig. 17
If the calibration has been completed successfully, the symbol
short time in the lower right edge.
If the calibration has not been completed successfully, the symbol
symbol
•
appears in the upper line and for a
appears on the right and the
is not shown in the upper line.
Press function key
to leave the “Calibration Pressure Sensor” menu.
IV-197
CropControl
Main Menu 13 Yield Counter
13
CC000864
Fig. 18
•
Bring up menu level by pressing function key
•
Select main menu 13
grey.
•
Press function key
from the basic screen
by pressing function key
or
, the symbol is highlighted in
.
The display shows the yield counter list.
The preselected cultivated area is shown in reverse video.
•
At the end of the list, maximally three cultivated areas are visible without mass (0.000t).
CC000865
•
Fig. 19
IV-198
CropControl
The total mass is displayed for each cultivated area:
Graphic
Softkeys
Meaning
Information
Yield counter (here for area
3)
Area 1 to 50
Meaning
Information
Scrolling up
Scrolling down
Printing yield counter
–
Print one or more cultivated areas.
Deleting yield counter
–
Delete one or more cultivated areas.
Calling up the list of control
weighings
–
The list of control weighings for the
cultivated area marked in grey is called.
Calling up the list of control
weighings
–
The list of control weighings for the
cultivated area marked in grey is called.
Leaving menu
–
Pressing the key and holding it down
brings up the basic screen.
IV-199
CropControl
Printing yield counter value
If a CAN printer is connected to the diagnostics interface of the machine, the values of the yield
counter can be printed.
•
Press function key
briefly to print the values for the selected cultivated area.
•
Press function key
for longer than three seconds to print the values of a cultivated areas.
Description of print-out for CropControl
2
1
4
3
CC000894
Fig. 20
1)
Determined weight of stated field (here field 5).
2)
On average determined calibration value for the entered field.
3)
Mass entered by the driver in case of calibrations 1 to 4.
4)
Determined calibration values in case of calibrations 1 to 4.
Deleting yield counter values
•
Press function key
for longer than one second to delete the selected cultivated area.
•
Press function key
for longer than 5 seconds to delete all cultivated areas.
CC000867
Entering the weighed mass of a control weighing
CC000866
Fig. 21
Menu 13 “List of Yield Counters” is called.
Select the cultivated area to enter a control weighing by using function keys
cultivated area is highlighted in grey.
Press function key
IV-200
or
.
and
. The selected
CropControl
The display shows the control weighing list for the selected cultivated area:
Graphic
Meaning
Information
Yield counter (here for cultivated area
5)
1 to 50 areas
Correction value for the total cultivated
area (in this case: value 228)
The correction factor is not used to
determine the correction factor for the
cultivated area. Entered weight is not
saved.
The correction factor is used for the
determination of the correction factor
for the cultivated area. Entered weight
is saved.
This line means:
–
Control weighing number 2
–
Weight of 15040 kg is entered
–
Calculated correction factor of 228
for this control weighing
Leaving menu
Softkeys
The correction factor is
also used to determine
the correction factor of
the entire cultivated area.
Meaning
–
Pressing the key and
holding it down brings
up the basic screen.
Information
Scrolling up
Scrolling down
Deleting the control weighing.
–
The entered weight is deleted and saved.
–
The correction factor is set to zero.
The correction factor is not used for the
determination of the correction factor of
the entire cultivated area.
The entered weight is saved.
If the weight of this control
weighing is available again at a
later time, then it can be entered
again.
The calculated correction factor is
used to recalculate the correction
factor of the total cultivated area.
Reducing the weight for the control weighing
highlighted in grey.
Increasing the weight for the control weighing
highlighted in grey.
Leaving menu
–
Pressing the key and holding it
down brings up the basic
screen.
IV-201
CropControl
Entering the correction factor directly
Note
The recalculation of the correction factor initiates the correction of the measured mass
retrospectively for the entire cultivated area.
If no control weighing has been carried out for the cultivated area, a correction factor directly be
entered. However, this correction value does not necessarily reflect the characteristics of the
cultivated area.
The accuracy that can be achieved by the direct entry of the correction factor strongly depends on the
experience of the operator.
CC000873
The correction factor must only be entered when a control weighing cannot be carried out or the
current correction factor seems to be unrealistic.
CC000866
Fig. 22
Menu 13 “List of Control Weighings” is called.
Select the cultivated area to enter a control weighing by using function keys
cultivated area is highlighted in grey.
Press function key
or
and
. The selected
.
The display shows the mask to enter the correction value for the selected cultivated area.
IV-202
CropControl
Graphic
230
Meaning
Information
Yield counter
(in this case: cultivated area 6)
Surface 1 to 50
Correction value for the total cultivated
area
(in this case: value 230)
Displayed correction factor is not saved.
Displayed correction factor is saved.
230
Softkeys
This line means:
–
A correction factor of 230 has been
entered and saved.
Meaning
Information
Entered correction factor is saved
Reducing the correction factor.
Increasing the correction factor.
Leaving menu
–
Pressing the key and
holding it down brings
up the basic screen.
IV-203
CropControl
Main Menu 15 Service
15
CC000875
CC000874
Fig. 23
•
Press function key
•
Press function key
grey.
or
•
Press function key
.
to bring up the menu level from the basic screen.
to select main menu 15
The display shows menu level 15 “Service”.
The menu level 15 is divided into the following sub-menus:
Menu 15-1 Manual Sensor Test
Menu 15-3 Alarms
Menu 15-4 Information
Menu 15-15 Technician
IV-204
. The symbol is highlighted in
CropControl
Menu 15-1 Manual Sensor Test
In the manual sensor test, the sensors are checked for errors.
CC000876
CC000877
Fig. 24
Calling the menu
Main menu 15 “Service” is called.
•
Press function key
in grey.
or
to select menu 15-1
. The selected symbol is highlighted
Selecting the sensor
•
Press function key
tested.
or
to select the sensor.The selected symbol is highlighted in grey and
IV-205
CropControl
Diagnostics of analogue sensors
CC000877
Fig. 25
Setting values:
The black bar must be in the green area of the bar display.
Analog sensors
No.
Sensor symbol
Description
B73
Pressure sensor
B72
Path sensor pre-compression rollers
State:
OK
/
•
ERROR
Sensor OK
Defect on sensor or job
computer
Cable break/short circuit on
the sensor
Press function key
to close the menu currently displayed.
The display shows the previously called main menu.
•
IV-206
Pressing function key
longer brings up the basic screen.
CropControl
Diagnostics pressure increase
CC000878
Fig. 26
Description of display:
The left black bar indicates the pressure measured by the pressure sensor. The value is displayed
under the black bar.
The right black bar indicates the pressure difference between the current pressure and the calibrated
pressure (by calibration of pre-compression rollers in the unloaded condition).
No.
Sensor symbol
B73
•
Press function key
Description
Pressure sensor with pressure difference
to close the menu currently displayed.
The display shows the previously called main menu.
•
Pressing function key
longer brings up the basic screen.
IV-207
CropControl
Diagnostics power supply voltages
CC000879
Fig. 27
No.
Sensor symbol
Description
U1
U1
Power supply voltage
Nominal voltages:
•
Designation
Values
+12V_EIN
12 - 14.5 V
+12V_Si
12 - 14.5 V
+12VANA
12 – 13 V
+8VDIG
8.5 – 9.1 V
+12V2FU_L
12 - 14.5 V
+12V3FU_L
12 - 14.5 V
3V Bat
Exeeds 2.5 volts
Press function key
to close the menu currently displayed.
The display shows the previously called main menu.
•
IV-208
Pressing function key
longer brings up the basic screen.
CropControl
Diagnostics intake
The speed of intake drive as well as the speed of the crop through the intake is displayed.
CC000880
Fig. 28
No.
Sensor symbol
D630
•
Press function key
Description
Display of speed/intake speed when the intake is
turning.
to close the menu currently displayed.
The display shows the previously called main menu.
•
Pressing function key
longer brings up the basic screen.
IV-209
CropControl
Diagnostics acreage counter
CC000881
Fig. 29
Description of display:
The latest state of the total acreage counter of the machine is displayed in the first line. This must
correspond to the total acreage counter displayed in the machine terminal.
The current acreage (in hectares per hour) of the machine is displayed in the second line.
No.
Sensor symbol
D731
Description
Display acreage counter/hectares per hour.
If the machine is chopping actively and driving forward,
the acreage counter must increase and a value that is
bigger than 0 must be displayed for ha/h.
•
Press function key
to close the menu currently displayed.
The display shows the previously called main menu.
•
IV-210
Pressing function key
longer brings up the basic screen.
CropControl
Diagnostics machine chops
CC000882
Fig. 30
Description of display:
It indicates whether the machine is currently chopping or not.
The state must be ON, if:
•
The machine moves forward.
•
The lifting unit is in the working position.
•
The cutting drum is turned on.
•
Intake and header turn forward.
No.
Sensor symbol
Description
The machine chops (status ON is displayed if the
machine chops and moves forward, otherwise OFF is
displayed).
D730
State:
ON
The machine chops actively.
OFF
The machine chops inactively.
•
Press function key
to close the menu currently displayed.
The display shows the previously called main menu.
•
Pressing function key
longer brings up the basic screen.
IV-211
CropControl
Menu 15-3 Alarms
CC000884
CC000883
Fig. 31
Calling the menu
Main menu 15 “Service” is called.
•
Press function key
grey.
or
•
Press function key
.
to select menu 15-3
. The selected symbol is highlighted in
The display shows menu 15-3 “Alarms”.
The currently pending alarms are displayed here.
Description, possible cause and remedy are listed in chapter “Alarm Messages”.
The current page and the number of pages are shown at the top left.
If there are several pages, press function keys
•
Press function key
or
to scroll in the list.
to close the menu currently displayed.
The display shows the previously called main menu.
•
IV-212
Pressing function key
longer brings up the basic screen.
CropControl
Menu 15-4 Information
CC000885
CC000886
Fig. 32
Calling the menu
Main menu 15 “Service” is called.
•
Press function key
grey.
or
•
Press function key
.
to select menu 15-4
. The selected symbol is highlighted in
The display shows menu 15-4.
The complete CropControl software version is displayed here.
•
SW = complete software version
•
Press function key
to close the menu currently displayed.
The display shows the previously called main menu.
•
longer brings up the basic screen.
Pressing function key
Menu 15-5 Technician
CC000887
CC000888
Fig. 33
Calling the menu
Main menu 15 “Service” is called.
•
Press function key
grey.
or
•
Press function key
.
to select menu 15-5
. The selected symbol is highlighted in
Menu 15-5 “Technician” is protected by password.
The display shows the password query.
IV-213
CropControl
Alarm Messages (VT)
CC000889
Fig. 34
Alarm message
If there is a disturbance on the CropControl, an alarm message appears in the display and an audio
signal sounds at the same time (constant horn signal). Description, possible cause and remedy are
listed in chapter “Alarm Messages”.
To stop audio signal:
•
Press function key
.
To acknowledge the alarm:
•
Press function key
briefly, the alarm is acknowledged and the audio signal stops.
If the disturbance occurs again, the alarm message will also appear again.
IV-214
CropControl
General messages
No.
Image
Possible cause
–
Computer internal plug-in fuse 2 –
defective.
–
Short circuit on voltage output
+12V2FU_L.
–
Fuse 3 defective (self-repairing)
–
Short circuit on voltage outputs
+12V3FU_L
A01
A02
EEPROM error
A04
–
–
–
Check wiring for short circuit.
–
Replace job computer.
–
Check the back-up battery and
replace it, if necessary.
–
Replace fuse.
–
Check alternator
–
Check the back-up battery and
replace it, if necessary.
–
Replace job computer.
–
Use another cultivated area or
delete the currently active
cultivated area.
Back-up battery defective
Undervoltage
–
Check wiring for short circuit.
Replace fuse.
Job computer defective
Undervoltage back-up battery
A13
Remedy
Fuse -22F39 defective
A14
A15
Overvoltage
–
Alternator is defective
RAM error
A16
A19
–
Back-up battery defective
–
Job computer defective
The yield counter for the currently
active cultivated area will soon
overflow (jumps to 0 t).
–
The yield counter of the
currently active cultivated area
is active for too long.
IV-215
CropControl
Physical messages
Physical Messages
No.
Image
Sensor
Possible cause
Path sensor
–
101
102
IV-216
Pressure sensor
Remedy
Sensor or supply line –
defective.
–
Perform sensor test.
Check sensor and
supply line for damage.
Driver’s cab and ladders
5
Driver’s cab
5.1
Ladder to driver’s cabin
Do not ascend or descend on the
ladder during travel.
Riding on the steps of the ladder or on
the platforms is not permitted.
•
Ladder (1) to the driver’s cab.
•
Steps (2) to the roof.
2
1
BX100460_1
5.2
•
Opening the cabin door
From the outside: Use the door key to unlock the
door lock (1); press in the button (1) and open the
door.
1
BX100220_1
•
From the inside: Lift the door opening lever (1) and
open the door.
The cab door must be closed during
operation.
1
BX100230_1
V-1
Driver’s cab and ladders
5.3
The air comfort seat
After the adjustment of the comfort seat, the right armrest and the steering column adjustment,
check the free mobility of the multi-function lever into all directions. Should this not be the case,
the settings need to be readjusted.
The adjustment devices of the comfort seat must not be actuated during the operation.
The damper must always be set so tightly that a snap through of the seat is prevented, also in
case of a bad road, and that a contact to the pedals is always given.
The air-cushioned comfort seat (1) can be individually
adapted to the requirements of the driver.
Standard version
Weight adjustment
In order to prevent health problems, the individual
driver’s weight adjustment should be checked and
adjusted prior to operation of the machine.
The adjustment should be carried out whilst sitting
absolutely stationary.
•
10
Pull the lever (6) upwards briefly (position I).
Height adjustment
The height can be adjusted continuously by means of
the hydraulic system.
In order to prevent damage, actuate the compressor for
a maximum of 1 minute.
•
8
Pull the lever (6) upwards completely (position I) to
move the driver’s seat (1) up; press the lever (6)
down completely (position II) to move the driver’s
seat (1) down. When the upper or lower end position
of the height adjustment mechanism is made, the
height will be adjusted automatically in order to
ensure a minimum spring travel.
1
2
3
Horizontal suspension
4
The shock load in direction of travel through the
driver’s seat (1) is cushioned better by the horizontal
suspension.
5
•
Swing the lever (5) to the front - the horizontal
suspension is active; swing the lever (5) back – the
horizontal suspension is switched off.
Longitudinal adjustment
•
Pull the locking lever (4) up, and push the driver’s
seat (1) forward or backward into the requested
position. Permit the locking lever (4) to snap into
place; after locking the driver’s seat must not be
movable into any other position.
V-2
6
9
11
7
BX850939
Seat angle adjustment
•
Pull the left key (3) up and at the same time set the
angle of the sitting surface by increasing or
decreasing the pressure on the seat surface.
Seat depth adjustment
•
Pull the right key (2) up and at the same time bring
the sitting surface into the required position by
pushing forward and backward.
Driver’s cab and ladders
Headrest
Set the headrest in such a way that the upper edges of
the head and the headrest are on the same height, if
possible.
•
Adjust the height of the headrest (10) by pulling out
and pressing down across the noticeable snaps.
Lumbar support
•
The height as well as the intensity of the arching in
the backrest can be adapted individually by turning
the hand wheel (9) to the left or right.
Adjustment of the backrest
•
Pull the locking lever (7) up to set the inclination of
the backrest. Permit the locking lever (7) to snap
into place – after locking, the backrest must not
move into a different position any more.
Setting the left armrest
•
•
•
Tilt the armrest (8) up or down as requested.
Remove the cover cap (1) to adjust the height of the
armrest.
Undo the hexagon nut; move the armrest into the
requested position and tighten the hexagon nut
again. Press the cover cap (12) onto the hexagon
nut again.
Adjustable damper
The oscillating behaviour of the driver's seat can be
adjusted to each driving situation via the adjustable
damper stepless from "soft" to "hard".
• Pull lever (11) up (seating comfort: soft)
• Press lever (11) down (seating comfort: hard)
8
12
BX850945
V-3
Driver’s cab and ladders
Version ACTIVO (optional)
10
8
9
11
1
14
2
13
3
4
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
Air comfort seat ACTIVO
Seat angle adjustment
Horizontal suspension ON / OFF
Adjustment of the backrest
Seat heating and climate control ON / OFF
Cover cap of armrest adjustment
Lumbar support setting bottom
Seat depth adjustment
•
Pull the right key (2) up and at the same time bring
the sitting surface into the required position by
pushing forward and backward.
Seat angle adjustment
•
Pull the left key (3) up and at the same time set the
angle of the sitting surface by increasing or
decreasing the pressure on the seat surface.
Longitudinal adjustment
•
Pull the locking lever (4) up, and push the driver's
seat (1) forward or backward into the requested
position. Permit the locking lever (4) to snap into
place; after locking, the driver's seat must not be
movable into any other position.
Horizontal suspension
The shock load in direction of travel through the driver's
seat (1) is cushioned better by the horizontal
suspension.
• Swing the lever (5) to the front - the horizontal
suspension is active; swing the lever (5) back - the
horizontal suspension is switched off.
V-4
5
12
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
6
7
BX480217
Seat depth adjustment
Longitudinal adjustment
Weight and height adjustment
Left armrest
Headrest
Vibration damper adjustment
Lumbar support setting top
Driver’s cab and ladders
Set the Vibration Damper
The oscillating behaviour of the driver's seat can be
adapted ideally to each driving situation via the
adjustable vibration damper.
The lever (12) for the setting of the oscillating
behaviour has three settings:
I
II
III
Soft damping
Middle damping
Hard damping
12
III
To set the vibration damper:
• Turn lever (12) to the desired damping level and
release it.
I
II
BX480269
Damping level II is the default setting recommended by
the manufacturer at average driver's weight.
The damping behaviour can be coordinated between
the damping levels by two additional setting positions
each.
Weight adjustment
The weight adjustment is made automatically when the
driver sits down on the seat. There is no need to
additionally actuate the handle.
Height adjustment
The height can be adjusted continuously by means of a
hydraulic system. In order to prevent damage, actuate
the compressor for a maximum of 1 minute.
• Pull the lever (6) upwards completely (position I) to
move the driver's seat (1) up.
• Press the lever (6) down completely (position II) to
move the driver's seat (1) down.
When the upper or lower end position of the height
adjustment mechanism is reached, the height will be
adjusted automatically in order to ensure a minimum
spring travel.
Adjustment of the backrest
•
Pull the locking lever (7) up to set the inclination of
the backrest. Permit the locking lever (7) to snap
into place.
After locking, the backrest must not move into a
different position any more.
Lumbar support
The lumbar support can be used to adapt the intensity
of the swell of the backrest individually so that the
spine is supported and back stress is relieved.
To adapt the intensity of the swell in the upper area of
the backrest cushion:
• Press "+" or "-" on switch (14) until the desired
setting is reached.
To adapt the intensity of the swell in the lower area of
the backrest cushion:
• Press "+" or "-" on switch (13) until the desired
setting is reached.
14
13
BX480218
V-5
Driver’s cab and ladders
Seat heating and seat climate control
Heating and climate control of the seat are switched
with switch (9).
0
I
The switch has three positions:
0 Seat heating and seat climate control OFF
I Seat climate control ON (seat heating OFF)
II Seat heating ON (climate control of the seat OFF)
II
9
The seat surface can be vented via seat climate
control so that a cool and dry seating is enabled.
To switch on seat climate control:
• Move switch (9) to position I.
The left lamp shows the operation of the seat climate
control.
BX480268
To switch on seat heating:
• Move switch (9) to position II.
The right lamp indicates the operation of the seat
heating.
Headrest
Set the headrest in such a way that the upper edges of
the head and the headrest are on the same height, if
possible.
• Adjust the height of the headrest (10) by pulling out
and pressing down across the noticeable snaps.
Setting the left armrest
•
•
•
Tilt the armrest (8) up or down as requested.
Remove the cover cap (11) to adjust the height of
the armrest.
Undo the hexagon nut; move the armrest into the
requested position and tighten the hexagon nut
again. Press the cover cap (11) onto the hexagon
nut again.
8
11
BX480219
5.3.1 Right armrest (Version Standard
and Option)
The right armrest (1) and the multi-function lever are
one unit.
Setting the right armrest
• Undo the clamping screw (2); move the armrest (1)
into the requested height and tighten the clamping
screw (2) again.
• The angle of inclination and the height at the right
armrest can be adjusted by activating the lever (3).
3
1
2
BX850931
V-6
Driver’s cab and ladders
5.4
Steering column adjustment
After the adjustment of the comfort
seat, the right armrest and the steering
column adjustment, check the free
mobility of the multi-function lever
into all directions. Should this not be
the case, the settings need to be
readjusted.
1
Adjust the steering column only when
the machine is at a standstill.
Horizontal and vertical steering column adjustment
3
The steering column (1) is held in
vertical position by spring pressure.
Before actuating the pedal (2), hold the
steering wheel with both hands.
•
Use the pedal (2) to release the steering column (1),
and adjust to the desired position. After the pedal
(2) has been released, the steering column (1) will
be locked.
2
Horizontal steering column adjustment
•
Loosen release lever (3). Move the steering column
(1) into the requested position. Lock the release
lever (3) again.
BX100300_2
V-7
Driver’s cab and ladders
5.5
Storage compartment for firstaid kit/operating instructions
1
The storage compartment for the first-aid kit and the
operating instructions (2) are located below the front of
the driver’s seat (1).
2
BX100280
5.6
Passenger seat (optional)
Apart from the driver, only one
additional person may be present in
the driver’s cab during operation.
•
Folding down the passenger’s seat (1).
1
BX100290_1
5.7
Inside mirror
Set the interior mirror (1) according to the requirements
of operation.
•
Set the interior mirror (1) by hand.
1
5.8
BX100102_1
Cold box
The cold box (1) is underneath the passenger seat (2)
in the cab. With the help of 12 V of the plug (4) the cold
box leaves itself to the 12 V plug socket (3) right
beside the passenger seat to attach.
2
1
3
3
1
4
BX850821
V-8
Driver’s cab and ladders
5.9
•
Sun visor
Set the sun visor (1) as required.
1
BX100101_2
5.10 Outside mirrors
Left outside mirror
•
Set the left outside mirror by hand.
1
BX100461
Right outside mirror (1)
The right outside mirror (1) is electrically adjustable.
The switch (3) is located in the roof panel.
•
•
Turn the switch (3) to the left (arrow to the left).
Press the switch (3) up, down and to the side until
the anti-collision mirror (2) is set correctly.
2
1
Anti-collision mirror (2)
•
Set the anti-collision mirror manually in such a way
that the ground area next to the right front wheel
can be controlled.
3
BX300321_2
V-9
Driver’s cab and ladders
5.11 Emergency exit
WARNING
The escape route is obstructed by a blocked emergency exit! In an emergency, the right side
window serves as emergency exit.
If the side window cannot be opened without hindrance, then the escape route for the operator
is blocked.
• Make sure the right platform remains free. Thus the right side window can swivel open
unimpeded in case of an emergency.
b
a
3
2
1
c
1
BM 500 0165
In case of an emergency (1), the side window on the
RH side in the direction of travel, next to
the driver’s seat, can be opened as an exit door.
To do this:
• Swivel the lever (2) forward until it reaches the
locking point
• Pull the safety cotter pin (3) and remove it
• Open the side window (1) completely
• Climb onto the tool box (4). To do this, use the
handrail and the emergency exit above the right
platform.
• Open locking (5) of the tool box and fold down cover
(6).
• Leave the machine by using cover (6).
5
4
6
BX500069_2
V - 10
Driver’s cab and ladders
5.12 Windshield wipers
The rocker switch (1) for the windshield wipers is
located in the roof panel.
The switch has three positions:
I
II
III
-
Off
Interval
Continuous operation
Switching on the windshield wipers
•
1
Actuate the rocker switch (1).
BX200091_3
5.13 Washer system - windshield
The rocker switch (1) for the windshield washer system
is located in the roof panel.
Switching on the windshield washer system
•
1
Actuate the rocker switch (1).
BX200092_2
5.14 Side window washer
(optional)
1
The switch (1) for the side window washer is located in
the housing of the washer (right/left).
Switching on the side window washer
•
Actuate the rocker switch (1) (right/left) as required.
BX100190
V - 11
Driver’s cab and ladders
5.15 Climatronic / Heating
5.15.1 Control and indicator elements
The climatronic is a control unit for air conditioning and heating systems in modern vehicle cabins.
The driver is being relieved from all tasks of the ideal air conditioning in the cabin by easy and clear controlling.
In case the power supply for the control unit is interrupted, the control unit accomplishes a
self-testing after impressing power. After finishing the self-testing the last saved setting is
displayed.
1
2
4
3
16
11
12
10
13
9
15
14
6
5
7
BX850876
Key
1
2
4
5
6
7
Key function
Key for switching air conditioning on and off
Key for adjusting the desired cabin temperature up.
Alternative: manual adjustments „up“ "Speed up"
Key for adjusting the desired cabin temperature down.
Alternative: manual adjustments „down“ "Speed down"
Key for switching the control on and off
Shift-key evaporator fan speed manual/automatic
Key for switching REHEAT (dehumidify cabin air) on and off
Blind key for switching the temperature display to ° Fahrenheit
LCD
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Function of LCD-display
Symbol indicates REHEAT – operation on
Symbol indicates air conditioning on
Symbol indicates that fully automatic control is switched on
Bar indicates the fan speed during manual operation
Symbol indicates manual fan operation
4-digit seven segment display indicates set value or error code
Symbol indicates temperature unit ( °)
Indicates symbol for the vehicle cabin
3
V - 12
Driver’s cab and ladders
5.15.2 Switch on system
Press key
After switching on, the control
accomplishes a self-testing, the
software version is displayed for
about 5 sec., e.g.:
Afterwards the hours of operation of the air conditioning
system are displayed for about 5 sec.:
(e.g. 6 hours of operation)
Afterwards the last saved setting is shown in the
display.
5.15.3 Setting the desired cabin
temperature
The adjusted cabin temperature in °C, e.g. 26°C, is
displayed.
The control is set on automatic operation.
For lowering the desired cabin temperature to e.g. 21°C
press key
until the desired value is shown in the
display. (press key 5 times)
V - 13
Driver’s cab and ladders
5.15.4 Switching air conditioning
operation on/off
Switching air conditioning on with the key
.
The air conditioning is now operating, this symbol
indicates the air conditioning operating.
If required, the compressor is
switched on by the control.
By pressing this key
again the air conditioning is
switched off.
(Compressor deactivated), symbol
is no longer
shown.
5.15.5 Switching REHEAT - operation on
and off
REHEAT-operation = (dehumidify cabin air)
Switching REHEAT- operation on with this key
The following notice is shown in the display:
The REHEAT - operation is switched on now, this
symbol
indicates REHEAT - operation.
The compressor is constantly
switched on. The evaporator fan
speed is raised to 100%. If required,
the control turns the heater on for
keeping the room temperature on set
value.
The REHEAT – operation is
automatically limited to 10 minutes.
By pressing this key
again, the REHEAT -
operation is switched off.
This symbol
V - 14
is no longer shown.
Driver’s cab and ladders
5.15.6 Manual adjustment of the
evaporator fan speed
Switch on evaporator fan speed with
this key
.
Manual setting of the fan speed is now active.The
currently adjusted fan speed value is shown with this
bar
(full bar = 100%).
The symbol AUTO is no longer shown.
Fan
flashes for 5 sec., during this time the fan
speed can be raised in 10%-steps with the key
lowered with the key
or
.
The lowest adjustable fan speed is
30% (three bars is shown).
By pressing the key
two times the AUTO -
operation is reactivated, symbol Auto is shown,
symbols
and
are no longer shown.
5.15.7 Switching the temperature display
to ° Fahrenheit
The adjusted set temperature is shown in ° Celsius.
Keep blind key (8) pressed, additionally press
key
, display switches to ° Fahrenheit.
Adjusted set temperature is shown in ° Fahrenheit.
By pressing the key (8) and the key
display switches back to ° Celsius.
again the
8
V - 15
Driver’s cab and ladders
5.15.8 Showing errors on the display
Error code (F0)
Error room temperature sensor is shown with blinking
display (F0) .
The control received an error of the
room temperature sensor, the
function is inoperable.
Cause of the sensor error:
Short circuit or interruption of the sensor line, plug
connection on the sensor or control, temperature
sensor damaged.
Only after eliminating the error, the control is operable
again, the sensor error is no longer shown.
In case of an sensor error, the control
keeps working with the setting which
was in effect before receiving an
error.
Error code (FI)
Error blow out-temperature sensor is shown with
blinking display (F1).
The control received an error of the
blow out-temperature sensor, the
function is inoperable.
Cause of the sensor error:
Short circuit or interruption of the sensor line, plug
connection on the sensor or control, temperature
sensor damaged.
Only after eliminating the error, the control is operable
again, the sensor error is no longer shown.
In case of an sensor error, the control
keeps working with the setting which
was in effect before receiving an
error.
V - 16
Driver’s cab and ladders
5.16 Adjustable air jets
1
2
1
•
•
BX750031_1
Six manually adjustable air nozzles (1) are located
in the front roof area of the cabin.
Two manually adjustable air nozzles (2) are located
in the rear area of the cabin.
The intensity of the flow of air of the
air conditioning system is regulated in
the „AUTO“ mode via engine speed.
The flow of air can be adjusted
manually via the
key (refer to
chapter 5 „Manual Adjustment of the
Evaporator Fan Speed“).
Set the louvers in such a way that the
panes do not mist up.
5.17 Radio
An ISO compartment for radio (1) is located in the roof
console.
For data on the connections, please refer to circuit
diagram in the chapter titled "Maintenance – electrical
system".
Telephones and radio equipment not
connected to the outside antenna may
lead to functional troubles in the
vehicle’s electronic system, thus
jeopardising the operational safety of
the vehicle.
1
BX100103_2
V - 17
Driver’s cab and ladders
5.18 Ladders
Always make certain the ladders and
steps are clean. Before starting work,
remove the impurities.
5.18.1 Ladder to the radiator compartment
Left-hand side of the machine
•
Open the flap (1).
1
BX500068_1
Right-hand side of the machine
•
•
Rotate the flap (1) upward.
Open the lock (3) of the tool box and fold down the
lid (2).
5
4
6
BX500069_2
V - 18
Driver’s cab and ladders
5.18.2 Ladder to the motor compartment
•
•
Open the rear flap (1).
Fold down the ladder (2).
1
2
BX850930
5.18.3 Flaps with safety locks
Opening the flaps
•
Use an open-jawed spanner or ring spanner (NW 13)
or a screwdriver (2) to unlock the flap locks (1) by
turning to the left. Open the flap with the handle (3).
3
1
Closing the flap
•
Close the flap by pressing (without tools).
2
BX100480
5.19 Setting the monitor for camera
monitoring (Option)
•
Set the monitor (1) for camera monitoring manually
so that the roadway and the lateral and rear working
range can be seen completely.
1
BX851058
V - 19
Driver’s cab and ladders
V - 20
Lighting
6
Lighting
6.1 Indicator, hazard warning
flasher and brake light
In road traffic indicate the change of
travelling direction by means of the
indicator.
1
3
3
2
2
1
4
BX851064
Switching on the indicator
Brake light
•
The stop lamps (4) light up, if:
• the service brake is activated with ignition switched
on
• it is broken via the control lever
Actuate the direction indicator on the steering
wheel; the indicators (1, 2, 3) will flash on one side
(right/left).
Hazard warning flasher
When the hazard warning flasher has been switched
on, all indicators (1, 2, 3) will flash at the same time.
Switching on the hazard warning flasher
The switch (1) for the hazard warning flasher is located
in the roof panel switch group.
•
Actuate the rocker switch (1). The red pilot lamp in
the switch (1) will start flashing.
1
BX200096_2
VI - 1
Lighting
6.2 Parking light
1
Switching on the parking light
The rocker switch (1) for the parking light and the
dipped beam is located in the roof panel switch group.
The switch has three positions:
I
II
III
•
-
Off
Parking light
Dipped beam
Set the rocker switch (1) to position II.
The following lamps will light up when the
parking light is switched on:
1
-
BX850662
BX500400_3
Front side lamps.
1
Depending on the size of tyres on the
axle tyre, the additional attached
clearance lamps illuminate (1a) on
both sides of the platform.
1a
BX851059
2
-
Rear side lamps
3
-
Side lamps
3
2
BX850878_2
VI - 2
Lighting
4
-
Upper side lamp
4
BX850877
6.3 Dipped beam
1
Switching on the dipped beam
The rocker switch (1) for the parking light and the
dipped beam is located in the roof panel switch group.
The switch has three positions:
I
II
III
-
Off
Parking light
Dipped beam
BX200093_3
The dipped beam can be switched on
only when the ignition has been
switched on.
•
Set the rocker switch (1) to position III.
When the parking light is on, the following lamps will
light up:
1
-
Driving headlights
2
-
Rear lights
3
-
License plate lighting
1
BX850879_1
3
2
BX750034_1
VI - 3
Lighting
6.4 Working floodlights
Switching on the working floodlights
1
The rocker switch for the working floodlights is located
in the roof panel switch group.
1
2
3
4
5
-
2
3
4
Front working floodlights I
Working floodlight cab roof
Front working floodlights II
Rear working floodlights
Working floodlights discharge chute
5
The front working floodlights I can be
set by hand.
They have an on/off switch on the rear
side.
1
-
Front working floodlights I
1
BX200094_2
1
BX850880_1
2
-
Working floodlight cab roof
2
BX850883_1
3
-
Front working floodlights II
3
BX850884_1
VI - 4
Lighting
4
-
Rear working floodlights
4
BX850885_1
5
-
Working floodlights discharge chute
5
BX850881_1
6
-
Right and left rear wheel lights
6
BX850882_1
VI - 5
Lighting
6.5 Allround lights
In some countries the allround lights
must be switched on in road traffic.
Switching on the allround lights
The switch (1) for the allround lights is located in the
roof panel switch group.
•
Actuate the rocker switch (1). The orange pilot lamp
in the switch (1) will light up.
1
1
-
BX850886_1
Allround lights
1
BX200412_2
6.6 Reversing lights
The reversing lights will light up when reversing, and at
the same time an acoustic warning signal is sounded.
1
VI - 6
BX850887
Lighting
6.7 Interior Lighting
1
6
8
6
3
4
2
7
5
BM 500 0146
The interior lighting (1) and spotlight (2) are located
on the cab roof.
Overview:
3 = On / Off switch - interior lighting (1)
4 = On / Off switch - spotlight (2)
After ignition stage II is turned off,
interior lighting will stay on for the
amount of time set on time relay (5).
The time for switch-off delay can be
adjusted with the time relay (5).
6.8 Locator lighting for multifunction lever
The locator lighting (1) is located on the cab roof. It is
used to illuminate the multi-function lever.
The rocker switch (2) for the locator lighting has
three positions:
III III -
1
brightness 30%
Off
brightness 100%
2
BX851053
VI - 7
Lighting
VI - 8
Start-up
7
Start-up
WARNING
Danger to life due to rolling away of the unlocked machine!
When parking the machine, all measures that prevent the machine from rolling back must be
carried out.
• The parking brake must be applied.
• Move the "Travelling gear" release switch to "OFF" position.
• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.
• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back with wheel chocks.
• Interrupt the electrical power circuit with the main battery switch.
7.1 Daily checks
Regular performance of daily checks on the machine will ensure its safety and significantly
extend the machine's service life.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Remove dirt deposits in the engine and machine compartment.
Before starting up the machine, lubricate thoroughly.
Check the protective equipments and replace them, if necessary.
Check the fuel level.
Check the screws for tightness.
Check coolant level.
Clean engine compartment, intake sieve and the water cooler, oil cooler and charging air cooler.
Check tyres for cuts and breaks visually.
Check the tyre pressure.
Perform an indicator lamp test.
Perform a light function test.
Check brakes for function.
Check the oil level on all gearboxes.
Check the hydraulic tank.
Check the engine (If you need any further information, please refer to the enclosed Caterpillar operation and
maintenance manual).
Check the gearboxes.
For further information about how tasks are designed, please refer to the chapters "Operation" and
"Maintenance".
VII - 1
Start-up
7.1.1 Dirt deposits in the engine and
machine compartment
WARNING! - Cleaning with
compressed air!
Effect: Loss of eyesight!
• Keep people well away from the
working area.
• Wear suitable work clothes to
perform cleaning jobs with
compressed air (for example eye
protection).
A mixture of dust, oil, grass and chaff
in the engine compartment is a
source of fire and means an increased
fire hazard.
•
•
•
Always keep the engine and engine compartment
(1) clean.
Blow off dirt with compressed air.
Wipe off oil deposits.
1
BX850888_1
•
•
Always keep the radiator sieve (1) and air filter
cover (2) clean.
Blow off dirt with compressed air.
1
2
BX850889
The compressed air connection (1) and compressed air
gun (2) are in the machine compartment.
2
1
BX850891
VII - 2
Start-up
7.1.2 Engine - oil level check
Park the machine on level ground, perform an oil level
check approx. 5 minutes after the engine has stopped.
•
•
•
Pull out the oil dipstick.
Clean the oil dip stick with a non-fibrous cloth and
push it in completely.
Pull the oil dipstick back out.
The oil level must lie between the min. and max. mark.
•
1
max.
min.
If necessary refill engine oil (see engine
maintenance section).
BX100800_3
7.1.3 Hydraulic oil level check
•
Lower the lifting gear and switch off the engine.
•
Check the hydraulic fluid level in the viewing glass
(2) of the hydraulic fluid tank (1).
2
1
The hydraulic fluid must be visible in the viewing glass (2).
•
If necessary refill hydraulic oil (see hydraulic
maintenance section).
7.1.4 Checking the engine coolant level
BX500055_1
Control:
• Check the coolant level in the overflow container (1)
in the viewing pane (2)
The coolant level must reach up to the middle of the
control eye (2)
3
In case of a contact with hot liquids or
machine parts, a danger of burns
exists.
• Wear appropriate protective
clothing
• Allow the liquids or machine parts
to cool down
Filling:
• Turn the cap (3) to the first notch and wait until the
overpressure reduces
2
1
BX850892
Do not fill cold coolant into the warm
motor.
In order to prevent machine damages,
allow the diesel engine to cool down
before the coolant is topped up.
•
•
Fully open the cap (3) and top up the engine coolant
to the middle of the control eye (2)
Close the cover again (3)
VII - 3
Start-up
7.1.5 Checking the central lubrication
system
•
Perform visual filling level check at the lubricant
tank (1).
max
1
The lubricant level must be above the min. mark.
• If necessary refill lubricant (see section
Maintenance - Central lubrication system).
min
7.1.6 Tyres
•
•
Check tyres (1) daily for damage and cracks and
obviously low tyre pressure.
Measure the tyre pressure with an accurately
working test device at least 1x weekly.
BX101960_1
1
For tyre pressure information, refer to the section on
Maintenance - Tyres.
The tyre pressure data refer to cold tyres.
•
Correct the tyre pressure if necessary.
1
7.1.7 Light functions
•
Check the functioning of the lighting before the start
of every journey.
BX850893
7.1.8 Checking the foot brake
1
Danger!
Danger to life, injuries or damage to
the machine.
• Adjustment and repair work on the
brake system must only be
performed by authorised
professional workshops or
authorized brake services.
•
•
The brake function must be checked before the
start of every trip.
The footbrake (1) must take effect beginning with
the first third of pedal travel.
Fully depress the brake pedal and start the machine
with max. torque.
If it is possible to start the machine, the proper
function of the blade brake is no longer guaranteed.
Take the machine out of operation and contact
KRONE customer service.
I
UPM
7.1.9 Fuel level
•
BX100111_2
With the ignition switched on, check the fuel level
(1) in the display of the Info centre.
1080
0
20
40
60
80
If the symbol
(2) appears in the engine data
info area, refuel without delay.
100
IV
1
100
2
50
67°C
25
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
V
A
2
III
75
•
1
B
C
D
BX500163
VII - 4
Start-up
7.1.10
•
Setting Mirror and Monitor for
Camera Monitoring (Option)
Prior to travel or before starting work, adjust the
inside mirror and the outside mirrors as well as the
monitor for camera monitoring so that the roadway
and the lateral and rear working ranges can be seen
completely (for the adjustment of the mirrors, refer
to chapter 5 "Driver's Cab").
7.2 Fuel system
7.2.1 Fuel
Take care when handling fuel.
Refuel only outdoors and with the
engine switched off. No smoking.
The quality and cleanliness of the fuel are of critical
importance for consistently good performance and a
long service life for the engine.
Observe the data in the engine
operating instructions, operating
materials section (MAN) and the
operating regulations (MAN).
For temperatures under 10 °C (50 °F), always use
winter fuel.
1
7.2.2 Refueling
•
•
•
•
•
•
Switch off the engine.
Clean grass and dust from the area around the filler
neck (1).
Open the tank cover.
Fill the fuel tank. (Use only clean fuel in the tank. If
necessary, filter the fuel before adding it to the
tank.)
Capacity of the fuel tank approx. 960 l.
Close and seal the tank after filling it.
Dispose of spilled fuel.
BX200770
Refuel the fuel tank daily after the end
of work to avoid the formation of
condensation in the fuel tank and
freezing when cold.
7.2.3 Venting the fuel system
The fuel system must be vented if necessary after a
lengthy standstill.
For more information, please refer to the operating
instructions in the section on engine maintenance
(MAN).
VII - 5
Start-up
7.3 Engine operation
7.3.1 Running in the engine
Modifications to the engine not
authorised by the manufacturer result
in expiry of the warranty protection.
The engine is immediately ready for normal operating
conditions; particular caution is required, however, in
the first 100 operating hours.
Observe the following notes:
•
If one of the following error messages (1) appears in
the display of the Info centre and at the same time
an acoustic signal sounds, immediately switch off
the engine and remedy the fault (see also Appendix
A - Error messages).
-
Engine fault!
-
Diesel engine oil pressure!
-
Diesel engine oil level!
-
Cooling water temperature!
-
Cooling water level!
•
Check the engine oil level at regular intervals of
time (see section 7.1.2 Engine oil level check),
watch out for leaks.
•
Pay particular attention and be particularly aware
until you have the required sense and ear for the
engine and operating noises.
•
Avoid high loading or idling of the engine for more
than 5 minutes during the first 20 operating hours.
7.3.2 Before starting the engine
Before starting the diesel engine,
make certain there are no persons/
children or objects in the danger zone.
Activate the horn as a warning signal.
Danger, toxic exhaust!
Never allow the engine to run in
closed rooms without an extraction
unit. Ensure sufficient ventilation.
Inhaling exhaust fumes can kill.
VII - 6
Before starting the engine after a
longer service life, make certain there
are no loose parts in the front
attachment or in the foraging unit.
Only start the engine from the driver's
seat.
Start-up
The following conditions must be met to start the
machine:
• The main battery switch must be in position „I“
(closed).
• The parking brake must be applied.
Check the status of the parking brake in the
display:
1
The parking brake is applied if the symbol
•
appears in the display (refer to chapter „Control
Elements“).
The traction drive release switch must be in position
I (off) (refer to chapter „Control Elements“.
BX851017_1
7.8.3.1 Starting the engine
Turn the ignition key (1) into the III position. Do not
operate the starter too briefly, but not longer than 20
seconds. Immediately let go of the ignition key (1)
after the engine starts.
5
3
STOP
2
1
III
•
Turn the ignition key (1) clockwise to II position, the
ignition is switched on.
4
I
•
Turn the ignition key (1) clockwise to I position, the
electric circuit for the electronics is turned on.
- The charging pilot lamp (3) lights up. It must go
out after the engine starts.
- The engine oil pressure pilot light (4) shines for
approx. 2 seconds.
- The coolant temperature pilot light (5) shines for
approx. 2 seconds.
II
•
BX500012_4
If the engine does not start within the
20 seconds, wait for at least 2 minutes
before trying to start it again.
After the engine is started, the indicator lamps for
engine warning (3) and engine failure
(4) light up for approx. 5 seconds.
• Check whether the indicator lamps go out.
• If this is not the case, switch off the engine
immediately, remedy the malfunction or call KRONE customer service.
IIf the ignition key (1) is turned back into the I position
before the engine starts, wait until the engine is at rest
before trying to start it.
For information regarding fault clearance, please refer
to the enclosed maintenance instructions of the engine
manufacturer.
VII - 7
Start-up
7.3.4 Starting at low temperatures
In the cold season let the engine run in the lower idling
speed for a few minutes after the start.
If necessary use winter-grade fuel.
7.3.5 Starting with auxiliary battery
Under cold operating conditions use a further 12 V battery as required parallel with the batteries.
Leaking battery gas is highly explosive. Avoid spark formation and open
flames in the vicinity of the battery.
Always connect the battery with the
correct polarity, the earth cable to the
minus pole and starter cable to the
plus pole of the battery.
Never connect batteries in series,
since otherwise excess voltages that
damage the electronics can arise.
In the case of non-compliance of the
correct polarity between battery and
three-phase generator severe faults in
the electrical system arise.
Always connect the plus pole first and
then the minus pole.
7.3.6 Killing the engine
If an engine at operating heat stalls,
immediately restart the engine to
avoid an excessive heat accumulation
at functionally important parts.
Before switching off the engine, let it
run without load for 1-2 minutes in the
lower idling range to let all important
parts of the engine cool down.
14a
7.3.7 Switching off the engine
•
•
•
BX850964
Let the engine run without load for 1-2 minutes in
the lower idling range to let all important parts of the
engine cool down.
Press key (14a). Lower the front attachment
completely onto the ground.
Turn the ignition key (1) counter-clockwise
STOP
to
STOP
position.
Always pull out the ignition key (1)
before leaving the driver’s cab. The
holding brake is applied automatically.
I
II
1
III
BX851078
VII - 8
Start-up
7.4 Driving
DANGER! - Road travel, carrying passengers, driving conduct!
Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine
•
When driving on public roads, the provisions of the Road Traffic Licensing
Regulationsmust be observed (lighting, identification).
•
To meet the requirements to maintain sufficient distance from overhead power lines the
total height of the machine must not exceed 4 m (13 ft).
•
Do not ride as a passenger on ladders or platform.
•
Do not drive with the parking brake engaged.
•
Always adapt the travelling speed of the machine on road and field to the given conditions.
•
When driving down hills, on inclines or through obstacles, adjust driving behaviour to
prevailing driving conditions.
•
Note that the machine swings out when cornering.
7.4.1 General aspects of driving
The following notes must be observed when driving the
forage harvester:
•
•
•
Handling the forage harvester requires a certain
amount of practice because of the rear steering.
Handling on the road and in the field differs.
In the case of an error message in the Info centre
immediately stop and remove the error.
If this is not possible, inform the Krone customer
service or your Krone dealer.
Handling characteristics
The handling characteristics of the forage harvester are
influenced e.g. by the roadway and by the fitted front
attachment.
Therefore the style of driving must be adapted to the
relevant ground and soil conditions.
Special care is required when working and turning on a
slope!
7.4.2 Steering
The forage harvester is easy to steer due to the
hydrostatic steering with the rear axle.
Take care when driving on roads and
tight corners, the forage harvester
swings out at the rear!
Emergency steering forces
The steering also operates when the engine has
stopped. However, considerably more force must be
applied.
BX000025
VII - 9
Start-up
7.4.3 Starting the engine
For details see section 7 "Starting the engine".
1
1
7.4.4 Road/field mode
Road operating mode
•
Bring the lifting gear into the transport position.
When travelling on roads, the road/field
release switch (1) has to be set to the I
position.
This ensures that only the travelling
gear, the steering mechanism and the
brakes are active.
I
II
II
BX750C-0004
1
Field mode
•
Switch the road/field release switch into the II
position.
7.4.5 Switching the travelling gear on
I
No persons may be present in the
direct hazardous area of the machine
when the travelling gear release switch
is actuated!
•
BX850943
Set the travelling gear release switch (1) to position II.
7.4.6 Release holding brake
1
Danger due to a reduced brake
capacity!
Driving for an extended period of time
with the parking brake applied will
result in overheating of the brake.
•
The parking brake is applied
automatically:
• When switching off the ignition,
• When the machine is at a standstill
and the driver leaves the seat.
To release the parking brake after a restart of the
machine, activate foot brake first. Then the parking
brake release switch (1) must be set to I position.
VII - 10
BX750C-0006
Start-up
7.4.7 Operating brake
•
The hydrostat decelerates automatically when the
operating brake (1) is operated.
7.4.8 Setting the acceleration behaviour
Four different acceleration stages can be selected
while driving with the selector switch acceleration ramp
(2) attached to the multi-function lever (1).
With unchanging operation of the multi-function lever
(1) in one direction and unchanging engine speed, the
travelling speed increases the slowest in the
acceleration stage I and the fastest in the acceleration
stage IV.
•
1
2
Switch the selector switch (2) into the desired
acceleration stage.
BX100801_1
7.4.9 Driving forwards
0
Always adapt the travelling speed of the
forage harvester on road and field to the
given conditions.
1
Starting forwards from standstill
After the engine has been started up and the travelling
gear is released, the machine is ready to start.
•
•
•
•
Press the activation button for the travelling gear (2)
and keep it pressed.
Move the multi-function lever (1) to the front, the
forage harvester starts to move forwards and
accelerates.
If you release the multi-function lever (1), it returns
automatically to the mid position (0). The speed
remains constant.
The forage harvester decelerates if the multifunction lever (1) is moved backwards while driving.
It is braked until it comes to a stop.
2
BX100802_1
VII - 11
Start-up
7.4.10
Reversing
0
An acoustic warning signal sounds
when reversing.
Starting in reverse from standstill
After the engine has been started up and the travelling
gear is released, the machine is ready to start.
•
•
•
•
1
2
Press the activation button for the travelling gear (2)
and keep it pressed.
Move the multi-function lever (1) to the rear, the
forage harvester starts to move in reverse and
accelerates.
If you release the multi-function lever (1), it returns
automatically to the mid position (0), the speed
remains constant.
The forage harvester decelerates if the multifunction lever (1) is moved backwards while driving.
It is braked until it comes to a stop.
7.4.11
BX100802_1
Quick stop
Activating quick stop
•
1
Move the multi-function lever (1) to the left while
driving.
The forage harvester decelerates to a standstill.
7.4.12
BX850035_1
Fast direction change (fast reversing)
Fast reversing is possible only in the
field mode.
1
2
Activating fast reversing
•
While travelling press the activation button for the
travelling gear (2) and keep it pressed, move the
multi-function lever (1) to the left and back to the
middle position.
The forage harvester decelerates down to standstill and
accelerates in the opposite direction to approx. 70 % of
the previous travelling speed.
VII - 12
BX850036_1
Start-up
7.4.13
Cruise control
The cruise control can be activated only when
travelling forwards. When the cruise control is
activated, the forage harvester is accelerated or
decelerated with the set acceleration stage to the
speed stored for the cruise control mode.
Storing the speed for the cruise control mode
2
1
The speed is saved for the operating mode (road/field)
the machine is currently in.
One speed can be saved for road and field mode each.
•
•
BX850037_1
Accelerate the forage harvester to the desired
speed.
While travelling press the activation button for the
travelling gear (2) and keep it pressed, move the
multi-function lever (1) to the right and back to the
middle position.
I
The momentary travelling speed is stored.
IV
II
The stored speed (1) is displayed in the display of the
Info centre in the travelling gear data Info area.
V
A
B
C
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BX850940
Activating cruise control
•
Move the multi-function lever (1) to the right without
the activation key while travelling.
The forage harvester goes to the saved speed, the
symbol
in the display of the Info centre is
displayed for cruise control active.
1
BX850038_1
Deactivating cruise control
•
The cruise control is deactivated by overriding the
multi-function lever, operating the operating brake
and switching off the travelling gear.
If you switch into "Road/field" mode, the display
switches to the value that is saved for the currently
selected operating mode (field or road speed).
VII - 13
Start-up
7.4.14
Constant-Power load limit control
The load limit control is used for the automatic
acceleration or deceleration of the travelling gear in
order to ensure an almost constant diesel engine
speed.
Activating the load limit control
The load limit control is only
possible in field mode (see chapter
„Road/field mode“).
•
By briefly pressing the driving lever (1) twice to the
right, the load limit control „Constant Power“ will be
activated.
1
BX850038_1
•
The green Symbol
(1) on the display
indicates that the load limit control is active and
the travelling speed is automatically adjusted to
the speed reduction of the motor.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Deactivating the load limit control
The following operations will deactivate the load limit
control:
•
•
•
•
Actuating the driving lever (Increasing/ Reducing)
Road/field release switch must be in the road mode
position.
Travelling gear release switch off
Applying the brake pedal
VII - 14
A
B
C
D
BX850941
Start-up
7.4.15
Autopilot
The autopilot is only available in the
maize header mode with mounted
maize header EasyCollect and
autopilot equipment (optional).
Special safety instructions
Autopilot must only be used for its
intended purpose. It must only be
used in open fields, off public and
semi-public roads, away from open
areas frequented by people and far
away from any persons that could be
endangered. They must only be used
for their intended purpose:
•
Automatic forage harvester guiding
on a stalk-line row of plants.
Before placing the autopilot in service,
check the functionality of safety
elements that can be checked and
make a visual inspection of all the
components.
To do this, the user should proceed as
follows:
• Check whether the autopilot shuts
down:
by an abrupt movement of the
steering wheel and leaving the
driver`s seat (via seat switch
contact).
• Check for proper operating condition
- i.e. free of mechanical damages
and leaks - row tracers, steering
angle transmitter as well as all
visible hoses and wirings.
When the autopilot is in operation, no
one must be within 50 m of the forage
harvester in any direction.
The operator is not permitted to leave
the driver’s cabin while the autopilot
is in operation.
While the autopilot is in operation, the
driver must regularly check the
direction in which the machine is
moving and its travel path to be able
to take over manual control of the
harvest forager immediately if
obstructions or interruptions come up
in the vehicle’s path.
After the autopilot has been in
operation and before leaving the field,
the autopilot must always be switched
off on the autopilot release switch on
the console.
Manipulating safety-related elements
of the autopilot is prohibited, as is
making changes to the hydraulic,
electrical or electronic components.
The autopilot should only be installed
by an authorised service centre.
Prerequisites for activating the autopilot:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Engine runs.
The driver's seat must be occupied.
Road/field release switch must be in the field mode
position.
Travelling gear release switch must be switched on.
The autopilot release switch (1) must be switched to
position II.
The machine is on a level surface.
II
1
I
BX750C-0007
VII - 15
Start-up
Chaffing should preferably be in row tracer mode left or
right.
Now, the following modes can be used:
• Both row tracers
• Row tracer automatic
• Row tracer mirrored, automatic
1
Setting the row tracer mode (see also Sect. 4.2.5)
Activating the autopilot
•
•
•
Move the forage harvester parallel to the rows of
plants. Autopilot can be activated after about 1 meter.
Activate the autopilot by pressing the button (1).
The lastly set icon is displayed in the Info-Center
BX500039_1
Autopilot now takes over the task of guiding the forage
harvester along the row of plants with the selected row
tracer on the maize header. In the case of short gaps
in the maize crop the autopilot ensures straight-ahead
travel of the forage harvester.
Deactivating the autopilot
•
If you move the steering wheel abruptly, the
autopilot will be deactivated.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The autopilot is also automatically deactivated if:
A
•
The driver's seat is left (via seat switch contact)
•
The driver leaves the driver’s seat.
•
The cab door is opened.
•
The autopilot button (1) is pressed again.
•
The autopilot release switch is switched off.
•
The travelling gear release switch is switched off.
•
Road/field release switch is switched to the road
mode.
•
One of the quick stop buttons is pressed.
•
If there is an error in the autopilot system
components.
After the autopilot is deactivated, take
control of the forage harvester with the
steering wheel.
The deactivation of the autopilot is
indicated by an audio warning tone.
VII - 16
B
C
D
BX850942
Start-up
7.4.16
Traction Control TC
•
Pressing the TC button (2) repeatedly switches the
traction control off or back on.
The status of the traction control is shown in the
display (in the travelling gear data section (III) of the
Info Centre, see Basic Screen chapter)
7.4.17
2
TC Sensitivity Switchover
BX850859
The TC I / II pushbutton (3) sets the sensitivity level of
the traction control. There are two sensitivity levels:
level I for grass and level II for maize.
• Pressing the TC I / II button (3) repeatedly switches
the TC between the two sensitivity levels.
The sensitivity level of the traction control is shown in
the display (in the travelling gear data section (III) of
the Info Centre, see Basic Screen chapter).
7.4.18
3
Hydrostat system
Avoid overheating of the Hydrostat system!
There is an acoustic warning signal if the Hydrostat
system is overheated. Switch the engine off and
determine the cause of overheating.
Driving speed is automatically reduced to about 25 km/h
for road driving.
7.4.19
BX850860
Towing
Serious machine damage.
•
Only tow the machine if this is
absolutely required.
•
Tow the machine only out of the
danger zone. Never tow over
longer distances.
•
Note that it is very difficult to
steer the machine with turned off
engine.
•
Only perform towing process by
pushing the machine with towing
rod.
•
Tow the machine with max. 0.5
km/h.
•
In addition, bear in mind that
there is only a limited or even no
brake function if the engine is
turned off.
•
Switch on the ignition so that the
indicators (hazard lights) and the
brake lights are functioning.
•
Switch the road/field release
switch to road travel position.
1
For towing choose either the hitch coupling (1) or
according to fitted front attachment suitable towing
points at the front of the forage harvester.
BX500025_2
VII - 17
Start-up
7.4.19.1 Releasing the parking brake manually
If the machine no longer builds up the necessary oil
pressure for releasing the holding brake, then the
holding brake must be released manually.
Remove the ignition key and secure
the forage harvester from being placed
in operation or rolling away
unintentionally.
Fitting wheel chocks
•
•
•
Place wheel chocks (1) on both sides in front of or
behind (according to slope) the driving wheels (front
axle).
Always place the wheel chocks (1) so that the
forage harvester cannot roll away.
Fold the wheel chocks (1) open completely and
place them close up against the drive wheels.
1
BX100531
Preparation
•
•
The parts kit consists of the pump lever and the
connecting hose.
The parts are fastened in the support (2) under the
upper cover of the tool box.
2
BX500639_2
•
•
•
Close the drain valve (2) on the pump.
Mount the pump lever and the connecting hose on
the hand pump.
Fill the connecting hose by activating the hand
pump until oil emerges free of blow holes from the
line.
2
1
BX750015_1
VII - 18
Start-up
Release parking brake
•
•
Screw the measuring line (4) to the measuring
coupling.
Set the lever (5) of the shut-off valve to (II)
(closed)and use the hand pump to release the brake
(when the resistance of the pump becomes
noticeably stronger, move the machine to check
whether or not the brake is released far enough).
After towing
•
•
•
•
•
To create the function of the brake, move the stop
cock (5) to the position (I) (open).
Drain the system pressure by opening the drain
valve on the hand pump.
Unscrew the connection hose from the release
connection (4) (right-hand machine side).
Place protective cap on the screw coupling.
Put down parts kit (hand lever and connection hose)
in the support in the tool box.
II
I
5
4
BX500643_3
Transporting on a low loader
The forage harvester must be properly
secured in place to be transported on
a low loader.
1 - Lashing point left front
2 - Lashing point right front
3 - Lashing point left rear
4 - Lashing point right rear
2
1
BX850894
3
4
BX850895
VII - 19
Start-up
7.4.20
Parking the Machine
DANGER! - Leaving the machine
without protection
Effect: Danger to life, serious
injuries or serious damages to the
machine.
•
Set down the front attachments on the ground.
•
Switch on „Road Travel“
•
„Control Elements“).
Apply the parking brake.(refer to chapter 3 „Control
Elements“).
•
Switch off „Traction Drive“
•
•
3 „Control Element“).
Switch off the engine.
Remove the ignition key.
VII - 20
(refer to chapter 3
(refer to chapter
Start-up
7.5 Operation with Front Attachments
WARNING
Danger to life, injuries due to unpredictable moving of the lifting gear when folding in and
folding out the front attachment.
• No individuals are allowed in the area of the lifting gear during folding in and out of the front
attachment!
WARNING
Danger to life, injuries due to unpredictable moving of the lifting gear when attaching and
removing the front attachment.
• Special care is required when fitting and detaching the attachment!
The specifications in the operating instructions of the front attachment unit must be
observed.
• Fit and detach the front attachment on a level surface with load bearing ground; make certain
in this process there is sufficient space on the side for manoeuvring the machine.
Only attachments that are type tested by the
manufacturer and approved for the use may be fitted.
Fitting and operation of other attachments is
considered as use not as intended. The manufacturer
is not liable for damage resulting from this, the user
alone bears the risk for this.
When a front attachment is operated the operating
instructions supplied with the front attachment must be
read before the use and the given instructions must be
complied with.
Depending on the equipment, the
machine is equipped ex works with
different front attachments.
The necessary conversion work on the
machine for use with the corn
conditioner is described in Section
7.5.7.
7.5.1 Adjusting the adapter frame
Only for first fitting of the attachment.
•
Measure the axle base "a" between holding claw (1)
and locking hook (2) on the pendulum frame of the
forage harvester.
1
a
2
BX20110001
VII - 21
Start-up
1
1
2
a
3
3
3
EFL000006
•
Check the axle base "a" between the holding bolt (1, 3) of the adapter frame on the front attachment and if
necessary adapt it to the size of the pendulum frame.
Make the adjustment equally on the right and left of the adapter frame.
•
Loosen the screw connections (2) and shift the reciprocal frame holders (3) to the correct distance.
•
Tighten the screw connections (2).
7.5.2 Pendulum frame
3 4
I
II
6
2
2
1
2
•
•
•
•
•
EFL000007
Lower the lifting gear (1) of the forage harvester all the way
Align the lifting gear (1) of the forage harvester horizontally
The locking hooks (2) must be opened, open them via the locking lever (4), if necessary.
Loose the lock of the locking lever (3) and swing the lever upwards by activating the spring-mounted bar (3)
The lifting gear (1) must be locked, the locking bolt (6) must be in position I (locked).
VII - 22
Start-up
7.5.3 Fitting and Detaching the Front
Attachment
An operating manual is included with
delivery for the respective front
attachment. All relevant work steps and
safety regulations are described in
detail in this document.
7.5.3.1 Fitting the Front Attachment
Fitting the front attachment is explained by using
EasyFlow 300 as an example. This principle is the same
for all KRONE front attachments.
WARNING
Danger to life or serious injuries when
connecting.
Be certain there is no one between the
machine and the front attachment when
making the connection.
1
5
1
3
4
2
•
•
•
•
•
•
EFL000008
Attach the universal shaft included with delivery of
the front attachment onto the P.T.O. shaft (8) and
secure it with the sliding pin.
Put down the universal shaft onto the support (9)
provided for that purpose.
Drive the machine up to the front attachment so
that the pendulum frame of the forage harvester
stands just in front of the adapter frame (1) and the
holding bolts (3) are located against the stop
surfaces of the holding claws (2).
Raise the lifting gear until the locking hooks (4) in
the pendulum frame holder (5) rest on the adapter
frame.
Stop the front attachment.
Swivel down locking lever (6) and secure it with
spring-mounted bar (7).
Note
Check that the pendulum frame hooks
correctly into the holding bolts (3) and
the locking hooks
on both sides.
8
9
BX851033
7
6
3
EFL00009_1
VII - 23
Start-up
7.5.3.2 Connecting the Hydraulic Lines
Warning! - Connecting the hydraulic line
Effect: Serious injuries due to hydraulic oil penetrating the skin.
•
When connecting the hydraulic hoses to the forage harvester hydraulics, ensure that the
system is depressurised on both sides!
•
When searching for leaks, use suitable aids because of the risk of injury and wear safety
goggles.
•
Seek medical help immediately should injuries occur! Danger of infection.
•
Before uncoupling the hoses and before performing work on the hydraulic system, relieve
the pressure!
•
Check the hydraulic hose lines at regular intervals and replace them if damaged or worn!
The replacement hoses must fulfill the technical requirements set by the equipment
manufacturer.
CAUTION! - Soiling of the hydraulic system
Effect: Damage to the machine
•
When connecting the quick couplings, ensure that these are clean and dry.
•
Note chafing areas or points of contact.
Depending on the front attachment,
different plug-in connectors are used
on the forage harvester (see separate
operating instructions of the front
attachment).
•
•
Connect the hydraulic hoses (1) to the plug-in
connections provided for this purpose on the forage
harvester.
Close not needed plug-in connectors with dust caps
(2).
2
1
VII - 24
BX850896
Start-up
Connecting hydraulic hoses and electrical
connection cables
1
Prior to connecting the hydraulic hoses, depressurise
the system on both sides.
To do this:
• Press the keys (1) and (2) (red) simultaneously (the
first hydraulic circuit is depressurised).
• Press the keys (3) and (4) (blue) simultaneously
(the second hydraulic circuit is depressurised).
3
2
1
4
Make sure the plugs and couplings are
clean; clean them if necessary.
BX500610
Grass pick-up
I
II
IV
-
Extend roller feelers
Retract roller feelers
Roller-type crop guard
Maize header
I - Raise plant divider
II - Lower plant divider
III - Folding out the maize header
IV - Folding in the maize header
1
2
-
Maize header sensor connection
Lighting cable
The identification of hydraulic
connections (I - IV) is also on the
hydraulic hoses of the attachment
device.
I
1
II
III
IV
2
BX200761_1
VII - 25
Start-up
7.5.3.3 Removing the Front Attachment
Note
Please also refer to the operating instructions of the attachment concerned.
Danger! - Unexpected movement of the machine Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries
•
There must be nobody between the machine and the front attachment.
•
Keep all persons clear of the swivel range while the machine is being swivelled from
transport into working position or vice-versa.
•
Place the machine on solid and level ground only and with the parking supports extended.
•
Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key and secure the machine against the
possibility of rolling back.
•
Wait until all machine parts have come to a complete stop.
•
Before working under or on the raised attachment, support the attachment securely.
The pendulum frame must be locked.
• If necessary, move the locking bolt (1) from position
II (unlocked) to position I (locked) and secure with
spring cotter pin (2).
I
2
II
1
2
1
EFL000010
Caution! - Danger of accident and damage!
Lay hydraulic hoses (1) on top of the front attachment.
Note
Before disconnecting the hydraulic hoses (1), depressurise the system on both sides.
•
Detach the hydraulic lines (1) from the hydraulic
couplings and seal using dust caps (2).
2
1
•
•
•
BX850896
Open the locking hook (1): Swivel the locking lever
(3) upwards and secure with the spring-mounted bar
(2)
Lower the pendulum frame of the forage harvester
until the holding claws are below the holding bolts
Move the forage harvester back
3
1
VII - 26
2
EFL000019
Start-up
7.5.3.4 Parking the Front Attachment
Note
See also the operating instructions of
the front attachment.
•
•
4
1
Set down the front attachment (1) with the parking
supports (2) extended and supporting wheels (3)
unfolded on a solid and level surface.
When parking, lay down the hydraulic hoses (4) on
the front attachment (1).
2
3
EF000020
7.5.4 Attaching the Rear Weight
Note
Attaching a rear weight is only necessary on machines with EasyCollect front attachment.
WARNING
Danger to life and risk of injury when the machine lifts off during braking and when driving on
slopes.
• In road traffic as well as when using the machine for work, only use the machine when the
specified rear weight and the front attachment are assembled.
The number of the required additional weights (1)
depends on the machine type as well as on the type of
the front attachment. The additional weights are
installed on the cast weight (2) (for information about
installation and te table of the additional weights, refer
to the operating instructions of the front attachment).
The cast weight and the additional weights form the
rear weight (3) which is installed on the machine.
3
2
1
BX851026
Assembly of the rear weight:
•
Unscrew the four screws (5) and remove the trailer
coupling (4).
4
5
BX851027
VII - 27
Start-up
•
•
•
Install the trailer coupling (4) with the four existing
screws (5) on the coupling support (6) of the rear
weight (3).
Position the rear weight (3) onto the rear of the
machine by using a suitable lifting gear so that the
connecting screws can be assembled.
To do this, use:
- The openings (7) for a forklift,
- Suspension points (8) for a lifting traverse.
Make sure the hooks of the chains of the lifting gear
are attached correctly on the suspension points.
5
6
4
BX851028
8
7
3
BX851029
•
Install the rear weight (3) with the screw
connections (9) and (10) under the rear of the
machine (for information regarding screw connection
material, refer to the parts list in the operating
instructions of the front attachment).
WARNING
Injuries or damage to the machine due
to falling down loads!
• Do not step under the suspended
load.
•
Install the rear weight (3) with the screw
connections (11) and (12) onto the bumper (13) of
the machine (for information regarding screw
connection material, refer to the parts list in the
operating instructions of the front attachment).
WARNING
Risk of accident caused by wrong
tyre pressure!
• After assembling the rear weight,
the tyre pressure must always be
checked.
•
Measure the tyre pressure with a tyre gauge and
adjust the tyre pressure to the specified values, if
necessary (for tyre pressure specifications, refer to
chapter "Maintenance - Tyres").
VII - 28
9
10
BX851030
12
13
11
BX851031
Start-up
7.5.5 Adjusting hydraulics of the forage
harvester
Perform the adjusting work for the
hydraulics of the forage harvester only
with the machine at standstill and
attachment set down.
Operate only with the lifting gear
lowered.
I
II
III
-
Lifting hydraulics locked
Lifting hydraulics in grass pick-up position
Lifting hydraulics in maize header position
1
Gras-pick up
The three-way valve (1) for the lifting hydraulics must
be in position II.
• If necessary turn the three-way valve (1) into
position II.
Corn-Conditioner
The three-way valve (1) for the lifting hydraulics must
be in position III.
• If necessary turn the three-way valve (1) to position
III.
1
III
I
II
BX200685
VII - 29
Start-up
7.5.6 Adjusting the lifting gear
The adjustment of the lifting gear
control EMR must be performed on the
first fitting of the attachment and on
changing the attachment, so that the
lifting gear bearing pressure control,
position control and distance control
function reliably.
Prerequisites for adjusting the lifting gear:
•
•
•
•
•
Engine is started.
Road/field release switch must be in the road mode
position.
Travelling gear off.
Maintenance release switch off.
Pendulum frame must be horizontal.
Adjusting
During adjustments, components may
move around, in particular the lifting
gear – danger of injury!
The first adjustment procedure to be covered is number 3.
Adjusting procedure 3 "Upper height"
Calibration of the upper height of the lifting gear.
The lifting gear is raised in the adjusting procedure.
•
2
Keep the lifting gear raising (1) button and memory
button for lifting gear adjusting procedure (2)
pressed simultaneously for approx. 7 seconds.
3
After successful adjustment the message "EMR
adjusting procedure 3 OK" appears in the status line
of the Info centre.
BX500040_1
Adjusting procedure 2 "Front attachment weight"
Calibration of the lifting gear pressure.
•
Press the lifting gear button (1) until the front
attachment unit is not touching the ground at all.
The EasyCollect is an exception. The glide skids
must touch the ground.
1
The lifting gear does not need to be raised to calibrate
the lifting gear pressure.((The position is approached
from above) It does not move during calibration.
•
Keep the memory button for lifting gear adjusting
procedure (2) pressed for approx. 7 seconds.
After successful adjustment the message "EMR
adjusting procedure 2 OK" appears in the status line
of the Info centre.
VII - 30
2
BX500041_1
Start-up
Adjusting procedure 1 "Lower height"
1
Calibration of the lower height of the lifting gear.
•
Keep the lifting gear lowering (1) button and memory
button for lifting gear adjusting procedure (2)
pressed simultaneously for approx. 7 seconds.
After successful adjustment the mess ge "EMR
adjusting procedure 1 OK" appears in the status line
of the Info centre.
2
BX500041_1
After the lifting gear has been
adjusted, the actual lifting gear
pressure must be verified
in
Field 1.
To do this:
Call the „Diagnostics“ main menu.
• Select menu 4-1-5 „Lifting gear“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
• Press the rotary potentiometer.
Swivel the lifting gear up and down at least twice.
Leave the lifting gear in a floating position (no ground
contact) and read the value of the actual lifting gear
pressure
in Field 1.
The actual lifting gear pressure
in Field 1 must
have a negative value. If it does not, repeat adjustment
process 2.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
II
„Lifting gear diagnostics“ appears.
1
III
IV
A
B
C
D
BX500093
VII - 31
Start-up
7.5.7 Converting the grass channel grain
conditioner
Conversion kit
1
-
Grain conditioner
2
-
V-belts
3
-
Cable deflection
4
-
Transport frame for grain conditioner
1
4
3
2
7.5.7.1 Preparations
•
BX850897
Open the flap (1) to the machine compartment on
the right hand side.
1
•
Pull the catch (3) up, and swivel the tool box (2)
open.
2
3
BX500014_2
•
Disassemble the two screws at the cover (1) and
remove the cover (1).
1
BX750032_1
VII - 32
Start-up
•
Unlock the locks (2) of the cover (1) under the
discharge accelerator and take out the cover (1).
2
Safety Instructions for Cable Winch
•
1
Before placing the cable winch (1) in operation, read
the following safety instructions. Follow the
instructions during operation.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The cable winch (1) may only be
used for installation and removal of
the grass channel and grain
conditioner.
Cable winch is energised
permanently. Connect remote
control only if cable winch is
required.
Careless operation of the cable
winch (1) can result in severe
injuries and damage to the machine.
When working with the cable winch,
always wear protective gloves.
Each time before using the cable
winch, check to make certain the
mounting bolts are securely seated
on the winch attachment plate.
Check the wire rope of the cable
winch and the connecting cable for
remote control for damage each time
before using and replace if
necessary (to replace the wire rope,
see Chapter 9 "Replacing the Wire
Rope").
When winding the rope make sure
that it is not wound one-sided.
Always leave five revolutions on the
winch drum for safety.
2
BX500700_1
1
3
2
BX500668_3
•
Connect the remote control (2) (is in the tool box) to
the connection (3) of the cable winch (1).
Keep remote control in the drawer
under the driver’s seat after usage in
order to avoid unwarranted use.
Method of operation of remote Control
Unwind cable from cable winch
• Press the key (1).
Wind cable onto cable winch:
• Press the key (2).
2
1
BX850659
VII - 33
Start-up
7.5.7.2 Fold out crane splice
Before assembly or disassembly of
grass channel, crane splice (2) has to
be folded out.
•
•
1
Loosen the winged nut (1) at the crane splice (2) of
grass channel (3).
Rotate crane splice (2) up to the edge guide
upwards in position (II) and attach it by tightening
the winged nut (1).
2
I
3
II
1
2
BX500681_1
7.5.7.3 Deinstallation of grass channel
•
•
Unwind cable (5) from cable winch.
Catch the hook (4) of the cable winch in the eye
ofthe pivoted lever (2).
5
Force of cable winch is higher than
necessary for assembly of grass
channel. Too long activation of cable
winch can lead to damaged
components of cable winch.
•
Wind cable onto cable winch, until the cable (5) is
tight.
•
Remove the cover (1).
4
2
BX500680_1
1
BX500015
VII - 34
Start-up
The attachment bolt on the left-hand
side can only be removed from below.
Thus remove the screw coupling on
the right-hand side in the end.
•
Loosen the screw connection (2) on either side of
the grass channel (1). In doing so, remove the left
screw at first. The right screw can be removed from
the outside or from above.
2
1
BX200240_2
Danger! - Load falling down.
Effect: Injuries or damage to the
machine.
• Do not step under the suspended
load!
•
•
Turn the spring-mounted bars (1) in that way that
they can engage.
Let the grass channel down with the cable winch
until the oblong holes of the tubes in the rear wall
and the bore holes of the discharge accelerator
housing lie on top of each other. As soon as the
corresponding bores are in alignment, the spring
pressure causes the spring-mounted bars (1) to
engage automatically.
2
1
BX500682_1
.
•
Unwind cable from cable winch, the grass channel
(1) swivels down.
1
BX500250_1
VII - 35
Start-up
•
Remove the hook of the cable winch from the
pivoted lever (2) on the grass channel (1) and
engage it on the eye (3) on the grass channel (1)
2
3
1
BX550432
Installation of cable guide:
• Position the cable roller guide (1) as shown in the
graphic BX200290 and screw in place with the
screw connection (2) on the lower cross brace of
the rear wall of the discharge accelerator.(in driving
direction right bore hole)
• Lead cable (3) corresponding to the description in
the graphic BX200290 round the guide roller.
2
1
3
BX200290_1
Danger! - Load falling down.
Effect: Injuries or damage to the
machine.
• Do not step under the suspended
load!
•
Raise grass channel (1) with the cable winch until
the receiving hooks (4) loose out of the holders (5)
at the transfer channel on both sides of the grass
channel.
4 5
1
4
5
BX500251_1
VII - 36
Start-up
•
•
•
Unwind cable (2) from cable winch until the grass
channel (1) lies on the ground.
Detach cable winch hook and pull out (1) grass
channel to the side.
Remove cable guide, if necessary.
2
1
The spring-mounted bars (1) must
remain locked, otherwise the rear
wall (2) will no longer be fixed.
BX500252_1
2
1
BX500682_1
7.5.7.4 Installation of grass channel
•
•
•
Rotate the crane splice (2) up to the edge guide
upwards in position (II) (see chapter „Fold out crane
splice“).
Deposit grass channel via installation cart into
mounting position below the machine.
Engage the hook (3) of the cable winch on the eye
(4) on the grass channel (1).
DANGER! - Load falling down.
Effect: Injuries or damage to the
machine.
• Always use the cable winch to hook
in the grass channel.
• It must be ensured that there are no
persons in the range of movement.
•
4
3
1
2
5
BX859807
Pull grass channel (1) with cable winch until the
receiving hooks (1) are located approx. at the height
of the holders (2).
Use the holders (a) at transfer shaft for
hitching the grass channel.
a
b
2
1
BX850821
VII - 37
Start-up
•
Tilt grass channel manually towards the front, so
that the receiving hooks (2) engage into the holders
(3).
DANGER! - Load falling down.
Effect: Injuries or damage to the
machine.
• Caution when using the grass
channel.
• Do not use the cable winch as long
as there are persons within the
range of movement of the parts.
•
•
3
2
1
BX850832
Let out cable (4) from the cable winch until the
grass channel is hanging downwards and the cable
(4) can be unhooked.
Unhook the hook of the cable (4) out of the eye (5).
4
5
•
BX850838
Disassemble the rope deflection (10).
10
BX850837_1
•
•
•
Swing crane strap (6) up to the stop upwards in
position (II) (see chapter "Fold out crane strap").
Fasten hook (7) of cable winch at the crane splice.
Pull up grass channel (1) via cable winch until bolt
(8) is inserted into the holders (9) of the rear wall at
the grass channel.
9
8
7
6
1
BX859809
VII - 38
Start-up
•
After swivelling up, assemble the grass channel (1)
with the fastening screws (2) on both sides to the
frame of the forage harvester starting on the right
machine side. Place the grass channel (1) in the
correct mounting position by using fastening screws
if necessary.
1
2
•
BX850831_1
Actuate the spring-mounted bars (1) to release the
lock on the rear wall (2).
2
1
The spring-mounted bars (1) must
always be released, otherwise the
grass channel will not reach the
working position.
BX500682_1
•
•
•
Screw the grass channel (1) with screw connection
(2) to both sides of the machine frame.
In doing so, start with the screw on the right hand
side in direction of travel, since this one can be
installed from the outside.
Loosen hooks of the cable winch and retract cable
winch completely.
Swing the pivoted lever (3 in Fig. BX859810) on the
grass channel from Installation/removal position into
transport position and attach it.
2
1
BX850857
•
•
Loosen the wing nut (2) on the crane splice (3) of
the grass channel (1).
Swivel the crane splice (3) as far down as it will go
to position (I) and tighten the wing nut (2) to lock it
in place.
2
3
I
1
BX851035
VII - 39
Start-up
After the installation of the grass
channel the following settings need to
be checked and, if necessary,
readjusted.
1. Setting Pick-up (When working with Pick Up).
The position and the height of the holding-down
device roller as well as the following baffle plate
must be adapted to the swath height, so that the
roller crop guide does not pile up the swath. (refer to
operating instructions Pick-up chapter 3.6.3 Setting
the roller crop guide and the swath guide plate)
2. Setting the drum base (refer to chapter 8.2.4
Tips for optimising crop flow).
3. Setting the rear wall (refer to chapter 8.2.4 Tips for
optimising crop flow).
•
1
Install the cover (1).
BX750032_1
•
Fit the cover (1) and close the locks (2) of the cover
(1) under the discharge accelerator.
2
1
2
•
Close the toolbox (2) and the flap (3) for the
machine compartment on the right hand side.
•
Remove remote control from cable winch and keep
it in the drawer under the driver’s seat in order to
avoid unwarranted use.
BX500700_1
3
1
2
BX850906
VII - 40
Start-up
7.5.6.5 Installation of the corn conditioner
Before assembly of the corn
conditioner, „Preparations before
working on the grass channel - Corn
Conditioner“ have to be carried out as
described in chapter 7.
•
•
•
•
2
1
Check whether the rear wall is secured by both
spring-mounted bars.
Install the cable roller guide (refer to chapter 7
„Installation of cable guide“).
Measure the spacing of the grain conditioner for
calibration after installation (refer to chapter 4, menu
3-6).
Push the corn conditioner with the transport frame
(3) half way to the side under the forage harvester.
BX500682_1
1
2
BX850835
•
•
Set cable winch cable (3) into the hook (4) of the
corn conditioner and guide it via roller panel
downwards.
Guide the cable (3) further over the cable guide (7),
under the round bar (9) and then further along under
the axle (8) upwards to the holder (6).
To prevent that the cable (3) glides
off, it must always be guided along
between cable guide (7) and round
bar (9). Do not in any case guide the
cable (3) outside over the axle (8) or
the round bar (9).
•
Hook the cable winch hook (5) into the holder of the
corn conditioner (6).
3
4
2
7
9
8
6
5
BX859811
VII - 41
Start-up
•
Put the V-belt (3) in place as shown in the diagram.
•
Align the corn conditioner with transport frame (1)
and fitted V-belt under the forage harvester so that
the receiving hooks of the corn conditioner (2) are in
front of the holders of the forage harvester.
1
2
3
Danger! - Load falling down
Effect: Injuries or damage to the
machine.
Do not step under the suspended
load!
BX850812
•
Pull corn conditioner (1) up with the aid of a cable
winch until the receiving hooks (1) of the corn
conditioner are located further up than the holders
(2) at the transfer shaft.
1
Use the holders (b) at the transfer shaft
for hitching the corn conditioner.
•
Press corn-conditioner forward with the feet until the
receiving hooks (1) of the corn conditioner are
located directly over the holders (2) at the transfer
shaft.
•
Lower corn conditioner via cable winch until the
receiving hooks (1) hook in in the holders (2) at the
transfer shaft.
Lower corn conditioner further via cable winch until
there is no tension on the cable any more.
•
BX850813
a
b
2
1
BX850821
VII - 42
Start-up
Danger! - Load falling down.
Effect: Injuries or damage to the
machine.
• Do not step under the suspended
load!
•
1
3
Unravel cable (2) out of the cable guide and loosen
it out of the holder (3) of the corn conditioner.
1
2
BX850814
•
Exit danger zone and pull corn conditioner (1) up via
cable winch until the bolts (1) are inserted into the
locking hooks (2) at the rear wall of the corn
conditioner.
2
1
BX850815
VII - 43
Start-up
•
Pre-assemble attachment bolt (4) on the right-hand
side of the machine (screw in threading until thread
mounting (5) is full).
Then pre-assemble attachment bolt on the left-hand
side of the machine accordingly.
5
6
4
BX850816_1
•
•
•
•
1
Actuate the spring-mounted bars (1) to release the
lock on the rear wall (2).
Screw corn conditioner (6) with screw joint (4) on
both sides of the machine and secure with counter
nut on the right-hand side of the machine.
Remove transport frame
Loosen cable winch hooks and retract cable winch
completely.
2
•
•
Fix the position of the receiving hooks (1) (left/right)
in the holding bolts (2) by installing the link (3).
Secure with screw, washer and nut.
Remove connection of remote control out of the
cable winch, remove remote control and keep it in
the drawer under the driver’s seat in order to avoid
unwarranted use.
BX850820_1
3
2
1
BX500699
VII - 44
Start-up
•
Open the shut-off valve for the grain conditioner
tensioning roller (1) (position II).
1
II
1
I
BX102000
•
Place belts (1) over drive roller (2). Press tension
roller back manually, if necessary.
1
2
BX200330
VII - 45
Start-up
•
Connect the central lubrication plug (2) of the grain
conditioner onto the central lubrication coupling (1).
1
2
BX200340
•
Connect the connection line (1) of the control motor
for roller spacing on the grain conditioner to the
electrical system of the forage harvester (2).
After dismantling the corn conditioner,
place the protective caps back on the
connections.
1
2
BX500015_1
•
•
Close and lock the maintenance flap (1).
Loosen the wing nuts (3) and remove the covering
plates (2) of the additional venting slots.
For further measures for optimising
the crop route, see Section 8.2.6.
2
3
3
1
VII - 46
BX500701
Start-up
•
Install the cover (1).
3
•
Close the toolbox (2) and the flap(3) for the machine
compartment on the right hand side.
1
2
BX850906
7.5.7.6 Demontage Corn-Conditioner
Note
Remove the grain conditioner in
reverse order to the installation
procedure.
VII - 47
Start-up
Refitting the pendulum frame cylinder
The compression spring (1) on the pendulum frame on
the right must be exchanged for the hydraulic cylinder
(2) for field operation with maize header.
•
1
Release the tension on the compression spring (1)
and remove it.
BX202010_1
•
Dismount the hydraulic cylinder (2).
2
BX850907
•
Connect the hydraulic cylinder of the pendulum
frame to the hydraulic connections (1, 2) according
to the colour-coded hydraulic plugs.
For further hydraulic adjustments of
the forage harvester for field operation
with maize header, see Section 7.5.5
1
2
BX500094
Perform the following refitting jobs and make these
settings:
•
•
•
•
•
Refitting the cutting blade - refer to chapter
„Maintenance“.
Feed drive grain capture plates
Refitting the conveyor bars on the pre-compression
rollers - see chapter „Maintenance“.
Replacing the counterblade - refer to chapter
„Maintenance“.
Setting the maize header mode - refer to chapter
„Info Centre“.
VII - 48
Start-up
•
For changing between driving headlights on the
guardrail (1) and the lamp carrier (2) on the
EasyCollect 753/903/1053, use the switch (3) on
the operating console.
•
Grain conditioner – Adjusting the distance - see
Sect. 4.
•
Calibrate the pendulum frame and absolute lifting
gear height - see Sect. 4.
•
Mount the upper discharge chute extension
(EasyCollect 7500/EasyCollect 9000 only)
•
Adjust the rear wall of the discharge accelerator to a
gap dimension of 2-4 mm
•
Reset the shut-off valves to maize header mode
(see Sect. 7)
•
Adjust the tyres to the correct pressure
1
2
BX500647_3
3
For further refitting jobs see operating
instructions EASYCOLLECT 903/1053..
BX850977_1
7.4 Trailer operation
The forage harvester is equipped as standard with a
hitch coupling (1).
Connect the trailer only to the trailer
hitch.
Observe the information in the
operating license of the machine.
1
2
3
-
4
-
Hitch coupling
Power socket for lighting
Compressed air connections for two-line
brake (optional)
Additional hydraulics (optional)
2
4
1
3
BX500027_1
In road traffic connect the lighting of the trailer to the
power socket (2) and check it for functioning.
VII - 49
Start-up
7.6.1 Connecting the Trailer
Danger to life or serious injuries!
• The permissible noseweights and axle loads of machine and trailer must not be exceeded.
• TMake sure the trailer is secured against rolling away.
• TWhen connecting the trailer, do not stand between machine and trailer.
•
•
•
•
•
Secure the trailer against the possibility of rolling
back.
Make certain the towing eye and the trailer coupling
are on the same height.
To open the trailer coupling, press the hand lever (1)
upwards until the snap-in point is reached.
Clean the trailer coupling with a suitable aid.
Move back the machine slowly until the towing eye
engages in the trailer coupling.
1
Danger to life or serious injuries!
The bolt (2) must be locked in place
completely to ensure that the trailer
does not detach itself from the trailer
coupling.
•
•
•
•
Check whether the inspection pin (3) is closed off
flushed with the surface of the housing.
Crank the trailer supporting wheel (if available) up .
Connect the plugs for power supply and check
lighting system.
Connect the compressed air hoses, if a
compressed air connection (4) (optional) is
available.
BX850999
3
2
BX851015
There is a risk of accident caused by
the use of defective compressed air
couplings.
Worn or damaged compressed air
couplings have a negative effect on
how the brakes work.
Make certain the couplings are
working properly and there are no
leaks. Replace defective rubber seals
immediately.
Replace the coupling heads regularly
depending on frequency of coupling,
but in any case once or twice a year.
Make certain all compressed air
connections are properly seated.
VII - 50
4
BX851039
Start-up
Connecting Trailer for Italy
Danger to life or serious injuries!
• The permissible noseweights and axle loads of machine and trailer must not be exceeded.
• Make sure the trailer is secured against rolling away.
• When connecting the trailer, do not stand between machine and trailer.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Secure the trailer against the possibility of rolling
back.
Make certain the towing eye and the trailer coupling
are on the same height.
Pull cotter pin (1) out of the bolt (2) and lift the bolt
with the handle (3) mounting up and out.
Clean the trailer coupling with a suitable aid.
Move machine back slowly unitl the towing eye is in
the trailer coupling.
Connect towing eye and trailer coupling with bolt (2)
and secure with cotter pin (1).
Danger to life or serious injuries!
Ensure that the bolt (2) is secured with
the cotter pin (1). Otherwise there is a
risk that the trailer detaches from the
trailer coupling.
•
•
•
3
2
1
BX851034
Crank the trailer supporting wheel (if available) up.
Connect the plugs for power supply and check
lighting system.
Connect the compressed air hoses, if a
compressed air connection (optional) is available.
There is a risk of accident caused by
the use of defective compressed air
couplings.
Worn or damaged compressed air
couplings have a negative effect on
how the brakes work.
Make certain the couplings are
working properly and there are no
leaks. Replace defective rubber seals
immediately.
Replace the coupling heads regularly
depending on frequency of coupling,
but in any case once or twice a year.
Make certain all compressed air
connections are properly seated.
VII - 51
Start-up
7.6.2 Disconnecting the Trailer
Danger to life or serious injuries!
• Make sure the trailer is secured against rolling away.
• When disconnecting the trailer, do not stand between the machine and the trailer.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Secure the trailer against the possibility of rolling
back.
Remove the plugs for power supply.
Disconnect the compressed air hoses, if a
compressed air connection (4) (optional) is
available.
Crank the trailer supporting wheel down (if
available).
Press the hand lever (1) upwards until the snap-in
point is reached.
Move forward the machine slowly until the towing
eye is removed from the trailer coupling.
Risk of injury of the limbs in the area
of the trailer coupling!
• Do not lock the trailer hitch manually
by activating the trigger lever (2).
The spring-loaded locking bolt
springs back.
•
Turn the trailer coupling down to lock it by pressing
lever (1). Thus it will be avoided that the holder
opening of the locking bolt becomes soiled.
VII - 52
4
BX851039
1
2
BX851000
Start-up
Disconnecting Trailer for Italy
Danger to life or serious injuries!
• Make sure the trailer is secured against rolling away.
• When disconnecting the trailer, do not stand between the machine and the trailer.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Secure the trailer against the possibility of rolling
back.
Remove the plugs for power supply.
Disconnect the compressed air hoses, if a
compressed air connection (optional) is available.
Crank the trailer supporting wheel down (if
available).
Pull cotter pin (1) out of the bolt (2) and lift the bolt
with the handle (3) mounting up and out.
Move forward the machine slowly until the towing
eye is removed from the trailer coupling.
Plug bolt (2) into the trailer coupling and secure with
cotter pin (1).
3
2
1
BX851034
VII - 53
Start-up
7.7 Registration plates
1
2
3
BX851065
•
•
Install the front registration plate to both support
brackets (1) at the front skirt (2) of the driver's cab.
Install the rear registration plate into the recess
provided for that purpose centrally above the
lettering, under the registration plate lighting (3) on
the tailgate.
7.8 Connecting an additional silage agent
dosing unit (external)
2
1
BX850955_1
BiG X offers the option of connecting an additional silage agent dosing unit.
When this unit is in operation, the electronics controls the dosing unit completely automatically.
The electrical connection (1) for the dosing unit is located above the right front wheel under the platform or in the right
lamp carrier (2). It is a 3-pin plug identified as XY60.
The matching connection cable (Material No. 303-558-1, length about 3 m) is included with the
machine.
VII - 54
Start-up
Connection assignment of the cable
BX500652
•
•
•
XY 60 contact 1:
22-F74
XY60 contact 2:
XY60 contact 3:
voltage,
fuse 22-
+12 volts switched max. 15
amps through fuse
Earth
+12 volts continuous
max. 15 amps through
F74
For information on operating the
silage agent equipment, see Chapter 4
"Silage Fodder Addition"
7.9 Plugs included with delivery depending on version of the silage
agent dosing unit (internal/external)
Plug
XM16
XB77
XY60
XB60
Assignment
Pump silage agent
Flow sensor
Molasses
Filling level add. tank
Silage agent dosing unit
Regulated internally/ unregulated internally
Regulated internally
Unregulated internally
Regulated internally/ Unregulated
internally/ externally
Storage location
Above the right front wheel
Behind the cab
Above the right front wheel
Above the right front wheel
The operation of the internal silage
agent system is described in the
appendix.
VII - 55
Start-up
VII - 56
Operation
8
Operation
DANGER! - Tilting of the machine
Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.
• The driver of the machine must be qualified to operate the machine in every usual situation of
use without causing an accident.
DANGER! - Working range of the machine
Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries, property damages.
• Before reverse travel, the driver of the machine must make certain there are no persons or
objects behind the machine.
8.1 Road travel
When driving on roads, the general requirements or special conditions of the Road Traffic Type
Approval Law (StVZO) and the Road Traffic Law (StVO) must be observed.
The driving speed of the forage harvester must to be adapted to local conditions.
DANGER! - Risk of accident
Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries as the trailer drives up in case of full braking.
• If the machine is equipped with a trailer brake (option) for the operation with the trailer, the
both brake pedals must always be linked when driving on the road.
•
•
Make certain before starting to move on road that
the brake pedals (1) and (2) are connected with
each other via connecting bolt (3) (see fig.
BX851045).
If necessary, disconnect the brake pedal: Turn the
connecting bolt (3) upwards, push it in until the stop
is reached and snap it in downwards with a rotation.
3
Driving downhill
2
1
BX851045
The maximum permissible speed of 40
km/h must not be exceeded even when
driving downhill!
On steep slopes, the driver has the possibility to reduce
travelling speed via control lever or by actuating the foot
brake (in the order of listing).
VIII - 1
Operation
8.1.1 Transport position
In road traffic, the upper discharge chute (1) and the
front attachment fitted must be in transport position.
•
•
Moving the front attachment (2) into the transport
position – cf. operating instructions of the front
attachment.
Set the discharge chute (1) to the transport position
using the multi-function lever (see chapter Setting
the Cutting Length and Discharge Chute Position).
For the EasyCollect EC1053 (and
optionally for the EasyCollect EC 903),
the discharge chute must also be
folded back manually for road travel
(See function „K“).
2
1
For further adjustment jobs see
operating instructions EasyCollect
903/1053.
BX850969
Feed drive/front attachment in transport position
Danger!
Unpredictable moving of the lifting
gear during folding in and out of the
front attachment
Effect: Danger to life, injuries of
individuals.
No individuals are allowed in the area
of the lifting gear during folding in
and out of the front attachment!
•
•
Engine is started.
Road/field release switch must be in the field mode
position.
Press the "Lower lifting gear" (1) push-button.
Press the "Lift lifting gear" (2) push-button.
The lifting gear is lowered or lifted. During the first
second of the actuation the lifting/lowering speed is
very slow, but subsequently it will increase in speed.
When the maize header is retracted, the lifting height is
limited to 60 % of the maximum lifting height; there is
no limitation when the grass pick-up has been fitted.
If no control button is active, the position controller will
keep the lifting gear on the current lifting height.
A vibration absorber is permanently active in road
traffic. It is also active, if the push-button has not been
pressed after the diesel engine has been switched on.
VIII - 2
1
2
BX850043_2
Operation
Swivelling the upper discharge chute into transport
position
Pre-requisites:
•
The driver’s seat must be occupied.
Engine is started.
Road/field release switch must be in the field mode
position.
Main coupling off.
1
Press the "Upper discharge chute in transport
position" (1) push-button.
BX850956
The upper discharge chute travels automatically into
the transport position.
•
•
Visually check the correct position of the upper
discharge chute (1) on the support (2).
If and when necessary, use the manual control to
move the upper discharge chute into the correct
position (cf. chapter on operating the upper
discharge chute).
1
2
BX850898
8.1.2 Prior to travel
•
Prior to travelling on traffic routes, please ensure
that the warning boards (1, 2) have been fitted and
are located on the outermost positions.
•
Check the brake and light functions.
1
1
1
BX851066
VIII - 3
Operation
•
Check whether the fire extinguisher (1) is in a readyto-use condition in the holder provided on the
machine roof.
Have the operational readiness of the
fire extinguisher checked annually, at
the latest every two years. The
manufacturing date or the date of the
final inspection of the fire extinguisher
shall be decisive. The testing intervals
may vary from country to country. In
this case, the instructions on the fire
extinguisher of the respective
countries shall be applicable.
1
BX100450
Two wheel chocks have to be ready to hand at all
times.
•
Check whether the wheel chocks (1) are in a readyto-use condition in the holder provided on the left
side of the machine.
1
BX850900
8.1.3 Travel
When travelling on roads, the road/field
release switch (1) has to be set to
position I.
This ensures that only the travelling
gear, the steering mechanism and the
brakes are active.
1
1
For more information on road travel, please refer to
chapter titled "Initial operation – road travel".
I
VIII - 4
II
BX750C-0004
Operation
8.2 Field operation
DANGER! - Working range of the machine
Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.
• Before starting work in the field, make certain there is no person in the direct area around
the machine.
• When working near ditches or shores, make certain the distance of the machine to the
border is larger than the ditch or the shore.
For special instructions on the use of the respective front attachment fitted, please refer to the
separate operating instructions of the front attachment.
Please refer to the chapter titled "Info Centre" for
settings, such as mode of operation, working width,
front attachment/feed drive, silage attachment, lifting
gear, grain conditioner and customer data.
For information on drive operation, please refer to the
chapter titled "Initial operation – drive operation".
2
Pre-requisites for field operation
-
The engine is started.
The road/field release switch (1) must be in field
operation position.
The maintenance release switch (2) must be set to
off.
1
BX851083
8.2.1 Field Mode on Slopes
DANGER! - Tilting of the Machine
Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.
• In field operation on slopes, the ground must be level. Furthermore a sufficient grip of the
tyres on the ground must be ensured.
• Do only turn downhill, with reduced speed and by driving a large curve.
• The machine must not be used if the angle of inclination of the terrain is larger than the
specified one.
When driving uphill or downhill, the working implement:
• Must always be directed up slope,
• Must be held as close to the ground as possible.
The angle of inclination of the terrain on which the
machine is operated must not exceed the following
maximum values:
• Uphill and downhill 25% (15°) at the most
• Lateral 50% (30°) at the most
VIII - 5
Operation
Driving downhill in field mode with trailer and
connected trailer brake (option).
The brake pedals can be disconnected
before field mode of the machine to
ensure that the trailer can be braked
separately.
•
•
If necessary, disconnect the brake pedal: Turn the
connecting bolt (3) upwards, pull it out and snap it in
downwards with a rotation.
Actuate the brake pedal (2) in order to brake the
trailer separately.
3
2
1
BX851046
VIII - 6
Operation
8.2.2 Working in the Vicinity of Power
Transmission Lines
Always keep the safety distances according to the
table.
Rated voltage (KV)
To 1
Above 1 to 110
Above 101 to 220
Above 220 to 380
•
Safe distance from
overhead lines (m)
1
2
3
4
WARNING
Danger to life and danger to fire if the
machine comes into contact with an
electrical high voltage cable.
• When folding out and folding in the
discharge chute, keep sufficient
distance to the power transmission
lines.
If it is not possible to move the machine out of the
danger zone, but if it must be left (for example in
the event of fire), jump off the lowest platform (if
possible) of the machine with completely closed
feets without touching parts of the machine when
reaching the ground.
For leaving the cabin, use the
emergency exit, if necessary (refer to
chapter 5 "Emergency Exit").
•
•
•
Move away from the machine with very small steps.
Block off the scene of accident in an area of 20 m.
Inform the network operator immediately to cause
the lines to be switched off.
WARNING
A contact with the machine can
cause an electric shock and may be
lethal.
• Before starting salvage work of the
machine, the disconnection of the
affected overhead pipeline must be
confirmed by the network operator.
If the machine touches an electrical high voltage cable,
proceed as follows:
• Stop the machine immediately.
• Apply the parking brake.
• Third parties are not allowed to approach the
machine. Moreover they are not permitted to touch it.
Warn approaching persons (by honking, by making
suitable gestures) and request professional rescue
workers.
• Try to move the machine out of the danger zone.
• Switch off the engine if this is not possible.
• Do not leave the cabine, if this is possible. When
running, a step voltage can arise due to the distance
of the feets. The consequence of such a step
voltage is a fatal current pulse.
8.2.3 Lifting gear
Please refer to the chapter titled "Info Centre – Settings Lifting Gear" for settings of the lifting gear control
and setpoint pressure or height.
Activating the lifting gear position control
When the lifting gear position control is active, the
control sets the height constant relative to the
machine.
Pre-requisites:
- The Info Centre is used to set the lifting gear
position control; the
-
icon along with the
setpoint height in cm is displayed.
The lifting gear position control is currently inactive.
The lifting gear position control is currently inactive.
A
B
C
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BX850959
VIII - 7
Operation
•
•
Press the "Lower lifting gear" (1) push-button.
Press the "Lift lifting gear" (2) push-button.
The lifting gear is lowered or lifted. During the first
second of the actuation the lifting/lowering speed is very
slow, but subsequently it will increase in speed.
When the keys (1 or 2) are released, the current lifting
height is measured and kept constant relative to the
machine by the lifting gear position control until the lifting
gear height is manually overdriven.
Modify and save the setpoint height (working
position) on the multi-function lever
• Use the "Lift lifting gear" (2) or "Lower lifting gear" (1)
push-buttons to move the unit to the new setpoint
height.
• Keep the "Automatic lifting gear" (3) push-button
pressed for about 3 seconds.
1
3
2
BX850957
The new setpoint height is saved and a corresponding
information message will appear in the display of the Info
Centre.
Activating the setpoint height adjusted
• Press key "Automatic lifting gear" (3).
The lifting gear is lifted or lowered to the setpoint height
set. The
icon is used in the Info Centre to display
the setpoint height set in cm. The lifting gear position
control is active.
Deactivating the lifting gear position control
The lifting gear position control will be deactivated in
case of:
- Fault detection
- Manual control of the lifting gear with keys (1) and (2).
4
Deactivating the lifting gear position control
The lifting gear position control will be deactivated in
case of:
• Fault detection
• Manual control of the lifting gear with keys (1)and(2)
1
Setting and saving the lifting height for the headland
2
•
•
Use the "Lift lifting gear" (2) or "Lower lifting gear" (1)
push-buttons to move the unit to the lifting height.
Keep the "Lift lifting gear to top" (4) push-button
pressed for approx. 3 seconds.
The new lifting height is saved and a corresponding
information message will appear in the display of the Info
Centre.
Change the lifting height by new setting and saving.
Lifting the lifting gear right up – headland setting
By pressing the "Lift lifting gear to top" (4) push-button,
the lifting gear is lifted to the saved value (headland
setting).
•
Press the "Lift lifting gear to top" (4) push-button.
The lifting gear is lifted to the lifting height set.
VIII - 8
BX850958
Operation
Activating the lifting gear top pressure control
When the lifting gear top pressure control is active, the
control sets the pressure of the lifting gear on the
ground to a constant value.
The control is activated as follows: activate the
setpoint pressure; use the multi-function lever to
change the setpoint pressure; the saving process
corresponds to the procedure used in the lifting gear
position control.
B
A
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX850959
Lifting and lowering the lifting gear in case of
lifting gear top pressure control
•
Use the "Lift lifting gear" (2) or "Lower lifting gear"
(1) push-buttons to move the unit.
After the key is released (1 or 2), a position controller
will keep the lifting gear at a constant lifting height.
Press key "Automatic lifting gear" (3) for activation of
lifting gear top pressure control.
1
•
3
Press key "Automatic lifting gear" (3). (Active
swinging).
2
The lifting gear is lowered to the ground and is
automatically set to the lifting gear top pressure
control.
BX850957
Activating the lifting gear spacing control (optional)
The lifting gear spacing control can be activated only if
spacing sensor have been fitted on the maize header.
When the lifting gear spacing control is active, the
control sets the height constant relative to the
machine.
The control is activated as follows: activate the
setpoint height; use the multi-function lever to change
the setpoint height; the saving process corresponds to
the procedure used in the lifting gear position control.
A
B
C
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BX850959
VIII - 9
Operation
8.2.4 Feed drive/front attachment
For setting the setpoint speed of the feed drive and the
cutting length, please refer to the chapter titled "Info
Centre settings – feed drive/front attachment".
Switching the feed drive/front attachment on
Danger to life, injuries.
When switching on feed drive/front
attachment, unpredictable movements
of feed drive roller and front
attachment may occur.
There must be no persons in the range
of movement of these parts!
In order to be able to switch on the feed drive/front
attachment, the following conditions must be met:
-
•
•
The driver’s seat must be occupied.
The engine is started.
The road/field release switch (1) must be in field
operation position.
The maintenance release switch (2) must be set to off.
The feed drive/front attachment release switch (4)
must be set to on.
Switch on the main coupling (3).
Press the "Reverse feed drive/front attachment" key
(2) on the multifunction lever or on the manual
operation key (3) on the platform for a short time.
Press the "Feed drive/front attachment on - off" (1)
push-button on the multifunction lever or on the
manual operation on the platform.
3
1
2
4
BX851084
2
1
The front attachment units and the feed drive rollers are
switched on.
When the feed drive/front attachment is
switched on for the first time, the infeed
rollers and the front attachment will
reverse for a short time to remove any
potential soiling.
Switching the feed drive/front attachment off
• Press the key "feed drive/front attachment on - off" (1)
on the multi-function lever a second time.
The front attachment units and the feed drive rollers are
switched off.
BX850961
3
BX850901
VIII - 10
Operation
Reversing the feed drive/front attachment
In case of blockages and malfunctions in the crop flow,
feed drive/front attachment can be reversed.
2
The cutting drum may suddenly start if
an error occurs during reversing
without cutting drum being activated.
1
It must be ensured that there are no
persons in the area of the cutting
drum and other components for crop
flow when reversing feed drive/front
attachment.
Effect: Danger to life, injuries.
•
BX850961
Press the "Reverse feed drive/front attachment"
key (2) on the multifunction lever and hold it down
or press the manual mode key (1) on the platform.
3
The front attachment units and the drive feed rollers
will reverse for as long as the "Reversing the feed
drive/front attachment" (2/1) push-button is pressed.
The "Reversing the feed drive/front attachment" (2) pushbutton can be pressed also, even if the feed drive/front
attachment is switched on.
Subsequently the feed drive/front attachment must be
switched on again.
The traction drive release switch must be in position
"OFF" when reversing outside the cabin (Use the key
(3) on the manual operation on the platform).
8.2.5 Setting the Cutting Length and Discharge Chute Position
Two cutter lengths can be saved and brought up on the
multifunction lever.
The shape and swivelling range of the upper discharge
chute (1) have been designed in such a way that
operation is possible with towing trailer as well as with
forage trailers to the left and right.
The operation is controlled by the multi-function lever.
The ejector flap can also be set hydraulically.
BX850901
Metal detection
When starting the metal detection, feed drive/front
attachment stops instantaneously.
• Acknowledge the fault message.
• Permit the feed drive/front attachment to reverse.
• Stop the machine. Remove the metal.
RockProtect
The feed drive/front attachment stops instantaneously
when a larger foreign object (for example stone) has
been detected in the feed drive.
• Acknowledge the error message.
• Permit the feed drive/front attachment to reverse.
• Stop the machine. Remove foreign objects.
1
BX850962
VIII - 11
Operation
4
J
2
1
H
5
G
3
K
L
M
7
6
20
BX850963_1
1
-
Rotate discharge chute left
2
-
Rotate discharge chute right
3
-
Ejector flap down
4
-
Ejector flap up
5
-
Mirror upper discharge chute (with main
coupling switched on)
-
Upper discharge chute in transport position
(with main coupling switched off)
For the EasyCollect EC1053 (and
optionally for the EasyCollect EC 903),
the discharge chute must also be
folded back manually for road travel
(See function „K“).
6
-
Save the cutting length
G
-
Bring up cutting length value 1
If the button 6 is pressed and is past the
action point, the cutting length is saved in the
Info Centre (value 1)
H
-
Central position
J
-
Bring up cutting length value 2
If the 6 button is pressed and is past the
action point, the cutting length is saved in the
Info Centre (value 2)
VIII - 12
K
-
L
M
-
Pull the joystick (20) forward while holding down
the button (6):
Lower discharge chute, fold in discharge chute
extension simultaneously (if available) for
EasyCollect EC 1053 (14 rows) (the order can
vary).
Central position
Pull the joystick (20) backward while holding
down the button (6):
Lift discharge chute, fold out discharge chute
extension simultaneously (if available) for
EasyCollect EC 1053 (14 rows) (the order can
vary).
If the discharge chute flap is lifted, the
folding in of the upper discharge chute
extension defers by approx. 2 seconds,
because the discharge chute flap was
being lowered automatically before.
During folding in and folding out the
discharge chute flap can't be actuated.
Operation
8.2.6 Tips for optimising crop flow
1. How attachment speed depends on cutting length
Long cutting lengths require a higher speed for the front
attachment. If the speed is too low, the feed drive
rollers will pull the crop in in clumps from the front
attachment and the crop flow will separate off.
Short cutting lengths require a slower speed for the
front attachment. If the speed is too high, the paddles
of the grass pick-up will move the crop too far forward
and there may be jams in the maize header.
Reduce the driving speed for the maize header if
necessary.
Basic setting (on standard drum with 28 blades):
• Grass
Attachment speed 500 RPM at 10 mm
cutting length
Attachment speed 600 RPM at 18 mm
cutting length
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Overview cutting length - front attachment speed
Number of blades
Front attachment
speed
10
500 rpm
28 mm
600 rpm
50 mm
14
20 mm
36 mm
20
28
14 mm 10 mm
25 mm 18 mm
Front attachment speed X-Disc: 700 rpm
B
A
C
D
BX850950
2. Discharge capacity of the machine
The cutting drum determines mainly the discharge
capacity of the machine.
Depending on how far the cutter (1) extends beyond the
blade carrier (3) there will be correspondingly more or
less wind = discharge output.
Grinding off the cutters as well as dirt under the blades
reduces the volume for which the discharge capacity is
responsible.
1
3
Sharp tools – risk of injury!
Always wear gloves when working
with the blade drum.
•
•
Move the cutter (1) to its greatest possible
overhang. The max. overhang is about
82 mm (2).
Readjust the cutting blade frequently (refer to the
section on Maintenance – Adjusting or replacing
the cutting blade).
1
2
Keep the open area under the cutter (1) and blade
carrier (3) clean.
BX200490
VIII - 13
Operation
Adjusting the drum base
An incorrectly adjusted drum base will
result in increased fuel consumption
and wear of machine components.
a
Another way to improve the discharge capacity is to
fine-tune the setting of the drum base (1).
The drum base is adjusted in the factory.
• The distance from the blades to the drum base in
the rear is 6-7 mm.
3
2
1
•
The distance from the blades (4) to the drum base
in the front is adjusted automatically by the counterblade (5).
The nature of the crop (for example a dry crop) may
require readjusting the drum base. Furthermore,
checking and, if necessary, adjusting of the settings
after the conversion of the grass channel are
necessary.
BX850902
To reduce the gap dimension between the drum
base and blade:
• Loosen the counter nuts (3).
• Remove the screw (2), the distance of the drum
base (1) minimises.
• Tighten the counter nuts (3).
4
6 mm
To increase the gap dimension between the drum
base and blade:
• Loosen the counter nuts (3).
• Srew in the screw (2), the distance of the drum
base (1) increases.
• Tighten the counter nuts (3).
6
BX859818
After the drum base is adjusted, check
dimension „a“ and reset it to 48 mm if
necessary.
4
5
BX101241_1
VIII - 14
Operation
Setting the Discharge Accelerator Rear Wall
Risk of injury due to sharp edges.
•
Always wear protective gloves.
•
Only turn the discharge accelerator drum by using a tool.
•
Fix the discharge accelerator drum in place for all work on the discharge accelerator drum.
•
•
Remove the ignition key, secure the forage harvester
from being placed in operation or rolling away
unintentionally.
Wait until all units have come to a complete stop.
Settings with Installed Grass Channel
An incorrectly set distance between
discharge accelerator and rear wall will
result in an increased fuel consumption
and wear of machine components.
•
1
The point of impact (1) of the foraged crops on top in
the channel support should be as far as possible
behind the centre
Setting the distance of discharge accelerator - rear
wall on top
WHBBX02399
1
a
3
2
WHBBX02037
(1)
(2)
(3)
•
•
•
•
Channel support
Wear plate of rear wall
Rubber pad
Adjust the rear wall of the discharge accelerator in
such a way that the distance (a) between the wear
plate of the rear wall (2) and the channel support (1)
is about 15mm at the narrowest point but at least
12mm.
Set this distance using the both rubber pads (3) left
and right on the rear wall of the discharge
accelerator.
When doing this, make sure that the distance
between the wear plate and the rotor of the discharge
accelerator is as even as possible.
It might be necessary to readjust it via the left or the
right rubber pad (3).
VIII - 15
Operation
Setting the distance of discharge accelerator - rear
wall below
•
Check distance "a" between rear wall (1) and throw
shovel (2) bottom
2
Reducing or increasing the distance (a)
between the throw shovels (2) and the rear
wall (1) may influence the discharge
performance depending on the crop.
1
a
WHBBX02169
Default factory setting:
• Grass 3 mm
5
3
1
2
4
WHBBX02170
Set the distance as follows, if necessary:
• Loosen counter nut (5)
• Screw out stop screw (3)
• Set the distance of the rear wall (2) to the discharge accelerator (1) via adjusting screw (4)
• Readjust stop screw (3)
• Tighten counter nut (5)
• Retighten adjusting screw (4)
The setting must be made evenly on both
adjusting screws (4) right/left.
VIII - 16
Operation
Setting the spring force of the rear wall
1
2
3
WHBBX02171
•
•
•
•
Loosen nut (3).
To reduce the spring force, slightly screw out the
hexagonal head screws (1) on the rear wall - the
spring (2) is released.
To increase the spring force, slightly screw in the
hexagonal head screws (1) on the rear wall - the
spring (2) is tightened.
Tighten nut (3).
a
WHBBX02406
•
•
Select the pretension to obtain a spring path (a) of at
least 10mm and at most 12mm. Due to the fact that
the distance between the wear plate and the channel
support is 15 mm, it is ensured that no collecting
edge emerges between the wear plate of the rear wall
and the channel support.
After the adjustment has been carried out
completely, it is essential to check whether a
collecting edge towards the channel support arises
when the rear wall is entirely sprung back. If
necessary, readjust the position of the rear wall via
the rubber pad, adjust the preload length of the spring
and check the distance between discharge
accelerator rotor and wear plate.
VIII - 17
Operation
•
If the claw (2) of the discharge accelerator rear wall
does not reach exactly into the bolt (3) of the grass
channel, pull the grass channel to the front on one
side until the claw has full contact (1)
1
2
3
WHBBX02175
Setting the additional air slots for use with grass
channel
Default factory setting for use with grass channel:
completely closed
• Max. 50 % open left and right. (When the additional
air slots are wide open, too much air is directed
against the flow of air in the cutting drum and the
discharge output is reduced.)
1
Setting the additional air slots:
• Loosen wing nuts (1)
• Pull the cover plates (2) to the middle up to the
desired position or remove completely
• Tighten wing nuts (1)
2
WHBBX02172
Settings with Installed Corn Conditioner
Distance between the stop of the discharge
accelerator and the corn conditioner
•
When installing the corn conditioner, set distance "a"
between the stop on the discharge accelerator
housing and the corn conditioner to a dimension of
60 mm
a
WHBBX02173
VIII - 18
Operation
•
The rear wall of the discharge accelerator should be
set in such a way that the distance (b) between the
wear plate rear wall (2) and the discharge accelerator
rotor (1) is 2 mm
b
1
2
WHBBX02407
1
2
WHBBX02408
•
•
•
•
•
•
• Loosen the nut (1).
Set the distance of 2 mm by using the both rubber
pads (2) left and right on the rear wall of the
discharge accelerator.
When doing this, make sure that the distance
between the wear plate and the rotor of the
discharge accelerator is as even as possible.
It might be necessary to readjust it via the left or
the right rubber pad (1).
Tighten nut (1).
Check the transition between corn conditioner and
discharge accelerator rear wall.
Make sure that there is no collecting edge; this
means that the deflector sheet of the corn
conditioner must be higher than the rear wall of the
discharge accelerator.
If this is not the case, another
deflector sheet must be assembled
(repair kit
150435086, parts number of deflector
sheet: 202265610).
VIII - 19
Operation
Checking the belt distance of the corn conditioner
1
a
WHBBX02176
•
•
•
Check the distance between belt pulley and belt
Dimension „a“: min. 6 mm
If the dimension „a“ is smaller than 6 mm, raise the
corn conditioner in the crop flow (1)
After the corn conditioner has been raised, check the
distance between the rear wall of the discharge
accelerator and the discharge accelerator rotor and
correct it via rubber pad, if necessary
Setting the spring force of the rear wall
•
The dimension (a) for the transition to the channel
support (2) results from adjusting the rear wall (1) to
the discharge accelerator rotor (2)
2
3
1
4
WHBBX02174
1 Wear plate discharge accelerator rear wall (standard
or HD)
2 Channel support
3 Collecting edge
4 Discharge accelerator rotor
VIII - 20
Operation
a
WHBBX02406
•
•
•
Select the pretension to obtain a spring path (a) of
max. 10 mm.
After the adjustment has been carried out
completely, it is essential to check whether a
collecting edge arises towards the channel support
when the rear wall is entirely sprung back. If
necessary, readjust the position of the rear wall via
the rubber pad, adjust the preload length of the spring
and check the distance between discharge
accelerator rotor and wear plate.
If the claw (2) of the discharge accelerator rear wall
does not reach exactly into the bolt (3) of the corn
conditioner, then pull the corn conditioner forward on
one side until the claw has full contact (1)
1
2
3
WHBBX02175
Setting additional air slots discharge accelerator for
use with corn conditioner
•
Default factory setting for use with corn
conditioner: completely opened
(no air comes up through the corn conditioner to the
discharge accelerator for maize)
Setting the additional air slots:
• Loosen wing nuts (1)
• Pull the cover plate (2) to the middle up to the
desired position or remove completely
• Tighten wing nuts (1)
If the discharge capacity is still not
sufficient, an additional distance sheet
can be mounted between wear sheet
and discharge accelerator rear wall.
1
2
WHBBX02172
VIII - 21
Operation
8.2.7 Grinding the cutting blade
Sharp tools - risk of injury!
Always wear gloves when working
with the blade drum.
Dull cutting blades (1) and too great a
distance between the cutting blades (1)
and the counterblade (2) will result in
an unnecessarily high requirement of
force, poor chop quality and high wear
and tear on the cutting elements.
Sharpening does not do any good
unless the counterblade is readjusted
as well.
The maize cutters sharpen themselves
very effectively, so there is no need to
"sharpen them till they shine" at every
grinding interval.
Short grinding intervals with a brief
grinding duration combined with
readjusting the counterblades work
better than long grinding intervals with
long grinding times.
Checking and cleaning the grinding stone and
grinding channel
•
Remove the ignition key and secure the forage
harvester from being placed in operation or rolling
away unintentionally.
Before opening the covering hood (1)
the blade drum must come to a
complete stop.
1
2
BX101241
The grinding stone must not be wetted
with water. If water penetrates and
then freezes, the grinding stone could
break while it is being used.
Keep the covering hood of the
grinding device closed except for
maintenance work. When cleaning
make certain that the grinding stone
stays dry.
Before the cutting blades are ground,
the automatic readjustment of the
grinding stone must be checked and
all dirt and residue must be removed
from the grinding channel.
A build-up of dust, grass and chaff in
the grinding channel is combustible
and poses an increased fire hazard. In
addition, the accumulation prevents
the grinding stone from working as
effectively as possible.
a
2
1
BX850905
•
•
•
•
Open the covering hood (1) of the grinding mechanism
(2).
Clear out dirt and residue in the grinding channel (for
example blow it out using compressed air)
The visible length of threading on the grinding
mechanism (dimension "a") must be at least 5 mm.
If dimension "a" is less than 5 mm, the grinding stone
must be readjusted or replaced (refer to section on
Maintenance – Adjusting or replacing the grinding
stone).
Close the covering hood (1) of the grinding mechanism
(2).
VIII - 22
Operation
Since the blade drum and following
parts assigned to it may take longer to
coast down to a stop, after switching
off, do not open or remove any
protective devices until the blade
drum has come to a complete stop.
Observe the warning signal!
The "Grind cutting blade" process can
only be performed with the engine
turned on and the blade drum
running.
Because of the nature of the process,
not all moving parts of the blade drum
and drive can be completely covered,
especially during the grinding
process.
Especially after opening the grinding
flap, there is danger of touching sharp
or rapidly rotating parts of the blade
drum and drum drive.
The forage harvester is equipped with
an acoustic signalling device that
continues to emit a warning signal
after the main coupling (drum drive) is
switched off as long as the blade
drum is turning.
To prevent serious injuries, all
protective devices and maintenance
openings must be closed during the
grinding process.
In addition, there must be no one in
the area of the blade drum. Do not
reach into this area!
The audio coast-down alarm, which is
sounded after the main coupling is
switched off, does not relieve the
operator of the obligation to make
certain the machine is at an absolute
standstill before working on it.
To reduce the amount of time it takes
the blade drum to coast down, cut the
engine speed to lower idle before
switching off the main coupling.
Operators should be inside the cab on
the driver’s seat or at the front left
side next to the machine in the
manual operation area on the platform
while the grinding process is taking
place!
Activation of manual operation on the platform
The following requirements have to be met for
activation of the manual operation:
• The forage harvester has been secured against
rolling away with wheel chocks
• Engine started and running at idle
• Release switch for travelling gear (2) in the "Off"
position
•
•
•
The parking brake (3) is applied - the symbol
appears in the display.
The road/field release switch (1) must be in "field
operation" position.
Main coupling (5) switched on.
Working steps:
• In order to release the machine, lower the front
attachment by activating the key (14a) until it rests
to the ground completely.
• Release switch - maintenance (4) in the "On"
position.
F3 Maintenance main menu appears in the Info
centre display.
• Adjust the idle speed to 1100 rpms with the full
number of blades or to 1300 rpms with half the
number.
5
1
4
3
2
BX851085
14a
BX850964
VIII - 23
Operation
Adjusting the numbers of grinding circles
(Factory setting 20)
see Info-Center Menu 3-1 „Adjusting the numbers of
grinding circles“
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500173
Grinding operation
4
• Activate the "Open grinding flap" key (1)
The grinding flap opens.
5
3
1
• Activate the "Automatic grinding operation" key (2).
The number of grinding cycles that was set is
performed. After the end of the grinding process, the
grinding stone moves to its parking position (the right
side of the grinding mechanism).
• Activate the "Close grinding flap" key (3).
The grinding flap closes.
Blocking the counterblade
Once the grinding process is complete, the counterblade must be blocked while the blade drum is running.
• Press the "Move counterblade right to blade drum"
key (4) and then the "Move counterblade left to the
blade drum" key (5), holding each one down for a
very short time.
• If there is a noise when adjusting one of the sides
(right/left) (cutters touch the shearbar!) let go of the
key immediately and press the appropriate key
"Move counterblade away from blade drum" (4a or
5a) for a very short time.
• Block the counterblade on the other side using the
same procedure.
After you have blocked the counterblade, the blade drum must run
without making any noise.
•
Lift front attachment.
Depending on the front attachment,
readjusting of the counterblade can be
necessary.
If there is no noise while the counterblade is being
blocked, the cutters must be readjusted, or else worn
cutters and cutters that can no longer be used must be
replaced (refer to section on Maintenance - Adjusting
or replacing cutters)
VIII - 24
4a
5a
2
BX500052_1
Operation
8.2.8 Removing crop blockages in the area
of the crop flow
Danger of injury due to unexpected movement of the machine or due to moving parts!
There is an increased danger of injury when removing crop blockages.
•
Switch off engine, remove the ignition key and carry it with you.
•
Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling away by means of wheel chocks.
•
Wait until all rotating machine parts in the crop flow have come to a complete stop.
•
Make sure that no one approaches the machine as long as the follow-up alarms sounds.
8.2.8.1 Move the machine into a secure
condition
•
•
•
•
•
•
Stop the machine in case of blockage.
Actuate the ON/OFF key (1) for intake/header on the
control lever to switch off intake unit drive.
Move machine back a little.
Lower harvesting attachment onto the ground.
Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key and
carry it with you to avoid the engine to start
unintentionally.
Inform all persons in the proximity that the crop flow
is blocked and the inner parts of the machine
continue to move as long as the follow-up alarm
sounds.
2
1
BX850961
Risk of accidents!
After switching off the main drive, the chopping drum, the discharge accelerator and the
corn conditioner may coast down to a stop. If this is the case, an acoustic follow-up alarm
can be heard!
For all work and when eliminating malfunctions, always wait for the complete standstill of
the units first.
The machine is in a safe condition when the work
steps mentioned above have been carried out and
the follow-up alarm has become silent.
Only then the blockage can be removed.
VIII - 25
Operation
8.2.8.2 Removing blockages
Danger of injury due to sharp parts!
•
Always wear protective gloves when removing blockages.
Overview of parts in the crop flow
1 Chopping drum
2 Mounting flap in transfer shaft
3 Mounting flap in grass channel
4 Discharge accelerator
4
1
3
2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Open the upper side flap on the right-hand side of the
machine (refer to chapter "Flaps with Safety Lock").
Unlock tool box and swivel it out (refer to chapter
"Conversion from grass channel to corn conditioner).
Unscrew the nuts (1) on the maintenance flaps (2),
(3) (depending on the equipment with grass channel
or corn conditioner).
Open maintenance flaps.
Remove accumulated crop in the crop flow channel
(4) manually.
Completely remove adhesions on the inner walls of
the crop flow channel (4) by using a suitable tool.
Close maintenance flaps and screw on nuts (1).
Swivel in tool box and close upper side flap.
BX851093
1
4
2
BX851092
Fig. with Corn-Conditioner
1
4
1
3
2
BX851091
Fig. with grass channel
Danger of injury due to unexpected movement of the machine or due to moving parts!
There is an increased danger of injury when removing crop blockages.
•
Start the machine only after all maintenance flaps and side guards are closed.
•
•
•
Instruct all persons to leave the danger zone around
the machine.
Switch on the machine and allow it to run.
Check if all parts start again.
VIII - 26
Operation
8.3 Blowing device on the feed
attachment
Right-hand side
1
The blowing device (1) cleans areas around the feed
drive on the feed attachment (2) and grinding device
(3).
This increases functional safety.
8.3.1 Adjusting blowing times
In menu 1-1 „Parameters“ (driver’s level), in submenu
1-1-15 „Work“
2
, you can set parameter 33651
(cycle time) and parameter 33652 (duty cycle) for the
blowing device (for additional information see Chap. 4):
Recommended settings:
•
•
BX500711
Grinding device
Parameter 33651 (cycle time) = 30 s.
Parameter 33652 (duty cycle) = 3 s.
3
When the duty cycle is set to the same
value as the cycle time, the valve is
switched on continuously!
8.3.2 Performing a functional test and
monitoring set times
Switching conditions:
•
•
1
BX500713
Road/field release switch on the operating panel
must be switched on.
Quick stop switch must not be activated.
VIII - 27
Operation
8.4 Automatic function of additional axle (option)
The automatic functions „lift additional axle“ and „lower
additional axle“ are only active during travelling. They
are independent of pressure. In addition, the automatic
function „Lower additional axle“ is carried out cyclically.
The automatic functions of the additional axle can only
be controlled in the maize operating mode.
Road mode
As soon as the machine exceeds 10 km/h forward
speed, the additional axle will be lowered automatically,
if necessary. The hydraulic pressure of the additional
axle is then also adjusted automatically.
If the required hydraulic pressure cannot be built up, an
error message is output.
As soon as the machine is driven in reverse faster than
0 km/h in road mode, the additional axle is raised
automatically.
Field mode
As soon as the machine is driven faster than 0 km/h in
field mode, whether forward or in reverse, the additional
axle is raised automatically.
8.4.1 Checking "Lift additional axle"
automatic function
8.4.2 Checking automatic function
"Lowering additional axle"
Switching-on conditions:
• Operating mode = "Maize" (EasyCollect)
• Diesel engine = Idle speed
• "Road/field" release switch = Road mode
• "Traction drive" release switch = ON
Switching-on conditions:
• Operating mode = „Maize“ (EasyCollect)
• „Road/field“ release switch = Road mode.
Checking "Lift additional axle" automatic function:
• Completely lower additional axle manually.
• Slowly accelerate the machine in reverse direction.
The additional axle must be lifted completely
automatically.
• Decelerate the machine to a complete stop.
• Move „Road/field“ release switch to field mode.
• Completely lower additional axle manually.
• Slowly accelerate the machine in forward direction.
The additional axle must lift out completely.
Checking automatic function „Lowering additional axle“:
• Read the value of parameter 25498 „Lower additional
axle speed“ in the terminal.
• Completely lift additional axle manually.
• Select menu 4-1-6 „Sensor Test Additional Axle“ in
menu 4-1-6.
• Switch on „Traction drive“ release switch
• Accelerate the machine in the forward direction to a
speed that is higher than the read setting value
(parameter 25498).
Lower additional axle automatically and make
sure that there is no error message in the terminal.
• Decelerate the machine to a complete stop.
The error message with error code appears in the
display if an error occurs during the check.
For a list of error messages, error description,
potential error reason and remedy of error, please
refer to Appendix – Error messages.
VIII - 28
Maintenance
9
Maintenance
9.1 Special safety instructions
Repair, maintenance and cleaning
tasks must only be performed while
the engine is stopped!
Remove the ignition key and secure
the forage harvester from being placed
in operation or rolling away
unintentionally.
The audio coastdown alarm, which is
sounded after the main drive is
switched off, does not relieve the
operator of the obligation to make
certain the machine is at an absolute
standstill before working on it.
For information on maintenance intervals,
please refer to the maintenance table.
9.2 General Aspects
•
Test nuts and screws regularly (about every 50
hours) for firm seat and tighten them according to
the tightening torque tables if necessary! Deviating
tightening torques are indicated separately in the
text.
Self-locking nuts must always be
replaced.
Danger!
Unpredictable moving of the lifting
gear during folding in and out of the
front attachment
Effect: Danger to life, injuries of
individuals.
No individuals are allowed in the area
of the lifting gear during folding in
and out of the front attachment!
For repair, maintenance and cleaning
jobs on a folded down or raised front
attachment always secure it with
suitable supporting pieces and close
the shut-off valve (page IX - 7)!
Only perform tasks on the hydraulic
system when all excess pressure has
been released.
Liquid escaping under high pressure
can penetrate through the skin and
cause severe injuries! In the event of
injuries, find a physician immediately.
There is danger of infection.
After all repair, maintenance and
cleaning tasks are complete, all
protective coverings and safety devices
must be put in place again.
Tightening torque MA
2,2
4,5
7,6
18
37
64
100
160
8.8 10.9 12.9
M A (Nm)
4,4
3,0
5,1
8,7
5,9
10
15
10
18
36
25
43
72
49
84
125 145
85
135 200 235
145 215 255
210 310 365
225 330 390
425 610 710
730 1050 1220
800
1100
1150
1450
1150
1550
1650
2100
A
8.8
0.
9
6.8
1
5.6
A
O
/
M4
M5
M6
M8
M 10
29
M 12
42
M 14
M 14x1,5
M 16
M 16x1,5
M 20
M 24
M 24x1,5 350
M 24x2
M 27
M 27x2
M 30
A = thread size
(stability class can be seen on the head of the screw).
BP380-7-073
1350
1800
1950
2450
IX - 1
Maintenance
For all maintenance tasks:
•
•
•
The road/field release switch (1) must be in "field
operation" position.
Release switch for travelling gear (2) in the "Off"
position.
Tighten the parking brake by using momentary
switch (3).
Check the status of the parking brake
in the display:
The parking brake has been applied if
the symbol
1
3
2
appears in the
BX851089
display.
•
Turn main battery switch (1) to "0" position to
interrupt the electric circuit.
1
BX851017_1
9.3 Maintenance of the supply
system
9.3.1 Detaching the feed drive housing
You can detach the feed drive housing with the front
attachment connected.
For EasyCollect 6000, 7500 and 9000, the maize
header must be folded down as you do this.
You should attach and detach the feed
drive housing on a level surface with a
sub-surface capable of bearing the
load.
There must be sufficient space
available for laying out the forage
harvester.
•
•
Set down the feed drive housing with the front
attachment (1) on the ground.
Remove the ignition key and secure the forage
harvester from being placed in operation or rolling
away unintentionally.
IX - 2
1
BX850998
Maintenance
Front attachment connection lines
Left-hand side of the machine
Warning!
The hydraulic system is pressurised
Effect: Serious injury due to hydraulic
oil penetrating the skin.
• Before uncoupling the hoses and
before performing work on the
hydraulic system, relieve the
pressure!
• Seek medical help immediately
should injuries occur! Danger of
infection.
1
2
1
4
3
BX500610
To relieve all pressure on both sides of the system:
•
•
•
•
Press the keys (1) and (2) (red) simultaneously (the
first hydraulic circuit is depressurised).
Press the keys (3) and (4) (blue) simultaneously
(the second hydraulic circuit is depressurised).
Disconnect the hydraulic lines (1) at the hydraulic
couplings and close off with dust caps (2).
Disconnect the lighting cable and connection line for
the sensors (maize header front attachment).
2
1
BX200961_1
200961_1
Front attachment for PTO shaft
Left-hand side of the machine
•
Completely dismount the PTO shaft (3) for the front
attachment drive.
3
BX500970
Feed drive PTO shaft
Left-hand side of the machine
•
Completely dismount the PTO shaft (1) for the feed
drive.
1
BX100980_1
IX - 3
Maintenance
Connection of metal detection sensor and pendulum
frame
right-hand side of the machine
•
1
Remove the connection cable plug (1, 2) for the
metal detection plug and pendulum frame.
BX101000_1
Connection line for central lubrication
right-hand side of the machine
1
2
BX850967
•
•
Loosen the connection line to the lubricant distributor (1).
Remove connection line compressed air cleaning (2)
Coupling rods
Right and left side of the machine
2
Before starting work, lower the lifting
unit until the coupling rods are
relieved.
•
•
1
Loosen the hinged cotter pin (2) and dismount the
bolts (3).
Lift the coupling rod (1) out of the bearing and rotate
it downward.
3
BX201020_1
Interlocking claws up
Right and left side of the machine
Move lifting unit completely down
before starting work.
•
•
3
2
Loosen the counter nut (2) and turn back the hexagonal screw (3).
Swivel open the interlocking claws (1).
1
BX101030
IX - 4
Maintenance
Support base
•
•
Raise the lifting gear until the distance between the
feed drive housing and the cutter drum housing is
about 200 mm (see Section 9.3.3 "Folding down the
feed drive housing").
Disassemble the locking bolts (2) of the support
base (1), pull out the support base (1) to the ground
and secure in place with locking bolts (2).
1
2
2
1
BX201051
Interlocking down
Left side of the machine
•
1
Screw out the hexagonal screw (2) and swivel the
interlocking (1) back.
2
Connection of metal detection sensor and pendulum
frame
right-hand side of the machine
•
Remove the connection cable plug (1, 2) for the
metal detection plug and pendulum frame.
1
BX501070
IX - 5
Maintenance
•
•
•
•
Rotate the three-way valve to operating
position III = maize header (see Section 9.3.4).
Remove the wheel chocks on the forage harvester.
Raise the lifting gear until the receiving claws (1) of
the lifting mechanism are free under the receiving
mechanism (2) of the feed drive housing.
Carefully move the forage harvester back.
2
1
BX101090
9.3.2 Attaching the feed drive housing
1
2
BX850908
•
Move the forage harvester onto the feed drive
housing and lower the lifting mechanism until the
receiving claws (1) of the lifting gear are parallel to
the receiving mechanism (2) and are resting under
the receiving mechanism (2) of the feed drive
housing.
The procedure for attaching the feed drive housing is in
the opposite order to detaching it.
IX - 6
Maintenance
9.3.3 Fold down the feed drive housing
The feed drive housing (1) can be folded down for
maintenance tasks (such as checking the sharpness of
the blade, the condition of the counterblade and
scraper).
1
Perform the following dismounting steps (for specific
details see the section on Maintenance - Detaching the
feed drive housing):
•
Front attachment connection lines
Connection of metal detector sensor/pendulum
frame
Connection line for central lubrication
Coupling rods
Interlocking claws up
Compressed air cleaner feed drive
BX500810
Close the shut-off valve and three-way valve.
(refer to Section 9.3.4 on Maintenance jobs on the
lifting gear while it is folded down or raised).
The procedure for closing the feed drive housing is in
the opposite order to folding it down.
9.3.4 Maintenance jobs on the lifting gear
while it is folded down or raised
The shut-off valve (1) and the threeway valve (2) must be in position II
(closed) for all maintenance tasks on
the lifting gear when it is folded down
and raised.
Open the tool box and make the
changeover from behind.
2
1
Shut-off valve (1)
Operating position - position I = open
Maintenance jobs - position II = closed
Three-way valve (2)
Operating position - position I = grass pick-up
Maintenance jobs - position II = closed
Operating position - position III = maize header
•
•
•
Close the shut-off valve (1) and three-way valve (2)
before performing maintenance tasks on the lifting
gear when it is raised (position II).
Open the shut-off valve (1) after completing
maintenance tasks on the raised lifting gear
(position I).
Rotate the three-way valve (2) back to the
appropriate operating mode after the maintenance
work on the raised lifting gear is complete.
II
I
III
I
II
BX500962
IX - 7
Maintenance
9.3.5 Adjusting or replacing the
grindstone
a
2
1
BX850905
The visible length of threading on the grinding
mechanism (dimension "a") must be at least 5 mm.
The grinding stone can be adjusted approximately
twice. After that the grinding stone must be replaced.
•
•
•
•
Before opening the covering hood (1)
the blade drum must come to a
complete stop.
Remove the ignition key and secure the forage
harvester from being placed in operation or rolling
away unintentionally.
Open the covering hood (1) of the grinding
mechanism (2).
Clear out dirt and residue in the grinding channel
(for example blow it out using compressed air).
Determine the distance "a" from the lower edge of
the grindstone (1) to the upper edge of the grinding
housing. If dimension "a" is less than 5 mm, the
grinding stone must be adjusted or replaced.
1
a
BX101391
•
•
Loosen the catch lock (1).
Turn back the catch wheel (2) with an SW30 open
face wrench.
1
2
BX850909
IX - 8
Maintenance
•
•
•
Allow the locking bolt (1) to lock into place in the
lower area by turning it 90°.
Turn the catch wheel further back until the locking
bolt (1) has completely engaged and the grindstone
adjustment is locked in place.
Loosen the grindstone clamp by turning the catch
wheel further.
1
1
BX101390
•
Measure the distance "z" from the upper edge of
the grindstone to the upper edge of the hexagonal
nut on the catch wheel (1).
After the grindstone is adjusted the
dimension must be "z < 100 mm".
Otherwise replace the grindstone.
•
•
•
•
•
1
z
To replace the grindstone, push the old grindstone
down and out, completely unscrew the catch wheel
(1) and place the new grindstone on from above.
Then screw on the catch wheel.
Push the grindstone down through the drill hole
(d > 30 mm) in the catch wheel (1).
Adjust the grindstone to the previously determined
dimension "a - 0.5 mm".
Tighten the grindstone clamping with the torque
wrench.
Tightening torque 170 Nm.
Check the tightening torque after grinding (setting
behaviour of the clamping rings); retighten, if
necessary.
Unscrew the locking bolt (2), rotate it 90° and lock it
in this position.
BX850910
2
1
a-0,5 mm
BX101392
IX - 9
Maintenance
5
2
1
3
3
4
BX850976
•
At every grinding stone changing, replace the
clamping rings (3).
When installing a new grinding stone
(1), ensure the correct position of the
clamping rings (3) as well as of the
intermediate ring (4) and of the sleeve
(5) in the threaded sleeve (2).
The bevelled edges of the intermediate
ring (4) and the sleeve (5) must show
downwards. (See detail fig. BX850976).
•
•
•
•
1
Fasten the catch lock (1).
Close the grinding mechanism flap protection.
Check once again if the dimension is "a - 0.5 mm".
Reset the grinding cycles counter in the terminal.
BX850911
9.3.6 Adjust or change the cutting blades
If the adjustment capabilities of the counterblade are
no longer sufficient, the cutting blade must be
readjusted.
Worn cutting blades and cutting blades that cannot be
adjusted any further must be replaced.
Turning the blade drum
When working on the blade drum,
wear gloves.
Do not turn the blade drum directly.
Danger of injury!
•
Move the chopping drum (1) by using a suitable
tool. In doing so, use the counterblade as holding
surface.
1
WHBBX00083
IX - 10
Maintenance
Fixing the blade drum in place
The locking mechanism is located on the right-hand side of the machine.
DANGER! - Risk of cuts due to sharp blades!
Serious injuries; especially to hands.
• Fix the cutting drum when working on it.
• Wear protective gloves when performing any work in the area of the blades to avoid being
cut by them.
The chopping drum (1) is equipped for each working
position with one bore hole (2).
• Rotate the chopping drum (1) to the desired working
position and push the fastening bolt (3) to the front
into the bore hole of the cutting drum (1).
1
2
BX850915
•
•
Push the locking bolt (3) to the front into the bore
hole of the chopping drum (1).
To lock the chopping drum, insert the locking bolt
(3) and secure it by turning it in the groove (4).
3
4
BX850916_1
IX - 11
Maintenance
Moving counterblade and aligning it to the
blade backs
•
•
•
•
Loosen spring assembly (1) so that the counterblade support is without any tension. Then tighten
spring assembly again with a tightening torque of
65-75 Nm.
Lock chopping drum (refer to chapter 9.3.6 "Locking
the Chopping Drum").
Move the counterblade (2) completely away from
the chopping drum on both sides by using the
setting motors via manual operation on the platform.
Measure the distance between counterblade (2) and
drum body on both sides of the chopping drum.
1
BX850972_1
The counterblade (2) is completely
retracted when the distance from the
inside edge of the counterblade to the
drum body is a = 80-82 mm on both
sides.
a
2
BX851070
•
Align counterblade (3) parallel to the blade backs.
3
BX851069_1
IX - 12
Maintenance
Adjusting the cutting blade
In order to sharpen the blades completely with as few
grinding cycles as possible, they must be optimally
adjusted to the grinding device.
Use new screws for every
change of blades.
1. Grind the blades on the chopping drum (refer to
chapter 8 „Grinding Chopping Blades“).
2. Remove intake housing.
3. Move counterblade and align it to the backs of the
blade (refer to chapter 9.3.6 „Moving Counterblade
and Aligning it to the Blade Backs“).
4. Unscrew all hexagonal screws (1).
4
1
BX850917_1
5. Readjust the blades (2) to the counterblade (3).
Adjust the distance from blade to counterblade to
0.1 mm.
2
3
BX850912_1
6. Tighten all hexagonal head screws (2) with torque
wrench in the order 3a; 3b; 3c; 2a; 2b (tightening
torque 270 Nm).
7. Loosen the locking of the chopping drum, turn the
chopping drum one row of blades further and lock it
again.
8. Readjust the next row of blades.
9. Continue in this manner until all rows of blades of
the cutting drum are readjusted equally.
10. Loosen the locking of the chopping drum.
2a
3b
3a
3c
2b
BX101281_3
Adapt the grinding stone to the
readjusted blades as it will be
destroyed otherwise.
11. Set the grinding stone so that the distance
between blade back and grinding stone is 0.5 mm
(refer to chapter 8 "Readjusting or Replacing
Grinding Stone").
12. Fit intake housing.
13. Grind chopping blades (refer to chapter 8 „Grinding
Chopping Blades“).
14. Readjust counterblade.
IX - 13
Maintenance
Replace the cutting blade
Sharp tools – risk of injury!
Always wear gloves when working
with the blade drum.
To avoid imbalances in the cutting
drum, cutting blades must always be
replaced in pairs. Two cutters that are
on the cutting drum offset from each
other by 180° (e.g. blade 1 and 8 if
there are 14 blades on the drum).
The blade drum must always be fitted
with the same blades. Note the item
number on the replacement blades
(see also the spare parts list)!
14
13
12
4
11
5
10
6
9
Caution machine damages!
When screwing polluted cutting
blades, blade holding surfaces and
pressure plates (4) there is a risk that
the cutting blades unscrew from the
blade drum. Clean all parts before
inserting.
•
•
•
BX101240_1
8
Use new screws for every
change of blades.
For safety reasons, replace the
pressure plate (4) with new ones once
a year.
4
Grind the blades on the cutting drum (refer to
chapter 8 „Grinding chopping Blades“).
Move the counterblade and align it to the backs of
the blade (refer to chapter 9.3.6 „Moving Counterblade and Aligning it to the Backs of the Blade“.)
Screw out hexagonal head screws (1).
1
BX850917_1
3
•
•
•
•
•
Remove chopping blade (2), screw-on strip (3) and
perforated plate (4). Number cutting blade in case
of reuse.
Clean perforated plate (4) and blade carrier (5).
Replace damaged or heavily worn pressure plates
(4).
Insert new chopping blade.
Fasten chopping blade with new screws in the
following order 3a; 3b; 3c; 2a; 2b (from inside to
outside) with screw-on strip (3) and perforated
plate (4) on the blade carrier (5).
5
2
4
BX851072
2a
3b
3a
3c
2b
BX101281_3
IX - 14
Maintenance
When inserting the chopping blades
(1), observe the mounting direction of
the screw-on strips (2). The surface (a)
with the rounded off edges must rest
against the chopping drum (3). The
straight surface (b) must point away
from the
chopping drum (3).
2
3
1
b
•
a
Readjust the chopping blades, refer to chapter
9.3.6 „Readjusting chopping Blades“, work steps 6
to 12.
BX851073
9.3.7 Working with half the number of
cutting blades
The feed drive speed and number of cutting blades
determine the cutting length.
If the adjustable cutting length range is not sufficient
(cutting length is too short), the number
of the cutting blades can be reduced to the half.
•
•
For use with half the number of cutting blades on
the two sides of the chopping drum, remove every
other blade. In place of the cutters that have been
removed, blind cutters included with delivery should
be mounted to protect the blade carriers.
The tightening torque of the hexagonal headed
screws is min. 280 Nm.
Set the appropriate number of blades in the Info
Centre (see Info-Center chapter „Setting the number
of blades“).
B
A
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500022_1
9.3.8 Turning or replacing the counterblade
Sharp tools – risk of injury!
Always wear gloves when working
with the blade drum.
The counterblade should not be
turned or replaced until the
satisfactory cutting quality can no
longer be achieved even with the
cutting gap correctly adjusted and
with the blades intact.
The counterblade must not be
mounted until the holding surface is
cleaned. The holding surface must be
flat. If necessary rework it or replace it
to ensure that it is.
When turning the counterblade, clean
the underside of the counterblade.
1b
1a
1
BX851071
Both sides of the counterblade (1) can be used. If one
or both sides (1a, 1b) of the counterblade (1) are worn,
the counterblade must be turned or replaced.
IX - 15
Maintenance
Turning/Replacing shearbar
• Grind the blades on the cutting drum (refer to
chapter 8 „Grinding Cutting Blades“)
• Remove intake housing.
• Move counterblade and align it to the backs of the
blade (refer to chapter 9.3.6 „Moving Counterblade
and Aligning it to the Backs of the Blade“).
• Remove screw connection (2).
• Remove counterblade (1).
• Clean contact surface and bottom side of the
counterblade.
• Turn counterblade or install new counterblade.
!
!
1
2
2
2
BX851074
Assembly of a new shearbar
• Place the new counterblade (3) onto the counterblade support and install the centre screw (4) handtight with detent edged washer (5) and disc (6).
Align counterblade (3) in parallel to the ground
backs of the blades on the counterblade support.
3
4,5,6
•
•
210Nm
Install counterblade (3) hand-tight with lateral
fastening screws (7), detent edged washers (8)
and discs (9).
Tighten all three screw connections of the counterblade with the specified torque.
BX850914_1
Use only new self-locking nuts.
Secure those screw connections
medium tight with LOCTITE right hand
and left hand on the machine which
are marked with
•
•
!
.
Fit the intake housing.
Adjust the counterblade. (Refer to the section on
Operation – grinding the cutting blade).
IX - 16
350Nm
7
8
9
3
BX201341_4
Maintenance
9.3.9 Conveyor bars of the front baling
roller
The front baling roller (1) is equipped with conveyor
bars that can be used on alternating sides.
One of the sides of the conveyor bar is smooth, while
the other is designed with teeth.
1
Experience shows that the smooth side works well for
use in grass silage while the toothed side works well
with maize.
BX850918
Turning the conveyor bars around
•
•
•
•
Disconnect the front attachment.
Remove the ignition key and secure the forage
harvester from being placed in operation or rolling
away unintentionally.
Unscrew the fastening screws (3) on the conveyor
bar (2).
Turn the conveyor bar (2) around and mount it.
(Tightening torque 35 Nm)
Because of metal detection, only
fastening materials made of antimagnetic steel can be used.
The screws should not be tightened
with an impact wrench (magnetising
effect).
2
3
BX850920
Bottom pre-compression roller (option)
The bottom pre-compression roller (4) is also fitted with
conveyor bard. They are used to protect the roller
against wear, but they cannot be turned.
4
BX850919
IX - 17
Maintenance
9.3.10 Adjusting the scraper - smooth
roller
The adjustment should be made when the feed drive
housing is folded down or disconnected.
The scraper should be adjusted as gap-free as possible
over the entire width of the smooth roller.
Distance from scraper to smooth roller = 0 - 0.3 mm.
2
Adjust the scraper so that in is not
exerting any pressure on the smooth
roller.
Otherwise the scraper may overheat,
which will result in damage to the
scraper and the smooth roller.
•
1
Release the tension on the compression springs (1)
on both sides of the feed drive housing by loosening
the counter nuts (2).
1
2
BX101121_1
Adjust the distance from the scraper to the
smooth roller
•
•
•
•
•
•
Unscrew all hexagonal nuts (4).
Press the baling roller (2) upward with the mounting
lever (1).
Check the distance (nominal dimension 0 - 0.3 mm)
between the scraper (3) and the smooth roller (5)
using a sensor gauge (6).
If necessary, adjust the scraper (3) evenly along the
entire width.
Tighten all hexagonal screws (4).
Pre-tension the compression springs on both sides
(see section Maintenance - Adjusting the feed drive
housing compression springs)
2
1
4
3
5
BX101150_1
IX - 18
Maintenance
9.3.11 Adjusting the baling roller - scraper
The adjustment should be made when the feed drive
housing is folded down or disconnected.
•
Release the tension on the compression springs (1)
on both sides of the feed drive housing by loosening
the counter nuts (2).
2
1
2
BX101120_1
Adjusting the distance from the baling roller
to the scraper
•
•
•
The distance between the baling roller (1) and the
scraper (2) should be "a = 3-8 mm".
If necessary, adjust the distance evenly along the
entire width by placing disks under the stopper pads
(3) on the feed drive housing.
Pre-tension the compression springs on both sides
(see section Maintenance - Adjusting the feed drive
housing compression springs)
Measure the thickness (b) of the
scraper (2) at regular intervals. If the
scraper is less than 26 mm, it has to be
replaced.
3
1
a
b
2
BX101140_1
IX - 19
Maintenance
9.3.12 Adjusting the feed drive housing
tension springs
Spring length rear (a): 450 mm
• The adjustment is made via the threaded piece (1).
The springs front are not pre-tensioned.
• If the upper roller unit is not in parallel to the lower
feed roller, then adjust the spring length (b) via the
threaded piece (1).
b
a
In idle run, the roller unit rests on the
rubber pad (2).
WHBBX00327
1
2
WHBBX00429
9.4 Crop track
9.4.1 Access points to the crop track
The maintenance flaps can be used to clear blockages
in the crop track.
Before opening the maintenance flaps
•
Remove the ignition key and secure the forage
harvester from being placed in operation or rolling
away unintentionally.
Caution - risk of accidents!
After the main drive is switched off,
the blade drum and blower continue to
coast down and an audio alarm is
sounded!
For all tasks and when eliminating
malfunctions, always be absolutely
certain to wait until the units have
come to a complete stop - danger of
accident!
Maintenance flap in the grass channel
• Unscrew the hexagonal head screws (2) on the right
and left of the grass channel (3). Remove the
screws and washers.
• Fold down the maintenance flap (1).
• After maintenance work is complete, close the flap
(1) and secure it with the screws and washers (2).
.
IX - 20
2
3
1
BX500703_1
Maintenance
Rear wall in the output shaft of the blower
•
•
•
Unscrew the hexagonal head screws (2) on the right
and left of the transfer channel. Remove the screws
and washers.
Fold down the maintenance flap (1).
After maintenance work is complete, close the flap
(1) and secure it with the screws and washers (2).
2
1
BX500704_1
Rear wall of the blower
•
Lower corn conditioner.
6
Before dismounting the rear wall (1),
the two spring-mounted bars (6) right
and left on the rear wall must be
loosened.
1
•
•
Remove the two hexagonal head screws (2) on the
right and left of the rear wall.
Take off the rear wall (1).
BX850921
2
1
BX500702
IX - 21
Maintenance
Maintenance flap in the impact area of the
tower
•
•
2
Loosen the hexagonal nuts (2).
Remove the maintenance flap (1) upwards.
1
2
Maintenance flaps in the upper discharge
chute
•
•
•
•
Swivel the discharge chute to the front left and
lower it until the maintenance flaps are accessible
from the cabin platform.
Unscrew hexagonal nuts (2) and remove the covers
(1) of the cleaning openings.
Clean the discharge bend. Use suitable tools for
cleaning.
Screw on the covers (1) of the cleaning openings.
BX500058
1
2
1
2
2
1
BX100700
IX - 22
Maintenance
9.5 Engine maintenance
9.5.1 Excerpt from overview of maintenance (MAN)
The purpose of this overview of maintenance is to provide quick orientation. Information is not considered binding.
The information in the operating instructions and list of consumables is authoritative.
Only consumables approved in the MAN list of consumables may be used.
Engine maintenance schedule
• All maintenance work on the engine must be performed according to the intervals of the maintenance schedule in
the MAN operating instructions.
Oil change intervals
• See maintenance schedule accompanying document MAN
The approved motor oils can be found on the Internet (updated
daily):
https://mmrepro.mn.man.de/bstwebapp/BSTServlet
Common rail motors may only be
operated with oils conforming to
factory standard M 3277.
IX - 23
Maintenance
9.5.2 Important maintenance instructions
Repair, maintenance, and cleaning
jobs or eliminating malfunction must
always be performed with the drive
turned off and the engine completely
stopped- remove the ignition key!
For jobs on the engine, always switch
off the main battery switch!
Cooling water and air intake hoses
Check the condition and fastening of cooling water and
air intake hoses every 50 operating hours. Replace
cooling water hoses and non-metallic parts on the air
intake system every 2 years.
Check the engine, water cooler and exhaust system
daily to ensure it is clean. Clean it if necessary.
Coolant
The engine cooling system is filled with a mixture of
corrosion protection fluid and antifreeze in the factory.
The coolant consists of 50 % corrosion protection and
antifreeze and 50 % water.
Protection against freezing is ensured to approximately
-37 °C. See also the engine manufacturer’s
specifications.
Belts
All belts must be kept continuously under the proper
tension.
For new belts, check the tension after the first 2 to 3
operating hours.
Cleanliness
To protect against the danger of fire, clean the engine
area and especially the exhaust system as well as the
areas surrounding the brakes and gearbox, etc.
If the material being harvested is very dry and there is
a lot of dust, check the spots listed above more
frequently for accumulations of dirt and clean if
necessary.
• Completely remove plant residues and dust from
the engine via compressed air.
• Check the insulation of exhaust pipes and
turbocharger for damage and replace it, if
necessary.
• Remove plant residues and dust from diesel tank
and additional tank.
IX - 24
Store lubricants and fuels in suitable
containers and ensure they are
disposed of properly.
Exercise caution when draining hot
oil - danger of burns due to hot
liquids or machine parts!
• Wear protective gloves.
• Collect used oil in a suitable
container.
• Allow the liquids or machine parts
to cool off, if necessary.
Maintenance
9.5.3 Fuel system
Fuel
Exercise caution when working with fuel.
Only add fuel outdoors and with the
engine turned off.
Do not smoke.
The quality and cleanliness of the fuel are of critical
importance for consistently good performance and a
long service life for the engine.
Follow the specifications in the engine
operating instructions in the section
on fuels (MAN) and requirements for
operating materials (MAN).
Refuel the machine only from the
platform on the right.
Avoid skin contact with diesel fuel.
Remove possibly contaminated
clothes and clean affected skin parts
with water and soap. In case of
contact with eyes, clean the eyes
under flowing water and seek medical
help. Swallowing diesel fuel can lead
to lung damages and poisonings.
Seek medical help immediately.
For temperatures under 10 °C (50 °F), always use
winter fuel.
Tanks
•
•
•
•
•
Switch off the engine.
Clean grass and dust from the area around the filler
neck (1).
Use only clean fuel in the tank. If necessary, filter
the fuel before adding it to the tank.
Close and seal the tank after filling it.
Dispose of spilled fuel.
Fuel tank
•
•
•
•
1
For the filling quantity of the fuel tank, see the
section entitled GeneralAspects- Technical Data.
Monitor tank filling on the fuel gauge in the Info
Centre display.
Close and seal the fuel tank each time after filling it.
Fuel drain screw (2). Tightening torque 30 Nm.
Fill the fuel tank daily after finishing
operation to prevent condensation
water from forming in the tank and
freezing in cold weather.
Venting the fuel system
After the engine has not been operated for a long time,
the fuel system may need to be vented.
For more information, please refer to the operating
instructions of the engine in the chapter titled
"Maintenance" (MAN).
2
BX500771
IX - 25
Maintenance
9.5.4 Fuel filter/water separator
1
3
4
BX750007
Replacing the fuel filter
The intermediate tank must be emptied as it will
otherwise run empty.
• Connect the hose to drain cock of intermediate tank
and lay the other end into a collecting vessel.
• Open drain cock and empty intermediate tank.
• Close drain cock.
• Unscrew the filter pan (1).
• Clean the filter pan and filter insert, if there is a
heavy accumulation of dirt or damage, replace the
filter insert.
• Check the seal ring for the filter pan and replace it if
necessary.
• Wet the seal ring with diesel fuel and set it in place.
• Place the filter insert in the filter pan and screw the
filter pan (1) on the filter housing.
9.5.5 Fuel filter
Empty the water separator
• The water that is present in the fuel is collected in
the inspection glass (3).
• Drain the collected water by loosening the drain
screw (4) and capture it in a container.
• Dispose of used filters and remaining fuel properly.
• Tighten drain plug (4) again.
BiG X 600-1/700 -1
5
The fuel filter (5) removes even the finest pieces of dirt
from the fuel.
Replacing the fuel filter insert
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Open drain plug underneath on filter.
Allow the fuel to run out into a suitable vessel.
Close drain plug again.
Unscrew and clean the filter cover with round
sealing ring.
Remove the filter insert.
Insert new filter insert into housing.
Install new round sealing ring on filter cover.
Screw in and tighten filter cover. Tightening torque
is 25 Nm.
Vent the fuel system.
BX750033
BiG X 850 -1/1100 -1
5
For more information, please refer to the operating
instructions of the engine in the chapter titled
"Maintenance" (MAN).
BX750008
IX - 26
Maintenance
Two hand pumps (1) and (2) with fuel prefilter are mounted on the machine. The procedures of the
maintenance work is identical for both main pumps.
1
2
Replacing the filter (1) in the hand pump (3)
The intermediate tank must be emptied as it will
otherwise run empty.
• Connect the hose to drain cock of intermediate tank
and lay the other end into a collecting vessel.
• Open drain cock and empty intermediate tank.
• Close drain cock.
• Unscrew the handwheel for fuel supply (2) (turn to
the left)
• Unscrew the handwheel for fuel supply (2) (turn to
the left)
• Loosen the bottom screw (4) on the filter pan (1).
• Remove the filter pan (1)
• Clean the filter pan and filter insert. If there is a
heavy accumulation of dirt or damage, replace the
filter insert
• Check the seal ring for the filter pan and replace it if
necessary
• Wet the seal ring with diesel fuel and set it in place
• Place the filter insert in the filter pan and screw the
filter pan (1) on the filter housing
• Push handwheel (2) down again to release the fuel
supply
• Make pump movements with the handwheel (2) for
venting
• Screw handwheel (2) again
After having carried out maintenance
work, the hand wheel must always be
at the bottom and therefore it must be
screwed in. Otherwise the fuel supply
is not ensured.
BX851086
2
3
1
4
BX750024_1
IX - 27
Maintenance
9.5.6 Engine oil
The specifications in the operating
instructions of the engine manufacturer
(MAN) must be observed.
Engine - oil level check
• Check the engine oil level daily about 5 minutes
after shutting off the engine.
See the Section on Commissioning – Engine oil
check.
Filling with engine oil
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the cover (1) off the oil filling pipe.
Fill with engine oil up to the maximum mark of the
oil dip stick (2).
Unscrew the cover (1) off the oil filling pipe.
Allow the engine to run at low idle for a short time.
Switch off the engine and check it, including the oil
filter to make sure there are no leaks.
After about 5 minutes, check the oil level in the
engine again and fill up with engine oil to the
maximum mark if necessary.
2
l
ö
tor
Mo
1
BX750012_1
IX - 28
Maintenance
9.5.7 Cooling system
Coolant
The specifications in the operating
instructions of the engine manufacturer
(MAN) must be observed.
The engine cooling system is filled with a mixture of
corrosion protection fluid and antifreeze in the factory.
The coolant consists of 50 % corrosion protection and
antifreeze and 50 % water.
Protection against freezing is ensured to approximately
-37 °C.
•
Before the beginning of winter, always check the
capacity of the antifreeze.
If coolant is not available, no matter what time of year
it is, a mixture consisting of 50 % ethylene glycol
antifreeze/corrosion protectant and 50 % clear soft
water must be used. This mixture also offers corrosion
protection and protection against freezing to -37 °C.
No cooling system sealing additives
may be used.
•
Replace all cooling water hoses on the engine every
two years.
Checking the coolant level and engine
•
•
•
Check the coolant level daily.
Check the coolant level in the overflow container (1)
in the viewing pane (2).
The coolant level must reach up to the middle of the
control eye (2).
Top off with coolant if necessary.
1
2
BX850922
IX - 29
Maintenance
Filling with coolant
Danger of burns!
Never open the cover (3) of the
overflow container (1) when the engine
hot.
• Switch off the engine and wait until
it has cooled down.
• Wear protective gloves.
•
•
•
3
Turn the cover (3) on the overflow container (1) to
the right catch point and allow residual pressure to
escape slowly.
Open the cover (3) completely and fill with engine
coolant up to the middle of the viewing pane (2) .
Close the cover again.
1
2
BX850923
Draining off coolant
The drain screw (2) for coolant is located on the cooling
water pipe in the back of the engine compartment.
2
Water cooler, oil cooler and charging air cooler
The water cooler, oil cooler and charging air cooler are
located behind the radiator sieve (1) in the engine
compartment.
If possible, clean the radiator cooler while the engine is
cold.
• Check all cooler units regularly to ensure they are
clean and blow them off with compressed air if
necessary. Do not damage the blades!
• Blow out radiators with compressed air from the
outside to the inside.
1
BX850924
1
BX850925
IX - 30
Maintenance
9.5.8 Air filter
The operation of the machine with soiled or damaged air filter can lead to engine damage.
• Damaged air filters must be replaced immediately.
Perform air filter maintenance daily, but at least when the error message for a dirty air filter
appears in the Info
Centre Display.
Cleaning the air filter
BiG X 600/BiG X 700-1
2
1
3
4
BX850926_1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Unscrew the nut (2) and remove the cover (1).
Unscrew the nut (4) and carefully remove the filter insert (3).
Clean the interior area and the seal surfaces of the filter housing.
Blow out the filter insert with compressed air (max. 5 bar) from the inside to the outside.
Replace filter inserts that are excessively dirty or damaged. Filter inserts that were installed more than 4 years
ago must also be replaced.
Install the filter insert again.
Mount the cover (1).
BiG X 850-1/BiG X 1100-1
3
1
2
BX851037
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Unlock the clamps (2) and remove the cover (1)
Pull out the filter insert (3) carefully with slight rotary movements
Clean the interior area and the seal surfaces of the filter housing
Blow out the filter insert with compressed air (max. 5 bar) from the inside to the outside
Replace filter inserts that are excessively dirty or damaged Filter inserts that were installed more than 4 years ago
must also be replaced.
Install the filter insert again
Reinstall cover (1) and secure with clamps
IX - 31
Maintenance
Change safety cartridge
Safety cartridges must not be cleaned and used again!
BiG X 600/BiG X 700-1
2
4
3
5
6
1
BX851036
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Unscrew the nut (2) and remove the cover (1).
Unscrew the nut (4) and carefully remove the filter insert (3).
Unscrew the nut (5) and carefully remove the safety cartridge (6).
Clean the interior area and the seal surfaces of the filter housing.
Insert a new safety cartridge
Clean the filter insert with compressed air (max. 5 bar), blowing out from the inside to the outside.
Install the filter insert again.
Mount the cover (1).
BiG X 850-1/BiG X 1100-1
3
1
2
4
BX851038
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Unlock the clamps (2) and remove the cover (1)
Remove the filter insert (3)
Pull out the safety cartridge (4) with slight rotary movements
Clean the interior area and the seal surfaces of the filter housing
Install the new safety cartridge
Install the cleaned or new filter insert (3)
Reinstall cover (1) and secure with clamps (2)
IX - 32
Maintenance
9.6 Hydraulics maintenance
9.6.1 Special safety instructions
Use suitable aids when searching for
leaks because of the risk of injury and
wear safety goggles.
Liquids escaping under high pressure
can penetrate the skin and cause
severe injuries. Therefore, you must
depressurise the system before
disconnecting lines. Ensure that all
line connections are tight before the
pressure in the system builds up
again.
Hydraulic oil escaping from a small
opening can barely be seen. Because
of this you should use a piece of
cardboard or something similar when
searching for leaks. Protect your
hands and body.
If any fluid penetrates the skin, it must
be removed immediately by a doctor
who is familiar with this kind of injury;
serious infections could otherwise
result. Physicians who are not familiar
with this area should consult
appropriate information from a
competent medical source.
Check the hydraulic hose lines
annually and replace them if damaged
or worn!
Replacement lines must meet the
technical requirements of the device
manufacturer.
9.6.2 System layout of work and brake
hydraulics
For the hydraulics circuit diagram, refer to section on
"Maintenance" (explanation of the hydraulics circuit
diagram).
1
The main valve block (1) is located behind the access
flap on the right-hand side of the machine.
BX850927
IX - 33
Maintenance
Main valve block
Y39
Y40
Y31
Y30
Y38
Y37
Y29
Y28
Y27
Y26
Y25
Y24
Y23
Y22
Y21
Y67
Y66
Y20
Y20
Y21
Y22
Y23
Y24
Y25
Y26
Y27
Y28
-
Y29 Y30 -
Turn discharge "left"
Turn discharge "right"
"Raise" ejector flap
"Lower" ejector flap
"Raise" upper discharge chute
"Lower" upper discharge chute
Fold in front attachment "Transport"
Fold out front attachment "Work"
Retract supporting wheels/swivel in feed
drive/Raise plant divider
Extend supporting wheels/swing out feed
drive/Lower plant divider
Grinding device "Cylinder in"
Pressure control valve
The valve blocks have been equipped
with pressure control valves. These
valves were set at the factory and must
not be changed.
Work on the over-pressure valve must be carried out
only by the customer service department.
IX - 34
Y31
Y37
Y38
Y39
Y40
Y66
Y67
-
Grinding device "Cylinder out"
Pendulum frame "rotate left"
Pendulum frame "rotate right"
Auto-steering left
Auto-steering right
arrest steering left
arrest steering right
BX202080_2
Maintenance
9.6.3 Hydraulic tank
Hydraulic oil
Caution, never mix different types of
fluid.
Before changing the type of fluid,
consult with our customer service
department .
Never use engine oil.
List of mineral oils of quality class HLP (HM) and
environmentally friendly HEPG pressure fluids that
decompose quickly.
ISO viscosity
Class
Manufacturer
ADDINOL
HEPG VG 46
HLP VG 46
Hydraulic oil HLP
46
OSO 46
AGIP
ISO viscosity
Class
Manufacturer
FRAGOL
FUCHS
ARAL
ASEOL
AVIA
BAF-46Vitam
Aral Vitam GF 46
Aqua VG 46
Avia Hydrosynth AVILUB RSL 46
46
Avia Fluid ZAD 46
Houghton
KLÜBER
KUWAIT
BECHEM
Hydrostar
UWF 46
Biohyd PEG 46 Energol HLP 46
LIQUI
MOLY
MOBIL
BP
HEPG VG 46
Hydraulic
TR 46
Renolin
PGE 46
LAMORA HLP 46
Q8
Haydn 46
Holst 46
Hydraulic S46
HYSPIN AWS 46
SHELL
Fluid BD 46
COFRAN
Cofraline
extra 46 S
Astron HLP 46
ELFOLNA 46
ELFOLNA DS 46
StuartTheunissen
TOTAL
TRIBOL
Hydrocor E 46
ISOCOR E46
Engen
TQH 20/46
VALVOLINE
Ultrasyn PG 46
NUTO H 46
VERKOL
WINTERSHALL
Econa PG 46
ENGEN
ESSO
FINA
Hydraulic oil
PGK 46
Hydraulic oil
D3031.46
HYDRAN 46
RENOLIN
MR 15
VG 46
RENOLIN
B15
VG 46
Syntolubric 46
CASTROL
DEA
ELF
HLP VG 46
HLP 46 ISO
Mobil DTE 25
Mobil
Hydraulic
Oil Medium
Shell Tellus
Oil 46
Shell Hydrol
DO 46
Cofraline
extra 46 S
Azolla ZS 46
Tribol 772
Tribol ET 1140-46
Tribol 943 AW 46
Vesta HLP 46
WIOLAN HS 46
WIOLAN HX 4
IX - 35
Maintenance
Checking the hydraulic fluid level
Check the hydraulic fluid level every 50 operating
hours.
•
Lower the lifting gear and switch off the engine.
•
Check the hydraulic fluid level in the viewing glass
(2) of the hydraulic fluid tank (1).
2
1
The level of the hydraulic oil must reach the centre of the
sight glass.
•
Top off with hydraulic fluid if necessary.
BX500055_1
Changing the hydraulic fluid
3
1
Exercise caution when draining hot oil
- danger of burns due to hot liquids or
machine parts!
• Wear protective gloves.
• Collect the used oil in a suitable
container.
• Before changing hydraulic oil,
consult with the KRONE customer
service department.
When changing the hydraulic oil, replace
return suction filter and high-pressure
filter, as well.
•
•
•
•
•
Connect the drain hose (is included in the scope of
delivery of the machine) with a clamping connector
to the discharge pipe (2) of the hydraulic fluid tank
(1) and capture the old oil in a suitably large
container.
Remove the hose.
Fill with hydraulic oil through the filling pipe (3) on
the hydraulic fluid tank (1) until it is visible in the
viewing glass of the hydraulic fluid tank.
Allow the engine to run at low idle speed for about
10 seconds.
Turn off the engine.
Check the hydraulic fluid level and top off with
hydraulic fluid as necessary.
Repeat the procedure until the fluid level no longer
goes down.
Check charge pressures.
IX - 36
2
BX500089_2
Maintenance
Changing return suction filter
1
Change the hydraulic fluid filter if the error message
Suction return filter 1 or filter 2 appears in the Info
Centre display, but at least once after each season.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2
Release and remove the four screws (2) on the
cover via Allen key
Remove cover (1)
Lift the filter insert (2) and allow hydraulic fluid to
drip out.
Remove the filter insert and dispose of it properly.
Moisten the seal surface of the new filter insert with
fluid and set it in place.
Screw on the screw cover manually. Do not fasten
it too tightly.
Allow the engine to run at low idle speed for about
10 seconds.
Turn off the engine.
Check the hydraulic fluid filter to make sure there
are no leaks.
Re-fit the cover (1) and fasten it with the aid of the
four screws (2)
2
9.7 Gearbox maintenance
•
•
•
Unless there is some indication to the contrary, after
1000 operating hours for all gear, but at least after
the end of every season.
Check the oil level before the beginning of the
season and then every 100 operating hours.
Check all gears daily for any leaks and check the
oil level if necessary.
BX100901_3
Refill or change gear oil with original
KRONE gear oil (Mobil SHC 630) only.
If there is no original KRONE gear oil
available, consult KRONE customer
service.
9.7.1 Checking the oil level and changing oil
on the gearbox engine power drive
4
2
3
1
BX850985
Checking the oil level
•
Changing the oil
•
•
•
Check the oil level about 1 to 1,5 hours
after the engine is turned off while the
machine is in a horizontal position.
The oil level must reach up to 3/4 the control eye
(1) for continuous operation. If necessary top off
with (see Changing oil).
Take the drain hose out of the toolbox of the
machine and turn onto the drain plug (4).
Capture the old oil in a sufficiently large container.
Remove drain hose and lodge in toolbox again.
•
•
•
•
Remove drain hose and lodge in toolbox again.
Unscrew the cover screw (3) on the engine drive (2)
gearbox.
Add oil.
Screw in the cover screw (3) again.
IX - 37
Maintenance
Exercise caution when draining hot oil
- danger of burns due to hot liquids or
machine parts!
• Wear protective gloves.
• Collect used oil in a suitable
container.
Perform oil level checks and change
the oil while the forage harvester is in
a horizontal position!
Dispose of old oil properly!
For filling quantities and descriptions
of lubricants for gearboxes, see the
section entitled "General Aspects –
Technical Data").
WHBBX04011
•
•
•
•
Dismount hoses (3, 22, 35, 43) on pump and
gearbox (top and bottom) and let them run empty in
the collecting vessel.
Dismount filter housing (38).
Remove filter insert from the filter housing (38) and
clean filter housing.
Clean cooling coils and hoses from cooler to
gearbox/pump with compressed air (observe nonreturn valve (21)). Now press from the pump in the
direction of the cooler with compressed air and
collect the oil appropriately.
IX - 38
•
•
•
Mount hoses (3, 22, 35, 43) on pump and gearbox
(top and rear).
Install a new filter insert into the filter housing (38).
Mount filter housing (38).
Maintenance
Oil filter (7) for the circulating oil lubrication of the
transmission
Always perform the filter replacement together with
the change of the transmission oil after 1000
operating hours or at the end of the season.
•
•
•
Unscrew the filter housing (5) on the welded nut (6)
by using a wrench (W/F 32).
Replace the old filter with a new one.
Screw the filter housing (5) back into position by
using a wrench (W/F 32).
9
8
7
High-pressure filter (8)
The filter takes up depositions of solid particles of the
hydraulic system. The filtering of the hydraulic circuit
serves as a prevention of damages on components of the
circuit. The filter is equipped with an optical contamination
indicator (9). The contamination indicator (9) informs
optically about the degree of contamination of the filter.
When starting in cold condition, the button of the
contamination indicator (9) can hop out. Only press the
button back in after achieving the operating temperature.
In case it immediately hops out again, the filter element
must be changed.
5
6
BX500644_2
Check the contamination indicator before
the machine is used and exchange the
contaminated filter element if necessary.
If the contamination indicator does not
act, the filter element must be replaced
once a year or each time when the oil is
changed.
Replacing the Filter Element (8)
Store or dispose used oil and oil
filters according to statutory
provisions.
1
AUS
EIN
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Relieve all pressure from the hydraulic system.
Screw bottom of the filter (4) off the filter head piece
(1) and clean it
Remove the filter element (3) and replace by a new
filter element with identical characteristics
Push a new filter element (3) onto the valve sleeve
(5)
Check the O-ring seal (2) and replace it, if
necessary, by O-ring seal with identical
characteristics
Screw bottom of the filter (4) back onto the filter
head piece
Charge the hydraulic system with pressure and
check for leaks
2
5
3
4
COM00021
IX - 39
Maintenance
9.7.2 Checking the oil level and changing
the oil on the distributor gearbox
Exercise caution when draining hot oil
- danger of burns due to hot liquids or
machine parts!
• Wear protective gloves.
• Collect used oil in a suitable
container.
• Allow the liquids or the machine
parts to cool off, if necessary.
2
Refill or change gear oil with original
KRONE gear oil (Mobil SHC 630) only.
If there is no original KRONE gear oil
available, consult KRONE customer
service.
3
1
Checking the oil level
• Unscrew the oil level control screw (2) on the
distributor gearbox (1).
• The oil level must reach up to the control hole. If
necessary, top off the oil (see Changing the oil).
• Screw on the oil level cover screw (2) again.
Changing the oil
• Unscrew the oil drain screw (4) on the transfer
gearbox (1). Collect the oil in a suitable container.
• Screw on the oil drain screw (4) again.
• Unscrew the cover screw with the ventilation filter
(3) on the distributor gearbox (1).
• Add oil.
• Screw in the cover screw (3) again.
IX - 40
4
BX101490
Maintenance
9.7.3 Checking the oil level and changing
the oil on the lower roller gearbox
Exercise caution when draining hot oil
- danger of burns due to hot liquids or
machine parts!
• Wear protective gloves.
• Collect used oil in a suitable
container.
• Allow the liquids or the machine
parts to cool off, if necessary.
1
Perform oil level check and change
the oil while the forage harvester is in
a horizontal position!
The roller gearbox on the left side of the feed drive
housing is divided into two parts.
1
2
-
Angular gear left top, tower above
Lower roller gear
Oil level check angular gear left top, tower
top (1)
•
•
•
•
•
2
Clean the area of the oil dip stick (3) thoroughly.
Unscrew oil dip stick (3) and wipe oil residues away.
Screw oil dip stick (3) in and then back out.
Read oil level - Oil level must be between the
markings max. and min.
Screw oil dip stick back in.
Oil change angular gear left top, tower top (1)
• Unscrew oil drain plug (6) on the angular gear left
top, tower top (1) with a suitable Allen key.
Collect the used oil in a suitable container.
• Screw oil drain plug (6) back in.
• Screw out oil dip stick (3).
• Add oil.
• Screw oil dip stick back in.
BX851062
3
1
Checking the oil level at lower roller gearbox
• Read the oil level on the sight glass (4).
• If the oil level is falling below half in sight glass, the
oil has to be topped up up to this level (see oil
change).
6
BX851061
Checking the oil level at lower roller gearbox (2)
• Unscrew the oil drain plug (5) on the lower roller
gearbox.
Collect the used oil in a suitable container.
• Screw in the oil drain plug (5) again.
• Unscrew the cover screw with ventilation filter (6)
• Fill in oil.
• Screw in the cover screw (6) again.
2
4
5
BX850995_1
IX - 41
Maintenance
9.7.4 Checking the oil level and changing
the oil on the upper roller gearbox
Exercise caution when draining hot oil
- danger of burns due to hot liquids or
machine parts!
• Wear protective gloves.
• Collect used oil in a suitable
container.
• Allow the liquids or the machine
parts to cool off, if necessary.
2
1
Perform oil level check and change
the oil while the forage harvester is in
a horizontal position!
BX850928
Checking the oil level
•
•
•
Unscrew the oil level control screw (3) on the upper
roller gearbox (1).
The oil level must reach up to the control hole. If
necessary, top off the oil (see Changing the oil).
Screw on the oil level cover screw (3) again.
3
1
Changing the oil
•
•
•
•
•
Unscrew the oil drain screw (4) on the upper roller
gearbox (1). Collect the oil in a suitable container.
Screw on the oil drain screw (4) again.
Unscrew the cover screw with the ventilation filter
(2) on the upper roller gearbox (1).
Add oil.
Screw in the cover screw (2) again.
9.7.5 Oil level check and oil change on the
tower gearbox of the upper
discharge chute
4
BX850928_1
9
Oil level check
•
•
•
Unscrew the oil level control screw (6) on the tower
gearbox (5).
The oil level must reach up to the control hole. If
necessary, top up the oil (see Oil change).
Screw on the oil level control screw (6) again.
Oil change
•
•
•
•
•
Remove the protective cover (9) and unscrew the
ventilation filter (7).
Unscrew the oil drain plug (8). Collect the used oil in
a suitable container.
Screw in the oil drain plug (8) again.
Fill in oil. The oil level must reach up to the control
hole (6).
Screw in the ventilation filter (7) again and install
the protective guard (9).
IX - 42
6
7
5
5
8
6
BX850929
Maintenance
9.7.6 Checking the Oil Level and Changing the Oil of the Wheel Gearboxes
Exercise caution when draining hot oil
- danger of burns due to hot liquids or
machine parts!
• Wear protective gloves.
• Collect used oil in a suitable
container.
• Allow the liquids or the machine
parts to cool off, if necessary.
When topping up or changing the
transmission oil, use only Shell
Spirax S4 CX 50.
If this particular transmission oil is
not available, please consult KRONE
customer service.
Front wheel gearboxes
Oil level check
• Position the wheel so that the oil filler screw (2) is
horizontal to the hub.
• Thoroughly clean the area around the oil filler screw
(2) and oil level control screw (1).
• Unscrew the oil level control screw (1) on the front
gearbox.
The oil level must reach up to the control hole.
• If necessary, top up the oil (see Oil change).
• Screw on the oil level control screw (1) again.
Oil change
• Unscrew the oil drain plug (3). Collect the used oil in
a suitable container.
• Screw in the oil drain plug (3) again.
• Unscrew the oil filler plug (2).
• Fill in oil. The oil level must reach up to the control
hole (1).
• Screw the oil filler plug (2) back in again.
2
1
3
BX850872
IX - 43
Maintenance
Rear wheel gearboxes
Oil change
• Position the wheel so that the oil drain plug (2) is
perpendicular to the hub.
• Provide a collecting vessel (approx. 10 litres).
• Thoroughly clean the area around the oil drain plug
(2).
• Unscrew oil drain plug (2) and drain the oil.
• Mount oil drain plug (2) again.
• Position the wheel so that the lower edge of the oil
filler screw (1) is approx. 40 mm below the centre of
the hub. To do this, position a spirit level
horizontally in the centre of the hub and determine
40 mm by using a measuring tape.
• Dismount oil filler screw (1).
• Top up oil.
• Mount oil filler screw (1).
IX - 44
1
40 mm
Oil level check
• Position the wheel so that the lower edge of the oil
filler screw (1) is approx. 40 mm below the centre of
the hub. To do this, position a spirit level
horizontally in the centre of the hub and determine
40 mm by using a measuring tape.
• Clean the area around the oil filler screw (1)
thoroughly.
• Dismount oil filler screw (1).
• The oil level must reach to the oil filler screw, top
up oil, if necessary (refer to oil change).
• Mount oil filler screw (1) again.
2
30°
BX850873
Maintenance
9.8 Maintenance - Belt drives
9.8.1 Pulley and kraftband
In case of wear or dirt, the complete
force transfer of kraftband and pulley
is not ensured.
In case of extended times with no
usage in the open (e.g. outside the
season), water may accumulate
between pulley and kraftband. This
may lead to severe rust formation.
To avoid this, it is recommended to
dismount the kraftband.
Checking pulley
1
1
WHBBX04194
•
•
•
Check the edges of the pulleys (1) for wear and
replace them, if necessary.
Check pulley for damage and replace it, if
necessary.
Make sure that the pulley is not soiled (oil, grease)
and clean it, if necessary.
Checking kraftband
1
2
WHBBX04195
•
•
Check kraftband inside (1) and outside (2) visually
for wear and damage (e.g. cracks, stones) and
replace them, if necessary.
Check each kraftband for soilings (oil, grease) and
clean or replace it, if necessary.
IX - 45
Maintenance
9.8.2 Screen drum drive
1
3
-
2
Power take-off – screen drum
Screen drum
Belt tension of the screen drum drive via spring-loaded
tensioning roller (2).
1
3
BX101820
9.9 Windscreen washer system
The tank (1) for the water of the windscreen washer
system is located in the machine compartment.
•
Open the lid (2) to fill the tank (1).
•
In order to obtain a better cleaning action, add some
detergent for washer systems to the water.
2
1
Empty the windscreen washer system
in winter or fill a special anti-freeze
agent.
BX100610
9.10 Fire extinguisher
Have the operational readiness of the fire extinguisher
(1) checked annually, at the latest every two years.
The manufacturing date or the date of the final
inspection of the fire extinguisher (1) shall be decisive.
1
The inspection intervals may differ from one country to
another. In this case, the instructions on the fire
extinguisher (1) of the respective countries shall be
applicable.
BX100450
IX - 46
Maintenance
9.11 Tyres
9.11.1 Checking and servicing the tyres
•
•
•
1
BX850970
Reifenluftdruck / tyre pressure
BiG X
Bereifungstyp
wheel type
650/75 R 32 172A8
mit / with
Easyflow 300
mit / with
mit / with
mit / with
oder / or
EasyCollect EasyCollect EasyCollect max. Achse
km/h mp/h
Solomaschine 6000 /603/ 753 7500 / 903 9000*/1053*
axle
solo machine
(bar / psi)
(bar / psi)
(bar / psi) (bar / psi)
(bar / psi)
40
25
3,2 / 46,4
3,2 / 46,4
3,2 / 46,4
3,2 / 46,4
10
6
1,8 / 26,1
1,8 / 26,1
1,8 / 26,1
1,8 / 26,1
40
25
2,0 / 29,0
2,0 / 29,0
2,4 / 34,8
2,4 / 34,8
10
6
1,2 / 17,4
1,2 / 17,4
1,4 / 20,3
1,4 / 20,3
40
25
2,1 / 30,5
2,4 /34,8
2,4 / 34,8
2,1 / 30,5
10
6
1,2 / 17,4
1,4 / 20,3
1,4 / 20,3
1,4 / 20,3
40
25
1,8 / 26,1
2,4 / 35,0
2,4 / 34,8
1,8 / 26,1
10
6
1,2 / 17,4
1,4 / 20,3
1,4 / 20,3
1,2 / 17,4
40
25
1,9 / 27,6
2,4 / 35,0
2,4 / 34,8
1,9 / 27,6
10
6
1,2 / 17,4
1,4 / 20,3
1,4 / 20,3
1,6 / 23,2
40
25
1,4 / 20,3
1,6 / 23,2
1,6 / 23,2
1,4 / 20,3
10
6
1,0 / 14,5
1,0 / 14,5
1,0 / 14,5
1,0 / 14,5
40
25
1,7 / 24,7
2,0 / 29,0
2,0 / 29,0
1,7 / 24,7
10
6
1,0 / 14,5
1,2 / 17,4
1,2 / 17,4
1,0 / 14,5
40
25
1,2 / 17,
1,4 / 20,3
1,4 / 20,3
1,2 / 17,4
10
6
1,0 / 14,5
1,0 / 14,5
1,0 / 14,5
1,0 / 14,5
40
25
2,4 / 34,8
2,4 / 34,8
2,4 / 34,8
2,4 / 34,8
10
6
2,4 / 34,8
2,4 / 34,8
2,4 / 34,8
2,4 / 34,8
40
25
2,4 / 34,8
2,4 / 34,8
2,4 / 34,8
2,4 / 34,8
10
6
1,4 / 20,3
1,4 / 20,3
1,4 / 20,3
1,4 / 20,3
40
25
2,8 / 40,6
2,8 / 40,6
2,8 / 40,6
2,8 / 40,6
10
6
1,8 / 26,1
1,8 / 26,1
1,8 / 26,1
1,8 / 26,1
40
25
2,4 / 34,8
2,4 / 34,8
2,4 / 34,8
2,4 / 34,8
10
6
2,0 / 29,0
2,0 / 29,0
2,0 / 29,0
2,0 / 29,0
40
25
1,6 / 23,1
1,6 / 23,1
1,6** / 23,1
1,6 / 23,1
10
6
1,0 / 14,5
1,0 / 14,5
1,0 / 14,5
1,0 / 14,5
40
25
1,8 / 26,1
1,8 / 26,1
1,8 / 26,1
1,8 / 26,1
10
6
1,4 / 20,3
1,4 / 20,3
1,4 / 20,3
1,4 / 20,3
40
25
2,1 / 30,5
2,1 / 30,5
2,1 / 30,5
2,1 / 30,5
10
6
1,4 / 20,3
1,4 / 20,3
1,4 / 20,3
1,4 / 20,3
3,2 / 46,4
680/85 R 32 178A8
2,4 / 34,8
710/75 R 34 178A8
710/70 R 42 173A8
800/65 R 32 172A8
2,4 / 34,8
2,4 / 34,8
2,4 / 34,8
1,6 / 23,2
800/70 R 38 173B
900/60 R 32 176A8
2,0 / 29,0
1,4 / 20,3
900/60 R 38 175A8
540/65 R 30 168A8
600/70 R 28 157A8
600/70 R 28 157A8
(Trelleborg)
600/70 R 30 158 D
(Trelleborg)
710/55 R 30 153A8
710/55 - 34 155A8
710/60 R 30 165A8
27 006 781 2
Vorderachse
front axle
•
Check the tyres for damage and air pressure every day
as the service life of tyres depends on the air pressure.
Repair any cuts or tears in the tyres as soon as
possible or change the tyres.
Do not expose tyres to oil, grease, fuel, or
chemicals; nor should you let them stand in the
sunlight for long periods.
Drive carefully; avoid driving over sharp stones or
edges.
Check the tyre pressure at least once per week
with an accurate instrument.
2,4 / 34,8
2,4 / 34,8
2,8 / 40,1
2,4 / 34,8
Hinterachse
rear axle
•
1,6 / 23,1
1,8 / 26,1
2,4 / 34,8
* = Strassenfahrt ohne/Transport on road without EasyCollect 9000 / 1053
** = Vmax: 25km/h / 15mp / h
IX - 47
Maintenance
9.11.2 Fitting tyres
Fitting the tyres requires sufficient knowledge and suitable mounting tools. If tyres are not
correctly fitted, it could explode when pumped up. This can cause serious injury. If you do not
have sufficient experience of fitting tyres, have tyres fitted by the KRONE dealer or a qualified
tyre specialist.
When mounting the tyre on the wheel rim never exceed the highest permissible pressure stated
by the tyre manufacturer, otherwise the tyre or even the wheel rim may explode.
If the tyre bead is not located properly when the highest permissible pressure is achieved,
deflate the tyre, align the tyre, grease the tyre bead, and inflate the tyre again.
The tyre manufacturers can provide extensive informative material on how to fit tyres on
agricultural vehicles.
Never operate the forage harvester at
the tyre pressure usual for transport of
the tyres. Keep the valve caps fitted on
the valves to keep dirt out.
Check the tyre pressure frequently!
9.11.3 Wheel mounting
•
After the first and then after 20 to 25 hours of
operation, retighten the wheel lug nuts.
Tightening torque of the drive axle wheel lug
nuts = 510 Nm
Tightening torque of the steering axle wheel lug
nuts = 270 Nm
BX110001
Nm
9.11.4 Fitting different tyres
If a change of the tyre size is intended,
please apply to KRONE customer
service. If this is the case, a new
parameter set must be loaded for the
traction drive computer.
IX - 48
BX202245
Maintenance
9.12 Maintenance – electrical
system
WARNING
Danger to life due to rolling away of the unlocked machine, unpredictable moving of the
lifting gear and start-up of the machine!
• Always make certain that the drive and the engine are switched off before doing any
repairs, maintenance or cleaning. Remove the ignition key!
• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and rolling.
• When making repairs (welding work), always interrupt the electric circuit with the main
battery switch and remove the socket connector (1) from the control unit (EDC control
device)!
9.12.1 Main battery switch
•
•
Switch off the engine
Turn main battery switch (1) to "0" position to
interrupt the electric circuit.
1
BX851052
9.12.2 Batteries
2
The battery compartment is located on the left-hand
side of the machine behind the cover (1).
Opening the battery compartment
•
•
Open locking (2).
Unhook cover (1) including battery cover (3) and
remove it.
Cleaning the battery
•
•
•
3
1
Wipe the battery clean as and when necessary.
Use a brush to remove any oxidation on the pole
terminals.
Use pole grease on the battery poles and the pole
terminals.
BX500095_1
IX - 49
Maintenance
The forage harvester has been fitted with two batteries
(1) of 12 V (135 Ah) each.which are connected in
series (24 V) for starting.
1
A switching relay (2) is used to switch.
The operating voltage is only 12 V!
When jump-starting the battery,
make certain that only a voltage of
12 V is connected to each battery!
Before wintering the forage harvester, charge the
batteries and re-charge them every six weeks or have
them serviced at a battery service station.
2
BX500086
Removing the socket connector (1) from the control
unit (EDC-control device).
•
•
•
•
Switch off the engine
Set the main battery switch to off by turning to the
left into horizontal position.
Release the safety and disconnect the socket
connector (1) on the EDC control device by
swivelling.
When fitting the socket connector (1) swivel the
safety bracket upwards and lock into place.
The socket connector (6 plugs
altogether) is twice available on the
EDC control unit of the BiGX850 -1/
1100 -1.
9.12.3 Lighting
•
•
1
Check lighting (dipped beam, full beam, direction
indicator)
Check brake lamp
Indicator lamps
•
•
Engine control lamp must go out shortly after the
engine has been started.
Charge indicator lamp must go out shortly after the
engine has been started.
IX - 50
BX850971
Maintenance
9.12.4 Control units and fuses
Have work on the electronic system
carried out by KRONE after-sales
service or KRONE dealer only!
Relay circuit board in the cab
The designations of fuses, relays and LEDs for the
above mentioned control units can be found on the
relay circuit board (4) in the console of the driver's
cabin (3).
For the assignment of the relay circuit board (4),
please refer to chapter Maintenance "Relay Circuit
Board in the Console".
1
2
BX500088_1
Relay circuit board in the console
The designations of the fuses, relays and LEDs for the
cab can be found on the relay circuit board (2) behind
the cover (1) on the cab roof.
For the assignment of the relay circuit board (2), please
refer to chapter Maintenance "Relay Circuit Board in
the Cab".
3
4
BX850944_2
IX - 51
Maintenance
20 082 194 0
Relay circuit board in the cab
F1
20A
F2
10A
F3
15A
F4
15A
F5
15A
F6
10A
F7
5A
F8
5A
F17
15A
F20
10A
F21
10A
LD20
F22
10A
F23
10A
4X30L-2
LD38
F9
30A
LD39
LD40
F10
LD24A
15A
F24
LD34
F11
5A
F12
5A
F13
5A
30A
LD24B
LD35
LD25A
F25
LD36
30A
LD25B
LD37
F14
15A
F15
7,5A
LD26A
F26
S1
S2
1
ON
1
ON
S3
1
ON
S4
1
ON
LD26B
LD27A
F27
F16
15A
S5
1
ON
S6
1
ON
30A
30A
LD27B
4X30L-1
LD28
F28
15A
F29
10A
F30
10A
F31
10A
F32
10A
F33
10A
F34
7,5A
LD29
4X30E
LD30
4X31E
LD31
SICHERUNG
TEST
4X31L
LD32
LD18
F19
5A
LD33
LD41
F35
LD42
IX - 52
S7
1
ON
S8
1
ON
LD43
Maintenance
Fuse
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
F25
F26
F27
F28
F29
F30
F31
F32
F33
F34
Value
20A
10A
15A
15A
15A
15A
5A
5A
30A
15A
5A
5A
5A
15A
7,5A
15A
15A
5A
10A
10A
10A
10A
30A
30A
30A
30A
15A
10A
10A
10A
10A
10A
7,5A
Designation
Allround lights
Cutting drum lighting
Seat compressor
Side windscreen washers
Front windscreen washers, water pump
Travel direction indicator
Horn, headlamp flasher
Mirror adjustment
PWM module fan
Cooling box
Control unit for climate control
GPS antenna, reserve
Air conditioning compressor
Radio/CB/GPS/GSM ignition stage 1
Radio/CB/GPS/GSM continuous voltage
Hazard warning lights
Comfort seat, reserve
Fuse test for all connector locks used on the circuit board
Interior lighting, spotlight
Dipped beam right
Dipped beam left
Full beam left
Full beam right
Working floodlights cabin roof centre
Working floodlights cabin roof left/right outside
Working floodlights discharge chute, rear
Working floodlights platform, rear wheel light
Working floodlights lamp carrier bottom
Reversing horn, reversing lights
Brake light
Side light/ perimeter light left
Side light/ perimeter light right
Locator lighting
Control voltage, full beam
IX - 53
20 082 194 0
Maintenance
F1
20A
F2
10A
F3
15A
F4
15A
F5
15A
F6
10A
F7
5A
F8
5A
F17
15A
F20
10A
F21
10A
LD20
F22
10A
F23
10A
4X30L-2
LD38
F9
30A
LD39
LD40
F10
LD24A
15A
F24
LD34
F11
5A
F12
5A
F13
5A
30A
LD24B
LD35
LD25A
F25
LD36
30A
LD25B
LD37
F14
15A
F15
7,5A
LD26A
F26
S1
S2
1
ON
1
ON
S3
1
ON
S4
1
ON
LD26B
LD27A
F27
F16
15A
S5
1
ON
S6
1
ON
30A
30A
LD27B
4X30L-1
LD28
F28
15A
F29
10A
F30
10A
F31
10A
F32
10A
F33
10A
F34
7,5A
LD29
4X30E
LD30
4X31E
LD31
SICHERUNG
TEST
4X31L
LD32
LD18
F19
5A
LD33
LD41
F35
LD42
IX - 54
S7
1
ON
S8
1
ON
LD43
Maintenance
LED
LD18
LD20
LD24A
LD24B
LD25A
LD25B
LD26A
LD26B
LD27A
LD27B
LD28
LD29
LD30
LD31
LD32
LD33
LD34
LD35
LD36
LD37
LD38
LD39
LD40
LD41
LD42
LD43
Designation
Fuse test for all connector locks used on the circuit board
Dipped/high beam switching top/bottom
Working floodlight cabin roof centre
Working floodlight cabin roof centre
Cab roof left working floodlight
Cab roof right working floodlight
Working floodlight - discharge chute
Rear working floodlight
Working floodlight platform
Rear wheel light
Working floodlight lamp carrier bottom
Reversing horn, reversing lights
Brake light
Lighting left
Lighting right
Locator lighting
Ignition stage 2
Radio, climate control
Windscreen washer, horn
Cutting drum lighting, side windscreen washer
Headlamp flasher
Full beam
Dipped beam
Seat switch
Door switch
Delay lights control signal
IX - 55
Maintenance
Relay circuit board in the console
22X13
22S1
1
ON
+30L22
LD3
LD1
LD116
LD5
10A
20 083 389 0
F37
LD4
LD2
F41
LD6
15A
20A
LD22
LD18
F71
LD5.1
F40
LD8
F43
5A
F39
LD7
15A
F42
F38
LD23
20A
LD71
10A
LD24
15A
F72
10A
F72.1
5A
LD25
LD113
LD112
LD111
LD110
LD109
LD108
LD107
LD106
LD105
LD104
LD102
LD101
LD9
LD26
SICHERUNGS
TEST
LD27
LD20
LD-TEST
GAL
IC1
F73
15A
F74
15A
F75
15A
F76
15A
F77
15A
F78
15A
LD28
LD29
LD30
1
ON
TP2
F44
22S2.1
4 3 2 1
ON
22S2
5A
F49
3A
F50
LD44
F45
7,5A
LD31
LD32
LD50
F51
F60
10A
20A
LD45
F79
15A
F80
15A
F81
15A
F82
10A
LD60
LD33
F46
5A
F52
10A
F47
7,5A
F53
10A
F46.1
5A
F54
7,5A
F61
5A
LD61
LD52
TP1
LD10
LD34
LD35
LD0
F47.1 7,5A
F55
F83
10A
10A
LD11
F56
5A
F57
5A
F58
5A
LD36
LD21
F62
20A
F84
15A
F85
15A
F86
15A
LD37
LD38
LD62
F48.1 7,5A
F59
3A
F63
20A
LD59
F48
LD63
F64
10A
LD39
20A
F87
15A
LD64
F65
5A
F88
10A
F66
10A
F89
7,5A
F67
10A
F90
15A
F68
10A
F91
15A
F69
10A
F92
7,5A
F70
10A
F93
20A
LD40
LD41
LD42
LD15
LD16
LD17.1
LD17
LD43
LD93
22X9
-31E22
IX - 56
22X10
+30E22
22X11
22X12
+30L22
-31L22
Maintenance
Fuse
22F37
22F38
22F39
22F40
22F41
22F42
22F43
22F44
22F45
22F46
22F46.1
22F47
22F47.1
22F48
22F48.1
22F50
22F51
22F52
22F53
22F54
22F55
22F56
22F57
22F58
22F59
22F60
22F61
22F62
22F63
22F64
22F65
22F66
22F67
22F68
22F69
22F70
22F71
22F72
22F72.1
22F73
22F74
22F75
22F76
22F77
22F78
22F79
22F80
22F81
22F82
22F83
22F84
22F85
22F86
22F87
22F88
22F89
22F90
22F91
22F92
22F93
Value
10A
5A
20A
10A
15A
15A
15A
5A
7,5A
5A
5A
7,5A
7,5A
7,5A
10A
3A
10A
10A
10A
7,5A
10A
5A
5A
5A
3A
20A
5A
20A
20A
20A
5A
10A
10A
10A
10A
10A
20A
20A
5A
15A
15A
15A
15A
15A
15A
15A
15A
15A
10A
10A
15A
15A
15A
15A
10A
7,5A
15A
15A
7,5A
20A
Designation
DIN socket / reserve
Traction drive
Yield recording output
Yield recording electronics
Ignition stage 1 moisture measuring
Ignition stage 2 moisture measuring
Moisture measuring
KMC 3 electronics
Ignition stage 1 Teleservice
Terminal (slow release)
Terminal (slow release 0…16h)
Ignition stage 1 CU
Continuous voltage Teleservice
Ignition stage 2 CU
Ignition stage 2 diagnostics socket
Autopilot electronics
Steering wheel pressure
EMR
CAN diagnostics socket
Video system
Metal detection
Manual operation
Joystick ignition stage 1
Degree of maturity (AutoScan)
DIOM electronics
Ignition stage 1 electronics (slow release)
KMC 2 electronics
Ignition stage 1 electronics (slow release)
Ignition stage 1 electronics
Ignition stage 2 electronics
Continuous voltage joystick
Reserve
Continuous voltage CAN diagnostics socket
Continuous voltage MFR
Traction drive sensors
Ignition stage 2 MFR/EDC
Ignition stage 1 output
Reserve
Reserve
DIOM voltage
Molasses
Reserve
Autopilot voltage
Reserve
Voltage V3 KMC 3
Voltage V4 KMC 3
Voltage V2 KMC 3
Voltage V1 KMC 3
Cigarette lighter 2
Cigarette lighter 1
Voltage V4 KMC 2
Voltage V3 KMC 2
Voltage V2 KMC 2
Voltage V1 KMC 2
Starting engine
Central lubrication
Traction drive
Traction drive
Continuous voltage ignition lock
Control signal starting engine
IX - 57
Maintenance
22X13
22S1
1
ON
+30L22
LD3
LD1
LD116
LD5
10A
20 083 389 0
F37
LD4
LD2
F41
LD6
15A
20A
LD22
LD18
F71
LD5.1
F40
LD8
F43
5A
F39
LD7
15A
F42
F38
LD23
20A
LD71
10A
LD24
15A
F72
10A
F72.1
5A
LD25
LD113
LD112
LD111
LD110
LD109
LD108
LD107
LD106
LD105
LD104
LD102
LD101
LD9
LD26
SICHERUNGS
TEST
LD27
LD20
LD-TEST
GAL
IC1
F73
15A
F74
15A
F75
15A
F76
15A
F77
15A
F78
15A
LD28
LD29
LD30
1
ON
TP2
F44
22S2.1
4 3 2 1
ON
22S2
5A
F49
3A
F50
LD44
F45
7,5A
LD31
LD32
LD50
F51
F60
10A
20A
LD45
F79
15A
F80
15A
F81
15A
F82
10A
LD60
LD33
F46
5A
F52
10A
F47
7,5A
F53
10A
F46.1
5A
F54
7,5A
F61
5A
LD61
LD52
TP1
LD10
LD34
LD35
LD0
F47.1 7,5A
F55
F83
10A
10A
LD11
F56
5A
F57
5A
F58
5A
LD36
LD21
F62
20A
F84
15A
F85
15A
F86
15A
LD37
LD38
LD62
F48.1 7,5A
F59
3A
F63
20A
LD59
F48
LD63
F64
10A
LD39
20A
F87
15A
LD64
F65
5A
F88
10A
F66
10A
F89
7,5A
F67
10A
F90
15A
F68
10A
F91
15A
F69
10A
F92
7,5A
F70
10A
F93
20A
LD40
LD41
LD42
LD15
LD16
LD17.1
LD17
LD43
LD93
22X9
-31E22
IX - 58
22X10
+30E22
22X11
22X12
+30L22
-31L22
Maintenance
LED
LD0
LD1
LD2
LD3
LD4
LD5
LD5.1
LD6
LD7
LD8
LD9
LD10
LD11
LD15
LD16
LD17
LD17.1
LD18
LD20
LD21
LD22
LD23
LD24
LD25
LD26
LD27
LD28
LD29
LD30
LD31
LD32
LD33
LD34
LD35
LD36
LD37
LD38
LD39
LD40
LD41
LD42
Designation
Terminal (slow release 0…16h)
Reserve
Reserve
Ignition stage 1
Ignition stage 1 electronics yield recording
Ignition stage 2 electronics yield recording
Ignition stage 2 yield recording
Ignition stage 1 yield recording
Reserve
Reserve
Reserve
Output horn coastdown alarm
Ignition stage 1 (slow release)
Signal resistance CAN2 KMC2
Traction drive sensors
Ignition stage 2 MFR/EDC
Brake signal
Switching signal horn metal detection
Reserve
Cigarette lighters 1 + 2
Reserve
Reserve
Reserve
Reserve
Reserve
DIOM voltage
Silage agent switching signal
Reserve
Autopilot voltage
Reserve
Voltage V3 KMC 3
Voltage V4 KMC 3
Voltage V2 KMC 3
Voltage V1 KMC 3
Voltage V4 KMC 2
Voltage V3 KMC 2
Voltage V2 KMC 2
Signal starter relay selection
Voltage V1 KMC 2
Starting engine
Central lubrication
LED
LD43
LD44
LD45
LD50
LD52
LD59
LD60
LD61
LD62
LD63
LD64
LD71
LD93
LD101
LD102
LD104
LD105
LD106
LD107
LD108
LD109
LD110
LD111
LD112
LD113
LD116
Designation
Enable ground drive
KMC 3 electronics
Ignition stage 1 Teleservice
Autopilot electronics
Steering wheel pressure
DIOM electronics
Ignition stage 1 electronics (slow release)
KMC 2 electronics
Ignition stage 1 electronics (slow release)
Ignition stage 1 electronics
Ignition stage 2 electronics
Ignition stage 1 output
Control signal starting engine
Real. feed drive / front attachment voltage
Reserve
Seat switch
Door switch
Reserve
Quick stop
Reserve
Enable maintenance
Enable feed drive / front attachment
Enable ground drive
Enable automatic steering
Road/field mode release
Reserve
IX - 59
Maintenance
9.13 Maintenance – compressed
air system
BIG X 600/700 -1
9.13.1 Compressed air storage tank
1
Condensation water settles in the compressed air
storage tank (1). The condensation water may cause
malfunctions.
Drain the condensation water once a week.
•
2
Use the drain valve (2) to drain the condensation
water collected in the compressed air storage tank
(1) into a container.
BX750001
BiG X 850 -1/BiG X 1100 -1
2
1
BX750010
9.14 Maintenance – Air conditioning
system and heating
9.14.1 Special warnings
Carry out repair, maintenance and
cleaning work only when the machine
is at a standstill. Switch off the
engine. Remove the ignition key.
Secure the machine against the
possibility of rolling back.
It is imperative that you seek medical
advice in case of refrigerant burns;
take the data sheet (cf. page IX - 61)
along.
Ensure sufficient ventilation when
working on the refrigerating system.
Repair, maintenance and cleaning
work may be carried out by
authorised specialists only.
Do not permit the refrigerant to
escape during filling or repair work;
use a recycling container for
disposal.
In case of repair, maintenance and
cleaning work on the refrigerant
circuit, refrigerant emissions may
occur; these emissions may be liquid
or gaseous and are a hazard for man
and the environment. Take suitable
protective measures (wear protective
goggles and protective gloves).
IX - 60
The spare parts used have to meet
the technical requirements defined by
the machine manufacturer. For this
reason, use KRONE original spare
parts only.
Maintenance
9.14.2 Components of the air conditioning
system
A Compressor
on the right-hand side on the engine in direction of
travel, driven by V belt
B Capacitor
behind the radiator screen in the machine
compartment
C drier/collector
behind the radiator screen in the machine
compartment – bottom right
E Manometric switch
on drier
F Expansion valve
at the evaporator inlet
G Manometric switch climate control control unit
in cab, roof panel
D Evaporator
in the cab roof
9.14.3 Data sheet of refrigerant R134a (extract)
Refrigerant R 134a:
Chemical designation:
Chemical formula:
Molecular weight:
Boiling point (at 1.013 bar):
Freezing point:
Critical temperature:
Critical pressure:
Density (liquid at +25 ° Celsius):
Flammability limits in air:
1,1,1,2-tetrafluorethane
CH2F CF3
102.0 g/mol
-26.1°C
-101.0°C
-101.1°C
40.60 bar
1,206 kg/m3
not flammable
Environmental data
FKW 134a:
ODP - ozonolysis potential
CLP
- chlorine load potential
HGWP - greenhouse effect
PCR - photo-chemical reactivity
ODP = 0
CLP = 0
HGWP = 0.26
PCR = 0.5
9.14.4 Technical Data
Technical Data
Component
Evaporator
Heater
Fan
Voltage
Current consumption
Refrigerant
Performance data
refrigerating capacity* 5,200 Watt*
heating capacity 4,000 Watt
1000 m3/h free blowing
12 Volt
15 ampères
R 134a (CFC free)
*measured at +30 ° Celsius ambient temperature
(data rendered by the manufacturer)
IX - 61
Maintenance
9.14.5 Refrigerant
Nonetheless, the refrigerant must not
be drained; it must be collected at a
recycling plant. For this reason do
not sever any connecting pipes. Have
maintenance and repair work on the
air conditioning system carried out
only by your Krone dealer with a
suitable disposal and recycling
equipment.
The air conditioning system is
operated with 1500 g of refrigerant
R134a (tetrafluoroethane). This
substance does not contain any
chlorine atoms, and thus is inoffensive to the ozone in the atmosphere of
the environment.
9.14.6 Manometric switch
When the fan speed is at the highest
still pleasant performance, set the
cooling performance of the air
conditioning system to an average
value. Let the air conditioning system
not operate at the lowest fan speed
and highest cooling performance.
The air conditioning system has been fitted with a
manometric switch (2) which shuts down the system in
case of over or under pressure (on the collector/drier
(1) behind the combined radiator on the left hand side
in direction of travel).
1
2
Indikatorperle
im Schauglas
indicator pearl
in sight glass
blau = trocken
blue = dry
Rosa=feucht
Kundendienst
anrufen
pink=wet
call service
BX500080_1
9.14.7 Fresh air fan and circulation mode
(cabin)
Fresh air fan
A fresh air filter (3) in the form of a wedge filter cell is
located in the upper cab area behind the gill screen (2)
on the left hand side in direction of travel. This filter (3)
protects the driver in the cab against dust or airborne
dirt, which is outside the cab.
Check the filter for soiling prior to any operation.
2
1
If filters are not properly maintained
they may become very soiled, no
longer ensuring that sufficient fresh
air is passed into the cab.
•
•
•
Open the closing device (1) by turning 90°
clockwise.
Pull the gill screen (2) out; check the wedge filter
cell (3) for soiling and clean, if and when necessary.
Shake out the filter (3); never use compressed air.
In case of severe soiling, the filter (3) has to be
replaced.
3
BX100560_1
IX - 62
Maintenance
Circulation filter
If the circulating air filter (1) is very
dirty, the output of the air
conditioning system may be reduced
and it may heat up.
•
Clean the circulating air filter (1) regularly.
1
BX200550_1
9.14.8 Checking refrigerant condition
and filling quantity of collector/
dryer
Checking the refrigerant volume
Loss of refrigerant through hoses in the air conditioning
system is unavoidable. Check the level of the
refrigerant every 100 hours.
•
•
•
Check the window (2) of the drier (1) with the engine
running and with the air conditioning system
switched on (set to highest cooling action).
If the white float (3) is at the top, the volume of
refrigerant is okay.
If the white float (3) is at the bottom, the refrigerant
must be topped up (specialist workshop).
2
3
4
Checking the moisture saturation
The moisture in the refrigerant circuit is collected in the
filter drier (1).
1
2
Observe the notice on the sticker (5)
on the dryer (1).
5
Dryer with sticker (6):
•
•
If the indicator pearl (3) is blue, the degree of
moisture is okay.
If the indicator pearl (3) has turned pink, the
collector unit of the dryer must be replaced (specialist workshop)
Dryer with sticker (7):
•
•
If the indicator pearl (3) is orange, the degree of
moisture is okay.
If the indicator pearl (3) has turned colourless, the
collector unit of the dryer must be replaced (specialist workshop)
Indikatorperle
im Schauglas
indicator pearl
in sight glass
Indikatorperle
im Schauglas
blau = trocken
blue = dry
orange=trocken orange = dry
Rosa=feucht
Kundendienst
anrufen
pink=wet
call service
farblos=feucht
Kundendienst
anrufen
6
7
indicator pearl
in sight glass
colourless=wet
call service
BX500082_2
IX - 63
Maintenance
9.14.9 Capacitor
The capacitor is located in the engine compartment
behind the radiator screen (1).
Regularly check the capacitor for cleanliness; clean the
unit depending on the degree of soiling, however, at
least once a month.
2
Opening the radiator screen
•
1
Open the catch (2) and swing the radiator screen (1)
aside.
BX101560_1
Cleaning the capacitor
•
Blow the capacitor (1) out from the inside to the
outside with compressed air. Do not damage the
blades.
1
BX500083
Cleaning evaporator filter
1
WHBBX00045
•
WHBBX00046
Screw out hexagon socket-head screws (1) and
remove service cover.
2
WHBBX00056
1
3
4
WHBBX00056
•
•
Remove housing cover (1).
Clean filter (2) with compressed air.
IX - 64
Maintenance
9.15 Maintenance – central
lubrication system
(BEKA-MAX)
USA
Lubricant fill
1
Hydraulic-type lubricating nipple
2
The lubricant is filled through the hydraulic-type
lubricating nipple (1) by means of a commercially
available grease gun.
1 - Hydraulic-type lubricating nipple
2 - Additional Mounting Connection
BX500666
Fill coupling
•
•
3
Remove the lubricating nipple (3) and replace by
filler neck 27 001 594 0 (4).
The coupling box 27 001 595 0 (2) must be fitted to
the filling pump (1).
4
BX110008
Filling cylinder (USA)
•
•
Remove the M20x1.5 closure screw (3) and replace
by filler socket 940 392 0 (2).
For filling remove the protective cap on the socket
(2) and the filling cylinder 940 393 0 (1).
M20x1,5
3
Use clean lubricant with a suitable
tool only!
Soiled lubricants will lead to severe
system failures!
2
1
Operational sequence
•
Switch on the ignition.
The green (4) and red (5) LEDs light up for
approx. 1.5 s (independently of the set program)
and indicate that the control of the lubrication
system is operational.
If the ignition is interrupted during a
lubrication sequence or in the course of
the cycle time, the time will be stopped
and stored in the data memory.
When the ignition is turned on again,
the remaining lubrication or cycle time
stored in the memory will be reactivated and the sequence of
operations will be continued at that
point where it was interrupted before.
Malfunction
•
By pressing the interim lubrication button (3), the
pump will restart a lubrication sequence.
2
1
BX110009
4
5
3
BX500667
IX - 65
Maintenance
Signal displays
The function of the pump is displayed via two control
LEDs (green (4)/red (5)) in the viewing window (6) for
the motor half shell of the pump.
6
The red LED always displays a
malfunction in the program
sequence.
5
4
BX500649
Description of the signal displays
LED
Red
green
Red
green
Signal display
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Red
ON
OFF
green
ON
OFF
Red
green
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Red
ON
OFF
green
ON
OFF
Red
ON
OFF
Ready for operation: 1.5 sec.
Display of functional
readiness
During the entire lubrication process
IX - 66
ON
OFF
Program run of a
lubrication process
1 sec.
Cycle error on the
progressive distributor
1 sec.
Until the lubricant reservoir is re-filled
Error grease level;
grease level too low
1 sec.
Error pump motor
speed
1 sec.
0,5 sec.
0,5 sec.
green
Description
Error CPU/ accumulator
Setting of the pump
Cycle time: 8 Min.
Clock impulses: 34
Controlling time: 3 Min.
105
105
105
45
45
45
45
25*
Cylinder
Steering knuckle bolt
Steering knuckle bolt
Locating bolt
50 Lubrication points
Grease nipple
Rocker arm, left
Labyrinth seal
Labyrinth seal
Labyrinth seal
Rocker arm, left
Upper roller system
Upper roller system
Upper roller system
4010.A0553
Steering axle
75
75
75
75*
25
25*
Feed system
4010.9801
Scope of delivery
2158.C8750.5
Krone-no. 27 006 800 0
Rocker arm, right
Anti-wrap guard
Anti-wrap guard
Anti-wrap guard
Storage
Storage
Storage
Scope of delivery
2158.C8750.2
Krone-no. 27 006 168 0
Suction fan
Rocker bearing
Cylinder
Steering knuckle bolt
Steering knuckle bolt
Locating bolt
Blower
Drum bearing
Deflection pulley
Drum bearing
Main distributor
4010.A0436
45*
45
25
25*
105
Corn-Conditioner
4010.A0337
105
105
25*
Scope of delivery
2158.C8750.6
Krone-no. 27 005 801 0
Drum bearing
Drum bearing
High pressure
coupling
Blower
Scope of delivery
2158.C8750.1
Krone-no. 27 005 799 0
Electric pump EP-1
12V, 8kg, 2 x PE-170
with EP-tronic
105*
105*
25
25*
45
25
105
25
105*
105
105
105*
Drum bearing
Drum bearing
Frame bearing
Scope of delivery
2158.B8340.4
Krone-no. 27 000 146 0
Foraging unit, right
4010.6729
Counterblade bearing
Drum bearing
Frame bearing
Drum bearing
Counterblade bearing
Flange bearing
Clamping arm Main belt drive
Slewing ring
Discharge bearing
Discharge system and drive
4010.A0339
Scope of delivery
2158.C8750.7
Krone-no. 27 005 697 0
Discharge bearing
Clamping arm Main belt drive
Tension roller Corn - Conditioner drive
Tension roller arm
Flange bearing
Slewing ring
Maintenance
Overview lubrication system BEKA-MAX
IX - 67
Maintenance
Jam in the system or at a connected lubricating
point
Troubleshooting
-
-
Unscrew the outlet screw connections from the
main distributor to the subdistributor one after the
other.
If lubricant suddenly exits under pressure when
loosening one of the outlet screw connections, the
connected subdistributor is blocked.
If lubricant does not exit from any of the outlet
screw connections, the main distributor is blocked.
Clean the main distributor or replace it.
Reinstall the outlet screw connections.
-
Unscrew the outlet screw connections of the
blocked subdistributor.
If lubricant suddenly exits under pressure when
unscrewing one of the outlet screw connections, the
connected lubricating point is blocked.
If lubricant does not exit from any of the outlet
screw connections, the main distributor is blocked.
Clean the blocked subdistributor or replace it.
-
Remove the blockage at the lubricating point.
IX - 68
Maintenance
Main distributor (1)
1
BX200380_1
Auxiliary distributor, left steering axle (1)
1
BX500087_1
Auxiliary distributor for discharge system and drive (1)
1
BX200390_1
Auxiliary distributor, right foraging unit (1)
1
BX200410_2
IX - 69
Maintenance
Auxiliary distributor, supply system (1)
1
BX200400
Auxiliary distributor, grain conditioner (1)
1
BX200360
Emergency lubricating points for use if the central
lubricating system fails (1)
1
BX851087
IX - 70
Maintenance
9.16 Lubricant
To ensure continuous problem-free operation of the
central lubrication system, we recommend using the
following greases that we have tested. (Greases with
sodium soap must not be used in either the on-road or
off-road area because they are soluble in water.)
Grease can be changed from conventional grease to
bio-degradable greases (and vice-versa) for the
products listed here without resulting disadvantage.
Standard commercial greases or greases
recommended by the manufacturer of the vehicle or
grease should be used as lubricants. Greases should
still exhibit adequate suction and flowing behaviour at
–25 °C (max. flow pressure 700 mb).
To ensure the system works
properly, be careful no impurities
enter the system when refilling
lubricant.
Dirt will cause malfunctions in the
central lubrication system and will
damage or destroy parts an friction
points.
They must not have a tendency to bleed out, since
this can result in blockages during extended operation.
MoS2 greases (up to 5 % molybdenum disulphide) can
be distributed and pumped with VOGEL progressive
pumps.
Warning!
Use of incorrect lubricants - effect: Bearing damage to the machine. Use only the lubricants
listed here. The central lubrication must never under any circumstances be filled with fluid
grease.
Grease types, NLGIClass 2
Manufacturer
Type designation
AGIP
ARAL
BECHEM
BP
Autol Top 2000
Long-term grease H
High–Lub L4742
Energrease LS EP 9346
Energrease LS EP2
CASTROL
Spheerol EP L2
ESSO
ExxonMulti-purposegrease
ELF
ELF Multi 2
FINA
Multi-purpose grease EP
FUCHS
LZR 2
KROON OIL
Lithep Grease
MOBIL
Mobilux EP 2
Mobilgrease
MB 2
MOGUL
LV 1 EP
ÖMV
ÖMV Signum M283
OPTIMOL
Olit EP 2
SHELL
Retinax EP L2
TEXACO
Multifak EP2
TOTAL
Multis EP2
Zeller &Gmelin DivinolMulti-purposegrease2
With soap Minimum operating
temperature [°C]
Spez. Ca
Li
Li
Li
Li
Li
Li
Li
Li
Li
Li
Li
Li
Li
Li/Ca
Li
Li
Li
Li
Li
–10
–25
–20
–25
–20
–20
–20
–20
–20
–25
–10
–15
–20
–25
–25
–25
–20
–15
–20
–20
Lubrication greases with fast bio-degradable times
ARAL
AVIA
BECHEM
DEA
FINA
FUCHS
LUBRITECH
ÖMV
TEXACO
Zeller & Gmelin
BAB EP 2
Syntogrease
UWS VE 42
Dolon E EP2
Biolical EP S2
Plantogel 0120S
Stabyl Eco EP2
ÖMV ecodur EP2
Starfak 2
Divinol E2
Li/Ca
Li
Li/Ca
Li/Ca
Li/Ca
Li
Li/Ca
Ca
Ca
Li
–20
–25
–25
–20
–25
–25
–20
–25
–20
–25
IX - 71
IX - 72
1 2
6
9
8
10
250 h
7
100 h
250 h
250 h
250 h
4
250 h
250
100 hh
11
250 h
5
12
250 h
5
3
250 h
13
BX850986_1
250 h
Maintenance
9.17 Lubrication chart
Maintenance
Lubricating points
•
The lubricating points mentioned must be lubricated
according to specified number of operating hours.
Components
Subgroup/Part
Drive system
Universal shaft intake
Universal shaft header
3
3
100
100
Cooling system
Screen drum
Supply system
Flange bearing
Flange bearing
PTO shaft
Remote cylinder
Pendulum frame
Tension springs, front top and
bottom, rear top
Tension anchor
Point of rotation of swinging arm
Coupling rods
Slide
Grinding stone
1
1
3
4
1
2
250
250
100
100
250
250
2
2
4
2
1
1
250
250
250
250
250
250
Counterblade
adjustment
Grinding device
Hitch coupling
Number of
Lubrication intervals
lubrication points Operating hours
IX - 73
Maintenance
9.18 Silage Agent System (Optional)
9.18.1 Special Instructions for Using Silage
Agents
The silage agent system cannot be used
for all silage agents without restrictions.
The following instructions must be observed for the
silage agent that is used.
Water-based silage agent solutions with
bacterial additives can be used in the
system without any restrictions if
cleaning is performed according to
specification.
9.18.2 Cleaning Work on the Silage Agent
System
Whenever the silage agent system is cleaned, rinse it
with potable water until the water that emerges is
colourless.
Set the silage additive system via the terminal onto
„permanent operation“.
The following cleaning intervals must be
strictly observed to prevent damage to
the silage agent system.
Silage agent
Cleaning interval
Water-based silage agent
solutions with bacterial
additives
monthly
Solution containing acid
weekly
Solution containing fine
particles
after each use
9.18.3 Dosing quantity of the Silage Agent System
Dosing quantity silage additive system without flow
sensor
The dosing quantity (l/min) is specified by the nozzle
Sparep.
No.
940 512 0
940 515 0
940 517 0
colour
coding
nozzle orange
nozzle red
nozzle blue
Dosing quantity
on 1,8 bar
0,66 l/min
0,93 l/min
1,88 l/min
Silage additive system with flow sensor
In case of a poor flow capacity, the filter insert of line
filter and nozzle filter must be cleaned.
The flow sensor must under no circumstances be
cleaned with compressed air.
IX - 74
Silage agent solutions containing
acid can be used in a pH-value range
between 6 and 10 if cleaning is
performed according to
specifications.
Silage agent solutions containing fine
particles can be used conditionally in
the system if cleaning is performed
according to specifications.
Maintenance
9.19 Cable Winch
Danger to injuries!
Never step under suspended loads.
Before working on the cable winch,
disconnect the electrical power circuit
with the main battery switch.
Replacing the Cable Winch
The rope must be mounted so that it
coils and uncoils between the rope
coil and the base plate. Otherwise the
winch will not work.
Never coil or uncoil from the upper
side of the rope coil!
When using a rope with reduced
breaking force, there is risk of injury.
•
•
•
•
Unroll the old rope to within about two remaining
revolutions.
Loosen the hexagonal socket head screw.
Remove the old rope (1).
Guide in the new rope, which must be of
comparable quality, and secure with hexagonal
socket head screw.
Recommended rope:
• Diameter:
• Max. length:
6 mm
6m
Recommended rope construction:
• 16 x 9 FE, 1960 N/mm2
1
BX850801_1
Checking the cable of the cable winch
•
•
•
•
•
•
The cable must not be bended down.
The cable must be coiled up properly (windings side
by side).
Make sure that no single wires are torn.
The fastening of the cable on the hook must be OK
(terminal).
The hook must be OK (locking).
The fastening screws of the cable winch must be
tight.
IX - 75
Maintenance
9.20 Trailer Coupling
Danger to life or serious injuries!
• Make sure the trailer is secured
against rolling away.
•
•
•
•
Check the thickness of the wear plate (1) regularly.
As soon as the wear plate (1) is less than 6 mm, it
has to be replaced by an authorised workshop.
Measure the diameter on the thickest point of the
coupling bolt (2). As soon as the diameter is less
than 37 mm, the coupling bolt (2) has to be replaced
by an authorised workshop.
If the coupling gap is worn out more than 1.5 mm or
the gap (a) is larger than 3 mm on any point
between connecting jaw (3) and coupling support
(4), then the trailer coupling has to be replaced.
Check the rotatability of the connecting jaw (3)
every three months.
If the connecting jaw (3) is sluggish:
• Unscrew screw (5).
• Lubricate the grease nipple (6).
• Turn the connecting jaw (3) one rotation and tighten
the screw (5) with a torque of 35-50 Nm.
2
1
BX851018
a
4
5
3
BX851024
6
BX851025
Trailer coupling for Italy
•
•
Check the diameter of the coupling bolt 30 mm (1)
at the thinnest location.
If the diameter of the coupling bolt is smaller than
28 mm:
- Replace coupling bolt.
Check the diameter of the bolt holders (2) in the
trailer coupling.
If the holes of the bolt holder (2) are larger than 32
mm (oval):
- Replace trailer coupling.
1
2
BX851034_1
IX - 76
Maintenance
9.21 Brakes
Check within the national legal provisions
•
Regularly check blade brake for functionality
according to the national legal provisions. This
check may for example be performed within a TÜV
testing of the vehicle. A brake deceleration
measurement must be performed. In this process,
the target value must correspond to the vehicle
specification.
After emergency brake
Regardless of the maintenance intervals, it is
absolutely necessary to inspect the brake completely
after an emergency brake has been performed, with
turned out hydrostats.
• To do this, perform a visual check of blades,
springs and sealing elements.
IX - 77
Maintenance
9.22 Maintenance Schedule
IX - 78
Before the beginning of the season
Hydraulic system
Check oil level of hydraulic tank
Brake
Function test brake (Bosch)
Oil level check gearbox
Power take-off gear
Transfer gearbox
Lower roller gearbox
Angular gearbox
Roller gearbox top right
Auger gearbox spout
Wheel hub gearbox front/rear
Components for crop flow
Check scraper of flat roller (wear, distance dimension)
Engine
Check engine oil level
Check engine for oil leaks
Cooling system
Check coolant level
Clean air filter
General maintenance work
Check cable winch
Check fire extinguisher
Electrical system
Clean battery
Tyres
Check tyres visually for cuts and breaks and check the tyre pressure
Table 1
Once after 1 hour
Tyres
Tighten wheel nuts of front wheel/rear wheel
Table 2
Once after 10 hours
Components for crop flow
Tighten fastening screws of chopping blades
Tighten fastening screws of discharge scoops
Engine
Check engine for oil leaks
Central lubrication
Check lines for firm attachment
Table 3
Six times after 10 hours
Tyres
Tighten wheel nuts of front wheel/rear wheel (Bosch)
Table 4
Once after 50 hours
Oil change gearbox
Wheel hub gearbox front/rear
Table 5
Every 10 hours, at least every day
Hydraulic system
Check oil level of hydraulic tank
Brake
Function test brake (Bosch)
Engine
Prescribed maintenance intervals of the engine, refer to “maintenance instructions” of MAN
Clean engine compartment
Check engine oil level
Fuel system
Drain condensation water from fuel prefilter by using water separator
Drain condensation water from fuel filter (main filter)
refer to MAN maintenance instructions
Cooling system
Check coolant level
Clean air filter
Clean cooler, cooler compartment and sieve drum
Cabin
Clean fresh air filter
Top up windscreen washer system
Perform indicator lamp test
Perform light function test
Air conditioning system / heating
Clean capacitor
Central lubrication
Check filling level of reservoir
General maintenance work
Clean the machine “completely”
Perform manual lubrication according to lubrication chart
Silage additive system
Clean silage additive system
Tyres
Check tyres visually for cuts and breaks and check the tyre pressure
Table 6
Weekly
Oil level check gearbox
Wheel hub gearbox front/rear
Tyres
Measure tyre pressure by using test device
Compressor unit
Drain condensation water from compressed air storage tank
Table 7
Every 50 hours
Tyres
Tighten wheel nuts of front wheel/rear wheel
Table 8
Every 100 hours
Oil level check gearbox
Power take-off gear
Transfer gearbox
Lower roller gearbox
Angular gearbox
Roller gearbox top right
Auger gearbox spout
Components for crop flow
Check scraper of flat roller (wear, distance dimension)
Cabin
Clean circulation filter
Air conditioning system / heating
Check refrigerant condition and filling quantity (dryer)
Table 9
Every 250 hours
Belt drives
Check kraftband of main drive
Check V-belt of sieve drum
Check all pulleys for damage
General maintenance work
Check cable winch
Check wear plate of trailer coupling
Check coupling bolt of trailer coupling
Check rotatability of connecting jaw
Trailer coupling Italy (option)
Table 10
Every 500 hours
Hydraulic system
Change hydraulic tank oil
Change return suction filter
Change hydraulic oil filter (high pressure filter) steering
Change hydraulic oil filter (high pressure filter) work hydraulics
Oil change gearbox
Wheel hub gearbox front/rear
Engine
Prescribed maintenance intervals of the engine, refer to “Maintenance instructions” of MAN
Check engine for oil leaks
Fuel system
Replace fuel pre-filter of both hand pumps
Replace fuel pre-filter with water separator
Cabin
Change fresh air filter
Change circulation filter
Electrical system
Clean battery (contacts, pole terminals)
Table 11
Every 1000 hours, but at least at the end of the season
Hydraulic system
Change oil filter of gearbox oil cooling
Oil change gearbox
Power take-off gear
Transfer gearbox
Lower roller gearbox
Angular gearbox
Roller gearbox top right
Auger gearbox spout
Engine
Prescribed maintenance intervals of the engine, refer to “Maintenance instructions” of MAN
Cooling system
Replace air filter
Table 12
Every 3000 hours
Cooling system
Replace safety cartridge of air filter
Table 13
Every three years
Cooling system
Change coolant
Replace all hoses for coolant
Table 14
As required
Hydraulic system
Change hydraulic tank oil
Change return suction filter
Change hydraulic oil filter (high pressure filter) steering
Change hydraulic oil filter (high pressure filter) work hydraulics
Brake
Function test brake
Engine
Check engine for oil leaks
Clean engine compartment
Fuel system
Vent fuel system
refer to MAN maintenance instructions
Replace fuel pre-filter of both hand pumps
Replace fuel pre-filter with water separator
Replace fuel main filter
Cooling system
Clean cooler, cooler compartment and sieve drum
Clean air filter
Replace air filter
Replace safety cartridge of air filter
Belt drives
Check kraftband of main drive
Check V-belt of sieve drum
Check all pulleys for damage
Cabin
Top up windscreen washer system
Clean fresh air filter
Clean circulation filter
Air conditioning system / heating
Clean capacitor
Check refrigerant condition and filling quantity (dryer)
Central lubrication
Check filling level of reservoir
Electrical system
Clean battery
Table 15
refer to MAN maintenance instructions
At the end of the season
Cooling system
Check concentration of frost protection and corrosion protection (at least -20 °C)
Air conditioning system / heating
Replace dryer/collector unit
Clean filter of evaporator
Table 16
List of parameters
10
List of parameters
X-1
Compared with 150 200 104-31
Color red = modified
Color green = new
Color blue = deleted
Color black = not modified
rw = read/write
r = read only
Legend:
Software-Version: 150 200 104-32
DRIVER EN_US
Dated:Fr Jun 20 2014
Parameter BiG X 600/I, 700/I, 750C, 850/I, 1100/I
Parameter name
rw
0
Rights Min.
Software-Version: 150 200 104-32
33480 Discharge chute check
driver park. pos. active 0=OFF,
1=Road operation, 2= Main
coupling OFF, 3 MC off
and v> 0km/h
No.
2
Max.
Parameter BiG X 600/I, 700/I, 750C, 850/I, 1100/I
1
Default Unit
Lowering
Chute
Raising
Chute
Check to determine whether the upper discharge chute
is in the parking position when switching to road
operation.
0=No check
1=Check in road operation only
2=Check if main coupling is switched off.
3=Check if main coupling is OFF and machine moves
(independently of release switch field and release
switch travelling gear)
Description
Parameter name
rw
0
Rights Min.
Software-Version: 150 200 104-32
25227 Joystick turn discharge
driver chute mode 2nd stage
0=Joystick, 1=Parameter
25215
No.
1
Max.
Parameter BiG X 600/I, 700/I, 750C, 850/I, 1100/I
1
Default Unit
Lowering
Joystick
Raising
Joystick
Setting how the second level on the joystick for rotating
the upper discharge chute is to be treated. 0 = The
speed in both levels is specified by the lever on the
joystick. 1 = The speed for the second level is specified
via the parameter 25215.
Description
rw
25628 Maize value reduce speed
driver feed drive drive in/out
Software-Version: 150 200 104-32
rw
25627 Maize reduce speed feed
driver drive time drive out
50
0
0
Rights Min.
rw
Parameter name
25626 Maize reduce speed feed
driver drive path drive in
No.
100
60
100
Max.
Parameter BiG X 600/I, 700/I, 750C, 850/I, 1100/I
100
3
0
%
s
m
Default Unit
The distance for the
speed reduction
becomes less.
The duration for the
speed reduction
becomes less.
The speed is
reduced less.
Lowering
Feed drive
The distance for the
speed reduction
becomes greater
The duration for the
speed reduction
becomes greater
The speed is
reduced more
Raising
Feed drive
The value at which the speed of the feed drive is
reduced when driving in/out.
The time for which the speed of the feed drive is
reduced when driving out of the maize crop.
The distance for which the speed of the feed drive is
reduced when driving into the maize crop.
Description
rw
rw
25478 Front attachment rpm
driver dynamic active 0=OFF,
1=maize, 2=Grass/Xdisx,
3=All
25634 Front attachment forward
driver only XDisc 1=Front
attachment reversing not
possible
Software-Version: 150 200 104-32
rw
25477 Front attachment rpm
driver dynamic rpm differenz per
km/h
1
0
0
0
Rights Min.
rw
Parameter name
25476 Mininmal rpm front
driver attachement dynamic
No.
2
3
750
1000
Max.
Parameter BiG X 600/I, 700/I, 750C, 850/I, 1100/I
2
0
30
200
RPM
RPM
Default Unit
The speed change
per km/h is
decreased if speed >
set speed in the
terminal
The attachment
speed decreases if
speed > set speed in
the terminal
Lowering
The attachment speed is adjusted to the driving speed.
"Min. spd. dynamic front attachment" is the front
attachment speed at 0 km/h. If the speed set in the
terminal is greater, the speed set at the terminal is
actuated.
Description
front attachment
The "Reverse front attachment" function is not run,
instead "Front attachment forwards" is actuated. (Only
in XDisc mode)
1 = "Reverse front attachment" not possible ("Front
attachment forwards" is actuated.)
2 = Normal operation, the front attachment can also be
reversed in the usual way.
The dyn. front attachment speed actuation function can
be activated/deactivated. Deactivated means that the
speed set on the terminal is set.
0 = Dyn. front attachment speed deactivated
1 = Dyn. front attachment speed activated for maize
only
2 = Dyn. front attachment speed activated for grass/
XDisc only
3 = Dyn. front attachment speed activated for grass/
XDisc and for maize.
The speed change
For every 1 km/h the attachment speed increases by
per km/h is increased the set value. If the speed set in the terminal is greater,
if speed > set speed the speed set at the terminal is actuated.
in the terminal
The attachment
speed increases if
speed > set speed in
the terminal
Raising
front attachment
rw
Software-Version: 150 200 104-32
34005 Info messages 1=all ON,
driver 2=All OFF, 3=important
info ON
driver
33766 Blow valve engine off time
rw
rw
33765 Blow valve engine on time
driver
rw
33652 Blow valve Feed drive on
driver time
1
1
0
0
1
Rights Min.
rw
Parameter name
33651 Blow valve Feed drive off
driver time
No.
3
3600
600
600
3600
Max.
Parameter BiG X 600/I, 700/I, 750C, 850/I, 1100/I
1
30
3
3
30
s
s
s
s
Default Unit
Lowering
Raising
Common working functions
Common working functions
Setting as to whether all information messages are to
be shown:
1=Show all information messages (operating error,
information, etc.)
2=Do not show unimportant information
3=Show only the most important information (e.g.
information about completed calibrations).
The length of time the blow-off valve Y109 (engine
compartment cleaning compressed air) is switched off.
The length of time the blow-off valve Y109 (engine
compartment cleaning compressed air) is switched on.
The duration the valve Y73 (engine compartment/feed
drive cleaning compressed air) is actuated.
The time interval during which the blow-off valve Y73
(engine compartment/feed drive cleaning compressed
air) is actuated.
Description
rw
33657 Grinding stone adaption
Software-Version: 150 200 104-32
34014 Grinding stone adaption
driver number teeth
rw
r
33504 Max.rpm maintenance
driver 10-20 blades
driver
r
33499 Max.rpm maintenance 28
driver blades
1
1
1100
1100
1100
Rights Min.
r
Parameter name
33495 Maximum rpm
driver maintenance 40-36 blades
No.
100
2
1700
1700
1700
Max.
Parameter BiG X 600/I, 700/I, 750C, 850/I, 1100/I
32
1
1100
1100
1100
RPM
RPM
RPM
Default Unit
Raising
Description
Grinding
The number of teeth on the grinding stone adjuster:
24 teeth ==> machines up to year of manufacture 2007
36 teeth ==> machines from year of manufacture 2007
The number of times the grinding stone is regulated by
the ratchet mechanisms in one complete grinding
cycle. A grinding cycle means grinding stone once left
and once right until the grinding stone is back in its
original position.
The maximum speed The maximum speed The maximum speed of the diesel engine that can be
is decreased
is increased
set in field mode and with the maintenance switch on
can be with a 10-20 blade drum.
The maximum speed The maximum speed The maximum speed of the diesel engine that can be
is decreased
is increased
set in field mode and with the maintenance switch on
can be with a 28 blade drum.
The maximum speed The maximum speed The maximum speed of the diesel engine that can be
is decreased
is increased
set in field mode and with the maintenance switch on
can be with a 40-36 blade drum.
Lowering
Grinding
rw
rw
rw
rw
34066 Manual speed 2 raise
driver lifting gear 1=slow, 20=fast
34067 Manual speed 1 lower
driver lifting gear 1=slow, 20=fast
34068 Manual speed 2 lower
driver lifting gear 1=slow, 20=fast
34075 Raise lifting gear when
driver reversing travelling gear
automatic 1=ON
Software-Version: 150 200 104-32
rw
34065 Manual speed 1 raise
driver lifting gear 1=slow, 20=fast
driver
34051 Lifting gear Position Work
rw
rw
33501 Reduce hold-down time
driver
rw
33500 Reduce hold-down offset
driver time
0
0
0
0
0
20
0
0
1
Rights Min.
rw
Parameter name
33482 Holding-dwn dev.
driver automatic 1=On, 2=OFF
No.
1
20
20
20
20
70
30
30
2
Max.
Parameter BiG X 600/I, 700/I, 750C, 850/I, 1100/I
0
9
5
20
5
40
10
0
1
%
s
s
Default Unit
The speed of the
lifting gear becomes
less
The speed of the
lifting gear becomes
less
The speed of the
lifting gear becomes
less
The speed of the
lifting gear becomes
less
The maximum
working position is
decreased.
The time up to
lowering is
decreased.
The duration of
lowering is
decreased.
Lowering
The automatic lift setting for the holding-down device
on the pick-up when reversing the feed drive and front
attachment:
1=Automatic switched on
2=Automatic switched off.
Description
The speed of the
lifting gear becomes
greater
The speed of the
lifting gear becomes
greater
The speed of the
lifting gear becomes
greater
The speed of the
lifting gear becomes
greater
The maximum
working position is
increased.
Grass mode / EasyFlow
Setting as to whether the lifting gear is to be lifted
automatically during reversal of the travelling gear.
1 = Lifting gear is lifted automatically during reversing
2 = Lifting gear is not lifted automatically
Speed to lower lifting gear 2nd level
Speed to lower lifting gear 1st level
Speed to lift lifting gear 2nd level
Speed to lift lifting gear 1st level
If the lifting gear is below this position (in percentage
terms), it means that the machine is cutting. This is
used for the automatic silage material unit.
The duration of
The ramp time for which the holding-down device is
lowering is increased. lowered when automatic is switched on. Setting 0
deactivates automatic
The time up to
The delay time until the holding-down device is
lowering is increased. automatically lowered.
Raising
Grass mode / EasyFlow
rw
rw
34078 Front attachment fold
driver automatic 1=Automatic,
0=Manual
34079 Active lateral levelling
driver deact. 1=deactiv, 2=active
over ground tracer
Software-Version: 150 200 104-32
rw
34077 Pendulum frame horizontal
driver automatic with lifting gear
to top 1=Automatic
1
0
0
0
Rights Min.
rw
Parameter name
34076 Pendulum frame float
driver position auto with header
contour 1=Automatic
No.
2
1
1
1
Max.
Parameter BiG X 600/I, 700/I, 750C, 850/I, 1100/I
1
0
0
1
Default Unit
Lowering
Raising
Grass mode / EasyFlow
Setting as to whether active lateral levelling is active
when sensor hooks are connected.
1 = Lateral levelling not active (lateral levelling passive
via float position)
2 = Lateral levelling active (lateral levelling via the
sensor hooks)
Setting as to whether the front attachment can be
retracted automatically or not.
1=Automatic possible
0=Automatic not possible
Setting as to whether the pendulum frame is
automatically set to horizontal position when the "Lifting
gear to up" function is triggered.
Setting as to whether the pendulum frame is
automatically enabled when the "header contour"
function is activated. (Is switched on and off by
simultaneously pressing the "Lateral levelling left" and
"Right" buttons or by manual override.)
Description
Parameter name
rw
rw
rw
rw
34276 Pendulum frame float
driver position auto with header
contour 1=Automatic
34277 Pendulum frame horizontal
driver automatic with lifting gear
to top 1=Automatic
34278 Front attachment fold
driver automatic 1=Automatic,
0=Manual
34279 Active lateral levelling
driver deact. 1=deactiv, 2=active
over ground tracer
Software-Version: 150 200 104-32
rw
rw
1
0
0
0
0
20
Rights Min.
34275 Raise lifting gear when
driver reversing travelling gear
automatic 1=ON
driver
34251 Lifting gear Position Work
No.
2
1
1
1
1
70
Max.
Parameter BiG X 600/I, 700/I, 750C, 850/I, 1100/I
1
1
1
1
0
40
%
Default Unit
The maximum
working position is
decreased.
Lowering
The maximum
working position is
increased.
Raising
Maize mode / EasyCollect
Maize mode / EasyCollect
Setting as to whether active lateral levelling is active
when sensor hooks are connected.
1 = Lateral levelling not active (lateral levelling passive
via float position)
2 = Lateral levelling active (lateral levelling via the
sensor hooks)
Setting as to whether the front attachment can be
retracted automatically or not.
1=Automatic possible
0=Automatic not possible
Setting as to whether the pendulum frame is
automatically set to horizontal position when the "Lifting
gear to up" function is triggered.
Setting as to whether the pendulum frame is
automatically enabled when the "header contour"
function is activated. (Is switched on and off by
simultaneously pressing the "Lateral levelling left" and
"Right" buttons or by manual override.)
Setting as to whether the lifting gear is to be lifted
automatically during reversal of the travelling gear.
1 = Lifting gear is lifted automatically during reversing
0 = Lifting gear is not lifted automatically
If the lifting gear is below this position (in percentage
terms), it means that the machine is cutting. This is
used for the automatic silage material unit.
Description
Parameter name
rw
rw
rw
rw
34476 Pendulum frame float
driver position auto with header
contour 1=Automatic
34477 Pendulum frame horizontal
driver automatic with lifting gear
to top 1=Automatic
34478 Front attachment fold
driver automatic 1=Automatic,
0=Manual
34479 Active lateral levelling
driver deact. 1=deactiv, 2=active
over ground tracer
Software-Version: 150 200 104-32
rw
rw
1
0
0
0
0
20
Rights Min.
34475 Raise lifting gear when
driver reversing travelling gear
automatic 1=ON
driver
34451 Lifting gear Position Work
No.
2
1
1
1
1
70
Max.
Parameter BiG X 600/I, 700/I, 750C, 850/I, 1100/I
1
0
0
1
0
40
%
Default Unit
The maximum
working position is
decreased.
Lowering
XDisc mode
The maximum
working position is
increased.
Raising
XDisc mode
Setting as to whether active lateral levelling is active
when sensor hooks are connected.
1 = Lateral levelling not active (lateral levelling passive
via float position)
2 = Lateral levelling active (lateral levelling via the
sensor hooks)
Setting as to whether the front attachment can be
retracted automatically or not.
1=Automatic possible
0=Automatic not possible
Setting as to whether the pendulum frame is
automatically set to horizontal position when the "Lifting
gear to up" function is triggered.
Setting as to whether the pendulum frame is
automatically enabled when the "header contour"
function is activated. (Is switched on and off by
simultaneously pressing the "Lateral levelling left" and
"Right" buttons or by manual override.)
Setting as to whether the lifting gear is to be lifted
automatically during reversal of the travelling gear.
1 = Lifting gear is lifted automatically during reversing
0 = Lifting gear is not lifted automatically
If the lifting gear is below this position (in percentage
terms), it means that the machine is cutting. This is
used for the automatic silage material unit.
Description
rw
33446 Offset correction speed
driver road
Software-Version: 150 200 104-32
rw
33443 Offset correction speed
driver 4whl
0
0
0
Rights Min.
rw
Parameter name
33440 Offset correction speed
driver 2whl
No.
20
20
20
Max.
Parameter BiG X 600/I, 700/I, 750C, 850/I, 1100/I
0
1
4
Default Unit
Lowering
Main Drive
Raising
Main Drive
Correction of travelling speed. The specified offset is
deducted from the calculated travelling speed
(efficiency level extrapolated) of the SmartDrive. Valid
in road operation.
Correction of travelling speed. The specified offset is
deducted from the calculated travelling speed
(efficiency level extrapolated) of the SmartDrive. Valid
in 4-wheel field mode
Correction of travelling speed. The specified offset is
deducted from the calculated travelling speed
(efficiency level extrapolated) of the SmartDrive. Valid
in 2-wheel field mode
Description
Software-Version: 150 200 104-32
rw
34016 Autopilot row tracer to
driver central tip 1=central tip
(EasyCollect 2-part)
0
0
Rights Min.
rw
Parameter name
26025 Flexible row sensor
driver available
No.
1
1
Max.
Parameter BiG X 600/I, 700/I, 750C, 850/I, 1100/I
0
0
Default Unit
Lowering
Autopilot
Raising
Autopilot
Setting as to whether the touch sensors for the
autopilot are installed in the central tip or in the outside
tips. Parameter is used only for the display on the
terminal and does not apply to the autopilot control.
0 = Touch sensor in the outside tips
1 = Central tip
From SW version 150200029-07 of the autopilot:
"TAC sensor installed" ==>
Setting denoting whether a TAC sensor is installed
instead of the normal hook sensors.
0=Normal hook sensor (default)
1=TAC sensor
Up to SW version 150200029-06 of the autopilot:
"ComponentCentremovatSteerang2" ==> control
parameter autopilot (default = 0)
Description
Parameter name
rw
0
Rights Min.
Software-Version: 150 200 104-32
27500 RockProtect Sensitivity
driver 0=Insensitive, 100%=Very
sensitive
No.
100
Max.
Parameter BiG X 600/I, 700/I, 750C, 850/I, 1100/I
50
%
Default Unit
Lowering
RockProtect
Raising
RockProtect
Setting denoting how sensitive the stone detector is to
react.
0% ==> no stone detection
100% ==> Stone detection very sensitive.
Description
Parameter name
rw
rw
0
0
Rights Min.
Software-Version: 150 200 104-32
34019 Type of humidity
driver measurement (0= no
sensor or Harvest Tec,
2=NIR)
driver
30044 Crop type
No.
2
255
Max.
Parameter BiG X 600/I, 700/I, 750C, 850/I, 1100/I
0
32
Default Unit
Lowering
Raising
Moisture measurement
Moisture measurement
Hardware type of the moisture measuring system.
0=Harvesttech, 2=NIR
The setting that determines which crop type or
parameter set will be used. 16 = maize, 32 = grass, 0 =
user-defined crop
Description
Parameter name
rw
0
Rights Min.
Software-Version: 150 200 104-32
34020 AutoScan settings in
driver terminal expert mode
1=Expert, 0=Normal
display
No.
1
Max.
Parameter BiG X 600/I, 700/I, 750C, 850/I, 1100/I
0
Default Unit
Lowering
AutoScan
Raising
AutoScan
Setting as to whether the extended settings are to be
available in the AutoScan mask.
Description
Software-Version: 150 200 104-32
rw
rw
33543 Increment RPM Field
driver Grass
rw
33516 Auto PowerSplit (0 = off, 1
driver = on)
33517 Power mode diesel engine
driver maize/X-Disc (2=X-Power
3= EcoPower)
rw
2
rw
33515 Power mode diesel engine
driver road (2=X-Power 3=
EcoPower)
33518 Power mode diesel engine
driver grass (2=X-Power 3=
EcoPower)
0
r
33504 Max.rpm maintenance
driver 10-20 blades
1
2
2
1100
1100
r
33499 Max.rpm maintenance 28
driver blades
1100
Rights Min.
r
Parameter name
33495 Maximum rpm
driver maintenance 40-36 blades
No.
200
3
3
1
3
1700
1700
1700
Max.
Parameter BiG X 600/I, 700/I, 750C, 850/I, 1100/I
50
3
2
0
3
1100
1100
1100
RPM
RPM
RPM
RPM
Default Unit
Raising
Description
The step width is
decreased
The step width is
increased
Diesel engine
The change to rpm in the diesel engine when the RPMor RPM+ buttons are pressed in field mode grass.
Setting with which parameter set the intermediate
speed controller is to be operated for the MAN engine.
2=X-Power ==> full power in road operation.
3=EcoPower ==> reduced power
Automatic adjustment of the diesel engine power
mode.
Setting with which parameter set the intermediate
speed controller is to be operated for the MAN engine.
2=X-Power ==> full power in maize/XDisc mode.
3=EcoPower ==> reduced power
Setting with which parameter set the intermediate
speed controller is to be operated for the MAN engine.
2=X-Power ==> full power in road operation.
3=EcoPower ==> reduced power
The maximum speed The maximum speed The maximum speed of the diesel engine that can be
is decreased
is increased
set in field mode and with the maintenance switch on
can be with a 10-20 blade drum.
The maximum speed The maximum speed The maximum speed of the diesel engine that can be
is decreased
is increased
set in field mode and with the maintenance switch on
can be with a 28 blade drum.
The maximum speed The maximum speed The maximum speed of the diesel engine that can be
is decreased
is increased
set in field mode and with the maintenance switch on
can be with a 40-36 blade drum.
Lowering
Diesel engine
Parameter name
rw
1
Rights Min.
Software-Version: 150 200 104-32
33573 Increment RPM Field
driver Maize
No.
200
Max.
Parameter BiG X 600/I, 700/I, 750C, 850/I, 1100/I
50
RPM
Default Unit
The step width is
decreased
Lowering
The step width is
increased
Raising
Diesel engine
The change to rpm in the diesel engine when the RPMor RPM+ buttons are pressed in field mode maize.
Description
Parameter name
rw
0
Rights Min.
Software-Version: 150 200 104-32
33611 Time control horn with
driver metal/stone recog.
No.
20
Max.
Parameter BiG X 600/I, 700/I, 750C, 850/I, 1100/I
5
s
Default Unit
Raising
Description
Metal detection
The actuation of the The actuation of the The time in seconds that the horn is actuated when the
horn on metal alarm horn on metal alarm metal detection system locates "Metal in the feed
is shortened
is lengthened
drive".
Lowering
Metal detection
rw
rw
rw
33617 PWM Motor counterblade
driver left up
33618 PWM Motor counterblade
driver right down
33619 PWM Motor counterblade
driver right up
Software-Version: 150 200 104-32
rw
33616 PWM Motor counterblade
driver left down
200
200
200
200
0
Rights Min.
rw
Parameter name
33614 Mot. counterblade time
driver 2nd speed
No.
1000
1000
1000
1000
200
Max.
Parameter BiG X 600/I, 700/I, 750C, 850/I, 1100/I
1000
1000
1000
1000
2
0,001
0,001
0,001
0,001
s
Default Unit
The time when the
counterblade
switches to the 2nd
speed level is
extended.
Raising
Setting denoting after what time in sec. the
counterblade motor changes from the reduced speed
to the 2nd speed level (100%). The speed of the 2nd
level cannot currently be set. The speed of the 1st level
is set with the parameters 7616 - 7619.
Description
Shearbar
The speed of the
The speed of the
Setting denoting which voltage of the counterblade
counterblade in the counterblade in the motor is to be actuated in the 1st level.
1st level is decreased 1st level is increased 0% ==> 0 volts
100 % ==> 12-14 volts (max. speed)
The speed of the
The speed of the
Setting denoting which voltage of the counterblade
counterblade in the counterblade in the motor is to be actuated in the 1st level.
1st level is decreased 1st level is increased 0% ==> 0 volts
100 % ==> 12-14 volts (max. speed)
The speed of the
The speed of the
Setting denoting which voltage of the counterblade
counterblade in the counterblade in the motor is to be actuated in the 1st level.
1st level is decreased 1st level is increased 0% ==> 0 volts
100 % ==> 12-14 volts (max. speed)
The speed of the
The speed of the
Setting denoting which voltage of the counterblade
counterblade in the counterblade in the motor is to be actuated in the 1st level.
1st level is decreased 1st level is increased 0% ==> 0 volts
100 % ==> 12-14 volts (max. speed)
The time when the
counterblade
switches to the 2nd
speed level is
shortened.
Lowering
Shearbar
Parameter name
Rights Min.
Software-Version: 150 200 104-32
No.
Max.
Parameter BiG X 600/I, 700/I, 750C, 850/I, 1100/I
Default Unit
Lowering
Deleted
Raising
Description
Deleted
Appendix
A-1
Operation of the Internal Silage Agent System
Note
Prior to initial operation of the silage agent system, read these Operating Instructions carefully and
observe the safety instructions for safe use.
CAUTION!
In case of abnormal handling, the chemicals used in the silage agent system can cause damage to
health.
1.1
•
The silage agent system may only be operated by persons who are familiar with these Operating
Instructions and the silage agent manufacturer's safety data sheet. The safety instructions issued
by the silage agent manufacturer must be observed.
•
The operating personnel must be instructed in the safe handling of the chemicals used.
Technical Data
System
Drive:
electrical 12 V d.c. voltage
Max. power consumption
8A
Pump head material, external
Polypropylene (PP)
Pump head material, internal
Viton, Santoprene
Bypass idle pressure
3.15bar
Max. liquid temperature
77°C
Delivery rate (discharge chute
injection point):
0.5 - 3.2 l/min
Max. suction height:
3.1 m
Type of application / Duration
Continuous operation
Max. motor temperature
65°C
30 - 192 l/h
Flow sensor
Material
Ryton / PVDF
Temperature range
-10 °C to +100 °C
Measuring range
0.1235 l/min to 8.3893 l/min
Nozzle
TK-SS7.5
Outlet bore
[mm]
2.3
Volume flow [l/min]
0.2 bar
1 bar
1.5
3.4
4 bar
6.8
A-1
Appendix
1.2
Operation of the Internal Silage Agent System
The following prerequisites must be met for operating the silage agent system:
•
Quick-stop switch – panel: OFF
•
Quick-stop switch – manual operation: OFF
•
Road/field switch: ON
1
B
C
5
6
7
8
BXSI00001
D
Fig. 1
If an internal silage agent system has been set, an additional display (1) is shown in the main screen.
This additional display provides information on the current silage agent throughput rate in l/min.
8
9
10
7
6
5
1
2
B
3
C
5
6
7
8
4
D
BXSI00002
Fig. 2
•
Press the Terminal button
in the main screen. The setting options available for the internal
silage agent system are displayed:
1Button
:
Finish the settings and call up the main screen
2Button
:
Calibrate the internal silage agent system
3Button
:
Cancel the currently executed function of the silage agent system
4Button
:
Record the characteristic line of the silage agent system
5Current silage agent throughput rate in L/min
6Unit of silage agent dosing
7
Silage agent dosing
8Define the status of the silage agent system
9Define the flow sensor status
10Activate/deactivate the fill level indicator of the silage agent system (optional)
A-2
Appendix
1.3
Calibration of the Internal Silage Agent System
The silage agent system should be calibrated prior to each use in order to achieve maximum
precision.
CAUTION!
In case of abnormal handling, the chemicals used in the silage agent system can cause damage to
health.
•
The safety instructions issued by the silage agent manufacturer must be observed.
1
2
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BXSI00003
Fig. 3
1. Press the
(
STOP
) button to switch off the silage agent system .
2. Remove the quick-release coupling from the hose of the silage agent system.
3. Switch to Permanent mode (see Chap. "Permanent Mode") and operate the system in this mode
until the liquid leaks from the quick-release coupling.
4. Press the
(
STOP
) button to switch off the silage agent system.
5. During calibration, collect the liquid in a measuring cup (min. 2 litres).
(
) button to start the calibration. Use a measuring cup to collect the liquid
6. Press the
leaking from the quick-release coupling.
The calibration process stops automatically as soon as the progress bar (2) has reached 100%.
7. In the field (1) which pops up, enter the silage agent quantity collected in the measuring cup in
millimetres and then press the rotary potentiometer to confirm your entry. The calibration is now
complete.
Note
The calibration can be cancelled at any time by pressing the
(
STOP
) button.
A-3
Appendix
1.4
Recording the Characteristic Line
The characteristic line can only be recorded by means of an existing flow sensor.
The characteristic line should be recorded after each change to the silage agent system (e .g.
changing the injection point or nozzle) or silage agent.
The quick-release coupling must not be opened whilst the characteristic line is recorded.
CAUTION!
In case of abnormal handling, the chemicals used in the silage agent system can cause damage to
health.
•
The safety instructions issued by the silage agent manufacturer must be observed.
Note
Collect any silage agent escaping whilst the characteristic line is recorded and dispose of it
correctly.
1. Switch to Permanent mode (see Chap. "Permanent Mode") until liquid leaks from the nozzle.
2. Press the
(
STOP
) button to switch off the silage agent system.
3. Press the
(
) button to start the recording of the characteristic line.
The characteristic line record is terminated automatically after approximately 1 or 2 minutes.
Note
The characteristic line record can be cancelled at any time by pressing the
1.4.1
(
STOP
) button.
Usage
8
9
10
7
6
5
1
2
B
3
C
5
6
7
8
4
D
BXSI00002
Fig. 4
The flow sensor monitors the flow of silage agent through the silage agent system. If the flow sensor is
not ready for use, it must be switched off in the settings of the silage agent system (input box 9).
A-4
Appendix
To set the flow sensor status:
Flow sensor existing
Flow sensor not existing
If the flow sensor status is set to Not Existing, the characteristic line of the last characteristic line
record serves as a basis to control the pump.
Note
If the flow sensor status is set to Not Existing, the silage agent system cannot determine whether
silage agent is actually pumped through. In this case it must be ensured that a sufficient quantity of
silage agent is available in order to prevent the pump running dry (which can lead to damage of the
pump).
Setting the Silage fodder addition mode (input box 8):
The following states are possible:
Silage fodder addition deactivated
Silage fodder addition permanently activated
Silage fodder addition Automatic mode
1.4.2
Permanent Mode
1
2
3
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BXSI00004
Fig. 5
In Permanent mode, the delivery rate of the silage agent pump can be directly adjusted via a
displayed input box (1). The dosing information (input boxes 2 and 3) are not considered in Permanent
mode.
The flow sensor monitors the flow of silage agent through the silage agent system. If the flow sensor is
not ready for use, it must be switched off in the settings of the silage agent system (input box 9).
A-5
Appendix
1.4.3
Automatic Mode
In Automatic mode, the silage agent is dosed depending on the time or product throughput rate (only
in combination with CropControl). Here, the pumping of silage agent is switched off whilst the machine
does not cut.
The active pumping of silage agent is indicated by a green background colour in the status display.
Automatic mode active. Silage agent pumping inactive.
Automatic mode active. Silage agent pumping active.
8
9
10
7
6
5
1
2
B
3
C
5
6
7
8
4
BXSI00002
D
Fig. 6
In Automatic mode, the dosing of silage agents can be influenced by adjusting the entries in input
boxes 6 and 7.
In input box 6, the unit for dosing the silage agents can be defined first.
The following settings are possible:
L/min
Litres per minute
L/t
Litres per tonne of product (only in combination with CropControl)
L/m3
Litres per cubic metre of product (only in combination with CropControl)
The required dosing of the silage agent system is determined on the basis of the value in input box 7
combined with the unit in input box 6.
The actual delivery rate must therefore be defined in input box 7. The setting in input box 7 can also
be modified using the
and
buttons.
Note
The maximum delivery rate of the silage agent system must not be exceeded.
A-6
Appendix
1.5
Error Messages
B
C
5
6
5
6
7
8
7
8
D
B
C
D
BXSI00005
Fig. 7
The "8000 silage agent tank empty" error message can have the following causes:
•
No silage agent in the tank
•
The flow sensor is mechanically or electrically defective
•
The electrical connections of the flow sensor are defective
•
The pump mechanism of the silage agent pump is defective
•
The intake pipe or the pump filter of the silage agent system is soiled
•
The pressure pipe or the nozzle unit is soiled
The "8001 silage agent pump error" error message can have the following causes:
•
Interruption of the pump electrics
•
The cable harness towards the pump is damaged
•
The power output of the job computer is overloaded and switched off
•
Power supply failure (V2- KMC3)
A-7
Appendix
1.6
Cleaning and Maintenance
Danger! - When performing repair, maintenance or cleaning work on the machine , or in
the case of technical intervention, drive elements may start moving.
Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.
• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.
•
Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!
•
The cutter blades can continue to rotate after the drive has been switched off. Only
approach the machine once the work tools have come to a complete standstill!
•
After completing maintenance work reattach all safety devices properly.
•
Avoid skin contact with oil and grease.
•
Seek medical help immediately should injuries caused by oil escaping under pressure
occur.
The silage agent system must be cleaned after each use:
1. Empty the silage agent tank and fill it with 10 litres of clear water.
2. Afterwards, activate the pump in order to pump the water out of the silage agent system (see
Chap. "Permanent Mode").
Note
The silage agent residues and the rinsing water must be disposed of properly (refer to the silage
agent manufacturer's instructions in the separate Operating Instructions).
In case of poor flow rates, the pipe filter insert and the nozzle filter must be cleaned.
CAUTION!
Machine damage.
•
The flow sensor must not on no account be cleaned with compressed air.
Note
The silage agent system must be stored in such a way that it is protected against frost damage in
winter or filled with antifreezing agent.
A-8
Appendix
A2
Error messages
A2 - 1
2 undervoltage - SmartDrive
2
Status: 18.06.2014
1 overvoltage - SmartDrive
Description
Possible Reason
Error: SmartDrive power supply
voltage too low
Check battery acid
Measure battery voltage
Battery dead
Turn Page please!
Charge battery, change battery
Replace cabling
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check the cables.
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Wiring defective
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Replace SmartDrive
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Replace battery change-over
relay
Check fuse +22-F77
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Replace the dynamo
Replace the dynamo
Remedial measure
SmartDrive power supply voltage LED +22-LD31 not lit
too low
Check the dynamo
While engine is running,
measure on batteries. Voltage
must not be over 14.8V
Recommend Check
Dynamo defective
Error: SmartDrive supply voltage The controller of the dynamo is
too high.
defective
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
1
Error No.
Page No. 1/225
Description
See Remedial action
Measure battery voltage Check
battery acid
Check wiring to the 12V sensors
Check 12V sensors
See Remedial action
Battery dead
Short circuit in the wiring to a
12V sensor
Short circuit in a 12V sensor
Internal SmartDrive error
Replace SmartDrive
Change 12V sensor
Replace cabling
Charge battery Change battery
Replace cabling
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check the cables.
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Wiring defective
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F77
Replace SmartDrive
Replace cabling
Check the cables.
Internal SmartDrive error
Change charge indicator lamp
Check charge indicator lamp
Charge indicator lamp defective
Replace the dynamo
Remedial measure
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Recommend Check
Dynamo defective
Possible Reason
Error: 12 V sensor supply voltage 12-sensors power supply too low LED +22-LD31 not lit
too low
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
3 Malfunction sensor volt 12V SmartDrive
Status: 18.06.2014
3
Error No.
Page No. 2/225
8 Malfunction speed wheel rear
right - SmartDrive
8
Status: 18.06.2014
4 Malfunction sensor volt 5V SmartDrive
Description
From the speed sensor in the
hydraulic engine rear right, no
signals can be detected
Error: 5 V sensor supply voltage
too low
Meaning
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
No speed sensor is installed in
Maker certain a wheel sensor is
the hydraulic engine rear right.
installed rear right on the
However, a number of pulses is
machine.
indicated as parameter 22049
\\\"number of pulses per
revolution of the rear wheel\\\". If
0 pulses are indicated, this
means that no wheel sensor is
installed.
Change 5V sensors
Check 5V sensors
Short circuit in a 5V sensor
Turn Page please!
If no sensor is installed, the
value 0 must be entered in the
parameter 22049.
Replace SmartDrive
Replace wiring to the 5V sensors
Change battery
Check battery acid
Short circuit in the wiring to a 5V Check wiring to the 5V sensors
sensor
Charge battery
Measure battery voltage
Battery dead
Replace cabling
Check the cables.
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Wiring defective
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F77
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD31 not lit
Recommend Check
5-sensors power supply too low
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
4
Error No.
Page No. 3/225
Status: 18.06.2014
Error No.
Page No. 4/225
Description
Meaning
Sensor supply voltage from the
wheel sensor defective
Cable harness defective
Possible Reason
Recommend Check
Remedial measure
Remedy the fault in the wiring or
replace the wiring
Check / measure the wiring of
the sensor supply voltage for
cable break / short circuit
Turn Page please!
If OK, replace the appropriate
sensor that is responsible for the
short circuit.
Disconntect all further sensors
which are supplied via this
sensor supply voltage and
measure the sensor supply
voltage directly on the control
unit (pull the plug on the
respective sensor).
The following sensors are
supplied via this supply voltage:
-Service brake pressure (B16)
-High pressure of front axle
(B13)
-Service brake switch (B40)
Measure the power supply from Check the following steps; if
the sensor directly on the control these steps are OK, replace
unit Voltage must be greater
control unit SmartDrive
than 11 V
Check the wiring between sensor Remedy the fault in the wiring or
and control unit SmartDrive
replace the cable harness
Check the power supply from the Check the following steps; if they
sensor. To do this, measure the are not OK, replace the cable
voltage in plug XB90 from sensor harness
B90 speed wheel with a
multimeter. Contact 1 = + 12 V,
contact 3 = earth.
Voltage must be greater than 11
V.
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
17 parameter value
impermissible - SmartDrive
17
Status: 18.06.2014
16 parameter set invalid SmartDrive
Description
Error: MIN/MAX parameters
Error: EEPROM checksum
Meaning
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
EEPROM defective
Internal SmartDrive error
Check parameter file
Check parameters
Incorrect values in EEPROM
Incorrect parameter file
downloaded
Check software version
No update of new parameters
performed
Install replacement SmartDrive
Sensor input in SmartDrive
defective
Turn Page please!
Transfer parameter file onto
Smart Drive
Replace SmartDrive
Replace SmartDrive
Load parameter file in
SmartDrive
Load parameter file in
SmartDrive
Install new SmartDrive
Install new sensor
Remedy the fault in the wiring or
replace the cable harness
Measure signal line in the cable
harness between control unit
and sensor for cable break /
short circuit
Install replacement sensor
Remedial measure
Recommend Check
Sensor defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
16
Error No.
Page No. 5/225
21 internal Malfunction SmartDrive
30 Malfunction control loop front Error: Control loop for drive
axis pump 1 - SmartDrive
pump 1 front axle - Maximum
speed of remaining pump
possible
21
30
Status: 18.06.2014
20 internal Malfunction SmartDrive
20
Error: I2C Bus
Error: EV DAC
Error: Digital Pot
19 internal Malfunction SmartDrive
19
Error: EEPROM
Meaning
18 internal Malfunction SmartDrive
Description
Check wiring to pump valves
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Coil for solenoid valves defective Test coil
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for pump valves
Internal SmartDrive error
Internal SmartDrive error
Internal SmartDrive error
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
EEPROM defective
EEPROM defective
Check parameters
Recommend Check
Incorrect values in EEPROM
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
18
Error No.
Page No. 6/225
Turn Page please!
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace wiring
Replace SmartDrive
Replace SmartDrive
Replace SmartDrive
Replace SmartDrive
Replace SmartDrive
Replace SmartDrive
Replace SmartDrive
Transfer parameter file onto
Smart Drive
Remedial measure
31 Malfunction control loop rear
axis pump 2 - SmartDrive
31
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Error: Control loop for drive
pump 2 rear axle - Maximum
speed of remaining pump
possible
Meaning
Check valve plug
Valve plug defective
Replace the solenoid valve
See Remedial action
Check charge pressure
See Remedial action
Solenoid valve defective
The charge pressure is too low
The drive pump 2 is defective
Turn Page please!
Replace the drive pump 2
Change charge pressure valve
(30+/-3bar)
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to pump valves
Replace valve plug
Replace SmartDrive
Replace the drive pump 1
Change charge pressure valve
(30+/-3bar)
Change adjusting unit
Remedial measure
Coil for solenoid valves defective Test coil
Check valve plug
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Valve plug defective
Test function of drive pump
The drive pump 1 is defective
Check wiring to pump valves
Check charge pressure
The charge pressure is too low
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for pump valves
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Adjusting unit defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 7/225
32 Malfunction swivel angle
sensor B39 pump rear axis Smart Drive
33
Status: 18.06.2014
32 Malfunction swivel angle
sensor B38 pump front axis
SmartDrive
Description
Error: Pivoting angle of drive
pump 2 rear axle - Signal out of
range - Maximum speed of
remaining pump possible
Error: Pivoting angle of drive
pump 1 front axle - Signal out of
range - Maximum speed of
remaining pump possible
Meaning
Test voltage on the sensor
Pivoting angle sensor defective
Measure voltage on the sensor
Check sensor plugs
Sensor plug for pivoting angle
defective
Calibration of the pivoting angle
sensor not correct
Check the wiring to the sensors
for the pivoting angle
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for pivoting angle sensors
Run travelling gear diagnostics
Remeasure voltage in neutral
position
Calibration of the pivoting angle
sensor not correct
Values incorrectly set
Run travelling gear diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Values incorrectly set
Internal SmartDrive error
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
32
Error No.
Page No. 8/225
Turn Page please!
Set the sensor pivoting angle.
There must be a signal of
approx. 2.5 volts present in
neutral position
Correctly set voltage values
Replace and adjust the sensor
pivoting angle. There must be a
signal of approx. 2.5 volts
present in neutral position
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the pivoting
angle sensors
Set the sensor pivoting angle.
There must be a signal of
approx. 2.5 volts present in
neutral position
Correctly set voltage values
Replace SmartDrive
Remedial measure
Description
Error: Pivoting angle of drive
pump 1 front axle - Pivoting
angle is changing too quickly Maximum speed of remaining
pump possible
Meaning
Check hydraulics for
contamination
Measure voltage in neutral
position
Check the wiring to the sensors
for the pivoting angle
Check sensor plugs
Measure voltage on the sensor
Calibration of the pivoting angle
sensor not correct
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for pivoting angle sensors
Sensor plug for pivoting angle
defective
Pivoting angle sensor defective
Measure voltage on the sensor
Pivoting angle sensor defective
Dirt in the hydraulics (actuator
valves, for example)
Check sensor plugs
Sensor plug for pivoting angle
defective
Run travelling gear diagnostics
Check the wiring to the sensors
for the pivoting angle
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for pivoting angle sensors
Values incorrectly set
Recommend Check
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
34 swivel angle sensor B38
pump front axis signal change
implausible - SmartDrive
Status: 18.06.2014
34
Error No.
Page No. 9/225
Turn Page please!
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the pivoting
angle sensors
Set the sensor pivoting angle.
There must be a signal of
approx. 2.5 volts present in
neutral position
Remove dirt
Correctly set voltage values
Replace and adjust the sensor
pivoting angle. There must be a
signal of approx. 2.5 volts
present in neutral position
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the pivoting
angle sensors
Remedial measure
36 brake pressure sensor B16
and brake pedal switch B40
signal change implausible SmartDrive
36
Status: 18.06.2014
35 swivel angle sensor B39
pump rear axis signal change
implausible - SmartDrive
Description
Possible Reason
Error: Brake pressure sensor For road travel: Maximum speed
/4
Measure voltage on the sensor
Pivoting angle sensor defective
Run travelling gear diagnostics
Check sensor plugs
Sensor plug for pivoting angle
defective
Values incorrectly set
Check the wiring to the sensors
for the pivoting angle
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for pivoting angle sensors
Turn Page please!
Correctly set voltage values
Replace and adjust the sensor
pivoting angle. There must be a
signal of approx. 2.5 volts
present in neutral position
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the pivoting
angle sensors
Set the sensor pivoting angle.
There must be a signal of
approx. 2.5 volts present in
neutral position
Remove dirt
Check hydraulics (e.g. actuator
valves) for contamination
Measure voltage in neutral
position
Correctly set voltage values
Replace and adjust the sensor
pivoting angle. There must be a
signal of approx. 2.5 volts
present in neutral position
Remedial measure
Run travelling gear diagnostics
Recommend Check
Calibration of the pivoting angle
sensor not correct
Error: Pivoting angle of drive
Values incorrectly set
pump 2 rear axle - Pivoting angle
is changing too quickly Maximum speed of remaining
Dirt in the hydraulics (actuator
pump possible
valves, for example)
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
35
Error No.
Page No. 10/225
Status: 18.06.2014
Error No.
Page No. 11/225
Description
Meaning
See Remedial action
Test function of sensor
Check brake pressure
See Remedial action
Brake pedal switch defective
Brake pressure sensor defective
Brake pressure defective
Internal SmartDrive error
Replace SmartDrive
Set brake pressure
Replace the brake pressure
sensor
Change and adjust brake pedal
switch so that the switching of
the brake pedal switch is within
a range of 70 - 90 bar brake
pressure; observe installation
distance!
Replace sensor plug
Check sensor plugs
Sensor plug for brake pressure
sensor, brake pedal switch
defective
Adjust brake pedal switch so that
the switching of the brake pedal
switch is within a range of 70 90 bar brake pressure; observe
installation distance!
Remedial measure
Replace wiring to the sensors for
the brake pressure sensor and
brake pedal switch
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Short circuit / broken cable in
Check the wiring to the sensors
wiring for brake pressure sensor, for the brake pedal sensor and
brake pedal switch
brake pedal switch
Brake pedal switch not adjusted
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
38 brake tank pressure B18 too
low - SmartDrive
38
Status: 18.06.2014
37 pump speed/diesel motor
speed too low - SmartDrive
Description
Pump speed too slow
Error: Brake tank pressure too
low - For road travel: Maximum
speed / 4
Error:
Meaning
Run travelling gear diagnostics
Check valve
See Remedial action
Check the wiring to the brake
tank pressure sensor
Check sensor plugs
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Values incorrectly set
Accumulator charging valve
defective
Accumulator defective
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for brake tank pressure
sensor
Sensor plug for brake tank
pressure defective
Sensor for brake tank pressure
defective
Internal SmartDrive error
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
The brake tank pressure is too
low
Check engine speed
Recommend Check
Engine speed too low
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
37
Error No.
Page No. 12/225
Replace SmartDrive
Replace brake tank pressure
sensor
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the brake tank
pressure sensor
Replace accumulator
Replace accumulator charging
valve
Correctly set voltage values
Start diesel engine so that the
accumulator is filled
Replace SmartDrive
Replace the KMC3
Set engine speed
Remedial measure
Description
Error: CAN bus communication
Meaning
LED +22-LD44 not lit
See Remedial action
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Internal SmartDrive error
Check fuse +22-F44
LED +22-LD62 not lit
KMC3 power supply defective
See Remedial action
Check fuse +22-F92
See Remedial action
Internal joystick error
Internal error KMC3
Check fuse +22-F62
Check fuse +22-F65
Joystick power supply defective
Replace SmartDrive
Replace the KMC3
Replace joystick
Replace fuse +22-F65
Replace terminating resistors
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Replace wiring
Check wiring
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F77
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD31 not lit
Recommend Check
SmartDrive power supply
defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
39 Malfunction CAN1
communication - SmartDrive
Status: 18.06.2014
39
Error No.
Page No. 13/225
Status: 18.06.2014
Error: Attempt to move against
the parking brake
42 park brake active SmartDrive
42
Meaning
40 Malfunction high press.sensor Error: High pressure sensor B13 - SmartDrive
signal out of range
Description
Replace SmartDrive
Remeasure whether switch
actuates
Parking brake switch defective
Broken cable in the wiring bridge Check wiring bridge at the
of the parking brake pressure
parking brake pressure input
input at the SmartDrive
Check the wiring to the parking
brake switch
Short circuit in the wiring of the
switch
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring bridge at the
parking brake pressure input
Replace parking brake switch
Replace wiring to the parking
brake switch
Replace fuse +22-F72.1
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
If required, re-adjust high
pressure
Check fuse +22-F72.1
Check high pressure (420 bar)
High pressure incorrect
Replace high-pressure sensor
Switch off the parking brake
switch
Measure voltage on the sensor
High pressure sensor defective
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to high pressure
sensor
Remedial measure
Check whether parking brake is
actuated
Check sensor plugs
Sensor plug, high pressure defective
Parking brake switch is actuated
Check wiring to high pressure
sensor
Recommend Check
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the high pressure
sensor
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
40
Error No.
Page No. 14/225
Status: 18.06.2014
44 oil temp too high B14 - Smart Error: Oil temperature too high Drive
For road travel: Maximum speed
/ 1,5
44
Internal SmartDrive error
Possible Reason
Check flush valve temperature
sensor
Flush valve temperature sensor
defective
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Check the wiring for the
temperature sensor flush valve
Check the wiring for the
temperature sensor flush valve
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the supply pressure
sensor
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for the temperature
sensor flush valve
Test function of charge pressure
valve
Supply pressure valve defective
Check that radiator is clean
Test charge pressure
Supply pump defective
Hydraulic oil too hot
Check hydraulics for leaks
Check engine speed
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Hydraulic leakage
Error: The charge pressure is too No engine speed or speed too
low
slow
Meaning
43 charge pressure too low SmartDrive
Description
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
43
Error No.
Page No. 15/225
Turn Page please!
Replace the temperature sensor
flush valve
Replace wiring for the flush valve
temperature sensor
Clean the radiator
Replace SmartDrive
Replace wiring for the flush valve
temperature sensor
Replace the supply pressure
valve
Change charge pump
(30+/-3bar)
Repair the leakage
Start engine or increase speed
Replace SmartDrive
Remedial measure
46 Valve coil Y1 Malfunction
pump 1 front axis - SmartDrive
47 Valve coil Y2 Malfunction
pump 1 front axis - SmartDrive
46
47
Status: 18.06.2014
45 release travelling gear S3
missing - SmartDrive
Description
Error: Coil 1, pump 2
Error: Coil 1, pump 1
Error: Attempt to move without
travelling gear release Maximum speed possible
Meaning
Check wiring to valve
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for coil
Check coil
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Coil defective
Check the LED +22-LD43 on the
relay board
Release travelling gear switch
defective
Check wiring to valve
Check the wiring to the release
travelling gear switch
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring of the switch
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for coil
Check travelling gear release
switch
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Release travelling gear switch is
not actuated
Internal SmartDrive error
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
45
Error No.
Page No. 16/225
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring to valve
Replace SmartDrive
Replace coil
Replace wiring to valve
Replace SmartDrive
Replace release travelling gear
switch
Replace wiring to the travelling
gear release switch
Perform operating panel
diagnostics
Switch on the travelling gear
switch
Replace SmartDrive
Remedial measure
49 Valve coil Y4 Malfunction
pump 2 rear axis - SmartDrive
50 Malfunction joystick SmartDrive Joystick error
49
50
Status: 18.06.2014
48 Valve coil Y3 Malfunction
pump 2 rear axis - SmartDrive
Description
Error: Driving lever - Signal
incorrect/faulty - Maximum
speed / 4
Error: Coil 2, pump 2
Error: Coil 1, pump 2
Meaning
Central electrical power supply
defective.
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F63
Replace fuse +22-F65
Check fuse +22-F65
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Replace fuse +22-F57
Replace SmartDrive
Replace coil
Replace wiring to valve
Replace SmartDrive
Replace coil
Replace wiring to valve
Replace SmartDrive
Replace coil
Remedial measure
Check fuse +22-F57
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Joystick power supply defective
Test coil
Coil defective
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Check wiring to valve
Test coil
Coil defective
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for coil
Check the cables.
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for coil
Test coil
Recommend Check
Coil defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
48
Error No.
Page No. 17/225
61 Valve coil Y2 current
implaus.pump 1 front axis SmartDrive
61
Status: 18.06.2014
60 Valve coil Y1 current
implaus.pump 1 front axis SmartDrive
Description
Error: actuator valve 2 drive
pump 1 - Maximum speed of
remaining pump possible
Error: actuator valve 1 drive
pump 1 - Maximum speed of
remaining pump possible
Meaning
Replace valve plug
Replace SmartDrive
Internal SmartDrive error
Replace valve plug
Valve plug defective
Replace SmartDrive
Internal SmartDrive error
See Remedial action
Replace coil
Coil for solenoid valves defective Test coil
Check valve plug
Replace wiring to actuator valve
2 pump 1
Short circuit/broken cable in the Check wiring to actuator valve 2
wiring for actuator valve 2 pump pump 1
1
See Remedial action
Replace coil
Coil for solenoid valves defective Test coil
Check valve plug
Valve plug defective
Replace SmartDrive
Replace wiring to actuator valve
1 pump 1
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Replace driving lever
Check fuse +22-F92
Remedial measure
Short circuit/broken cable in the Check wiring to actuator valve 1
wiring for actuator valve 1 pump pump 1
1
Test functions of the driving
lever
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Recommend Check
Driving lever defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
60
Error No.
Page No. 18/225
63 Valve coil Y3 current
implausible pump 2 rear axis SmartDrive
64 Valve coil Y4 current
implausible pump 2 rear axis SmartDrive
63
64
Status: 18.06.2014
62 Malfunction valve coil Y69
stop valve pump 1 front axis SmartDrive
Description
Error: actuator valve 2 drive
pump 2 - Maximum speed of
remaining pump possible
Error: actuator valve 1 drive
pump 2 - Maximum speed of
remaining pump possible
Error: Stop valve for drive pump
1 - Front axle - Maximum speed
of remaining pump possible
Meaning
Replace SmartDrive
Replace SmartDrive
Internal SmartDrive error
Turn Page please!
Replace valve plug
Valve plug defective
Check valve plug
Replace wiring to actuator valve
2 pump 2
Short circuit/broken cable in the Check wiring to actuator valve 2
wiring for actuator valve 2 pump pump 2
2
See Remedial action
Replace coil
Coil for solenoid valves defective Test coil
Check valve plug
Replace valve plug
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Replace coil
Valve plug defective
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to actuator valve
1 pump 2
Check valve plug
Valve plug defective
Replace wiring to stop valve for
pump 1
Remedial measure
Short circuit/broken cable in the Check wiring to actuator valve 1
wiring for actuator valve 1 pump pump 2
2
Check wiring to stop valve for
pump 1
Recommend Check
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for stop valve pump 1
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
62
Error No.
Page No. 19/225
Description
Error: Stop valve for drive pump
2 - Rear axle - Maximum speed
of remaining pump possible
Meaning
Check wiring to stop valve for
pump 2
Check valve plug
Test coil
See Remedial action
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for stop valve pump 2
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal SmartDrive error
Replace SmartDrive
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to stop valve for
pump 2
Replace SmartDrive
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Remedial measure
Replace coil
Recommend Check
Coil for solenoid valves defective Test coil
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
65 Malfunction valve coil Y70
stop valve pump 2 rear axis SmartDrive
Status: 18.06.2014
65
Error No.
Page No. 20/225
Description
The control unit for the traction
drive (SmartDrive) has detected
a cable break or a short circuit
on the diagnostics-capable seat
switch. If the voltage from seat
switch is between 0 - 1.2 volts, a
cable break is detected. If the
voltage from seat switch is
between 3.8 - 5 volts, a short
circuit is detected. The faulty
voltage must be present for at
least 0.5 seconds before the
error message is displayed.
Voltage between 1.2 volts - 2.2.
Volts ==> Driver on the seat
Voltage between 2.8 - 3.8 volts
==> No driver on the seat
Voltage between 2.2 volts - 2.8
volts ==> Undefined area
If the fault has occured, the
traction drive changes to Limp
mode and only limited driving is
possible
Road operation max. 25 km/h
Field mode max. 5 km/h.<br
/The diagnostics-capable seat
switch is installed on BiG X 700,
850 and 1100.
Meaning
Wiring to the seat switch
defective
See next check
Replace wiring
Replace seat switch
Turn Page please!
Measure wiring from seat switch Remedy the fault in the wiring or
to control unit from traction drive replace the cable harness
and KMC3 with multimeter for
cable break and short circuit
Check seat switch with
diagnostics in the terminal
Measure resistance from seat
switch witch multimeter on the
plug from seat between contact
21X1.12 (earth) and 21X1.11
(+5 V).
Driver on the seat = seat switch
closed = 1.5 kiloohm
No driver on the seat = seat
switch open = 3 kiloohm
Replace seat switch and/or
wiring in the seat
Measure the resistance from the
seat switch with multimeter
Replace wiring in the seat
See next check
Check the seat switch in the
diagnostics of the terminal
Seat switch defective
Remedial measure
Check parameter 33659 \"Seat Adapt the parameter
switch hardware\" in the
accordingly.
parameter group \"General work.
Note: On machine with a new
cabine, a diagnostics-capable
seat switch is installed.
Recommend Check
Parameter for the setting for the
seat switch installed is wrongly
indicated
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
70 Malfunction seat switch SmartDrive
Status: 18.06.2014
70
Error No.
Page No. 21/225
Description
Meaning
Check parameter 33659 \\\"Seat
switch hardware\\\" in the
parameter group \\\”General
work.
Note: On machines with new
cab, a diagnostics-capable seat
switch is installed.
0 = closer
1 = diagnostics-capable 5 volts
(new cab Poclain traction drive)
2 = diagnostics-capable 10 volts
(new cab Bosch traction drive)
Measure wiring of the seat
switch to SmartDrive and KMC3
with multimeter for cable break
and short circuit
Wiring defective
Install replacement KMC3
KMC3 defective
The parameter 33659 \\\\\\\"Seat
switch hardware\\\\\\\" for the
setting for the seat switch
installed is wrongly indicated.
Install replacement SmartDrive
Recommend Check
SmartDrive defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
71 Seat switch value implausible The seat switch is parallely
- SmartDrive
evaluated by the control unit for
the traction drive (SmartDrive)
and by the control unit KMC3.
These two states are compared
by the traction drive. If the state
is not the same for more than 3
seconds, this fault is shown.
If the error has occured, the
traction drive changes to Limp
mode and only limited driving is
possible
Road operation max. 25 km/h
Field operation max. 5 km/h.
Status: 18.06.2014
71
Error No.
Page No. 22/225
Turn Page please!
Remedy the fault in the wiring or
replace the cable harness
Adapt the parameter
accordingly.
Install new KMC3
Replace SmartDrive
Remedial measure
96 Malfunction CAN1 between
terminal and SmartDrive / DRC
96
Status: 18.06.2014
95 foot brake permanent
activated / Malfunction brake
pressure sensor B16 SmartDrive
Description
Error: CAN bus communication SmartDrive to terminal.
Error: Brake valve
Meaning
Perform CAN diagnostics.
In the menu - Info software
versions - check the software
version of the control units
LED +22-LD31 not lit
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Determine via the terminal
Control unit not programmed
SmartDrive power supply
defective
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F63
Check fuse +22-F77
Program control unit
Replace SmartDrive
Internal SmartDrive error
See Remedial action
Replacing the Brake Valve
Remove foot from the brake
Install new KMC3
Install new SmartDrive
Remedial measure
Brake valve defective or jammed Check brake valve
See Remedial action
Install replacement KMC3
KMC3 defective
Brake was applied continuously
(for example braking pressure
greater than 10 bar and longer
than 3 min; terminal version
150200104-13 or later: braking
pressure greater than 5 bar)
Install replacement SmartDrive
Recommend Check
SmartDrive defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
95
Error No.
Page No. 23/225
98 Unknown error - SmartDrive
113 Undervoltage 12V - joystick
98
113
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Error: 12 V supply voltage too
low
Error: Internal error in
SmartDrive
Meaning
LED +22-LD116 not flashing
Check wiring
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
See Remedial action
Life signal from SmartDrive
faulty
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Internal SmartDrive error
Determine via the terminal
Internal error in SmartDrive
Perform joystick diagnostics
See Remedy
Old software version on KMC3.
Have software versions
Up to KMC3 software version 150 displayed on the terminal and
200 103 - 08 the error 96 can be compare.
caused by an error in the KMC3
software.
LED+22-LD102 not lit
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Recommend Check
Safety output for travelling gear
of KMC3 defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 24/225
Turn Page please!
Replace SmartDrive
Load current software version.
Replace SmartDrive
If required, replace wiring and
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Check the SmartDrive power
supply and check wiring
Check the safety output of KMC3
(output is always active with
engine shut off) and check wiring
Check fuse +22-F92
Remedial measure
Description
Error: 12 V supply voltage too
high
Meaning
While engine is running,
measure on batteries. Voltage
must not be over 14.8V
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
See Remedial action
Internal joystick error
Perform joystick diagnostics
Test dynamo
Dynamo defective
Determine via the terminal
Check charge indicator lamp
Check the cables.
Charge indicator lamp defective
Turn Page please!
Replace the dynamo
Replace joystick
Replace the dynamo
Replace charge indicator lamp,
renew cabling
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Battery dead
Replace cabling
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check the cables.
Check fuse +22-F63
Replace fuse +22-F65
Check fuse +22-F65
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Replace fuse +22-F57
Remedial measure
Check fuse +22-F57
Recommend Check
Wiring defective
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Joystick power supply voltage
too low
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
114 Overvoltage 12V - joystick
Status: 18.06.2014
114
Error No.
Page No. 25/225
Description
Error: 8.5 V joystick supply
voltage too low
Meaning
Check charge indicator lamp
Check the cables.
Test dynamo
Charge indicator lamp defective
Dynamo defective
Turn Page please!
Replace the dynamo
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Battery dead
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Replace fuse +22-F65
Check fuse +22-F65
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Replace fuse +22-F57
Check fuse +22-F57
Replace joystick
Joystick power supply voltage
too low
See Remedial action
Internal joystick error
Replace battery change-over
relay
Perform joystick diagnostics
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Replace the dynamo
Remedial measure
Determine via the terminal
Check the dynamo
Recommend Check
Dynamo defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
115 Undervoltage 8V - joystick
Status: 18.06.2014
115
Error No.
Page No. 26/225
116 Malfunction Button voltage
12V - joystick
117 Malfunction Voltage supply
LED - joystick
116
117
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
See Remedial action
Internal joystick error
Check charge indicator lamp
Check the cables.
Test dynamo
See Remedial action
Charge indicator lamp defective
Dynamo defective
Internal joystick error
Replace joystick
Replace the dynamo
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or Replace
cabling
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Replace joystick
Replace the dynamo
Battery dead
Perform joystick diagnostics
Test dynamo
Dynamo defective
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Check charge indicator lamp
Check the cables.
Charge indicator lamp defective
Replace joystick
Remedial measure
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Battery dead
Internal joystick error
Possible Reason
Error: 12 volt supply voltage LED Determine via the terminal
out of range
Error: 12 volt button voltage voltage out of range
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 27/225
118 Malfunction Voltage supply
outputs - joystick
119 Internal Malfunction joystick
120 Internal Malfunction joystick
118
119
120
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Error: FLASH checksum
Error: Min/Max parameters
Error: 12 volt supply voltage for
outputs - voltage out of range
Meaning
See Remedial action
Internal joystick error
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
FLASH defective
Internal joystick error
See Remedial action
EEPROM defective
Download was interrupted
See Remedial action
EEPROM defective
Incorrect values in EEPROM
Test dynamo
Dynamo defective
Replace joystick
Replace joystick
Repeat download
Replace joystick
Replace joystick
Replace joystick
Replace the dynamo
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Check charge indicator lamp,
Check the cables.
Charge indicator lamp defective
Remedial measure
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Recommend Check
Battery dead
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 28/225
Description
Error: Internal fault in the
joystick
Meaning
Internal fault in the joystick
Possible Reason
Fehlercode: 0000 0200: ==>
CAN BusOff
Fehlercode: 0000 0200: ==>
Uebertemperatur. Die interne
Temperatur im Joystick ist >
80°C
Turn Page please!
Joystick tauschen
CAN-Verkabelung kontrollieren
Maschine neustarten
Es sind
Die Umgebungstemperatur ist
auch > 75° C ==> Kabine
abkuehlen lassen und Maschine
neu starten
Es wurde KEINE Taste vom
Fahrer betaetigt, die
Fehlermeldung erscheint jedoch
nach jedem Neustart der
Maschine ==> Fahrhebel
tauschen
Joystick tauschen
Siehe Abhilfe
Remedial measure
Replace joystick
Recommend Check
See Remedy
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
121 Internal Malfunction joystick
Status: 18.06.2014
121
Error No.
Page No. 29/225
Description
Error: 12 V supply voltage too
low
Meaning
Perform operating panel
diagnostics
Fehlercode: 0000 2000: ==>
Restart durch Watchdog ==>
Joystick wurde nicht
ordnungsgemaess
ausgeschaltet. Z.B. bei
eingeschalteter Zuendung den
Batteriehauptschalter
ausgeschaltet.
Recommend Check
Wiring defective
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Turn Page please!
Replace cabling
Check fuse +22-F64
LED +22-LD64 not lit
Check the cables.
Check fuse +22-F62
Replace fuse +22-F48.1
Replace fuse +22-F47
Interner Fehler im Joystick ==>
Joystick tauschen
Wackelkontakt in der
Spannungsversorgung vom
Joystick ==> Verkabelung und
Spannungsversorgung vom
Joystick kontrollieren
Bei eingeschalteter Zuendung
wurde der Batteriehauptschalter
ausgeschaltet ==> Neustart der
Maschine
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD62 not lit
Check fuse +22-F48.1
Power supply for operating panel Check fuse +22-F47
too low
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
124 Undervoltage 12V - CU
Status: 18.06.2014
124
Error No.
Page No. 30/225
Status: 18.06.2014
126 Undervoltage 5V electronics Error: 5 V electronics supply
- CU
voltage too low
126
Error: 12 V supply voltage too
high
Meaning
125 Overvoltage 12V - CU
Description
Check the dynamo
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
See Remedial action
Dynamo defective
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Internal error, operating panel
Perform operating panel
diagnostics
While engine is running,
measure on batteries. Voltage
must not be over 14.8V
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Determine via the terminal
Perform operating panel
diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error, operating panel
Determine via the terminal
Check the dynamo
Dynamo defective
Turn Page please!
Replace operating panel
Replace battery change-over
relay
Replace the dynamo
Replace the dynamo
Replace operating panel
Replace the dynamo
Check the charge indicator lamp, Replace charge indicator lamp, if
check the wiring
required also replace cabling
Charge indicator lamp defective
Remedial measure
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Replace battery
charge
Recommend Check
Battery dead
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
125
Error No.
Page No. 31/225
Status: 18.06.2014
Error: 12 V LED supply voltage
too high
129 Voltage 12V LEDs too high CU
129
Meaning
127 Overvoltage 5V electronics - Error: 5 V electronics supply
CU
voltage too high
Description
Check the dynamo
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
See Remedial action
Dynamo defective
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Internal error, operating panel
Perform operating panel
diagnostics
While engine is running,
measure on batteries. Voltage
must not be over 14.8V
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Determine via the terminal
Perform operating panel
diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error, operating panel
Determine via the terminal
Check the dynamo
Dynamo defective
Turn Page please!
Replace operating panel
Replace battery change-over
relay
Replace the dynamo
Replace the dynamo
Replace operating panel
Replace the dynamo
Check the charge indicator lamp, Replace charge indicator lamp
check the wiring
Charge indicator lamp defective
Remedial measure
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Recommend Check
Battery dead
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
127
Error No.
Page No. 32/225
130 Parameter value imperm. CU
131 Internal Malfunction - CU
132 Key actuated / Malfunction
keyboard console - CU
130
131
132
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
FLASH defective
Internal error, operating panel
at least one key is pressed
continuously
Check whether the download is
complete
See Remedial action
Internal error, operating panel
Download was interrupted
See Remedial action
EEPROM defective
See Remedial action
Internal error, operating panel
Check parameters
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Incorrect values in EEPROM
While engine is running,
measure on batteries. Voltage
must not be over 14.8V
Recommend Check
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Possible Reason
Error: Keyboard error (at least
Keyboard defective
one key is pressed continuously)
Error: FLASH checksum
Error: Min/Max parameters
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 33/225
Turn Page please!
Replace keyboard
Replace operating panel
Replace CU
Repeat download
Replace operating panel
Replace CU
Set parameters
Replace operating panel
Replace battery change-over
relay
Replace the dynamo
Remedial measure
135 Undervoltage 12V - manual
operation
136 Overvoltage 12V - manual
operation
135
136
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Error: 12 V supply voltage too
high
Error: 12 V supply voltage too
low
Meaning
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Test dynamo
See Remedial action
Dynamo defective
Internal error, manual operation
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Charge indicator lamp defective
Turn Page please!
Replace manual operation
Replace the dynamo
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Battery dead
Replace cabling
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check the cables.
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check fuse +4-F33
Change fuse +22-F56
Replace operating panel
Remedial measure
Wiring defective
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
LED +4-LD33 not lit
Power supply voltage for manual Check fuse +22-F56
operation too low
Internal error, operating panel
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 34/225
Description
Meaning
Check charge indicator lamp
Check the cables.
Test dynamo
See Remedial action
Charge indicator lamp defective
Dynamo defective
Internal error, manual operation
Replace manual operation
Replace the dynamo
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Replace manual operation
Battery dead
See Remedial action
Internal error, manual operation
Replace battery change-over
relay
Perform diagnostics for manual
operation
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Replace the dynamo
Replace the dynamo
Remedial measure
Determine via the terminal
Test dynamo
While engine is running,
measure on batteries. Voltage
must not be over 14.8V
Recommend Check
Dynamo defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
137 Internal voltage 5V too low - Error: 5 V voltage too low
manual operation
Status: 18.06.2014
137
Error No.
Page No. 35/225
Status: 18.06.2014
139 Supply voltage LEDs too low Error: 12 V voltage for LEDs too
- manual operation
low
139
Error: 5 V voltage too high
138 Internal voltage 5V too high
- manual operation
138
Meaning
Description
Battery dead
Wiring defective
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Replace manual operation
Turn Page please!
Replace cabling
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check the cables.
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check fuse +4-F33
See Remedial action
Internal error, manual operation
Replace battery change-over
relay
LED +4-LD33 not lit
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Replace the dynamo
Change fuse +22-F56
Test dynamo
Dynamo defective
Replace the dynamo
Remedial measure
Check fuse +22-F56
While engine is running,
measure on batteries. Voltage
must not be over 14.8V
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Power supply voltage for 12 V
LEDs too low
Perform diagnostics for manual
operation
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 36/225
141 Parameter value
impermissible - manual
operation
141
Status: 18.06.2014
140 Supply voltage LEDs too
high - manual operation
Description
Error: Min/Max parameters
Error: 12 volt voltage for LEDs
too high
Meaning
Remedial measure
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Internal error, manual operation
EEPROM defective
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Check parameters
Test dynamo
Dynamo defective
Incorrect values in EEPROM
While engine is running,
measure on batteries. Voltage
must not be over 14.8V
See Remedial action
Internal error, manual operation
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Test dynamo
Dynamo defective
Turn Page please!
Replace manual operation
Update parameters
Replace manual operation
Replace battery change-over
relay
Replace the dynamo
Replace the dynamo
Replace manual operation
Replace the dynamo
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Recommend Check
Charge indicator lamp defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
140
Error No.
Page No. 37/225
143 Key actuated / Malfunction
keyboard or external key manual operation
150 Button pressed / keyboard
malfunction - Joystick
143
150
Status: 18.06.2014
142 Internal Malfunction manuel operation
Description
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
FLASH defective
Internal error, manual operation
Key sticks mechanically or a
short circuit from the key is
internally available
When switching on the ignition, a The driver has accidentally
keypress has been detected on
pressed a key on the joystick.
the joystick.
Internal error, manual operation
Check each key from the joystick
in the terminal in the joystick
diagnostics to make certain
whether the key changes the
status in the display when
pressing.
Restart the machine without a
key being activated by the
driver.
See Remedial action
Check keyboard
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Download was interrupted
Internal error, manual operation
Possible Reason
Error: Keyboard error (at least
Keyboard defective
one key is pressed continuously)
Error: FLASH checksum
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
142
Error No.
Page No. 38/225
Replace the joystick if a button
has always the status ON and if
this status does not change
when it is activated.
Restart the machine
Replace manual operation
Replace manual operation
Replace manual operation
Replace manual operation
Repeat download
Replace manual operation
Remedial measure
151 Overtemperature - Joystick
152 CAN bus malfunction Joystick
153 LIN bus malfunction Joystick
154 Internal malfunction Joystick
151
152
153
154
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Possible Reason
Der Joystick hat einen internen
Fehler im Joystick erkannt
The joystick has detected an
error on the internal LIN bus.
The joystick has detected an
error on CAN bus
Check wiring
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
See remedy
Short circuit/cable break in the
wiring CAN1 bus
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Internal error joystick
Interne Stoerung im Joystick
LIN bus communication internally
in the joystick is defective
Perform CAN and joystick
diagnostics
See remedy
Recommend Check
Determination via terminal
The internal temperature from
Overheating of the joystick due
the joystick was higher than
to direct sunlight.
80°C for 5 seconds. The error will
be reset if the temperature is
below 78°.
Internal error joystick
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 39/225
Turn Page please!
Joystick tauschen
Maschine neu starten
Replace joystick
Restart the machine
Replace joystick
Replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors, if
necessary
Replace the wiring
Replace joystick
Cool off the joystick and restart
the machine
Remedial measure
Status: 18.06.2014
The according switch has a
wrong position in order to start
the desired function. In case the
switch is activated, it must not
be activated to start the
function. In case the switch is
not activated, it must be
accordingly activated.
Instantaneous stop switch
console
502
Meaning
155 Joystick restart by Watchdog The joystick has been switched
off unexpectedly, e. g. by
switching off the machine with
switched on ignition or due to an
internal error in the joystick
Description
Replace joystick
Install the current software for
the joystick again
Internal fault in the joystick
Joystick tauschen
Remedial measure
Switch off and switch on the
machine via ignition lock
Recommend Check
Machine has been switched off
by the main battery switch as
well as by ignition stage 1 or 2
turned on
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
155
Error No.
Page No. 40/225
Release switch Maintenance
Release switch Road/Field!
508
511
Status: 18.06.2014
Instantaneous stop switch
manuell controll
Description
The according switch has a
wrong position in order to start
the desired function. In case the
switch is activated, it must not
be activated to start the
function. In case the switch is
not activated, it must be
accordingly activated.
The according switch has a
wrong position in order to start
the desired function. In case the
switch is activated, it must not
be activated to start the
function. In case the switch is
not activated, it must be
accordingly activated.
The according switch has a
wrong position in order to start
the desired function. In case the
switch is activated, it must not
be activated to start the
function. In case the switch is
not activated, it must be
accordingly activated.
Meaning
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
505
Error No.
Page No. 41/225
Recommend Check
Remedial measure
Release switch feed drive / front
attachment!
Release switch Transmission!
Release switch AutoPilot!
512
514
517
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
The according switch has a
wrong position in order to start
the desired function. In case the
switch is activated, it must not
be activated to start the
function. In case the switch is
not activated, it must be
accordingly activated.
The according switch has a
wrong position in order to start
the desired function. In case the
switch is activated, it must not
be activated to start the
function. In case the switch is
not activated, it must be
accordingly activated.
The according switch has a
wrong position in order to start
the desired function. In case the
switch is activated, it must not
be activated to start the
function. In case the switch is
not activated, it must be
accordingly activated.
Meaning
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 42/225
Recommend Check
Remedial measure
Release switch all-wheel!
Release switch 2nd Diesel
engine!
521
522
Status: 18.06.2014
Switch axis seperation!
Description
The according switch has a
wrong position in order to start
the desired function. In case the
switch is activated, it must not
be activated to start the
function. In case the switch is
not activated, it must be
accordingly activated.
The according switch has a
wrong position in order to start
the desired function. In case the
switch is activated, it must not
be activated to start the
function. In case the switch is
not activated, it must be
accordingly activated.
The according switch has a
wrong position in order to start
the desired function. In case the
switch is activated, it must not
be activated to start the
function. In case the switch is
not activated, it must be
accordingly activated.
Meaning
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
520
Error No.
Page No. 43/225
Recommend Check
Remedial measure
Machine driving!
Cruise control active!
Driver NOT on seat!
524
526
527
Status: 18.06.2014
release switch Parking brake!
Description
The seat switch has a wrong
position in order to start the
desired function. In case the
switch is activated (driver on the
seat), it must not be activated to
start the function. In case the
switch is not activated (driver
not on the seat), it must be
accordingly activated.
The vehicle is moving or
standing. In order to start the
desired function the machine
must, however, stand when it is
still driving, or drive when it is
still standing.
The according switch has a
wrong position in order to start
the desired function. In case the
switch is activated, it must not
be activated to start the
function. In case the switch is
not activated, it must be
accordingly activated.
Meaning
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
523
Error No.
Page No. 44/225
Recommend Check
Remedial measure
Door OPEN!
Motor speed too low!
529
530
Status: 18.06.2014
Press break pedal!
Description
Possible Reason
During cutting process, the
engine speed has fallen below
1200 rpm. Feed drive / front
attachment are switched off
The accordant switch (door
switch) has a wrong position in
order to start the desired
function. In case the switch is
activated (door closed), it must
not be activated to start the
function (door open). In case the
switch is not activated (door
open), it must accordingly be
activated (door closed).
Load of the engine is too strong
Reduce engine load
Measure voltage on sensor (B40) Replace operating brake sensor
(B40)
Operating brake sensor (B40)
faulty
Press the brake pedal
Remedial measure
Check setting of the sensor (B40) Make adjustment
See Remedy
Recommend Check
Operating brake sensor (B40)
not adjusted
The brake pedal must be pressed Brake pedal not pressed
for the requested function!
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
528
Error No.
Page No. 45/225
Engine running!
Engine NOT low idle!
532
533
Status: 18.06.2014
Engine NOT running!
Description
For starting the desired function
the diesel engine must run with
idle speed.
The diesel engine is operating or
not operating. In order to start
the desired function the diesel
engine must not be in operation
or must be in operation. When
diesel engine is turning, it must
not be turning. When diesel
engine is not turning, it must be
turning.
The diesel engine is operating or
not operating. In order to start
the desired function the diesel
engine must not be in operation
or must be in operation. When
diesel engine is turning, it must
not be turning. When diesel
engine is not turning, it must be
turning.
Meaning
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
531
Error No.
Page No. 46/225
Recommend Check
Remedial measure
Value out of range - set to
minimum!
Value out of range - set to
maximum!
Engine speed too high!
535
536
537
Status: 18.06.2014
Engine does not have any
nominal rpm
Description
To start the desired function the
engine speed is too high, so it
can not be started.
The changed parameter or
setting value has been set under
the minimum value. Therefore,
the parameter or setting value
has automatically been adjusted
to the minimum limit value.
The changed parameter or
setting value has been set under
the minimum value. Therefore,
the parameter or setting value
has automatically been adjusted
to the minimum limit value.
In order to start the desired
function the diesel engine must
run with nominal speed
(standard 2000 rpm).
Meaning
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
534
Error No.
Page No. 47/225
Recommend Check
Remedial measure
Reset active faults!
front attachment Control NOT
Active
EMR Adjustment 1 (bottom
position) OK
539
540
541
Status: 18.06.2014
Position Saved
Description
The adjustment/calibration 1
(position below) of the lifting
gear has been successfully
completed.
It has been tried to move the
lifting gear manually or
automatically. But the steering
of the lifting gear (EMR) is not
active, since the diesel engine is
not running.
An initialize operation was
carried out (no significance for
driver)
The desired position or value
(e.g. cutting length #1 and #2
on the small joystick) has been
saved.
Meaning
The error message appears
despite the diesel engine
running and a software update
has been accomplished before.
Possible Reason
Recommend Check
see remedy
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
538
Error No.
Page No. 48/225
Lift the lifting gear manually.
Restart the machine
Remedial measure
EMR Adjustment 3 (top position)
OK
Auto lifting gear Active
Distance Mode EMR active
Lifting gear too high
543
544
545
546
Status: 18.06.2014
EMR Adjustment 2 (Pressure
lifting gear) OK
Description
In order to start the desired
function the position of the lifting
gear is too high.
for the future
for the future
The adjustment/calibration 3 (top
position) of lifting gear has been
successfully accomplished.
The adjustment/calibration 2
(pressure lifting gear when lifting
gear is floating freely) of the
lifting gear has been successfully
accomplished for weight
determination.
Meaning
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
542
Error No.
Page No. 49/225
Recommend Check
Remedial measure
Distance Mode EMR deactivate
Lifting gear position saved
548
549
Status: 18.06.2014
Lifting gear too low
Description
The position of the lifting gear
(top position, ground pressure,
position below with position
control or header contour) has
been successfully saved and can
afterwards be recalled.
An error has been detected on
the sensors of the header
contour \\\"B47 and/or B48) or a
front attachment without ground
skids has been installed.
Therefore, the function
\\\”Header contour\\\" can not be
started from the lifting gear. In
order that the errors are not
being displayed anymore, the
other control function (pressure
regulation or position control)
must be selected from the lifting
gear.
For starting the desired function
the position of the lifting gear is
too low
Meaning
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
547
Error No.
Page No. 50/225
Recommend Check
Remedial measure
Cutting drum turning!
Check EMR adjustment!
Invalid sensor/actuator value
551
552
553
Status: 18.06.2014
Cutting drum stopped!
Description
The value of the sensor or one
actuator are inadmissible
Void values are saved for the
calibration of the set front
attachment.
For starting the desired function
the cutting drum must be at
standstill, but it is still running.
For starting the desired function
the cutting drum must be
running, but there was no speed
detected on the cutting drum.
Meaning
see remedy
Recommend Check
When calibrating the row sensor
or the steering axle this note
appears
Accomplish adjustment 1 - 3 of
the lifting gear with new front
attachment
Accomplish the adjustment 1 - 3
of the lifting gear again
Remedial measure
Turn Page please!
The accordant sensor is
Install the sensor according to
displayed in the mask calibration the installation instructions and
autopilot of which the sensor
connect it electrically
value is inadmissible, because it
has for example been installed in
a wrong way.
Front attachment exchanged and see remedy
there has not been an
adjustment for the new front
attachment
EMR control unit exchanged
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
550
Error No.
Page No. 51/225
Main clutch protection mode
active!
557
Status: 18.06.2014
Engine protection mode active!
556
For the future
Diesel engine is in protective
mode - speed is reduced
Lifting gear position saved, set to for the future
maximum value!
555
Meaning
Lifting gear position saved, set to for the future
minimum value!
Description
Perform engine diagnostics
Run diagnostics using the engine Consult KRONE Service
diagnostic device
Determined via the terminal
Engine parameters not OK
Consult KRONE Service
Perform engine diagnostics
The oil pressure is too low
Refill engine oil
Exchange plugs on the sensors
Remedial measure
Check engine oil level
The sensors of the row sensor
left and right are interchanged
connected to the cable harness
Recommend Check
The engine oil level is too low
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
554
Error No.
Page No. 52/225
Begin reversing feed drive/front
attachment
Overrun not yet complete!
558
559
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
After the function \”Reversing
feed drive/front attachment
without the cutting drum being
activated\" has been exited, this
function cannot be started again
for 7 seconds. If the driver starts
this function again, this
information message is
displayed. Wait for 7 seconds
and start the function once
again.
Information for the driver:
reversing of feed drive and front
attachment will start in a few
seconds as the main belt must
previously be released and the
main coupling must be
connected. Message is only
displayed if the feed drive or the
front attachment is reversed
without cutting drum being
activated.
Reversing without cutting drum
being activated is possible on
machines with Bosch traction
drive from YOM 2012.
Meaning
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 53/225
Recommend Check
Remedial measure
Status: 18.06.2014
Lifting gear Raised!
562
In order to start the desired
function the front attachment
must be below or on top. In case
the front attachment is below,
the front attachment must be on
top. In case the front attachment
is on top, it must be located
below.
In order to start the desired
function the front attachment
must be folded out, but it is
folded in
Front attachment NOT Folded
OUT!
561
Meaning
Front attachment NOT Folded IN! To start the desired function the
front attachment must be folded
in, but it is folded out
Description
Fold in front attachment
Remedial measure
The sensors B25 front
Reset the distance of the sensor,
attachment right and B55 front
change sensor if necessary
attachment left are defective or
not properly adjusted so that the
position can not be detected in a
correct way. Check the
conditions of the sensors in the
diagnostics
see remedy
Recommend Check
The sensors B25 front
Reset the distance of the sensor,
attachment right and B55 front
change sensor if necessary
attachment left are defective or
not properly adjusted so that the
position can not be detected in a
correct way. Check the
conditions of the sensors in the
diagnostics
The front attachment is folded in The front attachment is folded in Fold out front attachment
The front attachment is folded
out
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
560
Error No.
Page No. 54/225
Front attachment NOT Turning!
front attachment IS Turning!
564
565
Status: 18.06.2014
Front attachment Lowered!
Description
To start the desired function the
front attachment must be
running or at standstill. When
the front attachment is at
standstill, the front attachment
must run in order to start the
function. When the front
attachment is running, the front
attachment must be at standstill
in order to start the function.
To start the desired function the
front attachment must be
running or at standstill. When
the front attachment is at
standstill, the front attachment
must run in order to start the
function. When the front
attachment is running, the front
attachment must be at standstill
in order to start the function.
In order to start the desired
function the front attachment
must be below or on top. In case
the front attachment is below,
the front attachment must be on
top. In case the front attachment
is on top, it must be located
below.
Meaning
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
563
Error No.
Page No. 55/225
Recommend Check
Remedial measure
Status: 18.06.2014
Pendulum Frame NOT Horizontal For starting the desired function
the pendulum frame must be
horizontal, but the pendulum
frame is not yet horizontal.
568
For starting the desired function
the feed drive must be running
or at a standstill. When the feed
drive is at a standstill, the feed
drive must be running in order to
start the function. When the feed
drive is running, the feed drive
must be at standstill in order to
start the function.
Feed drive IS Turning!
567
To start the desired function the
front attachment must be
running or at standstill. When
the front attachment is at
standstill, the front attachment
must run in order to start the
function. When the front
attachment is running, the front
attachment must be at standstill
in order to start the function.
Meaning
Feed drive NOT Turning!
Description
The pendulum frame is not
horizontal
Possible Reason
Turn Page please!
Accomplish calibration of
pendulum frame
Check the calibration of the
position \\\”Pendulum frame
horizontal\\\"
Remedial measure
Position the pendulum frame
horizontally
Recommend Check
Position the pendulum frame
horizontally
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
566
Error No.
Page No. 56/225
Speed diesel engines not
synchron.
570
Status: 18.06.2014
Calibrate feed drive/front
attachment!
Description
When switching on the 2. diesel
engine the speeds of engine1
and engine2 are identical,
therefore the control unit was
also not able to switch on the
engine coupling
Feed drive and/or front
attachment must be calibrated
Meaning
The KMC3 unit has been
exchanged and the pendulum
frame has not been calibrated
Check sensors
Recommend Check
ADM of engine 1 or engine 2
defective
Check, if the speed of engine 1
can be readjusted?
An overspeed has been detected see error 2408
on the front attachment. Thus
the front attachment must be
recalibrated.
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
569
Error No.
Page No. 57/225
Turn Page please!
Change ADM of engine 1.
Check parameter of ADM or
install again. ADM engine 1 and
ADM engine 2 have separate
parameters and can not be
interchanged.
Check CAN connection from
control unit KMC3 to ADM of
engine 1
Check the power supply of the
ADM1 of engine 1
Carry out front attachment drive
calibration
Set sensor correctly and
accomplish calibration
Exchange sensor
Set sensor correctly and
accomplish calibration
Remedial measure
Status: 18.06.2014
Error No.
Page No. 58/225
Description
Meaning
Possible Reason
Recommend Check
Check, if the speed of engine 2
can be readjusted?
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Turn Page please!
Change PLD of engine 2.
Change ADM of engine 2.
Check parameter of ADM or
install again. ADM engine 1 and
ADM engine 2 have separate
parameters and can not be
interchanged.
Check CAN connection from ADM
of engine 2 to the PLD of engine
2
Check CAN connection from
control unit KMC3 to ADM of
engine 2.
Check the power supply of the
ADM1 of engine 2
Check CAN connection from ADM
of engine 2 to the PLD of engine
2
Change PLD of engine 1.
Remedial measure
Status: 18.06.2014
For starting the desired function
the diesel engine 2 must be
coupled or uncoupled. When
diesel engine 2 is coupled, it
must be uncoupled in order to
start the function. When diesel
engine 2 is uncoupled, it must be
coupled in order to start the
function.
Engine clutch 2
572
Meaning
Check feed drive wiring! (Power Feed drive wiring is not ok.
suppression cutting drum active) Switch-on suppressor
mechanism for blade drum is
active!
Description
See error 2600 "CAN to KMC2
CAN connection KMC3 to KMC2
Internal error KMC2/3
See Remedy
KMC 3 has no CAN connection to See error 9924 "CAN to metal
metal sensor
detection”
Check cables for metal detection Replace cables for metal
detection
Cables for metal detection not
connected
Replace KMC2/3
Replace plug for feed drive
Check plug for feed drive
Plug for feed drive faulty
Connect cables for feed drive
Remedial measure
Check wiring for feed drive
Check parameter for the
actuation of the diesel engine
Recommend Check
Cables for feed drive
not/incorrectly connected
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
571
Error No.
Page No. 59/225
Status: 18.06.2014
Discharge chute in park position
580
For starting the desired function
the current position of the
discharge chute is faulty.
Terminal Software inconsistent!!! The software versions of the
single control units on the
machine do not fit together.
Malfunctions cannot be
excluded.
574
The control unit for the lifting
gear control will be re-flashed.
There is currently no download
taking place on the EMR.
Meaning
Download to EMR!
Description
The discharge chute is parked,
but must not be in parking
position
A software version of a control
unit is not up to date. Example:
Software version 150 200 104-12
is on the terminal and version
150 200 102-10 is on control unit
KMC2 and the version is on
control unit KMC3. But the
terminal expects in the terminal
software version 150 200 104-12
the version 150 200 102-11 of
KMC2 or 150 200 103-11 of
KMC3.
Possible Reason
Recommend Check
The wrong software version of a
control unit will be marked red.
Flash the control unit with the
according software version.
Remedial measure
Check sensor B29 in the mask
\\\”Diagnostics discharge
chute\\\"
Check sensor B29 \\\”Discharge
chute position below\\\"
Turn Page please!
Move discharge chute to central
position and put it all the way
down
Check if discharge chute is in
parking position.
Check if the discharge chute is in Lift the discharge chute all the
parking position.
way up so that it is no longer
parking position.
Have the single software
versions of the control units
displayed in the mask \\\"Info
Software-Versionen\\\"
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
573
Error No.
Page No. 60/225
Description
For starting the desired function
the current position of the
discharge chute is faulty.
Meaning
The discharge chute is parked,
but must not be in parking
position
Possible Reason
Recommend Check
Exchange control unit KMC2
Exchange sensor
Check the sensor electrically
Set the sensor mechanically
correct
Remedial measure
Check sensor B29 in mask
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\”Diagnostics discharge
chute\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"
Check sensor B29
\\\\\\\”Discharge chute position
below\\\\\\\"
Turn Page please!
Check the sensor electrically
Set the sensor mechanically
correct
Move discharge chute to central
position and put it all the way
down
Check if discharge chute is in
parking position.
Check if the discharge chute is in Lift the discharge chute all the
parking position.
way up so that it is no longer
parking position.
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Discharge chute not parked!
Status: 18.06.2014
581
Error No.
Page No. 61/225
Shearbar Auto OK!
590
Status: 18.06.2014
Discharge chute not at top!
Description
For the future
For starting the desired function
the current position of the
discharge chute is faulty.
Meaning
The discharge chute is parked,
but must not be in parking
position
Possible Reason
Recommend Check
Exchange control unit KMC2
Exchange sensor
Remedial measure
Check sensor B29 in the mask
\\\”Diagnostics discharge
chute\\\"
Check sensor B29 \\\”Discharge
chute position below\\\"
Exchange control unit KMC2
Exchange sensor
Check the sensor electrically
Move discharge chute to central
position and put it all the way
down
Check if discharge chute is in
parking position.
Check if the discharge chute is in Lift the discharge chute all the
parking position.
way up so that it is no longer
parking position.
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
582
Error No.
Page No. 62/225
Shearbar Adj. in operation
Cracker motor in Zero Pos.
Sharpen flap CLOSED
Sharpen flap or service flap
OPEN
Sharpening in operation!
592
593
594
595
596
Status: 18.06.2014
Shearbar OK!
Description
The grinding flap is closed or
open. In order to start the
desired function the grinding flap
must have the accordant other
position.
The grinding flap is closed, but
must be opened to start the
function
Possible Reason
For starting the desired function, The function \\\”Grinding\\\" is
the function \\\”Grinding\\\" must active.
not be active.
In order to start the desired
function the grinding flap has a
wrong position.
In order to start the desired
function the grinding flap has a
wrong position.
For the future
For the future
For the future
Meaning
In order to start the other
desired function the function
\\\”Grinding\\\" must be cancelled
or closed.
Open the grinding flap
Check, if the grinding flap is
open.
see remedy
Close the grinding flap
Check, if the grinding flap is
closed.
Open the grinding flap
Check, if the grinding flap is
open.
Remedial measure
Close the grinding flap
Recommend Check
Check, if the grinding flap is
closed.
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
591
Error No.
Page No. 63/225
Caution: adjust grindstone!
600 Internal error - DRC
601 Malfunction valve coil Y101
pump forwards - DRC
602 Malfunction valve coil Y102
pump backwards - DRC
598
600
601
602
Status: 18.06.2014
Sharpening stone parked!
Description
The max number of total
grinding cycles is reached. The
grinding stone must be
readjusted and the grinding
cycle counter in the terminal
must be reset
Possible Reason
Fault on valve Y102 pump
backwardEffects:- Short circuit
on valve Y102- Interruption Faulty magnet
Fault on valve Y101 pump
forward
- Short circuit- Interruption Faulty magnet
Short circuit on valve Y101
Internal error in DRC control unit DRC control unit faulty
The max number of total
grinding cycles is reached. The
grinding stone must be
readjusted and the grinding
cycle counter in the terminal
must be reset
In order to start the desired
function \\\”Grinding\\\" the
function must be active
Meaning
Recommend Check
- Check cable harness- Check
magnet
Check cable harnessCheck
magnet
Effect:- Vehicle stop via error
mode #1- Sending error
message (shown on display)Emergency mode #1
Readjust the grinding stone and
check the number of grinding
cycles in the terminal
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
597
Error No.
Page No. 64/225
- Replace cable harness- Replace
magnet
Replace cable harnessReplace
magnet
Replace DRC control unit
- Contact Krone service - Replace
control unit
Reset the number of grinding
cycles in the terminal.
Remedial measure
603 Malfunction valve coil Y106
rear axis right - DRC
604 Malfunction valve coil Y105
rear axis left - DRC
605 Malfunction valve coil Y104
front axis right - DRC
606 Malfunction valve coil Y103
front axis left - DRC
603
604
605
606
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Possible Reason
DRC fault on valve Y103 front
- Short circuit- Interruption axle leftEffects:- Vehicle stop via Faulty magnet
error mode #2b - Sending error
message (shown on display)Emergency mode #2
DRC fault on valve Y104 front
- Short circuit- Interruption axle rightEffects:- Vehicle
Faulty magnet
deceleration via error mode #2b
- Sending error message (shown
on display)- Emergency mode #2
DRC fault on valve Y105 Rear
- Short circuit- Interruption axle leftEffects:- Vehicle
Faulty magnet
deceleration via error mode #2bSending error message (shown
on display)- Emergency mode #2
DRC fault on valve Y106 Rear
- Short circuit on valve Y106axle rightEffects:- Vehicle
Interruption - Faulty magnet
deceleration via error mode #2bSending error message (shown
on display)- Emergency mode #2
Meaning
Recommend Check
- Check cable harness- Check
magnet
- Check cable harness- Check
magnet
- Check cable harness- Check
magnet
- Check cable harness- Check
magnet
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 65/225
- Replace cable harness- Replace
magnet
- Replace cable harness- Replace
magnet
- Replace cable harness- Replace
magnet
- Replace cable harness- Replace
magnet
Remedial measure
608 Malfunction joystick - DRC
609 Malfunction pressure sensor
B101 - DRC
610 Malfunction pressure sensor
B102 - DRC
608
609
610
Status: 18.06.2014
607 Malfunction valve coil Y18
parking brake - DRC
Description
- Check cable harness
- Check multi-function lever
- CAN bus interruption
Multi-function lever/joystick
defective
DRC fault on pressure sensor
B102
Sensor voltage too high or too
low
- Check cable harness- Check
sensor B102
- Check cable harness- Check
sensor
See error message 121
- Check cable harness
- Check magnet
Recommend Check
Fault in the multifunction
joystick. At the same time, the
error message appears
Short circuit on the valve Y18
Interruption
Defective magnet
Possible Reason
DRC fault on pressure sensor
Sensor voltage too high or too
B101Effects:- Vehicle
low
deceleration via error mode #2bSending error message (shown
on display)- Emergency mode #2
DRC malfunction on the joystick
Effects:
Standstill of the vehicle via stop
ramp
Current to the valve Y18 is
defective
Effects: limited operation
(emergency mode)
Plausibility check control of the
parking brake deactivated
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
607
Error No.
Page No. 66/225
- Replace cable harness
-Replace magnet
Remedial measure
612 Overvoltage - DRC
613 Check rel.switch travelling
gear and quick stop - DRC
614 Malfunction speed sensor
B106 rear axis right - DRC
612
613
614
Status: 18.06.2014
611 Undervoltage - DRC
Description
Possible Reason
Travelling gear release missing
DRC fault speed sensor B106
Speed 0 although travel
rear axle rightEffects:- Vehicle
condition fulfilled
deceleration via error mode #2cSending error message (shown
on display)- Emergency mode
#3- ASR (Traction Control)
disabled- ABS disabled
DRC check FS (release switch)
Travelling gear and emergency
stopEffects:- Vehicle stop via
error mode #1 - Sending error
message (shown on display)Emergency mode #2
DRC overvoltageEffects:- Vehicle Battery voltage too high (above
stop via error mode #2a17V)
Sending error message (shown
on display)- Emergency mode #1
DRC undervoltageEffects:- Battery voltage too low (below
Vehicle stop via error mode #2a- 7V). - Take starting phase of
Sending error message (shown
Diesel engine into account.
on display)- Emergency mode #1
Meaning
Recommend Check
- Check cable harness- Check
sensor
- Activate Travelling gear
release- Deactivate emergency
stop panel
- Check cable harness- Check
battery voltage
- Check cable harness- Check
battery voltage- Take starting
phase of Diesel engine into
account
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
611
Error No.
Page No. 67/225
Remedial measure
616 Malfunction speed sensor
B104 front axis right - DRC
617 Malfunction speed sensor
B103 front axis left - DRC
618 CAN3 communication to
diesel engine - DRC
616
617
618
Status: 18.06.2014
615 Malfunction speed sensor
B105 rear axis left - DRC
Description
Possible Reason
DRC faultEffects:
DRC fault on speed sensor B103
front axle leftEffects:- Vehicle
deceleration via error mode #2c
- Sending error message (shown
on display)- Emergency mode
#3- ASR (Traction Control)
disabled- ABS disabled
Speed 0 although travel
condition fulfilled
Fault on speed sensor B104 front Speed 0 although travel
axle rightEffects:- Vehicle
condition fulfilled
deceleration via error mode #2c
- Sending error message (shown
on display)- Emergency mode
#3- ASR (Traction Control)
disabled- ABS disabled
DRC fault speed sensor B105
Speed 0 although travel
rear axle leftEffects:- Vehicle
condition fulfilled
deceleration via error mode #2cSending error message (shown
on display)- Emergency mode
#3- ASR (Traction Control)
disabled- ABS disabled
Meaning
Recommend Check
- Check cable harness- Check
sensor B103
- Check cable harness- Check
sensor B104
- Check cable harness- Check
sensor B105
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
615
Error No.
Page No. 68/225
Turn Page please!
Remedial measure
Status: 18.06.2014
620 CAN1 communication to CU - DRC Fault CAN Timeout control
DRC
unit console switchEffects:Vehicle deceleration via error
mode #2b- Sending error
message (shown on display)Emergency mode #2- Road
mode only
620
DRC Fault CAN Timeout driving
lever Multifunction
joystickEffects:- Vehicle stop via
error mode #2a- Sending error
message (shown on display)Emergency mode #1
Meaning
619 CAN1 communication to
joystick - DRC
Description
- Check cable harness- Check
diesel control unit
Recommend Check
- CAN bus interruption- Control
unit console faulty
- Check cable harness- Check
control unit console
- CAN bus interruption- KKC
- Check cable harness- Check
(Krone Console Controller) faulty driving lever Multifunction
joystick
- CAN bus interruption- Diesel
control unit faulty
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
619
Error No.
Page No. 69/225
Remedial measure
622 Malfunction outputs - DRC
623 Malfunction steering angle
sensor B107 - DRC
622
623
Status: 18.06.2014
621 CAN1 communication to
KMC3 - DRC
Description
Possible Reason
DRC Fault on the steering angle
sensor B107Effect:- Sending
error message (shown on
display)- ASR (Traction Control)
function restricted- ABS function
restricted
DRC Fault outputs supplied
externallyEffect:- Vehicle stop
via error mode #1- Sending error
message (shown on display)Emergency mode #1
- Check cable harness- Check
KMC
Recommend Check
Sensor voltage too high or too
low
- Check cable harness- Check
sensor
One or more outputs are
Check cable harness
supplied externally (before
switching on the main switch one
of the outputs is energized from
the battery)
DRC Fault KMC communication
- CAN bus interruption- KMC
CAN Timeout Effect:- Vehicle
faulty
stop via error mode #2aSending error message (shown
on display)In case of KMC
Timeout and if KSM message
(engine speed control) is missing
as well the travelling gear needs
to take over control of the Diesel
engine. Only in emergency mode
#2 with a reduced characteristic
line of the engine
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
621
Error No.
Page No. 70/225
Remedial measure
626 Internal error - DRC
627 Malfunction brake
press.sensor B16 - DRC
626
627
Status: 18.06.2014
625 Seat switch open (driver has DRC Fault seat switch open
left seat) - DRC
625
DRC Fault on brake pressure
sensor B16Effect:- Vehicle
deceleration via error mode #2bSending error message (shown
on display)- Error
acknowledgement followed by
emergency mode #2
DRC Hardware Fault monitor
emergency modeEffect:- Vehicle
stop via error mode #2- Sending
error message (shown on
display)- Error acknowledgement
followed by emergency mode #1
DRC Fault on the seat switch
sensorEffect: - Vehicle stop via
error mode #2b- Sending error
message (shown on display)Emergency mode #2
624 Malfunction seat switch S69
- DRC
624
Meaning
Description
Recommend Check
- Sensor voltage too high or too - Check cable harness- Check
low- Plausibility check with angle sensor B16
sensor of foot brake pedal (angle
present but no pressure)
- Short circuit on sensor - Broken No check possible
cable
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 71/225
Remedial measure
629 Sensors brake pedal
B16/B109 not plausible - DRC
630 Malfunction swivel angle
sensor B108 - DRC
631 Malfunction brake tank
pressure B18 - DRC
632 Malfunction output
revers.signal K29 - DRC
633 Malfunction output brake
light sig.K30 - DRC
629
630
631
632
633
Status: 18.06.2014
628 Malfunction brake pedal
sensor B109 - DRC
Description
Recommend Check
Sensor voltage too high or too
low
Brake pedal not plausible
compared to brake pressure
- Check cable harness- Check
sensor
No check possible
- Sensor voltage too high or too - Check cable harness- Check
low- Plausibility check with angle sensor
sensor of foot brake pedal
(pressure present but no angle)
Possible Reason
DRC malfunction output brake
light
Effect: Send the error message
(shown in the display)
DRC malfunction reversing light
Effect:
Send the error message (shown
in the display)
Short circuit, interruption brake
light
Short circuit, interruption
reversing light
Check cable harness
Check brake light
Check cable harness
Check reversing light
DRC Fault on manometric switch - Manometric switch for brake
- Check cable harness- Check
for brake tank pressure Effect:tank pressure faulty - Brake tank sensor- Check pressure
Sending error message (shown
faulty
accumulator
on display)
DRC Fault on pivoting angle
sensorEffect:- Vehicle stop via
error mode #2c- Sending error
message (shown on display)Emergency mode #3
DRC Fault on brake pedal not
plausibleEffect:- Error message
via CAN
DRC Fault on foot brake pedal
sensor B109Effect:- Vehicle
deceleration via error mode #2bSending error message (shown
on display)- Emergency mode #2
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
628
Error No.
Page No. 72/225
Replace cable harness,
brakelight
Replace cable harness, reversing
light
Remedial measure
634 Malfunction pressure sensor
B110 parking brake - DRC
635 Control parking brake not
plausible - DRC
636 Pump control not plausible DRC Malfunction
637 Malfunction reserve DRC
638 Malfunction reserve DRC
639 Malfunction reserve DRC
634
635
636
637
638
639
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Reserve
Reserve
Reserve
Pump control not plausible
Effect:
Standstill of the vehicle
(switching off the outputs)
DRC malfunction control of the
parking brake is not plausible
Effect:
Limited operation (emergency
mode)
DRC malfunction of parking
brake manometric switch
Effect:
Limited operation (emergency
mode)
Meaning
The signal of the pivoting angle
sensor does not match the
actual control of the pump via
solenoid valves.
Control of the parking brake not
plausible
Manometric switch of parking
brake defective
Possible Reason
Recommend Check
Check pump, pivoting angle
sensor, cable harness
Check parking brake,
manometric switch, cable
harness
Check parking brake,
manometric switch, cable
harness
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 73/225
Replace pump, pivoting angle
sensor or cable harness
Replace parking brake,
manometric switch, cable
harness
Replace parking brake,
manometric switch or cable
harness
Remedial measure
641 Unintentional release of
parking brake - DRC
642 Malfunction reserve DRC
643 Malfunction reserve DRC
644 Malfunction reserve DRC
645 Malfunction reserve DRC
641
642
643
644
645
Status: 18.06.2014
640 Unexpected movement of
machine - DRC
Description
Reserve
Reserve
Reserve
Reserve
Parking brake of the manometric
switch indicates pressure
although the parking brake valve
is not controlled
Effects: Standstill of the vehicle
(switching-off the outputs)
SR1 unexpected start-up: The
pivoting angle sensor on the
drive pump has detected that
the pump is not in neutral
position. Effects: Standstill of the
vehicle (switching-off the
outputs)
Meaning
Recommend Check
Manometric switch of the parking
brake is defective, valve of the
parking brake is defective, short
circuit wiring manometric switch
Check manometric switch of
parking brake, check parking
brake valve, check short circuit
wiring manometric switch
SR1 unexpected start-up:
Measure high-pressures MA and
Hydraulic pump defective
MB
(swivels out actually) pump is
controlled by mistake (swivels
out actually)
Wiring of pivoting angle sensor is
defective
Pivoting angle sensor defective
Pivoting angle sensor defective
Input on DRC defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
640
Error No.
Page No. 74/225
Contact KRONE customer service
Remedial measure
647 Malfunction reserve DRC
648 Driving lever not in neutral
position - DRC
649 Internal Malfunction - DRC
650 Malfunction output pump
forwards - DRC
651 Malfunction output pump
backwards - DRC
652 Internal Malfunction - DRC
647
648
649
650
651
652
Status: 18.06.2014
646 Malfunction reserve DRC
Description
Reaction to another fault
(see possible cause)
Effects: Standstill of the vehicle
Reaction to another fault
(see possible cause)
Effects: Standstill of the vehicle
Reaction to another fault
(see possible cause)
Effects: Standstill of the vehicle
Reaction to another fault
(see possible cause)
Effects: Standstill of the vehicle
Start condition not met
Effects: Standstill of the vehicle
Reserve
Reserve
Meaning
Fault 608 and/or further faults
active
Fault 602 active
Fault 601 active
Refer to the respective fault
Refer to the respective fault
Refer to the respective fault
Refer to the respective fault
See remedy
Internal fault driving lever
Fault 600 or 622 active
Check the position of the control
lever
Recommend Check
Control lever not in neutral
position
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
646
Error No.
Page No. 75/225
Refer to the respective fault
Refer to the respective fault
Refer to the respective fault
Refer to the respective fault
Replace control lever
Move control lever to neutral
position
Remedial measure
653 Internal Malfunction - DRC
654 Release travelling gear DRC
655 Requested speed too high DRC
656 No driver on seat - DRC
653
654
655
656
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Fault: When starting, no driver
on the seat
Maximum pump speed has been
exceeded
Start condition is not fulfilled
<br> Effects: limited operation,
emergency mode active
Reaction to another fault
(see possible cause)
Effects: Standstill of the
vehicle/limited operation
Meaning
Seat switch not actuated
Replace seat switch wiring
Replace seat switch
Check seat switch wiring
Check seat switch
Speed of the diesel engine is too See remedy
high
Contact KRONE customer service
\"Replace traction drive release
switch
\"
\"Traction drive release switch
defective\"
\"Check the shifting behavior of
the switch via pass-through
measurement
\"
Replace wiring to switch
Traction drive release
\"Carry out operating console
diagnostics
\"
Determination via terminal
Actuate release traction drive
switch
Refer to the respective fault
Remedial measure
Short circuit / broken cable in the \”Check wiring to switch
wiring of the switch
Traction drive release\"
Check release traction drive
switch
Refer to the respective fault
Recommend Check
Release travelling gear not met
Fault 603 and/or further faults
active
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 76/225
1300 Malfunction valve coil Y32
raise lifting gear
1301 Malfunction valve coil Y33
lower lifting gear
1300
1301
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Error: Lower lifting gear valve
Error: Raise lifting gear valve
Meaning
Check work pressure (0 - 200
bar)
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Work pressure defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal EMR error
Check the function using manual Replace lifting gear valve
operation on the hydraulic block
valve. Ensure easy motion and
no noises in the lifting gear!
Check work pressure (0 - 200
bar)
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Function to lower lifting gear
valve defective
Work pressure defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal EMR error
Replace the EMR
Replace the EMR
Set work pressure
Perform lifting gear diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
Replace the EMR
Replace the EMR
Set work pressure
Check the function using manual Replace lifting gear valve
operation on the hydraulic block
valve. Ensure easy motion and
no noises in the lifting gear!
Function to raise lifting gear
valve defective
Remedial measure
Perform lifting gear diagnostics
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 77/225
1303 electronics EMR not
active!!!
1303
Status: 18.06.2014
1302 Malfunction EMR voltage
Description
Error: EMR has not received any
CAN messages for at least 1
minute, or it has been
deactivated
Error: Supply voltage too low
(less than 10V)
Meaning
Charge battery
Change battery
Check battery acid
Check battery voltage
Battery dead
See Remedial action
LED +22-LD63 not lit
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Internal EMR error
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check plugs are secure
Check fuse +22-F92
Check wiring
Short circuit in the wiring to an
EMR sensor
The KMC3 control has been
switched off manually (e.g. plug
has been removed)
Check fuse +22-F63
Check the dynamo
Dynamo defective
Turn Page please!
Place the plug and switch the
ignition off and on again
Replace the EMR
Replace wiring
Replace the dynamo
Replace cabling
Check the cables.
Dynamo defective
Replace charge indicator lamp
Check charge indicator lamp
Charge indicator lamp defective
Replace cabling
Check the cables.
Wiring defective
Check fuse +22-F52
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD52 not lit
Recommend Check
Power supply voltage for EMR
too low
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
1302
Error No.
Page No. 78/225
Description
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
KMC3 was restarted but not the
EMR
Internal error KMC3
Internal EMR error
Check wiring to the lifting gear
position sensor
Check sensor plugs
Short circuit / broken cable in
wiring for lifting gear position
sensor
Lifting gear position sensor plug
defective
Turn Page please!
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the lifting gear
position sensor
Perform lifting gear diagnostics
Make adjustment
Replace the EMR
Replace the KMC3
Switch the ignition off and on
again
If required, rewire or replace
terminating resistors
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN3 terminating resistors
defective
Switch off the maintenance
switch
Remedial measure
Replace wiring
Check whether switch is
switched on
Recommend Check
Short circuit / broken cable in the Check wiring
wiring for the CAN3 bus
The maintenance switch has
been switched on
Possible Reason
Error: Sensor position lifting gear Sensor position of lifting gear not Specify position of the sensor
- wrong signal
adjusted
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
1304 Malfunction lifting gear
position sensor B50
Status: 18.06.2014
1304
Error No.
Page No. 79/225
1306 Malfunction sensor B47
header contour left
1306
Status: 18.06.2014
1305 Malfunction lifting gear
pressure sensor B49
Description
Error: Height of left lifting gear
sensor - wrong signal
Error: Pressure sensor for lifting
gear - wrong signal
Meaning
See Remedial action
Internal EMR error
Replace sensor plug
Replace lifting gear pressure
sensor
Lifting gear pressure sensor plug Check sensor plugs
defective
Measure voltage on the sensor
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Lifting gear pressure sensor
defective
Short circuit in the wiring to
another EMR sensor
Internal EMR error
Turn Page please!
Replace the EMR
Replace wiring
Replace wiring to lifting gear
pressure sensor
Replace the EMR
Replace wiring
Replace lifting gear position
sensor
Remedial measure
Short circuit / broken cable in the Check wiring to lifting gear
wiring for the lifting gear
pressure sensor
pressure sensor
Perform lifting gear diagnostics
Check wiring
Short circuit in the wiring to
another EMR sensor
Determine via the terminal
Measure voltage on the sensor
Recommend Check
Lifting gear position sensor
defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
1305
Error No.
Page No. 80/225
Description
Error: Height of right lifting gear
sensor - wrong signal
Meaning
Check the front attachment plug
Check setting of the sensor
Front attachment plug not
inserted
Height of left lifting gear sensor
not adjusted
Make adjustment
Plug in front attachment plugs
Deactivate the distance
adjustment if no skids are fitted,
or switch the machine to maize
operation on the display, if the
ground skids are fitted
Remedial measure
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Short circuit in the wiring to
another EMR sensor
Internal EMR error
See Remedial action
Measure voltage on the sensor
Height of the left lifting gear
sensor defective
The height of right lifting gear
sensor has not been fitted,
because the grass pick-up has
been fitted, or corn operation
has been set, but no skids are
present
Check sensor plugs
Height of the left lifting gear
sensor plug defective
Turn Page please!
Deactivate the distance
adjustment if no skids are fitted,
or switch the machine to maize
operation on the display, if the
ground skids are fitted.
Replace EMR.
Replace wiring
Replace height of lifting gear left
sensor
Replace sensor plug
Short circuit / broken cable in
Check wiring to sensor for height Replace wiring to sensor for
wiring for height of the left lifting of left lifting gear
height of left lifting gear
gear sensor
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
The height of left lifting gear
sensor has not been fitted,
because the grass pick-up has
been fitted, or corn operation
has been set, but no skids are
present
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
1307 Malfunction sensor B48
header contour right
Status: 18.06.2014
1307
Error No.
Page No. 81/225
Description
Error: Turn pendulum frame to
the left valve
Meaning
Check wiring to sensor for height Replace wiring to sensor for
of right lifting gear
height of right lifting gear
Short circuit / broken cable in
wiring for height of right lifting
gear sensor
See Remedial action
Internal EMR error
Replace valve plug
Check valve plug
Test coil
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Turn Page please!
Replace coil
Replace wiring to valve
Broken cable in the wiring for the Check wiring to valve
valve
Perform lifting gear diagnostics
Replace wiring
Check wiring
Short circuit in the wiring to
another EMR sensor
Determine via the terminal
Replace height of right lifting
gear sensor defective
Height of right lifting gear sensor Measure voltage on the sensor
defective
Replace the EMR
Replace sensor plug
Height of right lifting gear sensor Check sensor plugs
plug defective
Make adjustment
Check position of the sensor
Height of the right lifting gear
sensor not adjusted
Plug in front attachment plugs
Remedial measure
Check the front attachment plug
Recommend Check
Front attachment plug not
inserted
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
1308 Left pendulum valve coil
Y37 current too low
Status: 18.06.2014
1308
Error No.
Page No. 82/225
1309 Right pendulum valve coil
Y38 current too low
1310 Malfunction Valve coil Y37
pendulum left
1309
1310
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Error: Turn pendulum frame
valve left - current too high
Error: Turn pendulum frame
valve clockwise
Meaning
Test coil
See Remedial action
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal EMR error
Check wiring to valve
Test coil
Short circuit in the wiring for the
valve
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Turn Page please!
Replace coil
Replace wiring to valve
Check the function using manual Change pendulum frame valve
operation on the hydraulic block
valve. Ensure easy motion and
no noises in the pendulum
frame!
Turning function of left
pendulum frame valve defective
Perform lifting gear diagnostics
Perform lifting gear diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
Replace the EMR
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Check valve plug
Valve plug defective
Replace the EMR
Remedial measure
Replace wiring to the valve
Perform lifting gear diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Broken cable in the wiring for the Check wiring to the valve
valve
Determine via the terminal
Internal EMR error
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 83/225
1311 Malfunction Valve coil Y38
pendulum right
2101 Electronics undervoltage KMC2
1311
2101
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Error: Electronics voltage KMC2
too low
Error: Turn pendulum frame
valve right - current too high
Meaning
Check wiring to valve
Test coil
See Remedial action
Short circuit in the wiring for the
valve
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal EMR error
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD60 not lit
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Turn Page please!
Check fuse 22-F60
LED +22-LD61 not lit
Power supply voltage of KMC2
too low
Check fuse +22-F61
Run electronics diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
Replace the EMR
Replace coil
Replace wiring to valve
Check the function using manual Change pendulum frame valve
operation on the hydraulic block
valve. Ensure easy motion and
no noises in the pendulum
frame!
Turning function of right
pendulum frame valve defective
Replace the EMR
Remedial measure
Perform lifting gear diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Internal EMR error
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 84/225
Description
Error: Electronics voltage KMC2
too high
Meaning
While engine is running,
measure on batteries. Voltage
must not be over 14.8V
Check the dynamo
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Dynamo defective
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Dynamo defective
Run electronics diagnostics
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Charge indicator lamp defective
Determine via the terminal
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Battery dead
Turn Page please!
Replace battery change-over
relay
Replace the dynamo
Replace the dynamo
Replace KMC2
Replace the dynamo
Replace wiring
Check wiring
Short circuit in the wiring to a
12V sensor
Replace cabling
Remedial measure
Check the cables.
Recommend Check
Wiring defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2102 Electronics overvoltage KMC2
Status: 18.06.2014
2102
Error No.
Page No. 85/225
Description
Internal error KMC2
Possible Reason
Check wiring
Test function of the release
switch
Check release logic
Wiring of release switch
defective
Release switch defective
GAL component release logic
wrong (wrong GAL component)
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check fuse F13 in KMC2
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Fuse F13 in KMC2 defective
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Turn Page please!
Replace GAL component
Replace release switch
Replace cabling
Replace fuse F13 in KMC2
Replace fuse -22F72
Check fuse -22F72
voltage V1 KMC2 optional
defective (possible with
additional cutting drum brake)
Check fuse +22-F87
Replace KMC2
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD40 not lit
Run electronics diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Output voltage of V1 defective
Error: KMC2 output voltage of V1 Determine via the terminal
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2103 Malfunction Voltage V1 KMC2
Status: 18.06.2014
2103
Error No.
Page No. 86/225
Description
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
See Remedial action
Dynamo defective
Internal error KMC2
Check wiring
Wiring of release switch
defective
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Turn Page please!
Replace cabling
Replace fuse F6 in KMC2
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Check fuse F6 in KMC2
Check fuse +22-F63
Replace KMC2
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Fuse F6 in KMC2 defective
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Run electronics diagnostics
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Charge indicator lamp defective
Replace the dynamo
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Battery dead
Replace GAL component
Remedial measure
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
GAL component defective
Possible Reason
Error: KMC2 output voltage of V2 Determine via the terminal
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2104 Malfunction Voltage V2 KMC2
Status: 18.06.2014
2104
Error No.
Page No. 87/225
Description
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
See Remedial action
LED +22-LD38 not lit
Battery dead
Charge indicator lamp defective
Dynamo defective
Internal error KMC2
Output voltage of V2 defective.
LED +22-LD37 not lit
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Output voltage of V3 defective.
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Run electronics diagnostics
See Remedial action
GAL component defective
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22 F63
Check fuse +22-F85
Check fuse +22-F86
Replace KMC2
Replace the dynamo
Replace GAL component
If required, change GAL
component
Check release logic
GAL component release logic
wrong (wrong GAL component)
Replace release switch
Remedial measure
Check release switch
Recommend Check
Release switch defective
Possible Reason
Error: KMC2 output voltage of V3 Determine via the terminal
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2105 Malfunction Voltage V3 KMC2
Status: 18.06.2014
2105
Error No.
Page No. 88/225
Status: 18.06.2014
Error No.
Page No. 89/225
Description
Meaning
Test function of the release
switch
Check release logic
See Remedial action
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
See Remedial action
Release switch defective
GAL component release logic
wrong (wrong GAL component)
GAL component defective
Battery dead
Charge indicator lamp defective
Dynamo defective
Internal error KMC2
Replace KMC2
Replace the dynamo
Replace GAL component
If required, change GAL
component
Replace release switch
Replace cabling
Check wiring
Wiring of release switch
defective
Replace fuse F12 in KMC2
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check fuse F12 in KMC2
Check fuse +22-F60
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Recommend Check
Fuse F12 in KMC2 defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Description
Possible Reason
Test function of the release
switch
Check release logic
See Remedial action
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Release switch defective
GAL component release logic
wrong (wrong GAL component)
GAL component defective
Battery dead
Charge indicator lamp defective
Turn Page please!
Replace GAL component
If required, change GAL
component
Replace release switch
Replace cabling
Check wiring
Wiring of release switch
defective
Replace fuse F2 in KMC2
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check fuse F2 in KMC2
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Fuse F2 in KMC2 defective
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F84
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD36 not lit
Run electronics diagnostics
Recommend Check
Output voltage of V4 defective
Error: KMC2 output voltage of V4 Determine via the terminal
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2106 Malfunction Voltage V4 KMC2
Status: 18.06.2014
2106
Error No.
Page No. 90/225
2108 Malfunction Voltage 8V
digital sensors - KMC2
2108
Status: 18.06.2014
2107 Malfunction Voltage 12V
digital sensors - KMC2
Description
Error: 8V voltage of digital
sensors
Error: 12V voltage of digital
sensors
Meaning
Charge battery
Change battery
Check battery acid
Check battery voltage
Battery dead
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Short circuit in the wiring to a
digital sensor
Check the excitation voltage,
check the wiring, replace the
dynamo
Dynamo defective
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2
Replace the dynamo
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Charge indicator lamp defective
Replace sensors
Test function of the sensors
Digital sensor defective
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Replace the dynamo
Remedial measure
Short circuit in the wiring to a
digital sensor
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Recommend Check
Dynamo defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2107
Error No.
Page No. 91/225
Description
Error: 8 V voltage of analogue
sensors
Meaning
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2.
Check charge indicator lamp,
check wiring.
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Charge indicator lamp defective
Charge battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Turn Page please!
If required, change charge
indicator lamp and/or replace
cabling.
Replace the sensor
Test function of the sensor
Analogue sensor defective
Replace wiring
Check wiring
Short circuit in the wiring to an
analogue sensor
Replace KMC2.
Replace dynamo.
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Dynamo defective.
Change battery
Check battery voltage
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling.
Charge battery
Replace the sensor
Remedial measure
Check battery acid
Test function of the sensor
Digital sensor defective
Recommend Check
Charge indicator lamp defective. Check charge indicator lamp,
check wiring.
Battery dead
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2109 Malfunction Voltage 8V
analogue sensors - KMC2
Status: 18.06.2014
2109
Error No.
Page No. 92/225
2110 Voltage battery 3V too low
- KMC2
2111 Malfunction Voltage V1 KMC2
2110
2111
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2.
The actual present voltage V1 for
the control unit KMC2 does not
correspond to the logic for
voltage V1
The logic for V1 is without
cutting drum brake:
- Release Switch Field ON
- Release Switch Maintenance
OFF
- both Instantaneous stop switch
OFF
- Release Switch feed drive
safety output ON
- Release Switch feed drive/front
attachment ON
22LD40 is lit even though logic is Replace console relay circuit
not fulfilled
board
See remedy
Check wiring
Relay 22K40 defective
GAL component defective
Wiring of release switch
defective
Replace the wiring
Replace GAL component
Replace GAL component
Check release logic
GAL component release logic
wrong (wrong GAL component)
Replace release switch
Check the required position of
the release switches according
to logic table
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2.
Replace dynamo.
Replace backup battery in KMC2
Replace KMC2
Remedial measure
Release switch defective
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Dynamo defective.
Check voltage of the battery
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Recommend Check
Dynamo defective.
Possible Reason
Error: Backup battery voltage 3 Discharge the backup battery
V too low
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 93/225
2201 Valve coil Y5 feed drive in
front current too low
2202 Valve coil Y6 feed drive
backwards current too low
2201
2202
Status: 18.06.2014
2112 RAM initialised (Check 3V
battery) - KMC2
Description
Error: Minimum current feed
drive backward valve has fallen
below the normal level
Error: Minimum current feed
drive forward valve has fallen
below the normal level
Error: Re-initialization of the
battery backup RAM in KMC2
Meaning
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Check wiring
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Broken cable in the wiring for
feed drive backward valve
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Perform feed drive diagnostics
Check wiring
Broken cable in the wiring for
feed drive forward valve
Determine via the terminal
Perform feed drive diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Turn Page please!
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace cabling
Internal error KMC2
Replace backup battery in KMC2
Measure voltage on the battery
3V backup battery voltage too
low
Remedial measure
none
Recommend Check
Job computer KMC2 was replaced none
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2112
Error No.
Page No. 94/225
Status: 18.06.2014
Error: Minimum current front
attachment forward valve has
fallen below the normal level
2204 Valve coil Y7 front
attachment in front current too
low
2204
Meaning
2203 Valve coils Y5/Y6 feed drive Error: Maximum current of the
current too high
feed drive forward or feed drive
backward valves has been
exceeded
Description
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Check wiring
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Broken cable in the wiring for
front attachment forward valve
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Perform feed drive diagnostics
Check wiring
Short circuit in the wiring for
feed drive forward/feed drive
backward valve
Determine via the terminal
Perform feed drive diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Determine via the terminal
Test coil
Recommend Check
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2203
Error No.
Page No. 95/225
Turn Page please!
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2
Replace coil
Remedial measure
2206 Valve coils Y7/Y8 front
attachment current too high
2206
Status: 18.06.2014
2205 Valve coil Y8 front
attachment backwards current
too low
Description
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Check wiring
Perform front attachment
diagnostics
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Turn Page please!
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Replace KMC2
Remedial measure
Replace wiring
Perform front attachment
diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Broken cable in the wiring for
Check wiring
front attachment backward valve
Determine via the terminal
Internal error KMC2
Possible Reason
Error: Maximum current of the
Determine via the terminal
front attachment forward or front
attachment backward valves has
fallen below the normal level
Short circuit in the wiring for
front attachment forward/front
attachment valve backward
Error: Minimum current front
attachment backward valve has
fallen below the normal level
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2205
Error No.
Page No. 96/225
2208 Reserve alarm - KMC2
2209 Valve coil Y21 rotate
discharge chute on right current
too low
2208
2209
Status: 18.06.2014
2207 Reserve alarm - KMC2
Description
Error: Minimum current turn
discharge chute to the right
valve has fallen below the
normal level
Meaning
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Check wiring
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
See Remedial action
Broken cable in wiring to turn
discharge chute valve right
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal error KMC2
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Internal error KMC2
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2207
Error No.
Page No. 97/225
Replace KMC2
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2
Remedial measure
2210 Valve coil Y63 precontrol A
current too low
2211 Valve coil Y64 precontrol B
current too low
2210
2211
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Determined via the terminal
Error: Current for pilot control
discharge chute valve left or lift
(Y63) has fallen below minimum
level (Hydac valve block)
Meaning
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Check wiring
Check valve plug and contacts
Check coil
See Remedy
Broken cable in the wiringPilot
control discharge chute valve
right or lower (Y64)
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal error KMC2
See Remedy
Internal error KMC2
Determined via the terminal
Check coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Replace KMC2
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Check valve plug and contacts
Valve plug defective
Remedial measure
Replace wiring
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Recommend Check
Broken cable in the wiringPilot
Check wiring
control discharge chute valve left
or lift (Y63)
Determined via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 98/225
2301 Valve coil Y21 rotate
discharge chute on right current
too high
2302 Valve coil Y20 rotate
discharge chute on left current
too low
2301
2302
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Check wiring
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
See Remedial action
Short circuit in wiring to turn
discharge chute valve right
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal error KMC2
Check wiring
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
See Remedial action
Broken cable in wiring to turn
discharge chute valve left
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal error KMC2
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error: Minimum current turn
Determine via the terminal
discharge chute to the left valve
has fallen below the normal level
Error: Maximum current to turn
discharge chute valve to the
right exceeded
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 99/225
Replace KMC2
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Remedial measure
2304 Malfunction Valve coil Y24
raise discharge chute
2304
Status: 18.06.2014
2303 Valve coil Y20 rotate
discharge chute on left current
too high
Description
Error: Lift discharge chute valve
Error: Maximum current to turn
discharge chute valve to the left
exceeded
Meaning
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
See Remedial action
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal error KMC2
Replace KMC2
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Remedial measure
Check wiring to valve
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Turn Page please!
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Function to raise discharge chute Check the function using manual Change lift discharge chute
valve defective
operation on the hydraulic block valve
valve. Ensure easy motion and
no noises in the discharge chute!
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Check wiring
Broken cable in wiring to turn
discharge chute valve left
Determine via the terminal
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2303
Error No.
Page No. 100/225
2305 Malfunction Valve coil Y25
lower discharge chute
2306 Malfunction Valve coil Y22
raise ejector flap
2305
2306
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
Test function of solenoid valve
See Remedial action
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Solenoid valve defective
Internal error KMC2
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Check wiring to valve
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Turn Page please!
Replace KMC2
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Check the function using manual Change lower discharge chute
operation on the hydraulic block valve
valve. Ensure easy motion and
no noises in the discharge chute!
Function to lower discharge
chute valve defective
Replace KMC2
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Replace the solenoid valve
Remedial measure
Determine via the terminal
Test function of solenoid valve
Recommend Check
Solenoid valve defective
Possible Reason
Error: Raise discharge chute flap Determine via the terminal
valve
Error: Lower discharge chute
valve
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 101/225
2307 Malfunction Valve coil Y23
lower ejector flap
2307
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Recommend Check
Remedial measure
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
Test function of solenoid valve
See Remedial action
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Solenoid valve defective
Internal error KMC2
Check wiring to valve
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring to valve
Check the function using manual Replace lower discharge chute
operation on the hydraulic block flap valve
valve. Ensure easy motion and
no noises in the discharge chute
flap!
Replace KMC2
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Function to lower discharge
chute flap valve defective
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Check wiring to valve
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Function to raise discharge chute Check the function using manual Change lift discharge chute flap
flap valve defective
operation on the hydraulic block valve
valve. Ensure easy motion and
no noises in the discharge chute
flap!
Possible Reason
Error: Lower discharge chute flap Determine via the terminal
valve
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 102/225
2308 Discharge chute not at top
2308
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Error: Discharge chute not up
Meaning
Replace the sensor
Sensor for discharge chute
centre position or discharge
chute lower position defective
Turn Page please!
Replace cabling and plugs
Wiring to one of the sensors
Check wiring and plug
discharge chute centre position
or discharge chute lower position
defective
Measure voltage on the sensors
Correct setting of the sensors
Lift discharge chute
Replace KMC2
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Remedial measure
Discharge chute centre position Check setting of the sensors
or discharge chute lower position
sensor not adjusted correctly
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Determine via the terminal
Test function of solenoid valve
Solenoid valve defective
Check position of the discharge
chute
Check coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Discharge chute is not up
Check valve plugs and contacts
Recommend Check
Valve plug defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 103/225
2401 Sensor B28 discharge
chute centre signal too low
2401
Status: 18.06.2014
2400 discharge chute not in
parking position
Description
Error: Broken cable - discharge
chute centre position sensor
Error: Discharge chute not In
parking position
Meaning
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Check wiring and plug
Broken cable in the wiring to the
discharge chute centre position
sensor
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Determine via the terminal
Replace the sensor
Measure voltage on the sensors
Sensor for discharge chute
centre position or discharge
chute lower position defective
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Replace cabling and plugs
Wiring to one of the sensors
Check wiring and plug
discharge chute centre position
or discharge chute lower position
defective
Replace KMC2
Remedial measure
Correct setting of the sensors
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Discharge chute centre position Check setting of the sensors
or discharge chute lower position
sensor not adjusted correctly
Determine via the terminal
Internal error KMC2
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2400
Error No.
Page No. 104/225
2403 Sensor B29 discharge
chute top signal too low
2403
Status: 18.06.2014
2402 Sensor B28 discharge
chute centre signal too large
Description
Error: Broken cable - discharge
chute top position sensor
Error: Short circuit - discharge
chute centre position sensor
Meaning
Check wiring and plug
Measure voltage on the sensor
See Remedial action
Discharge chute top position
sensor defective
Internal error KMC2
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Broken cable in the wiring to the
discharge chute top position
sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Discharge chute centre position
sensor defective
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Check wiring and plug
Short circuit in the wiring to the
discharge chute centre position
sensor
Determine via the terminal
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Determine via the terminal
Measure voltage on the sensor
Recommend Check
Discharge chute centre position
sensor defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2402
Error No.
Page No. 105/225
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Remedial measure
2405 Sensor B30 discharge
chute impulse signal too low
2406 Sensor B30 discharge
chute impulse signal too large
2405
2406
Status: 18.06.2014
2404 Sensor B29 discharge
chute top signal too large
Description
Error: Short circuit discharge
chute moments of momentum
sensor
Error: Broken cable discharge
chute moments of momentum
sensor
Error: Short circuit - discharge
chute top position sensor
Meaning
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Measure voltage on the sensor
Discharge chute moments of
momentum sensor defective
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring and plug
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Broken cable in the wiring to the
discharge chute moments of
momentum sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Discharge chute top position
sensor defective
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Check wiring and plug
Short circuit in the wiring to the
discharge chute top position
sensor
Determine via the terminal
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2404
Error No.
Page No. 106/225
Turn Page please!
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Remedial measure
Description
Error: Feed drive speed
Meaning
Measure voltage on the sensor
See Remedial action
Discharge chute moments of
momentum sensor defective
Internal error KMC2
Check parameters for feed drive
Check wiring and plug
Check the sensor setting and
correct if necessary
Measure voltage on the sensor
Check pump, engine, and valves
of feed drive and stop valve of
metal detection. Note any
noises!
Parameters for feed drive
incorrect
The cables to the feed drive
speed sensor are defective
Feed drive speed sensor is not
adjusted properly
Feed drive speed sensor
defective
Feed drive is not running,
although the feed drive is turned
on, and the diesel engine is
running
Current is flowing through the
Perform feed drive diagnostics
feed drive forward valve and the
diesel engine is running, but the
feed drive is not running
Check wiring and plug
Recommend Check
Short circuit in the wiring to the
discharge chute moments of
momentum sensor
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2407 Fault feed drive speed
Status: 18.06.2014
2407
Error No.
Page No. 107/225
Turn Page please!
When checking, eliminate
detected faults
Replace the sensor
Turn the sensor up to stop and
then turn back by approx. half a
turn and counter
Replace cabling and plugs
Correct parameters for feed
drive
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Remedial measure
Description
Error: Front attachment speed
Meaning
Check wiring and plug
Check parameters 25260 and
25270 for no-load speeds front
attachment
The cables to the front
attachment speed sensor are
defective
Parameters defective after
software update
Current is flowing through the
Perform front attachment
front attachment forward valve
diagnostics
and the diesel engine is running,
but the front attachment is not
running
Check parameters for front
attachment
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Parameters for front attachment
incorrect
Check high pressure for feed
drive (420 bar)
High pressure for feed drive
incorrect
Turn Page please!
Set parameters 25260 and
25270 for no-load speeds front
attachment to standard value 80
Replace cabling and plugs
Set parameters for front
attachment
Replace KMC2
Set high pressure for feed drive
Set charge pressure for feed
drive
Check charge pressure for feed
drive (30+/-3 bar)
Charge pressure for the feed
drive incorrect
Remedial measure
Check feed drive valves forwards Clean or change feed drive
and feed drive valves backwards valves forwards and feed drive
defective
valves backwards
Recommend Check
Feed drive forward and feed
drive backward valves defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2408 Fault front attchachment
speed
Status: 18.06.2014
2408
Error No.
Page No. 108/225
Description
Error: Cutting drum speed
Meaning
Check charge pressure for front
attachment (30+/-3 bar)
Check high pressure for front
attachment (420 bar)
See Remedial action
Charge pressure for front
attachment too low
High pressure for front
attachment incorrect
Internal error KMC2
Perform work diagnostics
Check front attachment valves
forwards and front attachment
valves backwards
Front attachment forward and
front attachment backward
valves defective
Determine via the terminal
Check pump, engine, and valves When checking, eliminate
of the front attachment, and stop detected faults
valve of metal detection. Note
any noises!
Feed drive is not running even
though the front attachment is
turned on and the diesel engine
is running
Turn Page please!
Replace KMC2
Set high pressure for front
attachment
Set charge pressure for front
attachment
Clean or change front
attachment valves forwards and
front attachment valves
backwards.
Replace the sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Front attachment speed sensor
defective
Turn the sensor up to stop and
then turn back by approx. half a
turn and counter
Remedial measure
Check the sensor setting and
correct if necessary
Recommend Check
Front attachment speed sensor
not adjusted properly
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2409 Fault cutting drum speed
Status: 18.06.2014
2409
Error No.
Page No. 109/225
2411 Sensor B58 cutting drum
signal too large
2411
Status: 18.06.2014
2410 Sensor B58 cutting drum
signal too low
Description
Measure voltage on the sensor
Check main belt
Check main coupling
See Remedial action
Cutting drum attachment speed
sensor defective
Main belt for cutting drum
defective
Main coupling defective
Internal error KMC2
Error: Short circuit cutting drum
speed sensor
Check wiring and plug
Short circuit in the wiring to the
cutting drum speed sensor
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Perform work diagnostics.
Measure voltage on the sensor
Cutting drum attachment speed
sensor defective
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring and plug
Broken cable in the wiring to the
cutting drum speed sensor
Perform work diagnostics
Check setting of the sensor
Recommend Check
Cutting drum speed sensor not
adjusted properly
Possible Reason
Error: Broken cable cutting drum Determine via the terminal
speed sensor
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2410
Error No.
Page No. 110/225
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Replace main coupling
Change main belt
Replace the sensor
Correct setting of the sensor
Remedial measure
2413 Malfunction sensor B28
discharge chute centre
2413
Status: 18.06.2014
2412 Malfunction metal det.
Description
Error: Time exceeded when
parking or mirroring the
discharge chute up to which
discharge chute centre position
sensor should have been alive
Error: Metal detection defective
Meaning
Check discharge chute
Correct discharge chute
parameter max pulses left and
parameter max pulses left and
discharge chute max pulses right discharge chute max pulses right
More pulses to one side were
counted than permitted
Turn Page please!
Replace the sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Discharge chute centre position
sensor defective
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Check wiring and plug
See Remedial action
KMC2 input defective
Replace the metal detection
system
Wiring to the discharge chute
centre position sensor defective
Test function of metal detection
Metal detection output defective
Perform test stop in metal
detection diagnostics display
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Check wiring between the metal
detection and the KMC2
Conditions output metal
detection, and input KMC2
deviate from each other
Replace KMC2.
Replace sensor.
Remedial measure
Determine via the terminal
Perform metal detection
diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Incorrect default setting
Measure voltage on the sensor
Recommend Check
Cutting drum attachment speed
sensor defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2412
Error No.
Page No. 111/225
2415 Malfunction sensor B30
discharge chute impulse
2500 Sensor B55 front
attachment left signal too low
2415
2500
Status: 18.06.2014
2414 Malfunction sensor B29
discharge chute top
Description
Error: Broken cable front
attachment left sensor
Error: Sensor, discharge chute,
moments of momentum
Error: Discharge chute not up
when attempting to park or
mirror
Meaning
Check setting of the sensors
See Remedial action
Discharge chute top position
sensor is not adjusted properly
Internal error KMC2
Replace the sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
See Remedial action
Discharge chute moments of
momentum sensor defective
Internal error KMC2
Turn Page please!
Replace KMC2
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Correct setting of the sensors
Lift discharge chute
Replace KMC2
Remedial measure
Short circuit / broken cable in the Check wiring and plug
wiring to the discharge chute
moments of momentum sensor
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
Determine via the terminal
Check position of the discharge
chute
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Discharge chute is not up
Internal error KMC2
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2414
Error No.
Page No. 112/225
2501 Sensor B55 front
attachment left signal too large
2502 Sensor B25 front
attachment right signal too low
2501
2502
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Error: Broken cable front
attachment right sensor
Error: Short circuit front
attachment left sensor
Meaning
Check setting on the display
Check wiring and plug
Broken cable in the wiring to the
front attachment right sensor
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
The setting of the front
attachment in the display does
not agree with the actually
mounted front attachment
Measure voltage on the sensor
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Front attachment left sensor
defective
Measure voltage on the sensor
Front attachment left sensor
defective
Check wiring and plug
Check wiring and plug
Broken cable in the wiring to the
front attachment left sensor
Short circuit in the wiring to the
front attachment left sensor
Check setting on the display
Recommend Check
The setting of the front
attachment in the display does
not agree with the actually
mounted front attachment
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 113/225
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring and plugs
Correct setting on the display
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Correct setting on the display
Remedial measure
Status: 18.06.2014
2506 Release switch S1 field OFF Error: Action cannot be
- KMC2
performed, or was terminated,
because the field release switch
is, or was, turned off
2506
Error: Short circuit front
attachment right sensor
Meaning
2503 Sensor B25 front
attachment right signal too
large
Description
Perform operating panel
diagnostics
Check wiring
Test function of release switch.
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Determine via the terminal
Field release switch wiring
defective
Field release switch defective
Internal error, operating panel
Internal error KMC2
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Check switching position of field
release switch
Measure voltage on the sensor
Front attachment right sensor
defective
Field release switch is, or was,
turned off
Check wiring and plug
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Short circuit in the wiring to the
front attachment right sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Recommend Check
Front attachment right sensor
defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2503
Error No.
Page No. 114/225
Replace KMC2
Replace operating panel
Replace field release switch
Replace wiring
Switch on field release switch
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Remedial measure
Status: 18.06.2014
Check wiring
Test function of the release
switch
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Wiring of maintenance release
switch defective
Maintenance release switch
defective
Internal error, operating panel
Internal error KMC2
Check wiring
Test function of switch
See Remedial action
Wiring of the quick stop switch
defective
Quick stop switch defective
Internal error, operating panel
Perform operating panel
diagnostics
Check switching position of the
quick stop switch
Perform operating panel
diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
2508 Quick stop S90 or S91 ON - Error: Action cannot be
Quick stop switch is, or was,
KMC2
performed, or was terminated,
turned on
because the quick stop switch is,
or was, turned on
Determine via the terminal
Recommend Check
Maintenance release switch is, or Check switching position of
was, turned on
maintenance release switch
Possible Reason
2508
Error: Action cannot be
performed, or was terminated,
because the maintenance
release switch is, or was, turned
on
Meaning
2507 Release switch S5
maintenance OFF - KMC2
Description
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2507
Error No.
Page No. 115/225
Turn Page please!
Replace operating panel
Replace quick stop switch
Replace wiring
Turn quick stop switch off
Replace KMC2
Replace operating panel
Replace maintenance release
switch
Replace wiring
Switch maintenance release
switch off
Remedial measure
Status: 18.06.2014
Check valve plug and contacts
Check coil
See Remedy
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal computer error additional axle control
See Remedy
Internal computer error additional axle control
2510 Lower additional axle valve Error: Current to lower additional Determined via the terminal
Run travelling gear diagnostics
coil Y81 current too low
axle valve is below minimum
value (Y81)
Broken cable in the wiring for the Check wiring
additional axle valve (Y81)
Check coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Replace additional axle control
computer
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Replace additional axle control
computer
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Check valve plug and contacts
Valve plug defective
Replace KMC2
Remedial measure
Replace wiring
Run travelling gear diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Broken cable in the
Check wiring
wiringAdditional axle valve (Y80)
Determined via the terminal
Internal error KMC2
Possible Reason
2510
Error: Current to lift additional
axle valve is below minimum
value (Y80)
Meaning
2509 Lift additional axle valve
coil Y80 current too low
Description
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2509
Error No.
Page No. 116/225
Status: 18.06.2014
2513 Malfunction CAN2 between Error: CAN bus communication
add.axis and KMC2
from additional axle control
computer to the terminal
2513
An error occurred while lowering
the additional axle! Stop
machine immediately and
eliminate the error!
2512 Malfunction during
lowering of add. axis
2512
Possible Reason
See Remedy
Additional axle set but not
available
See Remedy
Internal computer error additional axle control
Run CAN and travelling gear
diagnostics
Check wiring and plug
Broken cable/short circuit in
wiring for the additional axle
Determined via the terminal
Switch off the machine and
check the additional axle
Fault in the additional axle area
See Remedy
Internal computer error additional axle control
Run travelling gear diagnostics
Measure sensor supply voltage
Additional axle sensor (B80)
faulty
Determined via the terminal
Check wiring and plug
Run travelling gear diagnostics
Recommend Check
Broken cable in the wiring to the
additional axle sensor (B80)
Error: Broken cable for additional Determined via the terminal
axle pressure sensor (B80)
Meaning
2511 Pressure sensor B80
add.axis signal too low
Description
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2511
Error No.
Page No. 117/225
Turn Page please!
Check the travelling gear
settings
Replace additional axle control
computer
Replace wiring and plugs
Switch off the machine and
remedy the fault
Replace additional axle control
computer
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Remedial measure
2514 Malfunction voltage 12V add.axis
2514
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
See Remedy
Internal computer error additional axle control
Internal computer error additional axle control
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Replace additional axle control
computer
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
See Remedy
Check/replace fuse +22-F60
Replace fuse +22-F51
Replace additional axle control
computer
Replace wiring
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Check fuse +22-F51
Run travelling gear diagnostics
Check wiring
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN2 bus
Check/replace fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Replace fuse +22-F51
Remedial measure
Check fuse +22-F51
Recommend Check
Power supply voltage for
additional axle control computer
faulty
Possible Reason
Error: Power supply voltage for
Determined via the terminal
additional axle computer too low
/ too high
Power supply voltage for
additional axle control computer
faulty
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 118/225
Status: 18.06.2014
2600 Malfunction CAN1 between Error: CAN bus communication terminal and KMC2
KMC2 to terminal
2600
Error: Switching voltage of
additional axle too low/too high
Meaning
2515 Malfunction voltage 5V add.axis
Description
Check wiring
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
See Remedial action
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Internal error KMC2
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit.
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit.
Central electrical power supply
defective.
Replace KMC2
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Check fuse +22-F61
LED +22-LD61 not lit.
KMC2 power supply defective
Program control unit
In the menu - Info software
versions - check the software
version of the control units
Control unit not programmed
Replace additional axle control
computer
Perform CAN diagnostics
See Remedy
Internal computer error additional axle control
Remedial measure
Determine via the terminal
Run travelling gear diagnostics
Recommend Check
Determined via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2515
Error No.
Page No. 119/225
2602 sensor B91 leak oil
pressure signal too large
2603 leak oil filter soiled
2602
2603
Status: 18.06.2014
2601 sensor B91 leak oil
pressure signal too low
Description
Error: Leakage oil filter dirty
Error: Leakage oil pressure
sensor (B91) has short circuit
Error: Leakage oil pressure
sensor (B91) has broken cable
Meaning
See Remedy
Internal error KMC2
Turn Page please!
Replace the sensor
Sensor for leakage oil pressure
(B91) faulty
Measure sensor supply voltage
Replace wiring to the leakage oil
filter sensor (B91)
Replace leakage oil filter if
necessary
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Remedial measure
Short circuit/broken cable in
Check wiring to the leakage oil
wiring for leakage oil filter sensor filter sensor (B91)
(B91)
Clean leakage oil filter
Measure sensor supply voltage
Sensor for leakage oil pressure
(B91) faulty
Leakage oil filter dirty
Check wiring and plug
See Remedy
Internal error KMC2
Short circuit in the wiring to the
sensor (B91)
Measure sensor supply voltage
Sensor for leakage oil pressure
(B91) faulty
Run travelling gear diagnostics
Check wiring and plug
Broken cable in the wiring to the
sensor (B91)
Determined via the terminal
Run travelling gear diagnostics
Recommend Check
Determined via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2601
Error No.
Page No. 120/225
2605 Foot switch malfunction
S15/S16 - KMC2
2606 Front attachment speed
too high - KMC2
2605
2606
Status: 18.06.2014
2604 leak oil filter very soiled
Description
The maximum permissible front
attachment speed has been
exceeded
Front attachment calibration is
defective
Switch sticks mechanically or a
short circuit from the switch is
internally available
Check the switch and the wiring
Restart the machine without a
key being activated by the
driver.
See Remedy
Internal error KMC2
Turn Page please!
Carry out front attachment drive
calibration again
Replace switch or wiring
Restart the machine
Replace KMC2
Consult KRONE Service
Check wheel motors
Wheel motors faulty
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring to the leakage oil
filter sensor (B91)
Measure sensor supply voltage
Sensor for leakage oil pressure
(B91) faulty
Replace leakage oil filter if
necessary
Replace KMC2
Remedial measure
Short circuit/broken cable in
Check wiring to the leakage oil
wiring for leakage oil filter sensor filter sensor (B91)
(B91)
Clean leakage oil filter
See Remedy
Recommend Check
Leakage oil filter dirty
Internal error KMC2
Possible Reason
When switching on the machine, The driver has accidentally
a keypress has been detected by pressed a foot switch.
the foot switch.
Error: Wheel motors faulty
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2604
Error No.
Page No. 121/225
Status: 18.06.2014
Error No.
Page No. 122/225
Description
Meaning
Make certain the parameter
Replace the sensor and carry out
25492 \"Engine front
front attachment drive
attachment” is correctly set and calibration again
compare the speed by using a
speed measuring instrument on
universal shaft of the front
attachment drive with the
display in the front attachment
diagnostics in the machine
terminal.
Replace job computer KMC2 and
carry out the front attachment
drive calibration again
Check installed hydraulic
component
Mixed installation from 75ccm
hydraulic pump with 55ccm
hydraulic engine of front
attachment drive
Front attachment speed sensor
defective
KMC2 shows an internal fault
(input from job computer KMC2
defective)
Replace hydraulic engine or
hydraulic pump of the front
attachment drive and carry out
front attachment calibration
again
Set the parameter appropriately
and carry out the front
attachment drive calibration
again
\"Check parameter 25492
“Engine front attachment” in the
parameter group “Front
attachment” to the installed
hydraulic engine.
0 = Sauer engines
1 = Linde engines with 55ccm
2 = Linde engines with 75ccm\"
Sensor type from front
attachment speed sensor
wrongly indicated in the machine
terminal (parameter 25492
engine front attachment)
Remedial measure
Recommend Check
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2609 Malfunction cutting drum
brake
Status: 18.06.2014
2609
Check valve plug
Test coil
Valve plug defective
Solenoid valve coil defective
Test coil
Solenoid valve coil defective
Check current equipment and
compare it with the set
parameters.
Check valve plug
Valve plug defective
The setting stated in the
The parameter 25655 does not
machine terminal for the braked correspond to the actual
cutting drum parameter 25655
equipment on the machine.
\\”Cutting drum brake
available\\\" does not correspond
to the actual configuration on
the machine.
Check wiring to valve
Short circuit in the wiring to
valve Y77
Perform front attachment
diagnostics
Check wiring to valve
Cable break in the wiring to
valve Y77
2608 Valve Coil Y77 Release
Error: Power consumption for the Determination via terminal
front attachment reverse current valve Y77 front attachment
too high
backward is too high.
Perform front attachment
diagnostics
Recommend Check
Determination via terminal
Possible Reason
2608
Meaning
2607 Valve Coil Y77 Release
Error: Power consumption from
front attachment reverse current valve Y77 release front
too low
attachment backward is too low.
Description
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2607
Error No.
Page No. 123/225
Turn Page please!
Set the parameter correctly
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace the wiring to the valve
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace the wiring to the valve
Remedial measure
Status: 18.06.2014
Error No.
Page No. 124/225
Description
Meaning
Recommend Check
Check the voltage from valve
Y77 in the diagnostics braked
cutting drum in the machine
terminal. A voltage of approx.
8.5V must always be present
here if no braked cutting drum is
installed.
Check whether a cable
break/short circuit valve Y77 is
available. To do this, check the
current as well as the voltage
from valve Y77 in the diagnostics
braked cutting drum in the
machine terminal. If a braked
cutting drum is installed, a
voltage of approx. 0V must be
present here if the valve Y77
release front attachment
backward is not controlled. If
the valve Y77 is controlled (front
attachment reversed), a voltage
of more than 10V is present
here.
Possible Reason
There is no braked cutting drum
installed but valve Y77 can be
detected. The voltage from valve
Y77 must be approx. 8.5V if
parameter 25655 ”Cutting drum
brakes available\" is 0 (brake not
installed).
A braked cutting drum is
installed but valve Y77 cannot be
detected. The voltage from valve
Y77 in the non-switched state
must be approx. 0V if the
parameter 25655 \"Cutting drum
brakes available\" is 1.
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Output KMC2.PWM_LA_8 or
output KMC2.HBPWM_6 defective
or input KMC2.Dig_3 defective
==> replace control unit KMC2
The current from valve Y77 is
approx. 0 mA and the voltage
from valve Y77 is approx. 8.5 V
==> Check valve Y77 and the
wiring from output
KMC2.PWM_LA_8 to valve Y77 as
well as from valve Y77 to output
KMC2.HBPWM_6
The current from valve Y77 is
greater than 500 mA. However,
the voltage is approx. 8.5V ==>
Check the wiring from input
Dig_3 from KMC2 to valve Y77.
Internal fault in the control unit
KMC2 ==> replace KMC2
Check plug 2X2 from KMC2 to
make certain it is not soiled or
moist. Also make certain that
there is no short circuit. Clean
the plug, if necessary.
Remedial measure
2611 Malfunction cutting drum
brake
3100 Voltage electronics - KMC3
2611
3100
Status: 18.06.2014
2610 Malfunction cutting drum
brake
Description
Error: Electronic voltage voltage out of range
\"The front attachment has
detected a speed while the
cutting drum has been braked.
The parameter 25661 - Cutting
drum brakes deactivated - has
been set automatically to 1
(deactivated) and the brake for
the cutting drum is no longer
controlled.
The parameter can only be
changed by a service
technician.\"
A speed has been measured on
the cutting drum even beyond
11 seconds.
Meaning
Check the hydraulics
Fault in the hydraulic system
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD62 not lit
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F62
LED +22-LD44 not lit
KMC3 power supply defective
Check fuse +22-F44
Run electronics diagnostics.
Check the hydraulics
The sensor B27 must be
replaced it the front attachment
does not move but a speed for
the front attachment drive is
displayed in the front
attachment diagnostics.
Set the sensor correctly.
Remedial measure
Determine via the terminal
Fault in the hydraulic system
Fault on sensor front attachment Check the front attachment
speed B27
speed in the diagnostics front
attachment and the actual
movement of the front
attachment.
Check the mechanical setting of
the cutting drum speed sensor
Recommend Check
Wrong mechanical setting of
cutting drum speed sensor
(B58).
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
2610
Error No.
Page No. 125/225
3101 Undervoltage electronics KMC3
3101
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Test function of dynamo
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Dynamo defective
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Run electronics diagnostics
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Turn Page please!
Replace the KMC3
Replace battery change-over
relay
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Charge battery,
Replace the dynamo
Replace cabling
Check battery acid,
Battery dead
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Charge indicator lamp defective
Replace wiring
Check wiring
Short circuit in the wiring to a
12V sensor
Replace cabling
Remedial measure
Check the cables.
Recommend Check
Wiring defective
Possible Reason
Error: Electronics voltage too low Determine via the terminal
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 126/225
Status: 18.06.2014
Error No.
Page No. 127/225
Description
Meaning
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Test function of dynamo
Check battery acid, Check
battery voltage
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
See Remedial action
Charge indicator lamp defective
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Dynamo defective
Battery dead
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Internal error KMC3
Replace the KMC3
Replace battery change-over
relay
Charge battery, Change battery
Replace the dynamo
Replace cabling
Replace wiring
Check wiring
Short circuit in the wiring to a
12V sensor
Replace cabling
Check the cables.
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Wiring defective
Check fuse +22-F62
LED +22-LD62 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F44
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD44 not lit
Recommend Check
Power supply voltage of KMC3
too low
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
3103 Malfunction Voltage V1 KMC3
3103
Status: 18.06.2014
3102 Overvoltage electronics KMC3
Description
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Test function of the dynamo
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
See Remedial action
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Dynamo defective
Battery dead
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Internal error KMC3
Output voltage of V1 defective
LED +22-LD35 not lit
Run electronics diagnostics
Check charge indicator lamp,
Check wiring
Charge indicator lamp defective
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F81
Replace the KMC3
Replace battery change-over
relay
Replace the dynamo
Replace cabling
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Replace wiring
Check wiring
Short circuit in the wiring to a
12V sensor
Replace cabling
Check the cables.
Wiring defective
Remedial measure
Run electronics diagnostics
Recommend Check
Power supply voltage of KMC3
too high
Possible Reason
Error: KMC3 output voltage of V1 Determine via the terminal
Error: Electronics voltage too
high
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
3102
Error No.
Page No. 128/225
Status: 18.06.2014
Error No.
Page No. 129/225
Description
Meaning
Test function of release switch.
Check release logic
See Remedial action
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, change charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or replace
cabling
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Check battery acid, Check
battery voltage
See Remedial action
Release switch defective
GAL component release logic
wrong (wrong GAL component)
GAL component defective
Charge indicator lamp defective
Dynamo defective
Battery dead
Internal error KMC3
Replace KMC3.
Charge battery Change battery
Replace the dynamo
Replace GAL component
Replace GAL component
Replace release switch
Replace cabling
Check wiring
Wiring of release switch
defective
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Replace fuse F13 in KMC3
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Check fuse F13 in KMC3
Check fuse +22-F63
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Recommend Check
Fuse F13 in KMC3 defective
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Description
Possible Reason
Test function of release switch.
Check release logic
See Remedial action
Check charge indicator lamp
Check the cables.
Release switch defective
GAL component release logic
wrong (wrong GAL component)
GAL component defective
Charge indicator lamp defective
Dynamo defective
Check wiring
Wiring of release switch
defective.
Turn Page please!
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Replace GAL component
Replace GAL component
Replace release switch
Replace cabling
Change fuse F6 in KMC3
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check fuse F6 in KMC3
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Fuse F6 in KMC3 defective
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F80
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD34 not lit
Run electronics diagnostics
Recommend Check
Output voltage of V2 defective.
Error: KMC3 output voltage of V2 Determine via the terminal
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
3104 Malfunction Voltage V2 KMC3
Status: 18.06.2014
3104
Error No.
Page No. 130/225
Description
Check wiring
Test function of release switch.
Check release logic
Wiring of release switch
defective
Release switch defective
GAL component release logic
wrong (wrong GAL component)
Turn Page please!
If required, change GAL
component
Replace release switch
Replace cabling
Replace fuse F12 in KMC3
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check fuse F12 in KMC3
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Fuse F12 in KMC3 defective
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F78
LED +22-LD32 not lit
Output voltage of V3 defective
Run electronics diagnostics
Replace the KMC3
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Replace the dynamo
Remedial measure
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Recommend Check
Battery dead
Possible Reason
Error: KMC3 output voltage of V3 Determine via the terminal
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
3105 Malfunction Voltage V3 KMC3
Status: 18.06.2014
3105
Error No.
Page No. 131/225
Description
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
See Remedial action
Battery dead
Internal error KMC3
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Turn Page please!
Replace fuse F2 in KMC3
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Check fuse F2 in KMC3
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Fuse F2 in KMC3 defective
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD33 not lit
Check fuse +22-F79
Replace the KMC3
Output voltage of V4 defective
Run electronics diagnostics
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Dynamo defective
Replace the dynamo
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Charge indicator lamp defective
Replace GAL component
Remedial measure
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
GAL component defective
Possible Reason
Error: KMC3 output voltage of V4 Determine via the terminal
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
3106 Malfunction Voltage V4 KMC3
Status: 18.06.2014
3106
Error No.
Page No. 132/225
Description
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
See Remedial action
Charge indicator lamp defective
Dynamo defective
Battery dead
Internal error KMC3
Check sensors
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Digital sensor defective
Charge indicator lamp defective
Turn Page please!
If required, replace sensors
Check wiring
Replace wiring
Replace the KMC3
Replace the dynamo
If required, change GAL
component
Short circuit in the wiring to a
digital sensor
Run electronics diagnostics
Check release logic
GAL component release logic
wrong (wrong GAL component)
Replace release switch
Test function of release switch.
Release switch defective
Replace cabling
Remedial measure
Check wiring
Recommend Check
Wiring of release switch
defective
Possible Reason
Error: 12 volts - voltage of digital Determine via the terminal
sensors
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
3107 Malfunction Voltage 12V
digital sensors - KMC3
Status: 18.06.2014
3107
Error No.
Page No. 133/225
Description
KMC3 Spg. 8V dig.sensors
Meaning
Check wiring
Check sensors
Check charge indicator lamp,
Short circuit in the wiring to a
digital sensor
Digital sensor defective
Charge indicator lamp defective
Replace the KMC3
Check battery voltage
See Remedial action
Change battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Internal error KMC3
Charge battery
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Replace the dynamo
Replace cabling
If required, replace sensors
Replace wiring
Replace the KMC3
Dynamo defective
Check wiring
Run electronics diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
See Remedial action
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Internal error KMC3
Charge battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Replace the dynamo
Remedial measure
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Recommend Check
Dynamo defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
3108 Malfunction Voltage 8V
digital sensors - KMC3
Status: 18.06.2014
3108
Error No.
Page No. 134/225
3110 Voltage battery 3V too low
- KMC3
3111 Cutting drum no speed!
3110
3111
Status: 18.06.2014
3109 Malfunction Voltage 8V
analogue sensors - KMC3
Description
Error: No cutting drum speed!
Error: Backup battery voltage 3
volts too low
Error: 8 V voltage of analogue
sensors
Meaning
Change battery
Check battery acid
Check battery voltage
Battery dead
Perform work diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Determined via the terminal
Measure voltage on the battery
Discharge the backup battery
See Remedial action
Charge battery
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Dynamo defective
Internal error KMC3
Check the charge indicator lamp, Replace cabling
check the wiring
Charge indicator lamp defective
Turn Page please!
Replace the KMC3
Replace backup battery in KMC3
Replace the KMC3
Replace the dynamo
If required, replace sensors
Check sensors
Analogue sensor defective
Replace wiring
Check wiring
Short circuit in the wiring to an
analogue sensor
Remedial measure
Run electronics diagnostics
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
3109
Error No.
Page No. 135/225
Status: 18.06.2014
3200 M11 Cracker motor current Short-circuit Cracker engine
too high
(M11)
3200
Error: Joystick type set
incorrectly
Meaning
3112 Joystick not correct!
Description
Remedial measure
Check wiring
Check plug
Short circuit in the engine
cracker wiring
Plug defective
Turn Page please!
Replace plug
Replace wiring
If required, increase current
Check parameters
Wrong parameter value for
maximum current of cracker
engine
Set joystick type
Remove the dirt; grease the
mechanics
Perform cracker diagnostics
Check settings
Power consumption too high due Check mechanism for
to sluggish mechanics
contamination
Determine via the terminal
Error: Maximum current engine
cracker has been exceeded
Current joystick type not set
Replace KMC2
Internal error KMC2
See Remedy
Replace the sensor
Check wiring to the cutting drum Replace wiring to the cutting
speed sensor (B58)
drum speed sensor (B58)
Recommend Check
Cutting drum speed sensor (B58) Check sensor
faulty
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for cutting drum speed
sensor (B58)
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
3112
Error No.
Page No. 136/225
Status: 18.06.2014
Error: When reducing the cracker
gap, the current is monitored for
the zero position of the cracker
rollers. The current has a value
between the normal and the
maximum current
3202 Cracker motor minimum
distance reached
3202
Meaning
3201 M11 Cracker motor current Error: Minimum current engine
too low
cracker has fallen below the
normal level
Description
Test function of plugs and
contacts
Test engine
See Remedial action
Plug defective
Engine cracker defective
Internal error KMC3
Test default setting of the
Cracker parameter s
Check wiring
Broken cable in the engine
cracker wiring
Wrong parameter value for
cracker
Check output voltage
Output voltage defective
none
Check parameters
Wrong parameter value for
minimum current of cracker
engine
The zero position of the cracker
has been reached
Perform cracker diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Determine via the terminal
Check Cracker engine
Recommend Check
Engine cracker defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
3201
Error No.
Page No. 137/225
Turn Page please!
Perform a default setting of the
parameter crackers
none
Replace the KMC3
Replace the engine cracker
Replace plug
Replace wiring
Adjust output voltage
If required, reduce current
Replace the KMC3
Replace the engine cracker
Remedial measure
3203 Malfunction cracker sensor
B42
3203
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Error: Sensor cracker position
detected
Meaning
Replace the KMC3
See Remedial action
Test engine at no load
Internal error in KMC3
Engine does not rotate
continuously
Turn Page please!
Remove engine and actuate
electrically, check whether it
rotates continuously. As long as
the engine is supplied with
current, a signal from the sensor
is expected. If this does not
occur, an error message is
issued.
Replace the sensor
Cracker position sensor defective Measure voltage on the sensor
Set supply voltage
Replace cabling and plugs
Check power supply voltage
Power supply voltage for
analogue sensors incorrect
Wenn der Motor dreht, muss die
Mechanik vom Cracker gereinigt
werden.
Wenn der Motor nicht dreht
siehe weitere Ursachen.
Replace the KMC3
Replace cabling or plugs
Remedial measure
Wiring to cracker position sensor Check wiring and plug
defective
Cracker-Motor ausbauen und im
ausgebauten Zustand testen
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Mechanik vom Cracker-Motor ist
zu schwergaengig
Check wiring and plug
Recommend Check
The wiring to the engine cracker
is defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 138/225
Status: 18.06.2014
3302 M9 counterblade left motor Error: Minimum current left
current too low
counterblade engine has fallen
below the normal level
3302
Meaning
3301 M9 counterblade left motor Error: Maximum current left
current too high
counterblade engine has been
exceeded
Description
Check counterblade engine left
See Remedial action
Left counterblade engine
defective
Internal error KMC3
Perform counterblade
diagnostics
Check plugs and contacts
Plug defective
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring
Short circuit in the left
counterblade engine wiring
Turn Page please!
Replace the KMC3
Replace left counterblade engine
Replace plug
Replace wiring
Run default setting parameters
Check parameters
Wrong parameter value for the
maximum current left
counterblade engine
Check whether corn conditioner
is mechanically jammed
Remedial measure
Remove the dirt; grease the
mechanics
Perform counterblade
diagnostics
Check that corn conditioner
moves easily
Recommend Check
Power consumption too high due Check mechanism for
to sluggish mechanics
contamination
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
3301
Error No.
Page No. 139/225
Description
Error: Maximum current right
counterblade engine has been
exceeded
Meaning
Check plugs and contacts
Test function of engine
See Remedial action
Check wiring
Plug defective
Left counterblade engine
defective
Internal error KMC3
Broken cable in the left
counterblade engine wiring
Run default setting parameters
Check parameters
Check wiring
Wrong parameter value for the
maximum current right
counterblade engine
Short circuit in the right
counterblade engine wiring
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring
Remove the dirt; grease the
mechanics
Replace wiring
Replace the KMC3
Replace left counterblade engine
Replace plug
Set output voltage
Run default setting parameters
Remedial measure
Power consumption too high due Check mechanics
to sluggish mechanics
Perform counterblade
diagnostics
Check output voltage
Output voltage defective
Determine via the terminal
Check parameters
Recommend Check
Wrong parameter value for the
minimum current left
counterblade engine
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
3303 Motor M10 counterblade
right maxiimum current
Status: 18.06.2014
3303
Error No.
Page No. 140/225
Description
Error: Maximum current right
counterblade engine has been
exceeded
Meaning
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Check parameters
Check wiring
Check plugs and contacts
Test function of engine
Wrong parameter value for the
maximum current right
counterblade engine
Short circuit in the right
counterblade engine wiring
Plug defective
Right counterblade engine
defective
sluggish mechanics
Power consumption too high due Check mechanics
to
Perform counterblade
diagnostics
Test function of the engine
Right counterblade engine
defective
Determine via the terminal
Check plugs and contacts
Recommend Check
Plug defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
3304 M10 counterblade right
motor current too high
Status: 18.06.2014
3304
Error No.
Page No. 141/225
Turn Page please!
Replace right counterblade
engine
Replace plug
Replace wiring
Run default setting parameters
Remove the dirt; grease the
mechanics
Replace the KMC3
Replace right counterblade
engine
Replace plug
Remedial measure
3306 Reserve Alarm
3306
Status: 18.06.2014
3305 M10 counterblade right
motor current too low
Description
Error: Minimum current right
counterblade engine has fallen
below the normal level
Meaning
Perform counterblade
diagnostics
Check parameters
Check output voltage
Check wiring
Check plugs and contacts
Test function of engine
See Remedial action
Wrong parameter value for the
minimum current right
counterblade engine
Output voltage defective
Broken cable in the right
counterblade engine wiring
Plug defective
Right counterblade engine
defective
Internal error KMC3
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Internal error KMC3
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
3305
Error No.
Page No. 142/225
Replace the KMC3
Replace right counterblade
engine
Replace plug
Replace wiring
Set output voltage
Run default setting parameters
Replace the KMC3
Remedial measure
3308 Valve coil Y12 main
coupling current too low
3400 Sensor B84 external
temperature signal too large
3308
3400
Status: 18.06.2014
3307 Reserve Alarm
Description
Error: Short circuit in external
temperature sensor (B84)
Error: Minimum current main
coupling valve has fallen below
the normal level
Meaning
Check wiring and plug
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Short circuit in the wiring to the
sensor (B84)
Check coil. The coil must have a
resistance of approx. 2.2 ohm
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace the KMC3
- Coil with the valve \"Y11 1/2
intake volume HA\" has been
interchanged. The valve Y11
\"1/2 intake volume HA is
connected to connection A from
the valve block. The main
coupling valve is connected to
connection B from the valve
block. The valve Y11 \"1/2 intake
volume HA\" has an internal
resistance of approx. 8 ohm.
- Change coil
Replace valve plug
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Remedial measure
Replace wiring
Perform work diagnostics
Recommend Check
Broken cable in the wiring for the Check wiring
main coupling valve
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
3307
Error No.
Page No. 143/225
3402 Sensor B85 hydraulic oil
temperature signal too large
3403 Sensor B85 hydraulic oil
temperature signal too low
3402
3403
Status: 18.06.2014
3401 Sensor B84 external
temperature signal too low
Description
Determined via the terminal
Error: Short circuit in hydraulic
oil temperature sensor (B85)
Error: External temperature
sensor (B84) has broken cable
Meaning
Perform engine diagnostics
Check wiring and plug
Perform engine diagnostics
Broken cable in the wiring to the
sensor (B85)
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace the KMC3
Internal error KMC3
See Remedy
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace the KMC3
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace the KMC3
Replace the sensor
Remedial measure
Hydraulic oil temperature sensor Measure sensor supply voltage
(B85) faulty
Check wiring and plug
Short circuit in the wiring to the
sensor (B85)
See Remedy
Internal error KMC3
Perform engine diagnostics
Measure sensor supply voltage
External temperature sensor
(B84) faulty
Determined via the terminal
Check wiring and plug
See Remedy
Internal error KMC3
Broken cable in the wiring to the
sensor (B84)
Measure sensor supply voltage
Recommend Check
External temperature sensor
(B84) faulty
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
3401
Error No.
Page No. 144/225
3404 Engine fan speed too high
3405 Engine fan speed too low
3404
3405
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Error: Engine fan speed below
minimum value
Check coil
See Remedy
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal error DIOM
Valve plug defective
Check valve plug and contacts
Broken cable in the
Check wiring
wiringHydraulic fan control valve
(Y82)
Perform engine diagnostics
Check valve plug and contacts
Valve plug defective
Determined via the terminal
Check wiring
Short circuit in the wiring to the
hydraulic fan control valve (Y82)
Perform engine diagnostics
Turn Page please!
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Replace wiring
Replace DIOM
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Replace the KMC3
See Remedy
Internal error KMC3
Remedial measure
Replace the sensor
Recommend Check
Hydraulic oil temperature sensor Measure sensor supply voltage
(B85) faulty
Possible Reason
Error: Maximum speed of engine Determined via the terminal
fan exceeded
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 145/225
3406 Sensor B36 grinding stone
left signal too large
3407 Sensor B36 grinding stone
left signal too low
3406
3407
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Error: Broken cable left position
grinding stone sensor
Error: Short circuit left position
grinding stone sensor
Meaning
Check wiring and plug
Measure voltage on the sensor
Check power supply voltage
Left grinding stone sensor
position defective
Power supply for digital sensors
incorrect
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Broken cable in the wiring to the
left position grinding stone
sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Left grinding stone sensor
position defective
Perform grinding diagnostics
Check wiring and plug
Short circuit in the wiring to the
left position grinding stone
sensor
Determine via the terminal
Perform grinding diagnostics
See Remedy
Internal error DIOM
Determine via the terminal
Check coil
Recommend Check
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 146/225
Turn Page please!
Set supply voltage
Replace the sensor
Change wiring and/or plugs
Replace the KMC3
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and/or plugs
Replace DIOM
Replace coil
Remedial measure
3408 Sensor B37 grinding stone
right signal too large
3409 Sensor B37 grinding stone
right signal too low
3408
3409
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Check wiring and plug
Measure voltage on the sensor
See Remedial action
Short circuit in the wiring to the
right position grinding stone
sensor
Left grinding stone sensor
position defective
Internal error KMC3
Check wiring and plug
Measure voltage on the sensor
Check power supply voltage
See Remedial action
Broken cable in the wiring to the
right position grinding stone
sensor
Right grinding stone position
sensor defective
Power supply for digital sensors
incorrect
Internal error KMC3
Perform grinding diagnostics
Perform grinding diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Internal error KMC3
Possible Reason
Error: Broken cable right position Determine via the terminal
grinding stone sensor
Error: Short circuit right position
grinding stone sensor
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 147/225
Replace the KMC3
Replace the sensor
Screw
Check wiring and/or plugs
Replace the KMC3
Replace the sensor
Change wiring and/or plugs
Replace the KMC3
Remedial measure
Status: 18.06.2014
3500 chute not in parking
position!
3500
Error: Discharge chute not in
parking position
3411 Sensor B59 maintenance
Error: Broken cable grinding
flap ginding device signal too low device maintenance flap sensor
closed
3411
Error: Short circuit grinding
device maintenance flap sensor
closed
Meaning
3410 Sensor B59 maintenance
flap ginding device signal too
large
Description
Check power supply voltage
See Remedial action
Power supply for digital sensors
incorrect
Internal error KMC3
Check whether discharge chute
is in parking position
Measure voltage on the sensor
Grinding device maintenance
flap closed sensor defective
The discharge chute is not in
parking position
Check wiring and plug
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Broken cable in the wiring to the
grinding device maintenance
flap sensor closed
Measure voltage on the sensor
Grinding device maintenance
flap closed sensor defective
Perform grinding diagnostics
Check wiring and plug
Short circuit in the wiring to the
grinding device maintenance
flap sensor closed
Determine via the terminal
Perform grinding diagnostics
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
3410
Error No.
Page No. 148/225
Turn Page please!
Move discharge chute into
parking position
Replace the KMC3
Set supply voltage
Replace the sensor
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Replace the KMC3
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and/or plugs
Remedial measure
Description
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2.
Run diagnostics via MiniDiag
See Remedy
Determined by the diagnostic
unit
Engine control of second engine
faulty
Perform engine diagnostics
Replace the sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Sensor for discharge chute
centre position or discharge
chute lower position defective
Replace engine control of second
engine
Consult KRONE Service
Replace KMC2
Replace cabling and/or plugs
Wiring to one of the sensors
Check wiring and plug
discharge chute centre position
or discharge chute lower position
defective
Remedial measure
Correct setting of the sensors
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Recommend Check
Discharge chute centre position Check setting of the sensors
or discharge chute lower position
sensor not adjusted correctly
Discharge chute centre or lower
position sensor defective
Possible Reason
Error: Speed of 2nd diesel engine Determined via the terminal
below minimum value
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
3501 Engine 2 speed too low!
Status: 18.06.2014
3501
Error No.
Page No. 149/225
3505 SmartDrive safety signal
missing
3505
Status: 18.06.2014
3504 Malfunction sensor B52
pendulum frame
Description
Replace wiring and/or plugs
Error in the wiring to the sensor
transverse incline position
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Check the Smart Drive power
supply and check the wiring
Check wiring
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
SmartDrive power supply
defective
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring of the safety signal
Internal error - Smart Drive
Internal error - KMC3.
Run travelling gear diagnostics
Set supply voltage
Check power supply voltage
Power supply voltage for
analogue sensors incorrect
Replace the KMC3
Replace Smart Drive
Replace wiring
Replace cabling to the
SmartDrive
Replace the KMC3
Replace the sensor
Sensor for transversal inclination Measure voltage on the sensor
position defective
Check wiring and plug
Set lifting gear
Sensor for transversal inclination Perform lifting gear diagnostics
position defective
Remedial measure
Make adjustment
Recommend Check
Sensor for transversal inclination Check setting on sensor
position not adjusted
Possible Reason
Error: Safety signal - Smart Drive Determine via the terminal
to KMC3
Error: Sensor for transversal
inclination position
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
3504
Error No.
Page No. 150/225
3508 Air filter contaminat.
Status: 18.06.2014
3508
Error: Air filter contamination
(800 and 1000 have 2 air filters)
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Short circuit in the wiring to
another KMC3 sensor
Internal error KMC3
Turn Page please!
Replace air filter contamination
sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Air filter contamination sensor
defective
If required, change air filter
Replace wiring to air filter
contamination sensor
Cleaning the Air Filter
Perform engine diagnostics
Have maintenance performed at
the intended factory, and have
the maintenance reminders reset
Replace the KMC3
Replace wiring
Replace fuel tank filling level
sensor
Change series resistor
Replace wiring to fuel tank filling
level sensor
Remedial measure
Short circuit/broken cable in
Check wiring to air filter
wiring for air filter contamination contamination sensor
sensor
Air filter dirty
Determine via the terminal
Check fuel tank filling level
sensor
Filling level fuel tank sensor
defective
Check whether the maintenance
interval has expired
Check series resistor
Protective resistor defective
3507 Diesel engine maintenance Note: Maintenance work must be The maintenance interval has
performed
elapsed
Check wiring to filling level fuel
tank sensor
Recommend Check
Error in the wiring of the filling
level fuel tank sensor
Possible Reason
3507
Error: Filling level fuel tank
sensor
Meaning
3506 Malfunction Sensor B44
tank sensor
Description
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
3506
Error No.
Page No. 151/225
3510 Fault suct. return filter 1
3510
Status: 18.06.2014
3509 Fill level hydraulic oil
control
Description
Error: Suction return filter 1
filling level
Error: Hydraulic tank filling level
Meaning
Check power supply voltage
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Power supply voltage for
analogue sensors incorrect
Short circuit in the wiring to
another KMC3 sensor
Internal error KMC3
Perform work diagnostics
Check hydraulic tank filling level
sensor
Hydraulic oil level sensor
defective
Determine via the terminal
Perform work diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
Clean suction return filter 1
Check wiring
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the hydraulic oil level
sensor
Suction return filter 1 dirty
Check hydraulic fluid level
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
The hydraulic oil level is too low
Internal error KMC3
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
3509
Error No.
Page No. 152/225
Turn Page please!
If required, change suction
return filter 1
Replace the KMC3
Replace wiring
Correct supply voltage
If required, replace hydraulic
tank filling level sensor
Replace wiring
If required, top up hydraulic fluid
Replace the KMC3
Remedial measure
Description
Perform work diagnostics
Check main distributor,
subdistributor and lubrication
points for blockage
Determine via the terminal
Jam in the system or at a
connected lubrication point.
Check grease filling level
LED +22-LD42 not lit
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Clean and, if required, replace
main distributor, subdistributor
and lubrication points
Add grease as described in the
BiG X operating instructions,
chapter Maintenance central
Lubrication System. See also
Central Lubrication System in the
operating instructions
See also Central Lubrication
System in the operating
instructions
Check fuse +22-F89
Replace the KMC3
Replace suction return filter 1
sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Suction return filter 1 sensor
defective
Remedial measure
Replace wiring
Recommend Check
Short circuit/broken cable in the Check wiring
wiring for the suction return filter
1 sensor
Possible Reason
Error: Central lubrication
Power supply voltage for central
IMPORTANT: All malfunction
lubrication defective
messages from the central
lubrication system must be
confirmed and deleted using the
DK key on the central lubrication
system. This will simultaneously
delete any intermediate
lubrication. Before deleting the
No grease present
error message, determine the
cause of the error, and eliminate
it. See also Central Lubrication
System in the operating
instructions.
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
3511 Malfunction M12 central
lubrication
Status: 18.06.2014
3511
Error No.
Page No. 153/225
Status: 18.06.2014
3600 Malfunction CAN1 between Error: CAN bus communication terminal - KMC3
KMC3 to terminal
3600
Error: Main gearbox oil pressure
3513 Oil pressure main gearbox
3513
Error: Hydraulic oil filling level
Meaning
3512 Malfunction B43 sensor
filling level hydraulic oil
Description
Replace the sensor
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
See Remedial action
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Internal error KMC3
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Replace the KMC3
Replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
LED +22-LD62 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check wiring
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD44 not lit
KMC3 power supply defective
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Check fuse +22-F62
Perform CAN diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
Check fuse +22-F44
Replace the sensor
Sensor defective
Measure voltage on the sensor
Replace wiring
Short circuit / broken cable in the Check wiring
wiring to the sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Sensor defective
Remedial measure
Replace wiring
Recommend Check
Short circuit / broken cable in the Check wiring
wiring to the sensor
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
3512
Error No.
Page No. 154/225
4001 Malfunction voltage 10V metal detetction
4002 Malfunction voltage 8V metal detetction
4001
4002
Status: 18.06.2014
4000 Metal detection
deactivated!!!
Description
Error: Power supply voltage too
low (<8V)
Error: Power supply voltage for
metal detection
Alarm: Metal detection has been
switched off
Meaning
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
Check fuse +22-F55
Test function of dynamo
Dynamo defective
Power supply voltage for metal
detection too low
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Battery dead
Turn Page please!
Change fuse +22-F55
Replace the metal detection
system
Replace the dynamo
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Charge indicator lamp defective
Replace cabling
Check the cables.
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Wiring defective
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Replace fuse +22-F55
Change metal detection settings
Remedial measure
Check fuse +22-F55
Perform metal detection
diagnostics
Recommend Check
Power supply voltage for metal
detection defective
Metal detection has been
switched off
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
4000
Error No.
Page No. 155/225
4010 Stop valve Y35 current too
low - metal detection
4010
Status: 18.06.2014
4003 Metal detetction
activated!!!
Description
Error: Broken cable - quick stop
valve
Note: Metal detection has been
turned on
Meaning
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
LED +22-LD71 glowing
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Quick stop valve - broken cable
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
none
Test function of dynamo
Dynamo defective
none
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Battery dead
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F71
none
Replace the metal detection
system
Replace the dynamo
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Charge indicator lamp defective
Replace cabling
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check the cables.
Check fuse +22-F63
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Recommend Check
Wiring defective
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
4003
Error No.
Page No. 156/225
4011 Stop valve Y35 current too
high - metal detection
4012 stop valve Y35 - metal
detetction
4011
4012
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Error: Overload quick stop valve
Error: Short circuit in quick stop
valve
Meaning
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check wiring to valve
Short circuit in the wiring for the
valve
LED +22-LD71 glowing
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Quick stop valve overload
LED +22-LD71 glowing
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
Error: Short circuit in quick stop
valve
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F71
Replace the metal detection
system
Replace coil
Replace wiring to valve
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F71
Replace the metal detection
system
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Remedial measure
Replace wiring to valve
Recommend Check
Broken cable in the wiring for the Check wiring to valve
valve
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 157/225
4032 internal malfunction metal detetction
4033 internal malfunction metal detetction
4032
4033
Status: 18.06.2014
4013 internal malfunction metal detetction
Description
Error: Metal detection internal
Error: Metal detection internal
Error: Quick stop valve output
defective
Meaning
Check parameters
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
Parameters for metal detection
system incorrect
Check parameters
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
Parameters for metal detection
system incorrect
Perform metal detection
diagnostics
Output defective
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
Check parameters
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Parameters for metal detection
system incorrect
Check wiring to valve
Recommend Check
Wiring to the valve defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
4013
Error No.
Page No. 158/225
Turn Page please!
Replace the metal detection
system
Set the factory settings of the
metal detection in the display of
the metal detection diagnostics
Replace the metal detection
system
Replace the metal detection
system
Set the factory settings of the
metal detection in the display of
the metal detection diagnostics
Metal detection internal error
Replace coil
Replace wiring to valve
Remedial measure
4048 internal malfunction metal detetction
4049 internal malfunction metal detetction
4048
4049
Status: 18.06.2014
4034 internal malfunction metal detetction
Description
Error: Metal detection internal
Error: Metal detection internal
Error: Metal detection internal
Meaning
Check parameters
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
Parameters for metal detection
system incorrect
Check parameters
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
Parameters for metal detection
system incorrect
Check parameters
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Parameters for metal detection
system incorrect
Metal detection internal error
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
4034
Error No.
Page No. 159/225
Turn Page please!
Set the factory settings of the
metal detection in the display of
the metal detection diagnostics
Replace the metal detection
system
Set the factory settings of the
metal detection in the display of
the metal detection diagnostics
Replace the metal detection
system
Set the factory settings of the
metal detection in the display of
the metal detection diagnostics
Replace the metal detection
system
Set the factory settings of the
metal detection in the display of
the metal detection diagnostics
Remedial measure
4220 Malfunction CAN2
communication - metal
detetction
4222 internal malfunction
(parameter error) - metal
detetction
4220
4222
Status: 18.06.2014
4050 internal malfunction metal detetction
Description
Error: Metal detection internal
Error: Metal detection internal
Error: Metal detection internal
Meaning
Check parameters
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
Parameters for metal detection
system incorrect
Check parameters
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
Parameters for metal detection
system incorrect
Check parameters
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Parameters for metal detection
system incorrect
Metal detection internal error
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
4050
Error No.
Page No. 160/225
Replace the metal detection
system
Set the factory settings of the
metal detection in the display of
the metal detection diagnostics
Replace the metal detection
system
Set the factory settings of the
metal detection in the display of
the metal detection diagnostics
Replace the metal detection
system
Set the factory settings of the
metal detection in the display of
the metal detection diagnostics
Replace the metal detection
system
Remedial measure
4301 METAL DETECTED!!!
4302 Malfunction metal
detetction
4301
4302
Status: 18.06.2014
4224 Internal malfunction metal detetction
Description
Possible Reason
Error: Fault, metal detection
Error: Metal detected in feed
drive
Check default setting
Check wiring between the metal
detection and the KMC2
Perform metal detection
diagnostics
Run KMC2 diagnostics
Incorrect default setting
Conditions output metal
detection, and input KMC2
deviate from each other
Metal detection output defective
KMC2 input defective
Check whether there is metal in
the feed drive
See Remedy
Metal detection internal error
Metal in feed drive
See Remedy
Perform metal detection
diagnostics
Recommend Check
Restore factory settings for
metal detection
Error: Fault in metal detection or Determined via the terminal
data saving
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
4224
Error No.
Page No. 161/225
Turn Page please!
Replace KMC2
Replace the metal detection
system
Perform test stop in metal
detection diagnostics display
Perform default setting in the
display in the metal detection
diagnostics
Remove metal and then reverse
feed drive/front attachment
Replace the metal detection
system
Restore factory settings for
metal detection in metal
detection diagnostics.
Remedial measure
4400 pressure sensor steer B63
signal too low
4401 pressure sensor steer B63
signal too high
4400
4401
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Error: Short circuit steering
wheel pressure sensor
Error: Broken cable steering
wheel pressure sensor
Meaning
Check plugs and contacts
Measure voltage on the sensor
See Remedial action
Sensor plug defective
Sensor defective
Internal error autopilot
Perform autopilot diagnostics
Check wiring to sensor
Broken cable in the wiring to the
sensor
Determine via the terminal
Check steering hydraulic
pressure (0 - 200 bar)
Steering hydraulic pressure
defective
Turn Page please!
Replace autopilot
Replace the sensor
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the sensor
Set steering hydraulic pressure
Check the function using manual Replacing the Pressure Sensor
operation on the hydraulic block
valve. Ensure easy motion and
no noises in the steering!
Steering pressure sensor
function defective
If required, replace wiring and
terminating resistors
Perform autopilot diagnostics
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN2 terminating resistors
defective
Replace wiring
Remedial measure
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring
Recommend Check
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN2 bus
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 162/225
Description
Check sensor plugs
Measure voltage on the sensor
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Sensor plug defective
Sensor defective
Short circuit in the wiring to
another autopilot sensor
Internal error autopilot
Check wiring to sensor
Check sensor plugs
Measure voltage on the sensor
Broken cable in the wiring to the
sensor
Sensor plug defective
Sensor defective
Perform autopilot diagnostics
Check wiring to sensor
Short circuit in the wiring to the
sensor
Turn Page please!
Replace the sensor
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the sensor
Replace autopilot
Replace wiring
Replace the sensor
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the sensor
Set steering hydraulic pressure
Check steering hydraulic
pressure (0 - 200 bar)
Steering hydraulic pressure
defective
Remedial measure
Check the function using manual Replace pressure sensor
operation on the hydraulic block
valve. Ensure easy motion and
no noises in the steering!
Recommend Check
Steering pressure sensor
function defective
Possible Reason
Error: Broken cable steering axle Determine via the terminal
angle sensor
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
4402 sensor steer.axis B64
signal too low
Status: 18.06.2014
4402
Error No.
Page No. 163/225
4404 sensor row-tracer B65
signal too low
4404
Status: 18.06.2014
4403 sensor steer.axis B64
signal too high
Description
Error: Broken cable sensor row
tracer left
Error: Short circuit steering axle
angle sensor
Meaning
Check sensor plugs
Measure voltage on the sensor
Sensor defective
See Remedial action
Internal error autopilot
Sensor plug defective
Check wiring
Short circuit in the wiring to
another autopilot sensor
Check wiring to sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Sensor defective
Broken cable in the wiring to the
sensor
Check sensor plugs
Sensor plug defective
Perform autopilot diagnostics
Check wiring to sensor
Short circuit in the wiring to the
sensor
Determine via the terminal
Perform autopilot diagnostics
Measure voltage on the sensor
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Internal error autopilot
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
4403
Error No.
Page No. 164/225
Turn Page please!
Replace the sensor
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the sensor
Replace autopilot
Replace wiring
Replace the sensor
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the sensor
Replace autopilot
Remedial measure
4406 sensor row-tracer B61
signal too low
4406
Status: 18.06.2014
4405 sensor row-tracer B65
signal too high
Description
Error: Broken cable sensor row
tracer right
Error: Short circuit sensor row
tracer left
Meaning
Check sensor plugs
Measure voltage on the sensor
Sensor defective
See Remedial action
Internal error autopilot
Sensor plug defective
Check wiring
Short circuit in the wiring to
another autopilot sensor
Check wiring to sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Sensor defective
Broken cable in the wiring to the
sensor
Check sensor plugs
Sensor plug defective
Perform autopilot diagnostics
Check wiring to sensor
Short circuit in the wiring to the
sensor
Determine via the terminal
Perform autopilot diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Internal error autopilot
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
4405
Error No.
Page No. 165/225
Turn Page please!
Replace the sensor
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the sensor
Replace autopilot
Replace wiring
Replace the sensor
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the sensor
Replace autopilot
Remedial measure
Status: 18.06.2014
Check sensor plugs
Measure voltage on the sensor
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Sensor plug defective
Sensor defective
Short circuit in the wiring to
another autopilot sensor
Internal error autopilot.
Replace valve plug
Check valve plug
Test coil
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Turn Page please!
Replace coil
Replace wiring to valve
Replace autopilot
Replace wiring
Replace the sensor
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the sensor
Replace autopilot
Remedial measure
Broken cable in the wiring for the Check wiring to valve
valve
Perform autopilot diagnostics
Check wiring to sensor
Short circuit in the wiring to the
sensor
4408 valve coil Y39 steering axis Error: Broken cable steering axle Determine via the terminal
left current too low
valve left
Perform autopilot diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Internal error autopilot
Possible Reason
4408
Error: Short circuit sensor row
tracer right
Meaning
4407 sensor row-tracer B61
signal too high
Description
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
4407
Error No.
Page No. 166/225
4411 valve coil Y40 steering axis Error: Short circuit steering axle
right current too high
valve right
Status: 18.06.2014
4411
Test coil
See Remedial action
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal error autopilot
See Remedial action
Internal error autopilot
Perform autopilot diagnostics
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Determine via the terminal
Replace valve plug
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Turn Page please!
Replace autopilot
Replace coil
Replace wiring to valve
Replace autopilot
Replace coil
Replace wiring to valve
Replace autopilot
Remedial measure
Broken cable in the wiring for the Check wiring to valve
valve
Perform autopilot diagnostics
Check wiring to valve
Short circuit in the wiring for the
valve
4410 valve coil Y40 steering axis Error: Broken cable steering axle Determine via the terminal
right current too low
valve right
Perform autopilot diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Internal error autopilot
Possible Reason
4410
Meaning
4409 valve coil Y39 steering axis Error: Short circuit steering axle
left current too high
valve left
Description
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
4409
Error No.
Page No. 167/225
4412 Malfunction power supply
voltage outputs - Autopilot
4412
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Error: Electronic voltage voltage out of range
Meaning
Turn Page please!
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Charge indicator lamp defective
Charge battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Replace cabling
Check the cables.
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Wiring defective
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check fuse +22-F76
LED +22-LD30 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F50
LED +22-LD50 not lit
Replace autopilot
Power supply voltage for
autopilot incorrect
See Remedial action
Internal error autopilot
Replace coil
Perform diagnostics for autopilot
and electronics
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Replace wiring to valve
Remedial measure
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring to valve
Recommend Check
Short circuit in the wiring for the
valve
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 168/225
4413 Malfunction sensor voltage
- Autopilot
4414 Malfunction reserve 0/14 Autopilot
4413
4414
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Error: Power supply voltage too
low
Meaning
Check wiring to the sensors
Measure voltage on the sensor
See Remedial action
Sensor defective
Internal error autopilot
See Remedial action
Internal error autopilot
Short circuit in the wiring to the
sensors
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000).
Perform diagnostics for autopilot
and electronics
While engine is running,
measure on batteries. Voltage
must not be over 14.8V
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Determine via the terminal
Test function of dynamo
Recommend Check
Dynamo defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 169/225
Replace autopilot
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring to the sensors
Replace autopilot
Replace battery change-over
relay
Replace the dynamo
Replace the dynamo
Remedial measure
4415 Malfunction reserve 0/15 Autopilot
4419 Internal malfunction Autopilot
4432 Malfunction CAN between
terminal - Autopilot
4415
4419
4432
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Error: CAN bus communication autopilot to KMC3.
Internal fault in the autopilot
computer
Meaning
Check wiring
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
See Remedial action
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Internal error autopilot
Replace autopilot
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check fuse +22-F76
LED +22-LD30 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F50
LED +22-LD50 not lit
Power supply voltage for
autopilot incorrect
Replace control unit
Remedial measure
Perform diagnostics for autopilot
and CAN
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
ISOBUS-ID is not available in the
control unit
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 170/225
5003 Diesel engine maintenance Note: Maintenance work must be The maintenance interval has
performed
elapsed
5004 Diesel engine maintenance Note: Maintenance work must be The maintenance interval has
performed
elapsed
5003
5004
Status: 18.06.2014
5002 KMC3 software wrong
machine type
KMC3 software - incorrect
machine type
Wrong software loaded
Wrong software loaded
5002
Error: Wrong software
Check whether the maintenance
interval has expired
Check whether the maintenance
interval has expired
Check software version
Check software version
See Remedial action
Internal error display
5001 KMC2 software wrong
machine type
Check battery voltage
Recommend Check
Discharge the backup battery
Possible Reason
5001
Error: Backup battery voltage
Meaning
5000 Display battery empty
Description
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
5000
Error No.
Page No. 171/225
Perform engine diagnostics
Have maintenance performed at
the intended factory, and have
the maintenance reminders reset
Perform engine diagnostics
Have maintenance performed at
the intended factory, and have
the maintenance reminders reset
Load new software
Load new software
Replace display
Replace backup battery in
display
Remedial measure
5006 Electronic Autopilot still
active
5007 Recalibrate cracker
5008 Memory for error list full
5006
5007
5008
Status: 18.06.2014
5005 Software inconsistent
Description
Attention: For the engine error
5008 please open engine error
list MAN MFR!
Recommend Check
See Remedy
Calibration required
See Remedy
Run grain conditioner diagnostics
See Remedy
Autopilot release switch turned
on
Check whether calibration is
required
Perform autopilot diagnostics
Determined via the terminal
One or more control units on the Display the software versions on
machine have an incorrect
the terminal of the machine on
software version.
the \"Software Info\" screen and
compare with the software
information in the
KroneDownloadCenter. The
control unit where the incorrect
software version has been
transferred, transfer
correspondingly new software
Possible Reason
Error: Wait queue for saving data Wait queue for saving data full
full
Note: Calibration work must be
performed
Note: Autopilot electronics still
active
The installed software versions
of the individual control unts are
not compatible.
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
5005
Error No.
Page No. 172/225
Consult KRONE Service
Perform calibration
Turn off Autopilot release switch
Remedial measure
See Remedy
Engine control faulty
Status: 18.06.2014
5012 Machine data inconsistent! The saved machine number or
A control unit has been replaced
the engine type in the individual
control units as well as in the
terminal are not compatible with
each other.
5012
Setting of diesel engine not
available
Enter engine type anew by using
the “Krone-Helper” PC
programme
Enter machine number anew
Check the machine number in
the terminal with the actual
machine number
Contact KRONE customer service
Check the set engine type in the
terminal of the machine
Check engine type setting in the
terminal
Run diagnostics using the engine Consult KRONE Service
diagnostic device
Determined by the diagnostic
unit
5011 Check diesel engine type
setting
Perform engine diagnostics
Clean the radiator
Determined via the terminal
5011
Fault: Diesel engine type lost
Run diagnostics using the engine Consult KRONE Service
diagnostic device
Determined by the diagnostic
unit
Replace engine control
Perform engine diagnostics
Remedial measure
Determined via the terminal
5010 Cooling water temperature Error: Cooling water temperature The cooling water temperature is Check radiator to ensure it is
too high
too high!
too high
clean
Error: Diesel engine oil pressure
has fallen below minimum value
5010
Recommend Check
5009 Diesel engine oil pressure
too low
Possible Reason
5009
Meaning
Description
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 173/225
7002 Malfunction acceleration
sensor left BXX - RockProtect
7003 Acceleration sensor B76
Error: Acceleration sensor right
right signal too low - RockProtect broken cable
7002
7003
Status: 18.06.2014
7001 Acceleration Sensor left
BXX overvoltage - RockProtect
7001
Error: RockProtect acceleration
sensor left
Error: Acceleration sensor left
voltage too high
Error: Acceleration sensor left
broken cable
7000 Acceleration sensor left
BXX signal too low - RockProtect
7000
Meaning
Description
Measure voltage on the sensor
Right acceleration sensor
defective
See Remedy
Internal error KMC4
(RockProtect)
Check wiring and plug
Measure sensor supply voltage
Acceleration sensor faulty
Broken cable in the wiring to the
right acceleration sensor
Run RockProtect diagnostics
Determined via the terminal
See Remedial action
Internal error - KMC4
Turn Page please!
Replace left sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC4 (RockProtect)
Replace the sensor
Replace KMC4
Replace left sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Replace KMC4
Left acceleration sensor
defective
See Remedial action
Internal error - KMC4
Replace left sensor
Replace wiring and/or plugs
Measure voltage on the sensor
Left acceleration sensor
defective
Renew wiring and plugs
Remedial measure
Short-circuit of operating voltage Check wiring and plug
for acceleration sensor left
Check wiring and plug
Recommend Check
Broken cable in the wiring to the
left acceleration sensor
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 174/225
7005 Malfunction acceleration
sensor B76 right - RockProtect
7006 Path sensor BXX signal too
low - RockProtect
7007 Path sensor BXX
overvoltage - RockProtect
7005
7006
7007
Status: 18.06.2014
7004 Overvoltage acceleration
sensor B76 signal too high RockProtect
Description
Measure sensor supply voltage
See Remedy
Acceleration sensor (B75) faulty
Internal error KMC4
(RockProtect)
Error: Path sensor voltage too
high
Measure voltage on the sensor
See Remedial action
Path sensor defective
Internal error - KMC4
Check wiring and plug
Run RockProtect diagnostics
Determined via the terminal
See Remedial action
Internal error - KMC4
Turn Page please!
Replace KMC4
Replace sensor
Replace wiring and/or plugs
Replace KMC4 (RockProtect)
Replace the sensor
Replace KMC4
Replace right sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Right acceleration sensor
defective
Replace KMC4
Remedial measure
Replace wiring and/or plugs
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Short-circuit of operating voltage Check wiring and plug
for acceleration sensor right
Internal error - KMC4
Possible Reason
Error: Broken cable - path sensor Broken cable in the wiring to the
path sensor
Error: RockProtect acceleration
sensor right
Error: Acceleration sensor right
voltage too high
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
7004
Error No.
Page No. 175/225
7009 Stop valve Y35 current too
low - RockProtect
7010 Stop valve Y35 current too
high - RockProtect
7009
7010
Status: 18.06.2014
7008 Path sensor BXX
Malfunction - RockProtect
Description
Error: Maximum valve current
exceeded
Error: Valve current is below the
minimum level
Error: RockProtect distance
sensor
Meaning
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Internal error - KMC4
Short circuit in the wiring for the
valve
Check coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring
Internal error - KMC4
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Check valve plugs and contacts
Replace KMC4 (RockProtect)
Valve plug defective
See Remedy
Internal error KMC4
(RockProtect)
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring
Measure voltage on sensor
Distance sensor (B72) faulty
Broken cable in the wiring for the Check wiring
valve
Run RockProtect diagnostics
Determined via the terminal
See Remedial action
Internal error - KMC4
Replace KMC4
Replace sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Path sensor defective
Remedial measure
Replace wiring and plugs
Recommend Check
Short-circuit of operating voltage Check wiring and plug
path sensor right
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
7008
Error No.
Page No. 176/225
Status: 18.06.2014
Dynamo defective
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Check the cables.
Check charge indicator lamp
Turn Page please!
Replace the dynamo
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Charge indicator lamp defective
Charge battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Replace wiring
Check wiring
Replace cabling
Replace KMC4 (RockProtect)
Replace KMC4
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Remedial measure
Short circuit in the wiring to a
12V sensor
Check the cables.
See Remedy
Internal error KMC4
(RockProtect)
See Remedial action
Internal error - KMC4
Run RockProtect diagnostics
Check coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Run RockProtect diagnostics
Check valve plugs and contacts
Recommend Check
Valve plug defective
Possible Reason
Error: Voltage in KMC4 is too low Wiring defective
7012 Undervoltage electronics RockProtect
7012
Meaning
7011 Malfunction valve coil Y35 - Determined via the terminal
RockProtect
Description
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
7011
Error No.
Page No. 177/225
7014 Undervoltage sensors RockProtect
7014
Status: 18.06.2014
7013 Overvoltage electronics RockProtect
Description
Test dynamo
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
See Remedial action
Dynamo defective
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Internal error - KMC4
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Turn Page please!
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or check
cabling
Charge battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Charge indicator lamp defective
Replace wiring
Replace cabling
Replace KMC4
Replace battery change-over
relay
Replace the dynamo
Replace the dynamo
Replace KMC4
Remedial measure
Wiring to a 12 V sensor defective Check wiring
Check the cables.
While engine is running,
measure on batteries. Voltage
must not be over 14.8V
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Internal error - KMC4
Possible Reason
Error: Voltage on sensors too low Wiring defective
Error: Voltage in KMC4 is too
high
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
7013
Error No.
Page No. 178/225
7016 Rock detected!!
8000 ensilage tank empty
7016
8000
Status: 18.06.2014
7015 Overvoltage sensors RockProtect
Description
Error: silage tank empty
Error: Rock detected in the feed
drive
Error: Voltage on sensors too
high
Meaning
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
See Remedial action
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Internal error - KMC4.
Check tank
Measure sensor supply voltage
Check wiring and plug
Silage tank empty
Sensor (B60) defective
Wiring faulty
Check whether stone in feed
drive
Test dynamo
Dynamo defective
Rock in feed drive
While engine is running,
measure on batteries. Voltage
must not be over 14.8V
See Remedial action
Internal error - KMC4
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Recommend Check
Dynamo defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
7015
Error No.
Page No. 179/225
Turn Page please!
If required, replace wiring and/or
plug
Replace sensor (B60)
Fill tank
Remove rock and then reverse
feed drive/front attachment
Replace KMC4
Replace battery change-over
relay
Replace the dynamo
Replace the dynamo
Replace KMC4
Replace the dynamo
Remedial measure
9611 Overvoltage - AutoScan
9611
Status: 18.06.2014
8001 Error ensilage pump
Description
Error: Power supply voltage too
high
Error: Silage agent pump
defective
Meaning
Test function of dynamo
See Remedy
Internal error KMC3
Dynamo defective
Measure sensor supply voltage
Silage agent flow sensor (B77)
faulty
While engine is running,
measure on batteries. Voltage
must not be over 14.8V
Check wiring
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for the silage agent flow
sensor (B77)
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Check silage agent pump
Silage agent pump faulty
Perform AutoScan diagnostics
Check wiring
Short circuit/broken cable in the
silage agent pump wiring
Determine via the terminal
Perform work diagnostics
See Remedy
Recommend Check
Determined via the terminal
Internal error KMC2/3
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
8001
Error No.
Page No. 180/225
Turn Page please!
Replace the dynamo
Replace the dynamo
Replace the KMC3
Replace sensor (B77)
Replace wiring
Replace silage agent pump
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2/3
Remedial measure
Description
Error: Supply voltage too low (
Meaning
Replace AutoScan
Replace battery change-over
relay
Remedial measure
Run AutoScan diagnostics.
Check fuse +22-F58
Determine via the terminal
AutoScan power supply voltage
too low
Turn Page please!
Change fuse +22-F58
bis Mat.-Nr 20 080 287 2 ==>
SW AutoScan = 150 200 162-03
aufspielen. Eine Neukalibrierung
ist mit der MAT-Nr 20 080 287 2
nicht notwendig.
bis Mat.-Nr 20 080 287 1 ==>
SW AutoScan = 150 200 162-01
aufspielen. (Ist die SW-Version
150 200 162-02 auf dem
AutoScan - Sensor mit der MATNr. 20 080 287 1 aufgespielt
gewesen ist eine Kalibrierung
vom Sensor notwendig. Dazu
muss der Sensor zu Krone
zurueck)
Software-Version vom AutoScan- SW-Version in Abhaengigkeit der
Sensor im Terminal der Maschine vorhandenen Hardware-Version
kontrollieren
(Mat.-Nr,) vom AutoScan-Sensor
aufspielen.
See Remedial action
Internal error - AutoScan
Falsche Software-Version im
AutoScan-Sensor
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Recommend Check
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
9612 Undervoltage 10V AutoScan
Status: 18.06.2014
9612
Error No.
Page No. 181/225
Description
Error: Supply voltage too low (
Meaning
Test function of dynamo
See Remedial action
Dynamo defective
Internal error - AutoScan
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD63 not lit.
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F63
Check fuse +22-F58
AutoScan power supply voltage
too low
Change fuse +22-F58
Perform AutoScan diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
Replace AutoScan
Replace the dynamo
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Charge indicator lamp defective
Charge battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Replace cabling
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check the cables.
Check fuse +22-F63
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Recommend Check
Wiring defective
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
9613 Undervoltage 8V AutoScan
Status: 18.06.2014
9613
Error No.
Page No. 182/225
Status: 18.06.2014
9616 Malfunction LED 2 AutoScan
9616
Error: AutoScan LED2 defective
Error: AutoScan LED1 defective
9615 Malfunction LED 1 AutoScan
9615
Meaning
9614 Glass scratched - AutoScan Error: AutoScan glass scratched
Description
Perform AutoScan diagnostics
Test function of LED
AutoScan LED 1 defective
Determine via the terminal
Perform AutoScan diagnostics
Check AutoScan for scratches
AutoScan glass scratched
Determine via the terminal
Perform AutoScan diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error - AutoScan
Determine via the terminal
Test function of dynamo
Dynamo defective
Turn Page please!
Replace AutoScan
Replace AutoScan
Replace AutoScan
Replace the dynamo
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Charge indicator lamp defective
Charge battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Replace cabling
Remedial measure
Check the cables.
Recommend Check
Wiring defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
9614
Error No.
Page No. 183/225
Status: 18.06.2014
9907 Malfunction CAN2 between Error: CAN bus communication KMC2 and Rock Protect
RockProtect to KMC2
9907
Error: AutoScan wrong
parameters
9618 Internal Malfunction
(parameter error) - AutoScan
9618
Error: AutoScan photo diode
defective
Meaning
9617 Malfunction Photo diode AutoScan
Description
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F63
Check fuse for KMC4
(RockProtect)
LED KMC4 not lit/not flashing
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check fuse +22-F39
LED +22-LD6 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F40
LED +22-LD4 not lit
RockProtect supply voltage
faulty
Program control unit
In the menu - Info software
versions - check the software
version of the control units
Control unit not programmed
Correct parameters
Replace AutoScan
Replace AutoScan
Remedial measure
Run diagnostics for RockProtect
and CAN
Check parameters
See Remedial action
Test function of LED
Recommend Check
Determined via the terminal
Wrong AutoScan parameters
AutoScan photo diode defective
AutoScan LED 2 defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
9617
Error No.
Page No. 184/225
Status: 18.06.2014
9911 Malfunction CAN2 between Error: CAN bus communication KMC2 and Autoscan
AutoScan to terminal
9911
Fault: Communication between
KMC2 and NIR sensor
Meaning
9910 Malfunction
CAN2-communication between
KMC2 - NIR-Sensor (A37)
Description
Control unit not programmed
AutoScan selected, even though
there is no AutoScan available
Check whether Autoscan is
available
See remedy
Internal error - KMC2 or NIR
sensor
Turn Page please!
Perform CAN diagnostics
Deactivate AutoScan in the
display
Replace KMC2 or NIR sensor
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check/replace fuse F41 on relay
circuit board console
Replace wiring and plug
Check LED LD7 on relay circuit
board console
Power supply NIR sensor
defective
Replace KMC4 (RockProtect)
Replace wiring
Check fuse +22-F92
Remedial measure
Short circuit / broken cable in the Check wiring and plug
wiring for the CAN2 bus
Carry out CAN diagnostics
See Remedy
Internal error KMC4
(RockProtect)
Determination via terminal
Check wiring and resistance
values.
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Recommend Check
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN2 bus
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
9910
Error No.
Page No. 185/225
Description
Meaning
LED +22-LD5.1/LD6 on relay
circuit board console is not lit
LED +22-LD4/LD5 on relay
circuit board console is not lit
Check wiring and resistances
Power supply voltage Crop
Control defective
Switching voltage Crop Control
defective
Short circuit/cable break in the
wiring CAN2 bus
See Remedial action
Internal error - AutoScan
Carry out CAN diagnostics
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN2 terminating resistors
defective
Determination via terminal
Check wiring
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring
Check fuse +22-F40
Replace fuse +22-F39
Replace AutoScan
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN2 bus
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Change fuse +22-F58
Program control unit
Remedial measure
Check fuse +22-F58
In the menu - Info software
versions - check the software
version of the control units
Recommend Check
AutoScan power supply voltage
defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
9912 Malfunction CAN2 between Error: CAN bus communication KMC2 and Crop Control
Crop Control to KMC2
Status: 18.06.2014
9912
Error No.
Page No. 186/225
Description
Meaning
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
See Remedial action
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Internal joystick error
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check wiring
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Check fuse +22-F63
Check fuse +22-F57
Joystick power supply defective
Replace joystick
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Check fuse +22-F65
Change fuse +22-F57
In the menu - Info software
versions - check the software
version of the control units
Control unit not programmed
Program control unit
Remedial measure
Perform CAN diagnostics
Replace Crop Control computer
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Internal error Crop Control
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
9920 Malfunction CAN1 between Error: CAN bus communication terminal and joystick
joystick to terminal
Status: 18.06.2014
9920
Error No.
Page No. 187/225
Status: 18.06.2014
9922 Malfunction CAN2 between Error: CAN bus communication KMC2 and manual operation.
manual operation to KMC2
9922
Meaning
9921 Malfunction CAN1 between Error: CAN bus communication terminal and CU
CU to terminal
Description
Perform CAN diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error, operating panel
Determined via the terminal
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Turn Page please!
Replace operating panel
If required, change wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check wiring
Check fuse +22-F64
LED +22-LD64 not lit
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Check fuse +22-F62
LED +22-LD62 not lit
Change fuse +22-F48.1
Check fuse +22-F48.1
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Change fuse +22-F47
Check fuse +22-F47
Power supply voltage operating
panel defective
Program control unit
In the menu - Info software
versions - check the software
version of the control units
Control unit not programmed
Remedial measure
Perform CAN diagnostics
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
9921
Error No.
Page No. 188/225
Description
Meaning
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Short circuit / broken cable in the Check wiring
wiring for the CAN3 bus
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD52 not lit
Power supply voltage EMR
defective
Check fuse +22-F52
Perform CAN diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
Replace wiring
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check wiring and resistance
values.
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN2 bus
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Program control unit
Remedial measure
Replace fuse +22-F56
In the menu - Info software
versions - check the software
version of the control units
Recommend Check
Power supply voltage for manual Check fuse +22-F56
operation defective
Control unit not programmed
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
9923 Malfunction CAN3 between Error: CAN bus communication terminal and EMR
EMR to terminal
Status: 18.06.2014
9923
Error No.
Page No. 189/225
Description
Meaning
Check wiring
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
See Remedial action
CAN2 terminating resistors
defective
Metal detection internal error
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN2 bus
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Replace the metal detection
system
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Replace fuse +22-F55
Check fuse +22-F55
Power supply voltage for metal
detection defective
Program control unit
In the menu - Info software
versions - check the software
version of the control units
Control unit not programmed
Replace the EMR
Perform CAN diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal EMR error
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Remedial measure
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
Recommend Check
CAN3 terminating resistors
defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
9924 Malfunction CAN2 between Error: CAN bus communication KMC2 and metal detection
metal detection to terminal
Status: 18.06.2014
9924
Error No.
Page No. 190/225
Status: 18.06.2014
9926 Malfunction CAN3 between Error: CAN bus communication terminal - ADM1/MFR
ADM1 to terminal
9926
Meaning
9925 Malfunction CAN1 between Error: CAN bus communication terminal and DIOM
DIOM to terminal
Description
Replace DIOM
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Turn Page please!
In der Fehlerliste vom
Siehe Fehler 5019 in der
Dieselmotor kontrollieren, ob die Fehlerliste vom Dieselmotor
Fehlermeldung 5019 auch
Parallel anliegt. Liegt die
Fehlermeldung 5019 parallel an,
liegt die Stoerung an der MFR,
EDC Master oder in der CANVerbindung zwischen MFR und
EDC Master
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Nur bei Maschinen mit MANMotor: Die Kommunikation
zwischen MFR und EDC - Master
ist fehlerhaft
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Replace wiring
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check wiring
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check fuse +22-F73
LED +22-LD27 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F59
LED +22-LD59 not lit
Power supply voltage DIOM
defective
Remedial measure
Perform CAN diagnostics
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
9925
Error No.
Page No. 191/225
Description
Meaning
Replace fuse +22-F68
Check fuse +22-F70
See Remedial action
Check fuse +22-F68
LED +22-LD17 not lit
Internal error ADM1
Power supply voltage ADM 1
defective
Check fuse +22-F69
Check fuse +22-F66
LED +22-LD16 not lit
Power supply voltage ADM 2
defective
Turn Page please!
Change fuse +22-F66
Perform CAN diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
Replace ADM1
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Measure resistors
CAN3 terminating resistors
defective
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Replace wiring
Check fuse +22-F64
LED +22-LD64 not lit
Short circuit / broken cable in the Check wiring
wiring for the CAN3 bus
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Remedial measure
Perform CAN diagnostics
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
9927 Malfunction CAN3 between Error: CAN bus communication terminal - ADM engine 2
ADM2 to terminal (800 and
1000)
Status: 18.06.2014
9927
Error No.
Page No. 192/225
Description
Error: Restart hardware
SmartDrive
Meaning
See Remedial action
Internal error ADM2
LED+22-LD102 not lit
Safety output for travelling gear
of KMC3 defective.
Turn Page please!
Check the safety output of KMC3
(output is always active with
engine shut off) and check wiring
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check wiring and plug
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Wiring defective.
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F77
LED +22-LD31 not lit
SmartDrive power supply
defective
Replace ADM2
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN3 terminating resistors
defective
Select correct machine type
Remedial measure
Replace wiring
Check machine type in the
display
Recommend Check
Short circuit / broken cable in the Check wiring
wiring for the CAN3 bus
Wrong machine type selected
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
9942 hardware restart to
SmartDrive/DRC
Status: 18.06.2014
9942
Error No.
Page No. 193/225
9946 hardware restart Autopilot
9946
Status: 18.06.2014
9945 hardware restart KMC2
Description
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check fuse +22-F76
LED +22-LD30 not lit
Replace KMC2
Check fuse +22-F50
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
LED +22-LD50 not lit
Check wiring and plug
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Wiring faulty
Check fuse 22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F61
Replace SmartDrive
LED +22-LD61 not lit
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Check the power supply voltage
on the SmartDrive
Remedial measure
KMC2 power supply defective
LED+22-LD116 not flashing
Recommend Check
Life signal from SmartDrive
faulty
Possible Reason
Error: Restart autopilot hardware Power supply voltage for
autopilot incorrect
Error: Restart KMC2 hardware
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
9945
Error No.
Page No. 194/225
9950 Restart hardware NIRSensor (A37)
9950
Status: 18.06.2014
9947 hardware restart
RockProtect
Description
Fault: Electrical power supply
interrupted, restart of the
hardware
Error: Restart RockProtect
hardware
Meaning
Check LED LD7 on relay circuit
board console
Check wiring and plug
Power supply NIR sensor
defective
Wiring faulty
See Remedy
Internal error KMC4
(RockProtect)
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Turn Page please!
Check/replace fuse F41 on relay
circuit board console
Replace KMC4 (RockProtect)
If required, replace wiring and/or
plug
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Check wiring and plug
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check fuse +22-F39
LED +22-LD6 not lit
Wiring faulty
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F40
Replace autopilot
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD4 not lit
See Remedial action
Internal error autopilot
RockProtect supply voltage
faulty
Check wiring and plug
Recommend Check
Wiring faulty
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
9947
Error No.
Page No. 195/225
9951 hardware restart maturity
detection
9952 hardware restart
CropControl
9953 hardware restart KMC3
9951
9952
9953
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Error: Restart KMC3 hardware
Error: Power supply interrupted,
restart of hardware
Error: Restart AutoScan
hardware
Meaning
LED +22-LD44 not lit
LED +22-LD62 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Replace Crop Control computer
Internal error Crop Control
KMC3 power supply defective
LED +22-LD5.1/LD6 on relay
circuit board console is not lit
See Remedial action
Internal error - AutoScan
Power supply voltage Crop
Control defective
Check wiring and plug
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F62
Check fuse +22-F44
Replace fuse +22-F39
Replace AutoScan
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Wiring faulty
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Change fuse +22-F58
Replace NIR sensor
Replace wiring and plug
Remedial measure
Check fuse +22-F58
See remedy
Recommend Check
AutoScan power supply voltage
defective
Internal error NIR sensor
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 196/225
9961 hardware restart CU
9961
Status: 18.06.2014
9960 hardware restart joystick
Description
Error: Restart CU hardware
Error: Restart joystick hardware
Meaning
Check fuse +22-F47
See Remedial action
Internal joystick error
Power supply voltage CU
defective
Check wiring and plug
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Wiring faulty
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F48.1
Change fuse +22-F47
Replace joystick
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Check fuse +22-F65
Change fuse +22-F57
Replace the KMC3
Check fuse +22-F57
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Check fuse +22-F92
Remedial measure
Joystick power supply defective
Check wiring and plug
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Recommend Check
Wiring faulty
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
9960
Error No.
Page No. 197/225
Description
Error: Restart manual operation
hardware
Meaning
See Remedial action
Internal error, manual operation
Replace manual operation
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check wiring and plug
Check fuse +22-F63
Check fuse +4-F33
Change fuse +22-F56
Replace operating panel
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Wiring faulty
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
LED +4-LD33 not lit
Power supply voltage for manual Check fuse +22-F56
operation defective
See Remedial action
Internal error, operating panel
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Check fuse +22-F64
LED +22-LD64 not lit
Check wiring and plug
Check fuse +22-F62
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD62 not lit
Recommend Check
Wiring faulty
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
9962 hardware restart manual
operatation
Status: 18.06.2014
9962
Error No.
Page No. 198/225
9964 hardware restart met.
detect.
9965 Restart hardware DIOM
9964
9965
Status: 18.06.2014
9963 hardware restart EMR
Description
Error: Restart DIOM hardware
Error: Restart metal detection
hardware
Error: Restart EMR hardware
Meaning
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F73
Replace the metal detection
system
LED +22-LD27 not lit
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Check fuse +22-F59
Check wiring and plug
Wiring faulty
Check fuse +22-F63
Check fuse +22-F55
Replace the EMR
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
LED +22-LD59 not lit
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Power supply voltage DIOM
defective
LED +16-LD1 not lit
See Remedial action
Internal EMR error
Power supply voltage for metal
detection defective
Check wiring and plug
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Wiring faulty
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F52
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD52 not lit
Recommend Check
Power supply voltage EMR
defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
9963
Error No.
Page No. 199/225
Description
Error: Restart ADM1 hardware
Meaning
Wiring faulty
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Power supply voltage ADM1
defective
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Turn Page please!
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Check fuse +22-F64
LED +22-LD64 not lit
Check wiring and plug
Check fuse +22-F63
Check fuse +22-F70
LED +22-LD17 not lit
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Change fuse +22-F68
Replace DIOM
Check fuse +22-F68
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check wiring and plug
Check fuse +22-F60
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Recommend Check
Wiring faulty
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
9966 hardware restart ADM1 /
MFR
Status: 18.06.2014
9966
Error No.
Page No. 200/225
9982 CAN1-Communication
SmartDrive/DRC restored
9985 CAN1-Communication
KMC2 restored
9982
9985
Status: 18.06.2014
9967 hardware restart ADM
engine2
Description
Error: Error - interruption of the
CAN communication to KMC2
Error: Interruption in CAN
communication to SmartDrive
Error: Restart ADM2 hardware
(800 and 1000)
Meaning
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Check wiring
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Check wiring
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
See Remedial action
Internal error ADM2
Turn Page please!
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Replace SmartDrive
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Replace ADM2
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Check fuse +22-F69
LED +22-LD16 not lit
Check wiring and plug
Change fuse +22-F66
Replace ADM1
Remedial measure
Check fuse +22-F66
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Wiring faulty
Power supply voltage ADM2
defective
Internal error ADM1
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
9967
Error No.
Page No. 201/225
Status: 18.06.2014
9991 CAN-Communication
Error: Interruption in CAN
AutoSCAN-Sensor (A40) restored communication to AutoScan
9991
Error: Interruption in CAN
communication to RockProtect
9987 CAN-Communication
RockProtect restored
9987
Error: Interruption in CAN
communication to autopilot
Meaning
9986 CAN1-Communication
Autopilot restored
Description
Check wiring
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
See Remedial action
CAN2 terminating resistors
defective
Internal error - AutoScan
See Remedial action
Internal RockProtect error
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN2 bus
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN2 terminating resistors
defective
See Remedial action
Internal error autopilot
Check wiring
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN2 bus
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Internal error KMC2
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
9986
Error No.
Page No. 202/225
Replace AutoScan
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Replace RockProtect
Replace wiring and terminating
resistors
Replace wiring
Replace autopilot
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2
Remedial measure
9993 CAN1-Communication
KMC3 restored
10000 Overvoltage 12V - NIR
sensor
9993
10000
Status: 18.06.2014
9992 CAN-Communication
CropControl resored
Description
Fault: 12V power supply voltage
is too high
Error: Error - interruption of the
CAN communication to KMC3
The previously detected faulty
communication between the
both control units KMC2 and
CropControl could be reestablished.
Meaning
Check LED LD7 on relay circuit
board console
Measure on batteries while the
engine is running. The voltage
may not exceed 14,8V
Check the dynamo
See remedy
Power supply NIR sensor
defective
Controller of the dynamo is
defective
Dynamo defective
Internal error NIR sensor
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Carry out moisture measuring
diagnostics
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Determination via terminal
Check wiring
Check the occurence of error
message 9912
Recommend Check
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Communication KMC2 to Crop
Control has previously been
interrupted
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
9992
Error No.
Page No. 203/225
Replace NIR sensor
Replace the dynamo
Replace the dynamo
Check/replace fuse F41 on relay
circuit board console
Read voltage values
Replace the KMC3
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
See error message 9912
Remedial measure
10002 Internal Malfunction - NIR
sensor
10003 Internal Malfunction - NIR
sensor
10004 Internal Malfunction - NIR
sensor
10005 Internal Malfunction - NIR
sensor
10002
10003
10004
10005
Status: 18.06.2014
10001 Undervoltage 12V - NIR
sensor
Description
Possible Reason
Fault: internal malfunction NIR
sensor, no troubleshooting
possible
Fault: internal malfunction NIR
sensor, no troubleshooting
possible
Fault: internal malfunction NIR
sensor, no troubleshooting
possible
Fault: internal malfunction NIR
sensor, no troubleshooting
possible
Check LED LD4 on relay circuit
board console
Check the dynamo
See remedy
Power supply voltage additional
electrical system defective
Dynamo defective
Internal error NIR sensor
Internal error NIR sensor
Internal error NIR sensor
Internal error NIR sensor
See remedy
See remedy
See remedy
See remedy
Check LED LD7 on relay circuit
board console
Power supply NIR sensor
defective
Internal error NIR sensor
\"Check battery voltage/
Check battery voltage\"
Carry out moisture measuring
diagnostics
Recommend Check
Discharge battery
Fault: 12 V power supply voltage Determination via terminal
is too low
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
10001
Error No.
Page No. 204/225
Replace NIR sensor
Replace NIR sensor
Replace NIR sensor
Replace NIR sensor
Replace NIR sensor
Replace the dynamo
Check/replace fuse F40 on relay
circuit board console
Check/replace fuse F41 on relay
circuit board console
Charge battery/ replace battery
Read voltage values
Remedial measure
10006 Internal Malfunction - NIR
sensor
10100 Malfunction Temperature
element - NIR sensor
10101 Internal Malfunction - NIR
sensor
10102 Internal Malfunction - NIR
sensor
10103 Internal Malfunction - NIR
sensor
10107 Malfunction calibration NIR sensor
15000 CAN1-Communication
Joystick restored
10006
10100
10101
10102
10103
10107
15000
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Error: Interruption in CAN
communication to Joystick
Fault: Automatic calibration
failed
Fault: internal malfunction NIR
sensor, no troubleshooting
possible
Fault: internal malfunction NIR
sensor, no troubleshooting
possible
Fault: internal malfunction NIR
sensor, no troubleshooting
possible
Fault: Power supply NIR sensor
defective
Fault: internal malfunction NIR
sensor, no troubleshooting
possible
Meaning
Check wiring
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
See remedy
Internal error NIR sensor
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Carry out moisture measuring
diagnostics
See remedy
See remedy
Determination via terminal
Internal error NIR sensor
Internal error NIR sensor
See remedy
See remedy
Internal error NIR sensor
Internal error NIR sensor
Carry out moisture measuring
diagnostics
See remedy
Recommend Check
Determination via terminal
Internal error NIR sensor
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 205/225
Turn Page please!
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Replace NIR sensor
Carry out restart of the machine
Replace NIR sensor
Replace NIR sensor
Replace NIR sensor
Replace NIR sensor
Check temperature display
Replace NIR sensor
Remedial measure
15001 CAN1-Communication CU
restored
15002 CAN-Communication
manual operation restored
15003 CAN-Communication EMR
restored
15001
15002
15003
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Error: Interruption in CAN
communication to EMR
Error - interruption of the CAN
communication to the manual
operation.
Error: Interruption in CAN
communication to CU
Meaning
See Remedial action
Internal EMR error
Replace the EMR
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN3 terminating resistors
defective
Replace manual operation
Replace wiring
See Remedial action
Internal error, manual operation
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Replace operating panel
Replace wiring
Replace joystick
Remedial measure
Short circuit / broken cable in the Check wiring
wiring for the CAN3 bus
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN2 terminating resistors
defective
See Remedial action
Internal error, operating panel
Check wiring
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN2 bus
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Internal joystick error
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 206/225
15005 CAN1-Communication
DIOM restored
15006 CAN-Communication
ADM/MFR restored
15005
15006
Status: 18.06.2014
15004 CAN-Communication
metal detection restored
Description
Error: Interruption in CAN
communication to ADM1
Error: Interruption in CAN
communication to DIOM
Error: Interruption in CAN
communication to metal
detection
Meaning
See Remedial action
Internal error ADM1
Replace ADM1
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN3 terminating resistors
defective
Replace DIOM
Replace wiring
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Replace the metal detection
system
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Remedial measure
Short circuit / broken cable in the Check wiring
wiring for the CAN3 bus
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
Check wiring
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN2 terminating resistors
defective
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Check wiring
Recommend Check
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN2 bus
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
15004
Error No.
Page No. 207/225
Status: 18.06.2014
Error: Communication - DIOM to
CAN
16000 DIOM CAN1
communication - DIOM
16000
Meaning
15007 CAN-Communication ADM Error: Interruption in CAN
engine 2 restored
communication - ADM2 to
terminal (800 and 1000)
Description
See Remedial action
Internal error ADM2
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Turn Page please!
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check wiring
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD27 not lit
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check fuse +22-F73
LED +22-LD59 not lit
Power supply voltage DIOM
defective
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F59
Perform CAN diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
Replace ADM2
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN3 terminating resistors
defective
Remedial measure
Replace wiring
Recommend Check
Short circuit / broken cable in the Check wiring
wiring for the CAN3 bus
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
15007
Error No.
Page No. 208/225
Status: 18.06.2014
Error: Internal voltage in DIOM
incorrect
16002 Malfunction internal
voltage - DIOM
16002
Meaning
16001 Malfunction temperature - Error: DIOM temperature too
DIOM
high
Description
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Replace DIOM
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Check wiring and plug
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check fuse +22-F73
LED +22-LD27 not lit
Wiring faulty
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F59
Run electronics diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
Replace DIOM
Allow DIOM to cool down
Replace DIOM
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD59 not lit
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Internal voltage in DIOM
incorrect
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
DIOM has overheated
Internal error DIOM
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
16001
Error No.
Page No. 209/225
Status: 18.06.2014
16004 Malfunction total current - Error: DIOM overall current
DIOM
incorrect
16004
Possible Reason
Check fuse +22-F73
LED +22-LD59 not lit
LED +22-LD27 not lit
DIOM overall current incorrect
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F59
Run electronics diagnostics
Replace DIOM
Determine via the terminal
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Check wiring and plug
Check fuse +22-F63
Check fuse +22-F73
LED +22-LD27 not lit
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check fuse +22-F59
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD59 not lit
Run electronics diagnostics
Recommend Check
Wiring faulty
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Power supply voltage DIOM
defective
Error: DIOM UB voltage incorrect Determine via the terminal
Meaning
16003 Malfunction operating
voltage - DIOM
Description
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
16003
Error No.
Page No. 210/225
16006 Malfunction hardware DIOM
16007 Malfunction internal
voltage UC - DIOM
16006
16007
Status: 18.06.2014
16005 Malfunction current at
output - DIOM
Description
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Power supply voltage DIOM
defective
Check fuse +22-F73
LED +22-LD27 not lit
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F59
Replace DIOM
Replace wiring
Consult KRONE Service
Replace DIOM
LED +22-LD59 not lit
Run electronics diagnostics
Check wiring
See Remedy
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring
Internal DIOM error
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Check wiring and plug
Check fuse +22-F63
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Recommend Check
Wiring faulty
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Possible Reason
Error: DIOM UC voltage incorrect Determine via the terminal
Error: DIOM hardware defective
Error: DIOM
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
16005
Error No.
Page No. 211/225
Description
Meaning
Wiring faulty
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Power supply voltage DIOM
defective
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Turn Page please!
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Check wiring and plug
Check fuse +22-F63
Check fuse +22-F73
LED +22-LD27 not lit
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check fuse +22-F59
Replace DIOM
LED +22-LD59 not lit
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs.
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Check wiring and plug.
Check fuse +22-F63
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Recommend Check
Wiring faulty
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
16008 Malfunction voltage 7.5V - Error: DIOM 7.5 V voltage
DIOM
incorrect
Status: 18.06.2014
16008
Error No.
Page No. 212/225
16011 Overcurrent valve coil Y67 Error: Maximum current on right
steering lock right - DIOM
steering valve
16011
Status: 18.06.2014
16010 Overcurrent valve coil Y66 Error: Maximum current on left
steering lock left - DIOM
steering valve
16010
Error: EEPROM defective
Meaning
16009 Internal error - DIOM
Description
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
Test solenoid valve
See Remedial action
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Solenoid valve defective
Internal error DIOM
Perform DIOM diagnostics
Check wiring to valve
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Determine via the terminal
Perform DIOM diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Determine via the terminal
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
EEPROM defective
Internal error DIOM
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
16009
Error No.
Page No. 213/225
Turn Page please!
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
If required, replace wiring to
valve
Replace DIOM
Replace DIOM
Replace DIOM
Remedial measure
Status: 18.06.2014
16013 Overcurrent valve coil Y63 Error: Over-current in additional
additive hydraulic 2 UP - DIOM
hydraulics 2 UP on PWM4
16013
Meaning
16012 Overcurrent valve coil Y62 Error: Over-current in additional
additive hydraulic 2 DOWN hydraulics 2 DOWN on PWM3
DIOM
Description
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Perform work diagnostics
Test solenoid valve
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Determine via the terminal
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Check wiring to valve
Test solenoid valve
Solenoid valve defective
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Perform work diagnostics
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring to valve
Recommend Check
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
16012
Error No.
Page No. 214/225
Turn Page please!
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Remedial measure
Status: 18.06.2014
16015 Overcurrent valve coil Y52 Error: Over-current in additional
additive hydraulic 1 hitch DOWN hydraulics 1 DOWN
- DIOM
16015
Meaning
16014 Overcurrent valve coil Y51 Error: Over-current in additional
additive hydraulic 1 hitch UP hydraulics 1 UP
DIOM
Description
Valve plug defective
Check wiring to valve
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Perform work diagnostics
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring to valve
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Perform work diagnostics
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring to valve
Recommend Check
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
16014
Error No.
Page No. 215/225
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring to valve
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Remedial measure
Status: 18.06.2014
16018 Malfunction output valve
coil Y66 steering lock left - DIOM
16018
Error: Status of PWM1 on left
steering valve defective
16017 Overcurrent valve coil Y56 Error: Over-current in coupling
coupling 2nd diesel engine for 2nd diesel engine
DIOM
16017
Error: Over-current DIG3
Meaning
16016 Overcurrent relay K28
molasses - DIOM
Description
Check valve plugs and contacts
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Valve plug defective
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Check wiring to valve
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Check wiring to valve
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Short circuit / broken cable in the Check wiring
wiring for the relay
LED +22-LD28 not lit
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Power supply voltage molasses
relay defective
Test coil
Check valve plugs and contacts
Recommend Check
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
16016
Error No.
Page No. 216/225
Turn Page please!
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Replace wiring
Check fuse +22-F74
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace valve plug
Remedial measure
16021 Malfunction output valve Error: Status of PWM4 on
coil Y63 additive hydraulic 2 UP - additional hydraulics 2 defective
DIOM
16021
Status: 18.06.2014
16020 Malfunction output valve
coil Y62 additive hydraulic 2
DOWN - DIOM
16020
Error: Status of PWM3 on
additional hydraulics 2 defective
Error: Status of PWM2 on right
steering valve defective
16019 Malfunction output valve
coil Y67 steering lock right DIOM
16019
Meaning
Description
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Check wiring to valve
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Check valve plugs and contacts
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Valve plug defective
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Check wiring to valve
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Check wiring to valve
See Remedial action
Internal error in DIOM
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Test coil
Recommend Check
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 217/225
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring to valve
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace valve plug.
Replace wiring to valve
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace valve plug.
Replace wiring to valve
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Remedial measure
16022 Malfunction output valve
coil Y51 additive hydraulic 1
hitch UP - DIOM
16023 Malfunction output valve
coil Y52 additive hydraulic 1
hitch DOWN - DIOM
16022
16023
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Error: Status of DI on additional
hydraulics 1 hitch DOWN
defective
Error: Status of DI on additional
hydraulics 1 hitch UP defective
Meaning
Check wiring to valve
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Perform work diagnostics
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring to valve
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Perform work diagnostics
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Determine via the terminal
Check valve plugs and contacts
Recommend Check
Valve plug defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 218/225
Turn Page please!
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace valve plug
Remedial measure
16024 Malfunction output relay
K28 molasses - DIOM
16025 Malfunction output valve
coil Y56 coupling 2nd diesel
engine - DIOM
16041 reserve DIOM PWM6
current
16042 reserve DIOM PWM7
current
16024
16025
16041
16042
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Error: Status of DI on coupling
for 2nd diesel engine defective
Error: Over-current DIG3
Meaning
Check wiring to valve
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
See Remedial action
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal error DIOM
Short circuit / broken cable in the Check wiring
wiring for the relay
LED +22-LD28 not lit
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Power supply voltage molasses
relay defective
Coil defective
Recommend Check
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 219/225
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Replace wiring
Check fuse +22-F74
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Remedial measure
16047 Reserve DIOM DIG8
current
16047
Status: 18.06.2014
16046 Overcurrent valve coil Y75
pressure relief front attachment
- DIOM
16046
16045 Overcurrent valve coil Y73 Error: Over-current - compressed Short circuit/broken cable in the
engine cleaning comp.air - DIOM air for engine cleaning
wiring for the valve
Perform CAN diagnostics.
Recommend Check
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
See Remedial action
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal error DIOM
Check wiring to valve
Short circuit / broken cable in the Check wiring.
wiring for the resistor
Determine via the terminal
16045
Error: Terminating resistor CAN2
KMC2 over-current
16044 Overcurrent relay K15
terminating resistor CAN2 KMC2
- DIOM
Possible Reason
16044
Meaning
16043 reserve DIOM PWM8
current
Description
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
16043
Error No.
Page No. 220/225
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Replace wiring.
Remedial measure
16049 Reserve DIOM PWM6
state
16050 reserve DIOM PWM7 state
16051 reserve DIOM PWM8 state
16052 Malfunction output relay
K15 terminating resistor CAN2
KMC2 - DIOM
16053 Malfunction output valve
coil Y73 engine cleaning
comp.air - DIOM
16049
16050
16051
16052
16053
Status: 18.06.2014
16048 Reserve DIOM PWM5
state
Description
Perform CAN diagnostics
Check wiring to valve
Short circuit / broken cable in the Check wiring
wiring for the resistor
Determine via the terminal
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring to valve
Replace wiring
If required, change silage agent
pump
Check silage agent pump
Silage agent pump defective
Remedial measure
Replace wiring
Recommend Check
Short circuit / broken cable in the Check wiring
wiring for the pump
Possible Reason
Error: Compressed air for engine Short circuit/broken cable in the
cleaning status D
wiring for the valve
Error: Terminating resistor CAN2
KMC2 status D
Error: Silage agent pump
defective
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
16048
Error No.
Page No. 221/225
16054 Malfunction output valve
coil Y75 pressure relief front
attachment - DIOM
16055 reserve DIOM DIG8 state
16071 reserve DIOM PWM10
current
16072 reserve DIOM PWM11
current
16054
16055
16071
16072
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Meaning
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
See Remedial action
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal error DIOM
Recommend Check
Valve plug defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 222/225
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace valve plug
Remedial measure
16077 Overcurrent valve coil Y65 Error: Over-current grinding flap
grind.flap open/closed - DIOM
open/closed
16077
Status: 18.06.2014
16076 Overcurrent horn metal
detection K18 - DIOM
16076
Error: Over-current metal
detection horn
Error: Over-current feed
drive/front attachment
16075 Overcurrent rel.voltage
feed drive/front attachment DIOM
16075
Error: Over-current 12/24-V
switching relay
16074 Overcurrent 12/24V
changeover K41 - DIOM
16074
Meaning
16073 reserve DIOM PWM12
current
Description
Check wiring
LED +22-LD11 not lit
LED +22-LD41 not lit
Recommend Check
Perform grinding diagnostics
Check wiring to valve
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
Determine via the terminal
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Short circuit / broken cable in the Check wiring
wiring for the horn
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
16073
Error No.
Page No. 223/225
Turn Page please!
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Replace wiring
Replace wiring
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F93
Check fuse +22-F88
Remedial measure
16078 Overcurrent valve coil Y82
hydraulic air regulation - DIOM
16079 reserve DIOM PWM10
state
16080 reserve DIOM PWM11
state
16081 Reserve DIOM PWM12
state
16082 Malfunction output relay
K41 12/24V changeover - DIOM
16078
16079
16080
16081
16082
Status: 18.06.2014
Description
Error: Over-current 12/24-V
switching relay
Meaning
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Internal error DIOM
Possible Reason
Recommend Check
LED +22-LD11 not lit
LED +22-LD41 not lit
See Remedial action
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
Error No.
Page No. 224/225
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F93
Check fuse +22-F88
Replace DIOM
Remedial measure
Powered by TCPDF (www.tcpdf.org)
16085 Malfunction valve coil Y65 Error: Grinding flap open/closed
grinding flap open/closed - DIOM
16085
Status: 18.06.2014
16084 Malfunction output relay
Error: Horn metal detection
K18 horn metal detection - DIOM
16084
Error: Release voltage feed
drive/front attachment
Meaning
16083 Malfunction release
voltage feed drive/front
attachment - DIOM
Description
Check wiring
Recommend Check
Check wiring to valve
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
See Remedial action
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal error DIOM
Short circuit / broken cable in the Check wiring
wiring for the horn
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100
16083
Error No.
Page No. 225/225
Turn Page please!
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Replace wiring
Replace wiring
Remedial measure
Maschinenfabrik
Bernard Krone GmbH
Heinrich-Krone-Straße 10, D-48480 Spelle
Postfach 11 63, D-48478 Spelle
Phone +49 (0) 59 77/935-0
Fax
+49 (0) 59 77/935-339
Internet: http://www.krone.de
eMail: [email protected]

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project